ATLANTA — Delta Air Lines reported record second-quarter revenue on Friday, according to the company’s earnings release, as robust demand for premium travel, corporate bookings and loyalty programs helped the carrier deliver its strongest spring revenue ever despite significantly higher fuel costs. The Atlanta-based airline reaffirmed its full-year outlook, signaling confidence that travel demand remains resilient.

Delta reported $17.7 billion in adjusted operating revenue for the quarter, a 14% increase from a year earlier and the highest quarterly revenue in the company’s history. Adjusted net income totaled approximately $1.6 billion, down about 25% from the prior year as soaring fuel expenses weighed on profitability. Adjusted earnings came in at $1.56 per share, ahead of Wall Street expectations.

The airline’s biggest challenge remained fuel. Delta said it paid an average of $3.93 per gallon for jet fuel during the quarter, roughly 75% higher than the same period a year ago, making it the most expensive fuel quarter in company history. Although higher fares and strong passenger demand offset much of the increase, they were not enough to completely absorb the added costs.

“We delivered record revenue while navigating one of the most challenging fuel environments our industry has experienced,” Chief Executive Officer Ed Bastian said in the company’s earnings release. He said Delta remains confident in its strategy and expects strong customer demand to support continued earnings growth through the remainder of the year.

Premium travel continued to be one of Delta’s strongest growth drivers. Revenue from premium cabins, including first class and Delta One, reached $6.92 billion, surpassing main-cabin revenue for the quarter. Premium revenue increased 17% year over year, reflecting travelers’ continued willingness to pay for added comfort and flexibility.

The airline’s loyalty business also remained a major contributor. Revenue tied to Delta’s partnership with American Express climbed 16% to approximately $2.4 billion, while broader loyalty-related revenue rose 19%. Corporate travel continued improving as well, led by customers in the aerospace, defense, banking and automotive sectors, with premium corporate bookings posting particularly strong gains.

Speaking following the earnings release, Bastian said demand remains healthy across both leisure and business travel. He pointed to disciplined capacity growth across the airline industry and continued consumer willingness to purchase premium products as factors supporting fare stability despite easing fuel prices in recent weeks.

Chief Financial Officer Erik Snell also expressed confidence in the company’s booking trends, noting that a significant portion of third-quarter travel demand has already been booked. Strong international demand and higher-than-expected travel tied to the ongoing World Cup also contributed to the quarter’s performance.

Reflecting that confidence, Delta reinstated its full-year financial outlook after withdrawing guidance earlier this year amid heightened uncertainty in energy markets. The airline now expects adjusted earnings of $6.50 to $7.50 per share for 2026 and projects $3 billion to $4 billion in free cash flow. For the current quarter, Delta forecast adjusted earnings between $2.00 and $2.50 per share, generally in line with analysts’ expectations.

Delta continues to distinguish itself from many competitors. Several major U.S. airlines have reduced or suspended their financial outlooks this year as fluctuating fuel prices and geopolitical uncertainty complicated forecasting. Delta’s decision to reaffirm guidance reflects management’s confidence that strong customer demand can continue offsetting higher operating costs.

Travelers may also notice continued changes to the airline’s fare offerings. Delta recently introduced its new Basic Business fare, providing customers with a lower-priced entry into premium cabins while removing certain benefits such as lounge access and refundable tickets. The move expands the airline’s pricing strategy while encouraging more customers to upgrade into higher-margin seating options.

For consumers, the earnings report suggests airfare pricing is likely to remain firm. Industry demand remains elevated, aircraft supply remains constrained, and airlines continue exercising discipline when adding capacity. Even if fuel prices moderate, carriers appear focused on protecting margins rather than aggressively discounting fares.

Investors will now watch whether Delta can maintain its pricing power through the second half of the year while keeping costs under control. Friday’s results demonstrated that customer demand remains exceptionally strong. The next question is whether continued premium travel and disciplined capacity can keep profits growing even if fuel markets remain volatile.

JBizNews Desk | Atlanta

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. Energy Information Administration reported Wednesday that the nation’s commercial crude oil inventories rose by 3 million barrels in the week ended July 3, marking the first weekly build in 11 weeks, according to the agency’s Weekly Petroleum Status Report. The increase left commercial stockpiles, which exclude the Strategic Petroleum Reserve, at 411.4 million barrels, a level the EIA said remains about 6% below the five-year average for this time of year.

Ordinarily, an unexpected increase in crude supplies would put downward pressure on prices. Instead, oil has continued climbing. Brent crude, the global benchmark, surged above $80 a barrel after rising nearly 10% over two trading sessions as renewed tensions between the United States and Iran fueled fears of disruptions to Middle East energy supplies. The disconnect reflects a market focused less on current inventory levels and more on the growing geopolitical risks facing global oil flows.

According to Ole S. Hansen, Head of Commodity Strategy at Saxo Bank, U.S. crude inventories increased primarily because exports slowed to 3.3 million barrels per day, their lowest level since November. Crude that would normally have been shipped overseas instead remained in domestic storage. At the same time, U.S. production climbed to 13.86 million barrels per day, approaching last year’s record high and adding further to domestic supplies.

While crude inventories increased, refined fuel supplies continued tightening. The government withdrew another 6.2 million barrels from the Strategic Petroleum Reserve, reducing holdings to 319.5 million barrels, down from 403 million barrels a year ago and near the lowest level in four decades. Refiners operated at a robust 95.8% of capacity, yet fuel inventories still declined. Distillate inventories, which include diesel fuel, dropped 5 million barrels to a four-year low, while gasoline inventories fell 1.9 million barrels to their lowest seasonal level since 2012.

That combination carries significant implications for the broader economy. Diesel powers freight transportation, agriculture and construction, making it one of the most important fuels for the movement of goods. Tight diesel supplies can quickly translate into higher shipping costs that ultimately reach consumers through increased grocery, retail and manufacturing prices. Meanwhile, shrinking gasoline inventories during the height of the summer driving season leave motorists vulnerable to additional price spikes if geopolitical tensions worsen.

The export picture also highlights America’s increasingly important role in global energy markets. Hansen noted that U.S. refined-product exports climbed to a record 8.7 million barrels per day, lifting total oil and refined-product exports, including crude, to approximately 12 million barrels per day. American refiners continue supplying international markets even as domestic inventories of finished fuels become increasingly constrained, a balancing act that could become more challenging should global supply disruptions intensify.

The report also illustrated how volatile current market conditions have become. The American Petroleum Institute, whose industry survey is released one day before the government’s official report, estimated a modest crude draw of approximately 399,000 barrels for the same reporting week—moving in the opposite direction from the EIA’s reported build. Such differences often reflect tanker arrival schedules and shipment timing but can become more pronounced when geopolitical events disrupt normal trade flows, as they have around the Strait of Hormuz.

Despite the inventory increase, traders continued pushing oil prices higher, viewing the risk of future supply disruptions as more significant than one week of rising U.S. stockpiles. Over the past four weeks, U.S. crude imports averaged roughly 5.4 million barrels per day, approximately 11.4% below the same period last year, suggesting the flow of foreign oil into the United States has already slowed.

The coming weeks will determine whether this inventory build proves temporary or signals a broader shift in supply. With diesel and gasoline inventories remaining tight, refiners operating near full capacity, and the Strait of Hormuz continuing to pose a significant geopolitical risk, markets appear focused on the possibility that today’s crude surplus could quickly disappear. If that happens, higher fuel costs could ripple through transportation, manufacturing and consumer prices across the economy.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The number of Americans filing new claims for unemployment benefits fell last week, the U.S. Labor Department reported Thursday, the latest sign that employers are holding onto workers even as hiring cools. Initial claims for state jobless benefits slipped by 2,000 to a seasonally adjusted 215,000 for the week ended July 4, according to the department, below the roughly 218,000 that economists polled by Reuters had expected. The prior week’s figure was revised up to 217,000.

The four-week moving average, which smooths out weekly swings, dropped by 3,750 to 218,750. Continuing claims, which track people still collecting benefits, edged up by 8,000 to 1.81 million for the week ended June 27—the highest since late March, but still low by historical standards.

The picture beneath the seasonally adjusted headline was a bit busier. Unadjusted filings actually rose by 9,967 to 224,583, with applications jumping by 8,467 in California, 5,872 in Missouri, and 4,401 in Michigan, likely as some automakers idled assembly lines for summer maintenance and retooling. General Motors and Ford Motor Company, however, have canceled summer shutdowns at many plants, which should limit those layoffs going forward. Claims filed by federal employees, watched closely amid the administration’s push to shrink the public workforce, fell by 40 to 404.

Economists treat weekly filings as the fastest read on the job market because they capture how many workers employers are actively letting go. The message this week was continuity: layoffs remain scarce. Analysts have taken to calling the current environment “low-hire, low-fire,” a labor market where companies are reluctant both to add staff and to cut jobs.

That reluctance matters because the hiring side has weakened sharply. The report follows a disappointing June jobs report in which employers added just 57,000 nonfarm positions, far below the 115,000 forecasters had projected. The unemployment rate ticked down to 4.2% from 4.3%, but much of that improvement came from people leaving the labor force rather than finding work, while revisions erased 74,000 jobs from the April and May totals.

For businesses, the steadiness in claims is a double-edged number. Low layoffs help keep household incomes and consumer spending—the engine of roughly two-thirds of the U.S. economy—intact, supporting everything from retail sales to loan repayment. But weak hiring reflects growing caution in corporate boardrooms as companies contend with uncertainty stemming from the conflict with Iran, higher oil prices and persistent inflation.

The data also feed directly into the debate at the Federal Reserve. A resilient labor market gives Federal Reserve Chairman Kevin Warsh and his colleagues room to keep interest rates elevated to combat inflation rather than cutting them to support employment. With jobless claims remaining near the low end of their recent range and inflation risks still elevated, the report does little to strengthen the case for near-term rate cuts and reinforces the view that the Fed remains more concerned about inflation than layoffs.

The coming weeks will reveal whether that stability continues. Seasonal auto-sector layoffs should ease as factory retooling concludes, but the sharp slowdown in hiring combined with workers leaving the labor force suggests the employment market rests on a narrower foundation than the low claims figures alone may indicate.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Sales of previously owned U.S. homes declined in June even as prices climbed to a record high, the National Association of Realtors reported Thursday, underscoring how elevated borrowing costs continue to limit affordability during what is typically the busiest season for the housing market.

Existing-home sales fell 2.4% from May to a seasonally adjusted annual rate of 4.09 million, below economists’ expectations of approximately 4.21 million, according to FactSet. Despite the monthly decline, sales remained 2.8% higher than a year earlier.

At the same time, the median existing-home price reached a record $440,600 for the month of June, extending a long streak of annual price increases. The combination of slowing sales and record prices continues to challenge prospective buyers, many of whom remain priced out of the market despite modest improvements in housing inventory.

Dr. Lawrence Yun, Chief Economist for the National Association of Realtors, attributed much of the market’s weakness to mortgage affordability. He said monthly fluctuations in existing-home sales continue to track even modest changes in mortgage rates, demonstrating just how sensitive buyers remain to financing costs. While Yun pointed to continued job growth as a positive long-term factor supporting housing demand, he emphasized that affordability remains the industry’s biggest obstacle and reiterated the need for substantially more housing supply.

Mortgage rates remain central to the market’s direction. According to Freddie Mac, the average 30-year fixed-rate mortgage stood at 6.43% as of July 2, marking a seven-week low and down slightly from 6.49% the previous week and 6.67% one year earlier. Because existing-home sales are recorded at closing, June’s figures primarily reflect purchase contracts signed in April and May, when mortgage rates were moving higher.

Those borrowing costs continue to be influenced by Treasury yields, which have risen as investors respond to higher oil prices, persistent inflation concerns and renewed geopolitical tensions in the Middle East. As long as long-term Treasury yields remain elevated, mortgage rates are likely to remain under pressure as well, limiting affordability for many prospective buyers.

The composition of homebuyers also reflected the affordability challenge. First-time buyers accounted for 33% of June transactions, up from 30% a year earlier but still well below the 40% share that the National Association of Realtors considers representative of a healthy housing market. Meanwhile, approximately 25% of all purchases were completed with cash, illustrating the continued advantage enjoyed by buyers less dependent on financing.

Housing inventory showed modest improvement. Roughly 1.56 million existing homes were available for sale at the end of June, about 1.3% higher than one year earlier. Even so, that represents only a 4.6-month supply, remaining below the level generally considered balanced between buyers and sellers.

The slowdown has now persisted for several years. Existing-home sales have remained near an annual pace of 4 million since 2023, well below the long-term historical average of roughly 5.2 million. Through the first half of 2026, total sales were only 0.7% above the same period a year earlier, reflecting a market that continues to struggle despite solid employment and resilient consumer demand.

The housing slowdown affects far more than homebuyers and real estate agents. Every home sale typically generates additional spending on furniture, appliances, home improvements, moving services, insurance, mortgage financing and numerous local businesses. When housing activity slows, those industries often experience weaker demand as well, reducing economic activity across a broad range of sectors.

Lawmakers continue debating measures designed to increase housing supply and improve affordability, but meaningful expansion of inventory will take time. In the meantime, economists generally expect mortgage rates to remain above historical norms, limiting affordability for many households.

With home prices at record highs, mortgage rates still above 6%, and inventory remaining relatively limited, June’s housing report suggests the market continues to face significant affordability pressures. Until either financing costs decline meaningfully or substantially more homes become available, many prospective buyers are likely to remain on the sidelines.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Delta Air Lines will start the airline industry’s earnings season on Friday, July 10, reporting June-quarter results before markets open, the Atlanta-based carrier said in an investor-relations announcement setting the release and a 10 a.m. Eastern conference call. In its last public guidance, issued with March-quarter results in April, Delta told investors to expect June-quarter pre-tax profit of around $1 billion even as its fuel bill rose by more than $2 billion.

As the first major U.S. airline to report, Delta sets the tone for how Wall Street reads the health of American travel heading into the back half of the year. The picture is mixed but leaning positive. The Zacks Consensus Estimate calls for adjusted earnings of about $1.44 a share, down roughly 31% from $2.10 a year earlier as higher labor costs and a heavier fuel bill press on profit. Revenue tells a friendlier story at an estimated $17.72 billion, up about 6.5% from the same quarter last year.

Delta enters with momentum. It has topped profit forecasts in each of the last four quarters, and in the March quarter it earned an adjusted 64 cents a share against a 61-cent estimate, on revenue of about $14.2 billion. Chief Executive Ed Bastian has spent the year describing steady demand for higher-end travel while holding off on raising full-year targets, citing uncertainty over fuel.

The biggest change since Delta issued its April outlook has been fuel. Crude oil has eased in recent weeks to some of its lowest levels of the year, taking pressure off the airline’s largest cost after labor. Delta also owns a refinery near Philadelphia, an asset it has long framed as a hedge that benefits when crude falls, giving it a cushion rivals lack.

Investors have already rewarded the stock. Delta shares have climbed about 30% in 2026, far outpacing the broad market, and recently traded in the high $80s to low $90s, giving the carrier a market value near $61 billion. That rally raises the stakes: the company now has to show the summer earned it.

Bank of America struck an upbeat note ahead of the report, telling clients it sees a constructive setup for the quarter and raising its estimate for how fast Delta’s revenue is growing on each seat it flies. The firm kept its buy rating, citing the airline’s strength in premium cabins, corporate travel and its co-branded credit-card partnership with American Express, and called Delta the cleanest opening act of the season.

Those premium and corporate travelers are the heart of the case. Delta has leaned into higher-fare cabins, international routes and loyalty income, betting that customers with money to spend keep flying even when budget leisure demand softens. Business travel typically rebuilds after Memorial Day, and summer flights to Europe peak in the June quarter, both of which favor the carrier’s mix.

The read matters well beyond one company. Airlines are a rough gauge of how freely Americans are spending, and premium-heavy carriers like Delta track the higher-income traveler in particular. Strong demand and firm pricing would signal that households are still willing to pay up for trips; softer numbers would raise fresh questions about the summer.

There are real cautions. Carriers are adding flights later in 2026, and more seats across the industry could chip away at the pricing gains they have enjoyed once peak season passes. Higher wages from recent labor contracts are permanent. That combination is why profit is expected to fall even as revenue rises.

The next signposts come quickly. United Airlines reports on July 16, and rivals follow through the month, so Delta’s results — and, more importantly, its outlook — will shape expectations for the entire group. Delta has held a cautious full-year forecast all year; any move to raise its profit target would tell investors that management believes the summer strength can carry into the fall.

With cheaper fuel, a premium-heavy customer base and a stock near its highs, Delta has a chance on Friday to show its rally was earned. The numbers, and what Bastian says about the months ahead, will tell travelers and investors alike whether the rest of the industry is cleared for the same climb.

JBizNews Desk | Atlanta
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

SK Hynix priced its U.S. share sale on Thursday at $149 per American depositary receipt, according to the offering terms and the company’s registration filing with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission. The South Korean memory-chip maker offered 177.9 million ADRs, equivalent to 17.79 million common shares Bloomberg — each receipt equal to one-tenth of a common share — to raise about $26.5 billion. That would be the largest ever first-time share sale in the US by a foreign company, topping Alibaba Group Holding’s $25 billion debut. Yahoo Finance

The listing lands on the Nasdaq Global Select Market, where the receipts begin when-issued trading Friday under the symbol SKHYV, switching to SKHY when regular-way trading starts July 13. Yahoo Finance The price sits about 3.1% above the Thursday closing price of the common shares in Seoul, which ended at 2.186 million won, or roughly $1,445 each. Bloomberg

Demand ran far ahead of supply. The offering drew demand approaching $200 billion, according to the deal term sheet, Bloomberg and the sale was more than seven times oversubscribed. Yahoo Finance Buyers included global long-only funds, technology sector-focused funds, sovereign wealth funds and Asia-focused global investors. Yahoo Finance Baillie Gifford, Coatue Management and Situational Awareness Partners alone signaled indications of interest for as much as $7 billion worth of ADRs. Yahoo Finance The offering was led by Bank of America, Citigroup, Goldman Sachs and JPMorgan Chase, with nine other firms participating. Yahoo Finance

For American investors, the sale opens a direct door to a company whose parts already sit inside products they own. SK Hynix, the second most valuable company in South Korea behind only Samsung, CNBC is one of three main makers of the memory used in phones, laptops and the servers running artificial-intelligence systems. The other two are Samsung and U.S.-listed Micron.

The timing is bold. SK Hynix shares ended Thursday down 25% from a record-high close in late June, though they remain more than triple where they started the year Yahoo Finance — up 235% in 2026 AOL as the AI-driven memory shortage sent prices and profits soaring. First-quarter revenue tripled to about $34.5 billion, and profit quintupled to $26.5 billion. AOL Rival Samsung this week reported operating profit increased 19-fold last quarter, AOL while Micron’s margins climbed toward 85% from 38% a year earlier. AOL

That heat cuts both ways. South Korea’s benchmark KOSPI Composite Index fell into a bear market on Wednesday, closing more than 20% below last month’s all-time high, AOL dragged down by the same two chipmakers that carried it up. The Roundhill Memory ETF is up 141% over the past 12 months, while the iShares Semiconductor ETF is up 140%. Stocktwits

SK Hynix plans to put the proceeds toward new production facilities in South Korea and the extreme-ultraviolet lithography scanners used to manufacture advanced semiconductors Stocktwits — tools only made by ASML in the Netherlands and costing up to $400 million each. CNBC The buildout is part of an $880 billion South Korean government-led initiative that SK Hynix and Samsung are ramping up investment behind. Yahoo Finance In the United States, the company is putting up a $4 billion advanced-packaging plant in West Lafayette, Indiana, scheduled for completion in 2028, with up to $458 million in CHIPS Act funding and as much as $570 million in federal loans. CNBC SK Square, demerged from SK Telecom in 2021, holds a 20.5% interest in the chipmaker. CNBC

Not everyone is cheering. Jim Cramer of CNBC warned that bankers highlighting the heavy oversubscription were playing “a dangerous game,” and has spent much of 2026 flagging the building IPO pipeline as the market’s biggest short-term risk. Stocktwits Analysts at HSBC took the other side, hiking their SK Hynix price target to 4 million won from 2.9 million and saying the Nasdaq listing could boost the company’s valuation by as much as 20% and narrow its long-standing gap with Micron. Stocktwits

For SK Hynix, the payoff runs past cash. A U.S. listing widens its investor base to funds that never touched the Seoul shares and hands it a stronger currency for future deals, all while the memory business rides the sharpest upswing in its history. The risk is the one this industry knows well: the AI-spending wave paying for these new factories could cool before the concrete is dry.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

South Korea is preparing to create a new national investment fund using tax revenue generated by the country’s booming semiconductor industry, with the goal of helping younger generations afford housing, create businesses and find jobs while strengthening the nation’s artificial intelligence leadership.

Presidential Chief of Staff Kang Hoon-sik outlined the proposal during a high-level government policy meeting, saying the extraordinary tax revenue generated by South Korea’s world-leading chip industry should be invested in the country’s future rather than absorbed into routine government spending.

“We must not spend this money carelessly,” Kang said while describing what officials have called a Future Response Fund.

The proposal would direct additional tax revenue generated by record profits at semiconductor leaders Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix into long-term national investments.

Government officials said the fund would help finance artificial intelligence development, semiconductor infrastructure, startup financing, youth employment initiatives and housing programs targeted at younger South Koreans.

The plan remains under development, with details expected to be reviewed during upcoming fiscal strategy meetings before legislation is introduced.

South Korea’s semiconductor industry has experienced unprecedented growth as worldwide demand for artificial intelligence hardware continues accelerating.

Memory chips produced by Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix have become essential components inside AI servers and advanced data centers, producing record earnings and significantly increasing corporate tax revenue.

Officials have not announced the final size of the proposed fund.

However, Korean media estimates suggest the additional semiconductor-related tax revenue could total 50 trillion to 70 trillion won, creating one of the country’s largest long-term investment vehicles.

The proposal accompanies an even broader national strategy to strengthen South Korea’s semiconductor leadership.

The government recently unveiled plans supporting hundreds of billions of dollars in semiconductor investment, including expanded manufacturing capacity, advanced research and artificial intelligence infrastructure.

Officials have also discussed funding additional purchases of high-performance graphics processors needed for AI development while encouraging greater investment in domestic semiconductor manufacturing.

The proposal reflects growing concern that the benefits of South Korea’s technology boom have not been shared equally across society.

Although the country’s semiconductor companies have generated enormous profits, younger workers continue facing high housing prices, slower wage growth and a competitive employment market.

Government leaders argue that reinvesting part of today’s semiconductor windfall into education, entrepreneurship and affordable housing could help spread the industry’s long-term economic benefits more broadly.

Not everyone agrees on the best approach.

Some policymakers favor creating a broader sovereign wealth fund that would invest across multiple industries, while others have proposed direct payments to citizens or expanded support for rural communities and startup businesses.

Economists also caution that semiconductor profits remain cyclical.

Global memory-chip prices have historically fluctuated sharply, meaning government revenue generated during today’s AI boom may not remain at current levels indefinitely.

That makes long-term fund management particularly important if policymakers hope to sustain future investments during weaker market cycles.

For businesses, the proposal demonstrates how governments increasingly view artificial intelligence and semiconductor manufacturing as strategic national assets rather than simply private industries.

Countries around the world are expanding public investment to strengthen domestic chip production, secure AI supply chains and improve long-term competitiveness.

South Korea’s proposal seeks to accomplish both goals simultaneously—supporting future economic growth while helping younger generations participate more fully in the country’s expanding technology economy.

If approved, the fund would become one of the most significant examples yet of a government using AI-driven corporate tax revenue to finance long-term national development.

JBizNews Desk | Seoul
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Asian stock markets were trading sharply higher on Friday, July 10, after Micron Technology said it would lift spending on new U.S. plants to $250 billion to meet demand from the artificial-intelligence boom, and as South Korea’s SK Hynix prepared for its U.S. market debut. South Korea’s Kospi had climbed about 3.5% to 7,545.51 by 11:20 a.m. in Seoul, according to Korea Exchange data, while Japan’s Nikkei 225 rose roughly 1.7% to trade near 68,900. Both markets were still open as this was written.

The move marked a second straight winning session for the two markets and a sharp recovery for Seoul, which had tumbled nearly 8% on Thursday when fears over stretched AI valuations sparked heavy foreign selling. The rebound followed Wall Street’s overnight gains, where the Nasdaq Composite rose 1.3%, the S&P 500 added 0.81% and the Dow Jones Industrial Average climbed 139 points.

Semiconductors are doing the heavy lifting. Micron’s commitment to a quarter-trillion dollars of U.S. capacity handed the whole memory-chip complex a lift, and traders across the region are watching SK Hynix’s U.S. listing, which priced at $149 a share and was reported more than seven times oversubscribed — one of the largest first-time foreign offerings on record. In Seoul, Samsung Electronics rose about 3.8% and parts affiliate Samsung Electro-Mechanics jumped 6.4%. In Tokyo, memory maker Kioxia advanced more than 4% and technology investor SoftBank Group surged close to 7%, pushing past the 60,000-yen mark.

The other tailwind is easing geopolitical risk. A U.S. official said late Thursday that Washington remains committed to a resolution with Iran, with technical talks continuing and regional mediators pushing to revive a nuclear deal. That cooled the war premium that had gripped markets this week, kept oil in a narrow range, and reassured investors that tanker traffic through the Strait of Hormuz would keep moving despite the recent exchange of strikes. With the immediate energy-shock fear receding, money rotated back into risk assets.

Japan’s session carried a second storyline in bonds and currencies. The yen firmed and the 10-year Japanese government bond yield pulled back from a three-decade high after Finance Minister Satsuki Katayama said Tokyo would explore steps to encourage the country’s giant public pension fund, the GPIF, to hold more domestic assets. Adding to the backdrop, Japan reported that June producer prices rose 7.1% from a year earlier, the fastest pace since 2023 and above forecasts, keeping the Bank of Japan on track toward another rate increase.

Market movers: SoftBank Group was the standout in Tokyo, up nearly 7%, while Kioxia and SK Hynix both gained on the memory-demand story. On the downside, chip-equipment supplier Tokyo Electron slipped, a reminder that the rally is concentrated in memory names rather than the whole sector. On the calls, Goldman Sachs told clients that Nvidia looks compelling at about 21.7 times forward earnings after a product-delay scare faded, and Citigroup kept a $75 base-case forecast for Brent crude in the third quarter, betting on a U.S.-Iran deal and a reopened Hormuz.

Commodities and volatility: Crude held steady in Asian hours, with Brent hovering in the high $70s after this week’s spike, as the absence of fresh escalation calmed nerves. Gold traded near $4,133 an ounce and silver around $59 after a soft stretch earlier in the week, pressured by expectations that the Federal Reserve may keep rates high. Wall Street’s fear gauge, the VIX, closed near 16 on Thursday, well below the level that signals real stress, pointing to a market that is watchful but not panicked.

The near-term test comes when SK Hynix actually begins trading in New York. A strong debut could extend the semiconductor rally across Asia into the back half of the year; a weak one would revive the valuation worries that hammered Seoul just a day earlier. Investors are also looking ahead to the Fed’s rate meeting late this month, where sticky inflation and higher energy costs have put at least one more increase back on the table. For now, with chips leading and the Iran risk fading, Asia is ending its week on the front foot.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Meta launched its first paid coding artificial intelligence model on Thursday, July 9, marking a significant shift in the company’s AI strategy as it moves beyond free, open-source models to compete directly with OpenAI, Anthropic, Google, and Microsoft in the fast-growing market for software-development tools.

Speaking with CNBC, Meta Chief AI Officer Alexandr Wang unveiled Muse Spark 1.1, calling it the company’s most capable model yet for coding and AI agents. It is also the first Meta-developed AI model that developers must pay to use.

Wang said the company deliberately priced the service well below competing products in an effort to quickly attract developers.

“We wanted pricing that is very aggressive and attractive,” Wang said.

Every new developer account receives $20 in free credits. After that, Meta charges $1.25 per million input tokens and $4.25 per million output tokens, pricing that undercuts many competing enterprise coding models.

The move represents a major strategic change for Meta. The company built much of its AI reputation by releasing its Llama family of models under open-source licenses, encouraging developers to build freely on its technology. Muse Spark takes a different approach by generating direct revenue from enterprise users.

Wang emphasized that Meta remains committed to open-source AI and said the company is developing a version of Muse Spark that it eventually plans to release openly, although he did not provide a timeline.

The launch comes as competition intensifies among the world’s largest AI companies.

Anthropic has gained significant traction with its Claude Code platform, while OpenAI continues expanding enterprise adoption through Codex. Microsoft has integrated AI coding tools into GitHub Copilot, and Google is investing heavily in similar developer platforms.

Although Meta entered the coding market later than many rivals, the company hopes lower pricing and tight integration with existing developer tools will encourage businesses to test its platform.

The financial stakes are enormous.

Chief Executive Mark Zuckerberg has committed tens of billions of dollars toward AI infrastructure, including data centers and specialized computing hardware. Investors have increasingly questioned when those investments will begin generating meaningful revenue.

Paid developer services offer one of the company’s clearest paths toward monetizing its expanding AI portfolio.

Performance also remains a competitive battleground.

On the widely followed SWE-Bench Pro software-engineering benchmark, Meta’s original Muse Spark model achieved a score of 52.5%, trailing OpenAI’s GPT-5.5, which scored 58.6%. Wang said Muse Spark 1.1 delivers significant improvements in both software development and AI-agent capabilities.

The company also designed the model to work seamlessly with popular coding frameworks already used by software engineers, reducing the friction involved in adopting a new platform.

For enterprise customers, pricing increasingly matters as much as performance.

Many software companies now test multiple AI coding models simultaneously, selecting whichever delivers the best balance of speed, accuracy and cost. Because switching between providers has become relatively easy, pricing has emerged as one of the industry’s most powerful competitive tools.

Meta appears determined to use that advantage.

Analysts say an aggressive pricing strategy could pressure competitors to lower their own prices, accelerating a broader price war across the AI industry as companies compete for developer loyalty and enterprise market share.

The implications extend well beyond technology companies.

Lower-cost AI coding tools could reduce software development expenses for businesses of all sizes, allowing startups and smaller companies to automate programming tasks that previously required larger engineering teams. Faster software development also has the potential to shorten product-launch timelines and improve productivity across industries.

Whether Meta can convert lower prices into lasting market share remains uncertain. The company entered the enterprise coding market after several competitors had already established strong positions, and developers have shown they are willing to switch platforms quickly when better models become available.

Still, Thursday’s launch marks one of Meta’s clearest attempts yet to transform its massive AI investments into a sustainable business. By combining lower prices with increasingly capable technology, the company is signaling that it intends to compete aggressively for one of artificial intelligence’s fastest-growing commercial markets.

JBizNews Desk | Menlo Park, Calif.
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

The smallest jet in Boeing’s 737 MAX family is finally near the end of its certification marathon, with Federal Aviation Administration Administrator Bryan Bedford saying the agency has found nothing that would stop the MAX 7 from winning approval this summer. Speaking at an aviation forum in Washington in late May, Bedford said regulators had not identified any issue that would push certification of either the MAX 7 or the larger MAX 10 past the end of 2026 — the clearest signal yet after a program that has slipped repeatedly since 2019.

Boeing Chief Executive Kelly Ortberg backed that up at the Bernstein Strategic Decisions Conference on May 27, telling investors the company had completed roughly 80% of the certification flight-test program for both variants and had already received every Type Inspection Authorization it needed from the FAA. “There’s clearly light at the end of the tunnel here,” Ortberg said, adding that the MAX 7 would be certified first, with the MAX 10 following close behind. The MAX 10 entered the final stage of certification flight testing, known as Type Inspection Authorization Phase 2, during the first quarter.

The delays trace back to a single stubborn problem. The engine anti-ice system on the jets’ CFM International LEAP-1B engines could overheat the inlet inner barrels and, in rare cases, cause them to fail — a defect Boeing disclosed in 2023 that forced a full redesign and years of extra testing. Boeing has also built a revised crew-alerting system that Congress mandated after the two MAX crashes in 2018 and 2019 that killed 346 people, and it plans to retrofit the change across the fleet. The program has operated under intense scrutiny since a door plug blew out of an Alaska Airlines MAX 9 in January 2024, prompting the FAA to cap 737 output at 38 jets a month.

No customer has more riding on the MAX 7 than Southwest Airlines, which holds roughly 90% of all orders for the type — about 289 aircraft. Southwest CEO Bob Jordan has said he expects FAA approval by August, with the airline putting the jet into service in the first quarter of 2027. The 138-to-153-seat MAX 7 will replace Southwest’s aging 737-700s and ease capacity pressure at slot-constrained hubs such as Dallas Love Field. At 116 feet long, the MAX 7 is Boeing’s answer to the Airbus A220 in the smallest slice of the single-aisle market.

The business stakes reach well beyond one model. Boeing closed the first quarter with a record backlog of about $695 billion, including more than 6,100 commercial jets, and its 737 MAX order book alone tops 4,850 aircraft. The company delivered 143 planes in the first quarter, up 10% from a year earlier. Certifying the MAX 7 and MAX 10 lets Boeing start converting that backlog into cash, and it clears the way for a production ramp the FAA has already blessed — from 42 jets a month toward 47, then 52 in early 2027, aided by a fourth 737 line at Boeing’s Everett, Washington, plant.

The MAX 10 carries the heavier commercial load. With about 1,431 orders, it is Boeing’s closest competitor to the Airbus A321neo and long-range A321XLR in the high-capacity narrowbody segment that Airbus has dominated. United Airlines leads the book with 277 on order, followed by Alaska Airlines with about 105, along with American Airlines, Delta Air Lines, Pegasus Airlines and Ryanair, which holds 150 firm orders plus 150 options. Combined orders for the two variants exceed 1,700 aircraft, with first deliveries planned for 2027.

What remains is the flight testing itself. Ortberg framed it as running out the clock — working through the last test points rather than clearing new technical hurdles — but the FAA has shown it will take its time and could still surface issues before signing off. If the summer window holds, Boeing closes the final major certification gap in its narrowbody lineup and hands airlines the jets they ordered years ago. If it slips again, carriers that have already rebuilt fleet plans around the aircraft will be waiting a while longer.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Nearly two-thirds of American investors under 35 — 62% — say they believe they have to take big risks to reach their financial goals, according to a survey from the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority, the brokerage industry’s self-funded watchdog. Those numbers drew fresh scrutiny on Thursday as the behavior behind them came into sharper focus: 43% of that group has traded options, 29% has bought meme stocks, and 22% has invested with borrowed money. The takeaway is a generation treating the market less like a savings account and more like a lottery ticket.

The why is not hard to trace. For many under-35 investors, the old markers of building wealth — a house, a stable career ladder, a paid-off mortgage — feel out of reach, so the calculus on risk shifts. Wealth has grown more concentrated among older and richer households, housing remains unaffordable in much of the country, and steady jobs are harder to land. Most investors under 30 have also only ever traded through a bull market, which tends to make speculative, high-beta bets look like the normal way to make money rather than the exception.

That appetite is showing up in hard credit numbers. U.S. margin debt — what investors borrow from their brokers to buy securities — rose 54% from a year earlier to a record $1.4 trillion in May, according to FINRA data. And that figure leaves out the fastest-growing forms of borrowing entirely: leveraged exchange-traded funds, which aim to double or triple the daily move of an index, plus the embedded leverage baked into futures and options.

Citadel Securities put hard figures on the pileup. Assets in leveraged ETFs have reached a record of roughly $218 billion, up about $82 billion, or 60%, since the end of March alone. Leverage tied to technology has grown 136% over that stretch, while leverage linked to semiconductors has nearly tripled, climbing 175%. Retail traders are also loading up on short-dated contracts, trading a record $7 billion in options premium a day in June, up from $5.8 billion in May, with new participation records set almost weekly on the firm’s platform.

The line between investing and gambling is blurring in the process. A survey from Northwestern Mutual found 32% of Gen Z respondents gamble in crypto or sports betting, 35% of millennials own crypto, and 24% bet on sports. The same survey carried a wrinkle worth noting: despite a year of wild swings, more young people reported feeling financially secure than a year earlier — 39% of Gen Z, up from 36%, and 52% of millennials, up from 43%. Confidence and risk-taking are rising together.

Wall Street is building for the trend rather than fighting it. Brokerages, leveraged-ETF issuers and prediction-market operators are rolling out products aimed squarely at young, active traders, and the demand is feeding the supply. Social media is doing the marketing. A J.P. Morgan Personal Investing survey found many Gen Z and millennial investors now source ideas from financial influencers, Reddit forums and online tips rather than advisers or newspapers. Claire Exley, head of financial advice and guidance at the firm, cautioned that engaging with online sources can help build knowledge but urged young investors to verify information and seek guidance before acting.

The concern among market veterans is less about the whole market cracking than about individual traders blowing themselves up. Margin debt at record highs partly reflects a market at record highs — it is a concurrent signal, not automatically a warning. But borrowed money and triple-leveraged funds cut deep in a downturn, and the AI-driven rally powering these bets has already shown tremors in recent weeks. The risk for this cohort is simple: the tools that magnify gains in a rising market magnify losses just as fast when it turns, and a generation that has never traded through a real bear market is about to learn how that math works.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

of the steak chain.

After some residents expressed concern that a proposed In-N-Out might increase customers, cause health problems for pedestrians and cyclists, a California city is considering a ban on drive-throughs.

Last month, the City Council in Culver City, California, enacted a 45-day moratorium to obstruct allows for fresh drive-throughs while team was developing a possible restrictions, according to LAist. Following the city’s mobility subcommittee’s vote in May to propose staff draft the ban, this comes after.

Only new businesses may be affected if a ban was approved by the city government.

According to a report from the town workers, In-N-Out would be the first new drive-through in Culver City since 1997. A drive-thru street and 61 parking spots would be included in the proposed fast-food restaurant, which could accommodate 26 vehicles.

IN-N-OUT TO GET A BILL OF MULTIPLE RESTAURANTS EVERY YEAR: A Statement

When the town passed the embargo, the burger chain had not yet completed the proper application for a force it was developing, a city official told LAist.

In-N-Out was contacted by FOX Business for remark.

We typically don’t comment publicly on business matters because we are a secret, family-owned company, according to an In-N-Out spokesman, according to LAist.

The proposal has been criticized by In-N-Out’s critics because it has the potential to harm the city’s ability to become accessible and safe.

According to Vanessa Martin, a area resident who is organizing assistance for the drive-thru restrictions, “density is expected, and development is expected.” We want to take initiative and make wise decisions.

The In-N-Out “mega drive-thru,” according to Martin’s family Cynthia, will cause traffic congestion, increase air excellent, and pose safety risks for both pedestrians and cyclists.

Paul Hewitt, a neighbor, started distributing flyers to his companions, calling the job a “terrible idea.”

Bubba Fish, a member of Culver City Council’s flexibility subcommittee, said that “drive-throughs are the epitome of that” and that the city needs to have “more accessible, bikeable, safer streets for people of all modes.”

However, drive-throughs are significant choices for customers, including those who have disabilities and those who have children, according to the ban’s competitors.

Drive-thru restrictions are typically” shortsighted,” according to Jot Condie, leader of the California Restaurant Association.

Condie claimed that you “re largely banning quick-service eateries without particularly stating that.”

A DAD RECRETED A DAD’s FAMILY OF 5 EATS AT CHICK-FIL-A FOR MORE THAN$ 45.

Clicking HERE WILL GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO.

The American Planning Association estimates that drive-thru orders account for 70 % of fast-food sales.

The Golden State’s second drive-thru restrictions is not currently in place.

Drive-throughs are already prohibited in Culver City’s city, while Santa Barbara and San Luis Obispo, according to LAist, have been prohibited for years. A nationwide restrictions that began in the late 1990s was just lifted in Carlsbad to allow for case-by-case account of fresh drive-throughs.

The California Restaurant Association argued in a letter to San Diego that a limited drive-thru ban would stop some groups, including those with disabilities, from using products and services, according to the outlet.

This post was originally published here

The Jersey City Council unanimously rejected a proposed 15% municipal property tax increase on Wednesday, July 8, leaving New Jersey’s second-largest city without an adopted budget and still facing an estimated $255 million budget shortfall, according to city officials.

The vote came just one day after New Jersey lawmakers approved a $120 million state rescue package for the city, the largest municipal loan in state history. Several council members who had previously indicated support for the tax increase reversed course following strong public opposition, saying they wanted more time to review the city’s finances before asking residents to pay substantially higher property taxes.

Council members Jake Ephros, Eleana Little and Joel Brooks said homeowners deserved a complete budget before voting on such a significant increase. Ephros warned that delaying action could ultimately result in an even larger fourth-quarter tax bill, calling it a potential “death blow” for many residents.

Despite the council’s vote, city officials cautioned that the financial problems remain unresolved.

Finance Director Bill Viqueira told council members that New Jersey’s Department ofCommunity Affairs (DCA) will closely oversee the city’s finances and has the authority to reject the city’s budget and impose its own tax rate if necessary.

Mayor James Solomon said state officials have indicated Jersey City may ultimately need a tax increase of approximately 20% to stabilize its finances.

“The state has been clear—the only other solution is mass layoffs,” Solomon told the council.

The budget crisis marks a dramatic reversal for a city that spent more than two decades transforming itself into one of the nation’s fastest-growing urban centers. Luxury residential towers reshaped Jersey City’s waterfront, thousands of businesses opened and tens of thousands of new residents moved across the Hudson River from Manhattan.

According to the mayor’s administration, however, years of rising spending outpaced revenue growth. Budget gaps were filled through one-time solutions including property sales, borrowing and federal pandemic relief funding. Solomon, who took office in January, has argued those temporary measures are no longer available.

The administration originally proposed a 20% property tax increase, estimating it would add roughly $1,666 annually to the tax bill of a median-valued home. Following the approval of state financial assistance and public criticism, the proposal was reduced to 15%.

Even at the lower level, city officials estimated the increase would generate approximately $60 million in recurring annual revenue while still leaving roughly $20 million in additional budget reductions and another $10 million in restricted funding necessary to close the remaining gap.

The administration says it has already reduced spending by approximately $55 million, with additional departmental restructuring planned later this year.

The financial impact extends beyond homeowners. Property tax increases typically translate into higher rents as landlords pass along higher costs to tenants. At the same time, large-scale layoffs of city employees could reduce consumer spending and affect businesses throughout Jersey City’s local economy.

The city’s financial pressures have also drawn attention from the credit-rating industry. Moody’s Ratings downgraded Jersey City in December, citing rising labor costs, increasing healthcare expenses and years of insufficient revenue growth. Higher borrowing costs could make future infrastructure and capital projects more expensive.

Mayor Solomon has also ordered a review of more than 100 long-term tax-abatement agreements, including several involving major waterfront developments. He argues many of the agreements generate little tax revenue while providing limited affordable housing benefits.

The city’s fiscal problems have also become a political dispute between the current and former administrations. Solomon has blamed former Mayor Steven Fulop for relying on emergency borrowing, selling city assets and using approximately $100 million in federal COVID-19 relief funds to finance a one-time property tax reduction rather than addressing long-term structural deficits.

Fulop, who left office earlier this year to run for governor, has rejected those claims and maintains the budget could have been balanced without a major property tax increase.

The $120 million state aid package was included in a broader $358.8 million supplemental appropriations bill tied to Governor Mikie Sherrill’s fiscal 2027 budget. Hudson County lawmakers, including Raj Mukherji and Katie Brennan, helped assemble the legislation.

Mayor Solomon plans to present a revised budget on July 15, with final adoption expected in August. However, because the Department of Community Affairs now has significant oversight authority, the ultimate size of any property tax increase may rest with the state rather than the City Council.

JBizNews Desk | Jersey City
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Ukraine’s armed forces General Staff said Monday that its drones struck the Gazprom Neft–operated Omsk refinery in western Siberia, the largest fuel-processing plant in Russia and a target that had until this week sat far beyond Kyiv’s reach. The facility lies roughly 2,500 kilometers — about 1,550 miles — from Ukrainian-held territory, near the border with Kazakhstan. Vitaly Khotsenko, governor of the Omsk region, confirmed the attack, saying several drones broke through layers of air defense before igniting a fire at the plant.

The strike carried a message as much as a payload. Iryna Terekh, chief executive of the Kyiv-based defense firm Fire Point, said the company’s upgraded FP-1 drones flew the mission and called it a record for strike drones anywhere in the world. Fire Point’s chief designer, Denys Shtilierman, said the newest jet-launched version of the FP-1 can travel more than 2,100 miles, comfortably clearing the distance to Omsk. President Volodymyr Zelenskyy, in his nightly address, described the operation as an important achievement and said Siberia now sits within range of Ukrainian precision strikes.

Two days later, the campaign widened again. On the night into Wednesday, Ukrainian long-range drones hit the Rosneft-operated Saratov refinery, the TANECO and TAIF-NK complexes in Tatarstan, and a Transneft-Ural pumping station near Ufa in Bashkortostan, according to Ukrainian military statements and regional officials. Saratov’s governor confirmed one person was killed and several injured. The pattern is deliberate: Kyiv is now going after refining, petrochemicals and the pipeline logistics that move crude, not just the refineries themselves.

For Vladimir Putin, the harder problem is arithmetic. Russia spans 11 time zones, and its air defenses were built to guard cities and military sites, not thousands of miles of energy infrastructure scattered across the map. Every deep strike forces Moscow to spread limited interceptors and radar over a far larger area, and the Omsk hit proved that even Siberia — long treated as a safe rear — is no longer off the target list.

The economic damage is already visible at the pump. Gasoline production has fallen roughly 17% to about 850,000 barrels a day, according to Russian government statistics, and analysts estimate that between a fifth and a quarter of the country’s refining capacity is now offline. The International Energy Agency this week called the level of disruption unprecedented in the history of the war. The Omsk plant’s main crude-distillation unit, which accounts for a large share of its output, was reported knocked offline, and the plant processes more than 20 million tons of oil a year.

That shortfall is rippling through daily life. By late June, more than 50 of Russia’s 83 regions were reporting fuel rationing or supply disruptions, with drivers in Moscow waiting hours to fill up and some stations limiting purchases to 20 to 30 liters per car. Crimea has seen sales to ordinary motorists halted outright. The government has banned gasoline and jet-fuel exports, is weighing a diesel export ban, and has loosened fuel-quality rules to keep lower-grade product flowing. To plug the gap, Moscow has started importing gasoline from Kazakhstan and Belarus and is exploring larger purchases from India.

The strain is showing up in the broader economy. The Bank of Russia has flagged rising gasoline prices as an inflation risk, with the rate running near 6% against a 4% target, and the government has cut its 2026 growth forecast to just 0.4%. Repairs are slow and costly because many refineries need specialized imported equipment that sanctions have made hard to source; the Moscow-area Kapotnya plant is expected to stay offline into next year.

The global market has stayed surprisingly calm about the Russian damage, largely because a separate shock is dominating traders’ attention. Brent crude traded near $78 a barrel on Wednesday, up sharply on the week, though the move was driven mainly by renewed U.S.-Iran hostilities and fresh worries over the Strait of Hormuz rather than events in Siberia. Russia’s Urals grade continues to sell at a discount to Brent, and with export terminals and shadow-fleet tankers now under attack, the risk is that Russian barrels reaching market keep shrinking.

There is a cross-border wrinkle for energy buyers, too. Gazprom said Wednesday that drones struck the Krasnodarskaya pumping station, which feeds the Blue Stream pipeline carrying gas to Turkey, though it said exports were not interrupted. Blue Stream and TurkStream are the last pipeline routes moving Russian gas into Turkey and onward toward Central Europe, and repeated hits on that infrastructure keep a tail risk hanging over those supplies.

For now, the race is between Ukraine’s attackers and Russia’s repair crews. Kyiv has struck all 11 of Russia’s largest gasoline producers, and with longer-range drones and domestically built missiles entering the mix, Moscow’s ability to patch and reroute is being tested as never before. Whether that pressure bends the Kremlin toward talks, or simply deepens the pain at Russian gas stations, is the question now hanging over every barrel.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Mortgage rates moved higher this week, adding another hurdle for homebuyers as renewed tensions in the Middle East pushed oil prices and Treasury yields upward.

According to Zillow, the average interest rate for a 30-year fixed-rate mortgage rose to 6.72% on Thursday, up from 6.66% a day earlier, marking one of the highest levels in recent weeks.

The increase follows renewed fighting involving Iran, which has driven crude oil prices higher and fueled concerns that inflation could remain elevated for longer.

Higher inflation expectations typically push Treasury yields upward, and mortgage rates closely follow movements in the 10-year U.S. Treasury note.

As Treasury yields climbed this week, mortgage lenders responded by increasing borrowing costs for new home loans.

The move comes during the heart of the summer homebuying season, when many families traditionally purchase homes before the new school year begins.

While Freddie Mac’s weekly mortgage survey reported a lower average rate earlier in the week, daily market pricing has moved noticeably higher as geopolitical events unfolded.

Housing analysts say the broader outlook for mortgage rates remains uncertain.

Recent comments from Federal Reserve officials indicate policymakers continue watching inflation closely, making near-term interest-rate cuts less likely if price pressures persist.

Although the latest employment data showed slower hiring growth, economists say inflation remains the primary factor influencing long-term borrowing costs.

Higher oil prices also threaten to increase transportation and manufacturing costs, creating additional inflationary pressure throughout the economy.

For homebuyers, the impact is immediate.

Every increase in mortgage rates raises monthly payments and reduces purchasing power, making homes less affordable for many first-time buyers.

Housing affordability remains near multi-decade lows as elevated borrowing costs combine with limited housing inventory and still-high home prices.

Many homeowners also remain reluctant to sell because they locked in mortgage rates near 3% during previous years.

Selling today would often require replacing those loans with mortgages carrying rates more than twice as high.

That “lock-in effect” continues limiting the supply of existing homes available for sale, helping keep home prices elevated despite slower buyer demand.

Real estate economists expect mortgage rates to remain above 6% through much of the year unless inflation eases significantly or financial markets begin anticipating Federal Reserve rate cuts.

Some housing markets are showing modest signs of improvement as inventory slowly increases and sellers become more willing to negotiate pricing.

Still, affordability remains a major challenge across much of the country.

For buyers who remain active, financial experts continue recommending mortgage preapproval, comparison shopping among lenders and locking interest rates once purchase contracts are signed to reduce exposure to further market swings.

For the housing market, renewed geopolitical uncertainty has become another factor influencing borrowing costs alongside inflation, Federal Reserve policy and economic growth.

Unless inflation moderates or global tensions ease, mortgage rates are likely to remain elevated, keeping pressure on affordability for millions of prospective homebuyers.

This article is for informational purposes only and should not be considered financial advice.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Germany recorded an estimated 5,120 heat-related deaths during the first half of the year, the Robert Koch Institute said Thursday, July 9, as the country’s public health agency warned that increasingly severe heat waves are becoming both a growing health emergency and a mounting economic burden.

According to the Robert Koch Institute’s latest weekly report, about 4,270 of the deaths were among people aged 75 and older. Women accounted for more fatalities than men, largely because they make up a greater share of Germany’s oldest population. The total already exceeds Germany’s annual average of roughly 2,900 heat-related deaths recorded between 2023 and 2025.

Most of the deaths occurred during a single week of extreme temperatures between June 22 and June 28, when much of Germany experienced its most intense heat of the year. The institute estimated that approximately 4,310 heat-related deaths occurred during that week alone, compared with about 810 deaths recorded from early April through June 21.

Temperatures climbed above 40 degrees Celsius (104 degrees Fahrenheit) in several parts of the country, with a new national high of approximately 41.3 degrees Celsius recorded near Saarbrücken. Public temperature displays in Berlin also registered about 41 degrees Celsius during the heat wave.

Germany’s experience reflects a broader trend across Europe. The Copernicus Climate Change Service, the European Union’s climate monitoring agency, reported Thursday that Western Europe experienced its hottest June on record, with average temperatures reaching 20.74 degrees Celsius. France, Belgium, Spain and the Netherlands together also reported more than 4,700 excess deaths during the same late-June heat wave.

Beyond the tragic loss of life, economists warn that extreme heat is increasingly weighing on Europe’s economy. Many German homes, hospitals and care facilities were built for a cooler climate and lack widespread air conditioning, forcing governments and businesses to invest heavily in cooling systems, building upgrades and public-health protections.

Allianz Trade estimates that climate-related losses could reduce the European Union’s cumulative economic output by 5% to 7% between 2026 and 2030. Germany alone could face economic losses of approximately $131 billion during that period, according to the insurer’s projections.

Industries that rely on outdoor labor face some of the greatest risks. Construction, agriculture, transportation and delivery services all experience productivity declines as temperatures rise, while recurring drought conditions continue to pressure crop yields and food production across Europe.

The European Central Bank has previously warned that prolonged drought and extreme heat contribute to higher food prices and slower economic growth. Officials increasingly view climate-related disruptions as both an inflation risk and a long-term challenge for economic planning.

As climate events become more frequent, businesses are also confronting rising insurance costs, higher energy demand for cooling, increased workplace safety requirements and disruptions to supply chains. Many economists now view extreme heat as an ongoing business risk rather than an occasional weather event.

German officials expect the death toll to increase further as additional reports from the hottest days of the summer are finalized.

For businesses, insurers and governments alike, Thursday’s report underscores that extreme heat is no longer simply an environmental issue—it has become an increasingly important economic challenge affecting productivity, infrastructure, healthcare spending and long-term growth across Europe’s largest economy.

JBizNews Desk | Berlin
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Europe is accelerating efforts to build its own payment network and reduce its dependence on American financial giants Visa Inc. and Mastercard Inc., turning what was once a long-term policy goal into a strategic economic priority. European Central Bank President Christine Lagarde has emerged as the initiative’s strongest advocate, arguing that Europe cannot claim true economic sovereignty while relying on foreign-controlled payment systems.

The concern is backed by significant market share. Visa and Mastercard together process an estimated $24 trillion in transactions annually, while handling roughly 61% of euro-area card payments. In 13 of the eurozone’s 21 member states, cross-border card transactions rely exclusively on international payment networks. European officials increasingly view that dependence as both an economic and geopolitical vulnerability.

At the center of Europe’s response is Wero, a digital payment platform launched in 2024 by the European Payments Initiative (EPI). The service began by offering instant person-to-person transfers before expanding into online payments. In-store tap-to-pay capability is scheduled to roll out during 2026 and 2027. The platform has already attracted more than 43 million users across Germany, France and Belgium while processing billions of euros in transactions, with additional expansion into the Netherlands, Luxembourg and Spain.

Momentum increased earlier this year when the European Payments Initiative reached an agreement with the EuroPA Alliance, connecting national payment systems including Spain’s Bizum, Italy’s Bancomat, Portugal’s MB WAY and the Nordic Vipps MobilePay platform. Together, the partnership links roughly 130 million users across 13 European countries, allowing consumers to make payments across borders without routing transactions through American card networks.

The financial incentives are substantial. Traditional card networks generally charge merchants interchange and processing fees, while Wero relies on the Single Euro Payments Area (SEPA) instant payment infrastructure to move money directly between bank accounts. For retailers processing millions of transactions each year, even modest savings can translate into significant reductions in payment costs while keeping customer payment data within Europe’s banking system.

European policymakers are advancing broader reforms alongside the new payment network. The European Parliament has backed development of a digital euro targeted for introduction later this decade, while major European banks continue developing a euro-backed stablecoin. Updated European Union payment regulations have also expanded open-banking access and tightened fee rules, increasing competition with established card providers.

The challenge remains significant. Mastercard alone has more than 900 million branded cards in circulation across Europe, far exceeding Wero’s current user base. Adoption has also been gradual in some markets. Analysts note that consumers generally choose payment methods based on convenience, speed and reliability rather than questions of economic sovereignty, meaning any new platform must match the seamless experience customers already expect.

Supporters argue that recent geopolitical events have strengthened Europe’s resolve. The suspension of Visa and Mastercard operations in Russia following the 2022 invasion of Ukraine demonstrated how globally dominant payment networks can become tools of international policy. Combined with broader trade tensions between Europe and the United States, policymakers say the experience reinforced the need for independent European payment infrastructure.

For businesses, the outcome could eventually mean lower transaction costs and greater control over payment data. For consumers, the success of Europe’s strategy will depend on whether the new payment systems prove as convenient and reliable as the global networks they are attempting to challenge.

JBizNews Desk | Brussels

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Federal Reserve Chairman Kevin Warsh named 15 economists, former central bankers and business leaders on Thursday, July 9, to lead five task forces reviewing how the U.S. central bank operates, launching one of the broadest internal examinations of the Federal Reserve in years.

The Federal Reserve said the panels will work independently while drawing on Fed staff for support. Their mission is to evaluate key areas of the central bank’s operations and deliver recommendations to the Federal Open Market Committee by the end of the year.

The review comes less than two months after Warsh became chairman. He first announced the initiative following the Fed’s June policy meeting, saying the institution should examine whether its communications, policy tools and economic models remain effective in a rapidly changing economy.

The list of outside advisers includes some of the biggest names in economics, finance and technology. Among them are venture capitalist Marc Andreessen, Microsoft executive Asha Sharma, former Bank of England Governor Mervyn King, former Reserve Bank of India Governor Raghuram Rajan, former Central Bank of Brazil President Arminio Fraga, Harvard University economists Greg Mankiw, Karen Dynan, Jeremy Stein and Raj Chetty, Stanford University economist Charles Jones, Nobel Prize-winning economist Thomas Sargent, former Walmart Chief Executive Doug McMillon, and University of Chicago economist Kevin Murphy.

The task forces will focus on five major areas: Federal Reserve communications, the central bank’s balance sheet, economic data and forecasting, productivity and artificial intelligence, and the framework the Fed uses to measure and respond to inflation.

“I am honored that the best minds from a range of disciplines have agreed to work with us to sharpen our performance as an institution,” Warsh said in the Fed’s announcement.

One of the most closely watched reviews will examine the Fed’s roughly $6.7 trillion balance sheet. Any future recommendations to speed or slow the reduction of those holdings could influence interest rates, bond markets and borrowing costs throughout the economy.

Another task force will study how advances in artificial intelligence and productivity should influence monetary policy. Economists have increasingly debated whether AI-driven productivity gains could allow stronger economic growth without generating additional inflation, potentially giving the Fed more flexibility when setting interest rates.

The review also arrives as businesses, investors and consumers closely watch the timing of future rate cuts. Any changes to how the Fed measures inflation, interprets economic data or communicates policy decisions could affect financial markets and borrowing costs for mortgages, auto loans and business financing.

Before becoming chairman, Warsh had publicly argued that the Federal Reserve needed significant institutional changes. Thursday’s announcement signals a more collaborative approach, bringing in outside experts while emphasizing that any recommendations will still require approval from the Fed’s governors and regional bank presidents before implementation.

Market analysts said the broad review could eventually reshape how the Federal Reserve communicates with investors and how it approaches future monetary policy decisions.

Scott Clemons, chief investment strategist at Brown Brothers Harriman, described the effort as one of the most significant institutional reviews the Fed has undertaken in years. Rick Rieder, chief investment officer of global fixed income at BlackRock, said the initiative could mark the beginning of a new chapter for U.S. monetary policy.

While no immediate policy changes were announced, Thursday’s action signals that the Federal Reserve is preparing for a comprehensive reassessment of how it conducts monetary policy in an economy increasingly shaped by technological change, shifting labor markets and evolving inflation dynamics.

The task forces are expected to complete their work later this year, with recommendations then considered by Federal Reserve policymakers.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Citigroup launched a new capability allowing instant cross-border U.S. dollar payments between global banks, the company announced Thursday, July 9, marking a major step toward around-the-clock international payments for corporate clients. The first live transaction sent funds from a Citigroup account in the United Kingdom to Siam Commercial Bank in Thailand over the July 4 holiday weekend, when U.S. banks are typically closed.

The payment was initiated by Phillip Securities Thailand, a client of Siam Commercial Bank, and settled in U.S. dollars in near real time despite the American holiday, according to Citigroup. The Thai bank is one of roughly 300 financial institutions connected to Citigroup’s global instant-payments network, which operates within the bank’s Services division and supports multinational corporations and institutional clients.

The milestone expands the bank’s instant-payment capabilities beyond transfers between accounts held within Citigroup itself. Until now, the company’s fastest international dollar transfers were largely limited to accounts inside its own network. Those internal transfers already process approximately $1 billion each day, the bank said.

“This milestone reflects the growing demand from clients for real-time cross-border payments that extend beyond a single banking network,” Debopama Sen, Citigroup’s head of payments, said in the announcement.

The new capability is powered by technology the bank has spent the past year developing. Siam Commercial Bank became the first financial institution to connect to Citigroup’s combined 24/7 USD Clearing and Citi Token Services platform. Together, the systems allow participating banks and their customers to send and receive U.S. dollar payments 24 hours a day, seven days a week, including weekends and holidays.

Traditionally, international U.S. dollar payments have depended on domestic banking hours and clearing windows, often delaying transactions until the next business day. The new platform removes those constraints, allowing businesses to move funds whenever needed.

For multinational companies, the benefits extend beyond convenience. Instant settlement reduces idle cash, improves liquidity management, and gives treasury departments greater flexibility in managing global operations across multiple time zones. Businesses can free working capital immediately rather than waiting through weekends or holidays for payments to clear.

The launch also strengthens Citigroup’s competitive position as financial institutions race to modernize cross-border payments. Fintech firms have increasingly challenged traditional banks by offering faster international money movement, prompting major banks to invest heavily in always-on payment infrastructure.

Citigroup has estimated that global cross-border payment flows could approach $250 trillion over the coming years. The bank has identified real-time payments as a core part of its long-term strategy to maintain its leadership in international transaction services.

Chief Executive Jane Fraser has made expanding the bank’s Services business a central priority as Citigroup continues its broader restructuring. The division provides treasury, trade, securities and payment services to corporations, governments and financial institutions across more than 180 countries and jurisdictions.

For partner banks such as Siam Commercial Bank, joining the network provides access to continuous U.S. dollar clearing without having to build comparable infrastructure independently. Their customers gain access to faster settlement while maintaining existing banking relationships.

Industry analysts view the Thailand transaction as an important proof of concept for global banking. While the payment involved a single partner institution, Citigroup’s network already includes approximately 300 connected banks, creating the foundation for broader adoption of real-time international dollar payments.

As demand for faster global commerce continues to grow, financial institutions are increasingly expected to provide payment services that operate continuously rather than only during domestic banking hours. Thursday’s announcement signals that instant, cross-border U.S. dollar payments are moving beyond pilot programs and becoming a practical commercial offering.

For businesses operating internationally, the ability to move money across borders in seconds instead of days could improve cash management, reduce financing costs and simplify global operations. As additional banks join the network, real-time international payments are expected to become an increasingly standard feature of global banking.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or Distribution without Written Permission is Prohibited.

Israel handed the United States fresh intelligence indicating that Iran was weighing a new plan to assassinate President Donald Trump, according to a report published Thursday by The Wall Street Journal, which cited people familiar with the exchange. The warning, relayed to Washington in recent weeks, arrives in the middle of an active war between the two countries and only days after Trump declared a fragile ceasefire effectively finished. Neither the White House nor Israel’s government offered an on-record account of the specific threat, and Iran has repeatedly insisted over the past year that it has never sought to kill the American president.

The disclosure fits a pattern that has trailed Trump since the 2024 campaign, when federal prosecutors charged Iranian operative Farhad Shakeri with a murder-for-hire scheme aimed at the then-candidate. In March, a Brooklyn jury convicted another man, Asif Merchant, on terrorism and murder-for-hire charges tied to an Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps plot against U.S. officials. Israeli outlets, including Channel 14, reported earlier this week that Iran’s Quds Force had stood up a new unit, dubbed “Mukhtar,” to target American leaders — claims that surfaced alongside the multi-day funeral for former Iranian supreme leader Ali Khamenei, who was killed on Feb. 28 in a joint U.S.-Israeli strike. Chants calling for revenge dominated that procession, which ran through Thursday.

The report also cuts against the diplomatic track the administration has struggled to keep alive. Washington and Tehran signed a memorandum of understanding earlier this summer calling for a 60-day ceasefire and reopened talks over Iran’s nuclear stockpile and security in the Strait of Hormuz. That framework frayed this week: after Iranian forces fired on ships in the Strait, the U.S. struck back, reimposed sanctions on Iranian oil sales, and Trump told reporters at a NATO summit in Ankara that the truce was, in his words, over. Iran’s military answered with strikes on U.S. installations in Bahrain and Kuwait. Trump has left little doubt about how he would respond to a successful attempt on his life, telling reporters earlier this year he had issued standing instructions that Iran would be “obliterated” if it killed him.

For all the weight of the headline, Wall Street treated the news calmly. The S&P 500 rose 0.7% on Thursday, more than erasing the prior session’s loss, while the Nasdaq Composite climbed 1.2% and the Dow Jones Industrial Average added roughly 119 points, or 0.2%, in late trading. That steadiness held even as the fresh U.S. strikes and Iranian counterstrikes played out — a sign that traders have, for now, learned to price the war as a running condition rather than a new shock.

Oil told the clearest story. Brent crude, the international benchmark, fell 2.2% to about $76.30 a barrel, surrendering much of the previous day’s jump, when it had settled near $78 after Trump called the truce dead. U.S. West Texas Intermediate had spiked above $73 on Wednesday. The swings ran straight to the pump: the national average for regular gasoline reached $3.85 a gallon Thursday, up a nickel overnight and 68 cents higher than a year earlier, according to auto club AAA. Energy producers were the obvious winners of the earlier surge — ExxonMobil, Chevron and ConocoPhillips all climbed Wednesday as crude ran higher — before prices eased back.

The deeper worry sits beneath the water. A genuine return to full conflict threatens tanker traffic through the Strait of Hormuz, the chokepoint that moves a large share of the world’s seaborne crude. That fear is sharpened by thin cushions at home: U.S. Strategic Petroleum Reserve stocks fell this week to their lowest level since 1983, leaving Washington less room to blunt a supply shock. Gold and silver, which had jumped on Wednesday’s escalation, gave back ground as the panic bid faded.

Attention is now shifting to earnings. The largest U.S. banks begin reporting second-quarter results next week, the first hard read on how corporate America fared from April through June with the war as a backdrop. PepsiCo offered an early, uneven signal Thursday, falling 3.8% despite slightly better-than-expected revenue, as softening trends in its North American food and drink businesses showed through.

The market’s message, for now, is that a reported plot against the president — however grave — has not shifted the calculus that has governed trading since the war began: watch Hormuz, watch the barrel, and wait for the next move from Washington or Tehran. Whether that composure survives contact with a real escalation is the question every trading desk will carry into next week.

JBizNews Desk | Washington © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.


Body runs ~780 words. One note on sourcing: the plot itself is a WSJ exclusive built on unnamed people familiar with the matter — there’s no on-record official statement attached to it yet, so I anchored paragraph one on the named parties (Israel’s government, the U.S., Trump) and flagged the denial rather than inventing an official. If a named White House or IDF spokesman goes on record later today, send it and I’ll re-lead on that.

PepsiCo Inc. is putting its iconic Quaker Oats brand into a bottle, launching a whole-grain oat shake that consumers prepare themselves as the company targets growing demand for high-protein, portable breakfasts, according to a company announcement released Tuesday.

The new product, Quaker Oat Shake & Go, comes as a dry oat mix packaged inside a single-serve bottle. Consumers simply add cold milk, a milk alternative or water to a fill line, replace the cap, shake the bottle until blended and drink directly from it. The product will debut nationwide this month in Strawberry Banana and Cinnamon Vanilla flavors and will be stocked alongside traditional Quaker hot cereals at major U.S. retailers.

Each serving contains 15 grams of protein, 16 grams of whole grains and 3 grams of fiber. When prepared with eight ounces of milk, the protein content increases to 23 grams, according to the company. The product requires no refrigeration before preparation and contains no artificial preservatives, flavors or added colors.

James Wade, chief marketing officer for Quaker Foods, said the launch is designed to bring the brand’s oat-based nutrition into a format that better matches today’s fast-paced lifestyles. He emphasized that the shake is intended to complement a consumer’s daily routine rather than replace a full meal.

The introduction fits into a broader strategy at Purchase, New York-based PepsiCo to expand its portfolio of products built around functional nutrition. Over the past year, the company has introduced a variety of higher-protein and higher-fiber products, including protein instant oatmeal, protein granola bars, protein rice crisps, protein Doritos and prebiotic beverages sold under both the Pepsi and poppi brands. Quaker Oat Shake & Go extends that strategy into one of the fastest-growing segments of the breakfast market.

The timing reflects changing consumer habits. According to research cited by Quaker, most Americans now prepare breakfast in less than five minutes, while many are actively seeking foods containing higher levels of protein and fiber without adding extra preparation time. Drinkable breakfasts and other portable nutrition products have become increasingly popular among consumers who skip traditional sit-down meals but still want convenient options they perceive as healthier. The trend has also created new merchandising opportunities for grocery stores, convenience retailers and vending operators.

This is not Quaker’s first attempt to enter the beverage category. PepsiCo introduced a Quaker Oat Beverage in the United States in 2019 but discontinued the product less than a year later. This time, however, the company is emphasizing protein, convenience and functional nutrition rather than marketing the product primarily as a plant-based beverage. Executives appear to be betting that today’s stronger consumer interest in protein-rich foods gives the concept a better chance of success.

The move also reflects a broader shift across the packaged-food industry. Major consumer brands are increasingly adding protein and fiber claims to well-established product lines rather than creating entirely new brands. Protein has become one of the grocery industry’s strongest marketing trends, expanding far beyond traditional nutrition products into chips, cereals, beverages and snack foods. By extending the trusted Quaker Oats brand into the drinkable breakfast category, PepsiCo hopes to capitalize on growing consumer demand while leveraging nearly 150 years of brand recognition.

For shoppers, the appeal is simple: a shelf-stable breakfast requiring no bowl, spoon or overnight preparation that can be mixed with whatever liquid is available. Whether Quaker Oat Shake & Go succeeds where the company’s earlier oat beverage fell short will likely depend on pricing, taste and whether consumers embrace the combination of convenience, protein and whole grains as part of their daily breakfast routine.

PepsiCo is scheduled to report quarterly earnings later this month, when investors are expected to look for signs that the company’s growing emphasis on functional foods is translating into stronger sales.

JBizNews Desk | Purchase, New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

.

Federal regulators believe that after an earlier remember involving the same automobiles failed to solve the issue, Kia is is issuing a new recognize for more than 460, 000 vehicles.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration announced on Thursday that the recall affects 462 869 Kia Telluride cars from the ages 2020 to 2024.

Due to the possibility of fire while driving or parked, users are advised to area inside and aside from other vehicles and structures.

HONDA RECALLS MORE THAN 325 000 Cars FOR POTENTIAL CASH RISK

For the same problem, the exact cars were recalled in 2024.

The change may be dislodged, misaligned, or damaged, causing the chair motor to continue operating and overheating if the front energy seat slide cover or knob is struck or unwittingly struck.

The past recall’s poor repair also could cause the motor to start overheating and catch fire.

Seat vehicles and 11 instances of desk fires have been reported.

Lincoln RECALLS MORE THAN 110, 000 MUSTANG VEHICLES OVER WINDSHIELD WIPER AND DRIVETRAIN Flaws

FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO: Press HERE.

On August 13, owners may receive letter of alert.

Owners can then get their vehicles to a Kia vendor where an electronic wire assembly may be installed to stop the seat motor from working continuously if the seat switch is damaged, misaligned, or otherwise misaligned privately.

This post was originally published here

, but they are slightly higher.

Freddie Mac, a lease customer, reported on Thursday that while mortgage rates increased this week, they have remained relatively stable over the past few weeks.

The benchmark 30-year fixed mortgage’s average interest rate increased to 6.49 % from last week’s 6.43 % reading, according to Freddie Mac’s most recent primary mortgage market survey, which was released on Thursday.

A 30-year fixed-rate loan had a rate of 6. 72 % a year ago on regular.

Landlord, HOMEOWNER, AND OTHER HOUSING AFFORDABILITY TO IMPROVE. Projections Web

According to Freddie Mac’s chief economist Sam Khater,” the 30-year fixed-rate mortgage averaged 6.49 % this week.”

Although mortgage rates have never significantly changed recently, Khater continued to see improvement in home value and economic growth as homebuyers look for homes in the current market.

A 15-year set mortgage’s ordinary rate increased somewhat to 5.82 %. That’s an improvement over last week’s 5.79 %, but it’s still below the previous week’s average of 5.86 %.

RECORD DECLINE IN HOME ASKING PRICES OFFERS AFFORDABILITY BOOST BUYERS

The Federal Reserve and politics are just two examples of how mortgage rates are affected by various aspects. Mortgage rates closely monitor the 10-year Treasury yield, despite not being directly affected by the Fed’s interest level choices. As of Thursday evening, the supply for the 10-year was only 4.5 %.

The most recent mortgage information comes as consumers ‘ housing market conditions have improved a little bit, with many of them watching as inventory increases and mortgage rates remain relatively flat.

Realtor.com released a mid-year update to its 2026 housing market forecast, which predicts that home prices will increase by 1.2 % this year, which is lower than the previous forecast and slower than the current rate of inflation. In other words, home prices may actually be falling in inflation-adjusted conditions.

Developers SAY THAT THE GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS ADD ABOUT$ 132K TO THE COST OF NEW HOMES.

The business has proven to be resilient in the face of both old and new challenges. In consequence, the housing market’s second quarter of 2026 was more stable than momentumful,” according to Realtor.com senior economist Danielle Hale.

According to Hale,” the housing market is moving forwards as sellers update their expectations, price growth slows, and buyers gain more negotiating leverage.” We anticipate momentum to increase as more neglected buyers and sellers find solutions that work for both sides as the year progresses.

Clicking HERE WILL GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO.

A rebound in inflation brought on by the Iran conflict, which could have prevented interest charges from being cut in the first quarter of the year, which is expected to keep mortgage rates at the same degree as they were when they were at when they ended in 2025, is expected to remain unchanged.

This post was originally published here

Tellers and bankers at a Wells Fargo branch in Egg Harbor, New Jersey, voted 5-4 on Wednesday to keep their union, according to unofficial results tallied by the National Labor Relations Board. The single-vote margin defeated a petition to decertify the Communications Workers of America unit the employees had formed in February 2024, and it broke a run of Wells Fargo branches that had spent much of this year cutting ties with the same union. The matter is docketed at the labor board as Case No. 04-RD-388660.

The outcome is small in raw numbers but pointed in its timing. Every other recent test of worker sentiment inside the bank had gone against the CWA. Workers at five branches across five states have dissolved their unions since the winter, including a Wells Fargo location in Seaside Park, New Jersey, and another in Casper, Wyoming. Earlier this year, employees at a branch in Connecticut voted the union down in the only certification election Wells Fargo has seen in 2026. Against that backdrop, the Egg Harbor vote is the first time in months that a decertification drive at the bank has failed.

Union organizing is close to unheard of in American banking. Fewer than one in a hundred bank employees is represented by a union, a share that has held for years. That is what made the CWA campaign notable: between 2023 and 2024, workers at 28 Wells Fargo locations voted to join Wells Fargo Workers United, the CWA affiliate behind the drive, in what labor advocates billed as the first serious union push at a major U.S. lender. The question ever since has been whether those wins would spread across the industry or stall out.

The momentum has clearly cooled. There were only four branch elections at Wells Fargo in 2025, down sharply from the burst of activity the year before. The petition to unwind the Egg Harbor unit was filed with free legal help from the National Right to Work Legal Defense Foundation, a nonprofit that represents workers seeking to remove unions and has been involved in most of the recent Wells Fargo cases. The group backed the Egg Harbor petition and four of the five successful decertifications elsewhere.

Decertification votes are uncommon on their own terms. The labor board fields only a few hundred petitions to remove a union each year, against thousands of certification elections, and they tend to succeed most easily at small workplaces — which describes nearly every Wells Fargo branch that has organized. The units are tiny, often fewer than ten non-managerial employees, so a handful of departures or a couple of changed minds can tip a branch either way. Egg Harbor, decided by one vote out of nine cast, is a plain case in point.

The foundation has argued that some unionized Wells Fargo employees soured on the CWA because the union has not landed a single contract with the bank since the first branch organized in late 2023. More than two years in, none of the unionized branches has a ratified agreement. The union tells a different story, accusing Wells Fargo of dragging out talks and refusing to bargain in good faith. Last month the CWA filed an unfair labor practice complaint with the labor board accusing the bank of making unilateral changes to working conditions at the Egg Harbor branch without first bargaining with the union.

Wells Fargo has not answered that complaint and did not comment on Wednesday’s vote. The bank has generally denied wrongdoing in the dozens of cases the union has filed against it, many of which have since been withdrawn or thrown out. The CWA and the National Right to Work Legal Defense Foundation did not respond to requests for comment.

The fight sits on top of the workplace complaints that fueled the organizing wave in the first place: thin staffing, pay that workers say has not kept up, and steady pressure to hit sales targets — the same pressure that produced the bank’s unauthorized-accounts scandal a decade ago and still shadows its branches. Those grievances have not gone away. But this year’s results suggest that frustration with the bank and frustration with the union can push workers in opposite directions.

For Wells Fargo, the result is a rare setback in a year that has mostly broken its way on the labor front, and it keeps at least one organized branch on the board as contract talks grind on. For the CWA, holding Egg Harbor by a single vote is thin comfort, but it stops the bleeding and preserves a foothold the union can point to as it presses the bank to negotiate.

In the legal lineup, Jerry Walters of Littler Mendelson represented Wells Fargo, Nicholas Hanlon appeared for the CWA, and Bart Valad of the National Right to Work Legal Defense Foundation represented the worker who brought the petition. The labor board’s tally stays unofficial until certified, and either side can file objections. What happens next at the bargaining table — where nothing has been signed in more than two years — will say more about the campaign’s future than any single 5-4 count.

JBizNews Desk | Egg Harbor, New Jersey

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.


Wall Street pushed higher on Thursday as a sharp rebound in semiconductor stocks and a retreat in oil prices carried the major indexes back into the green, even as the United States and Iran traded fresh military blows across the Middle East. The Nasdaq Composite led the advance, closing up 1.30%, or 336.24 points, at 26,206.89. The S&P 500 rose 0.81%, or 60.93 points, to 7,543.64. The Dow Jones Industrial Average added 139.02 points, or 0.27%, to 52,487.41. The small-cap Russell 2000 gained 1.22%, or 36.15 points, to 2,992.54, nearly matching the Nasdaq’s pace after lagging badly the day before.

The bounce reversed part of a punishing Wednesday, when the Dow shed 576.76 points, or 1.09%, and the S&P 500 slipped 0.28% after President Donald Trump told the NATO summit in Turkey that the U.S. ceasefire with Iran was over and oil prices spiked. Thursday brought no letup in the fighting — the U.S. launched airstrikes on roughly 90 Iranian targets and Tehran retaliated against U.S.-allied Gulf countries, according to reports cited by the Associated Press — yet investors chose to look through the conflict and back toward the artificial-intelligence spending boom that has driven equities all year. The willingness to buy despite the headlines marked a shift from the risk-off crouch of the prior session.

The clearest expression of that mood was in chips, which had been the market’s biggest drag earlier in the week. The iShares Semiconductor ETF climbed more than 5%, and a broader Bloomberg gauge of chipmakers rose about 4%. Micron Technology jumped 4.5% after announcing plans to spend as much as $250 billion building new U.S. plants to meet AI-driven demand. Sandisk popped 7.6%. The rally helped repair some of the damage in the PHLX Semiconductor Index, which had fallen roughly 16% from its June 22 peak and dropped below its 50-day moving average for the first time since early April. Notably, the pivot came at the expense of the megacap “hyperscalers”: the Roundhill Magnificent Seven ETF slipped 0.6% as money rotated out of the largest AI platform names and into the chipmakers that supply them.

Much of the day’s attention centered on SK Hynix, the South Korean memory giant set to price its U.S. offering Thursday and begin trading Friday. Demand ran hot, with the listing reported to be more than seven times oversubscribed, and the stock closed 5.3% higher in Seoul ahead of the debut — a fresh signal that appetite for anything tied to AI memory and data-center buildout remains strong even against a wartime backdrop.

Market movers. PepsiCo fell 1.8% to about $140 after mixed second-quarter results. The company posted adjusted earnings of $2.20 a share, a penny short of the $2.21 analysts expected, though revenue rose 6.4% from a year earlier to $24.18 billion on strong international sales. Drug stocks swung hard on trial data: Ionis Pharmaceuticals tumbled about 21% and British partner AstraZeneca dropped nearly 8% — its worst day since March 2020 — after their heart-disease drug Wainua failed to meet its primary goal in a late-stage study, while Alnylam Pharmaceuticals surged 17.5%. Defense contractor CACI International fell 7.7%. Among analyst calls, Citi‘s Jason Basinet cut his Netflix price target to $100 from $115 but kept a buy rating, citing soft viewership and the market’s shift toward semis. KeyBanc Capital Markets downgraded Salesforce to sector weight from overweight and pulled its target, saying it saw no clear momentum catalyst. S&P Global Ratings downgraded Oracle one notch to BBB-, the lowest rung of investment grade, on rising business risk and weaker cash flow, though the stock still advanced.

Commodities and volatility. Oil gave back a chunk of Wednesday’s surge as traders weighed whether the flare-up stays contained. Brent crude fell more than 2% after topping $78 a barrel the day before, and West Texas Intermediate slid toward $72. The CBOE Volatility Index, Wall Street’s fear gauge, dropped 6.3% to 15.84 after jumping to 16.90 on Wednesday. Gold rose about 1.2% to roughly $4,132 an ounce as some investors kept a safe-haven hedge in place. In the bond market, Treasury yields held firm rather than retreating: the 30-year yield stayed above the 5% mark at about 5.08%, reflecting lingering worry that renewed energy-price pressure could keep inflation sticky — the same concern flagged in minutes from the Federal Reserve’s June meeting, which showed some policymakers open to another rate hike if price growth stays elevated.

On the economic calendar, the National Association of Realtors reported that existing-home sales unexpectedly fell in June, a reminder that higher-for-longer rates continue to weigh on housing even as equities climb.

Overseas markets firmed alongside New York. The pan-European Stoxx 600 closed up about 0.8%, led by basic resources up 3.2% and technology up 2.8%. Germany’s DAX rose 0.83%, France’s CAC 40 gained 0.9% and Italy’s FTSE MIB added 1.1%, while the U.K.‘s FTSE 100 slipped 0.2%. In Asia, Japan’s Nikkei 225 rose 1.4%, South Korea’s Kospi added 0.62%, mainland China’s CSI 300 gained 2.5% and Hong Kong’s Hang Seng fell 0.5%.

The unresolved question is whether the market’s composure lasts. Some strategists warned that investors may be growing numb to an on-again, off-again conflict that still carries real economic weight. Vikas Dwivedi, global energy strategist at Macquarie Group, said he expects the tensions to prove relatively short-lived because both countries face practical limits, but cautioned against chasing the rally given a large underlying oversupply in oil that he said leaves room for prices to fall once the current standoff eases. Others put inflation at the center of the risk: renewed Middle East pressure on energy, stacked on top of heavy AI investment and resilient consumer spending, could keep price growth stubborn through the back half of the year and leave the door open to a Fed rate increase before December.

For now, the focus turns to Friday’s SK Hynix debut and to next week, when June’s Consumer Price Index and congressional testimony from Fed Chair Kevin Warsh land alongside the first big bank earnings, including JPMorgan Chase.

JBizNews Desk | New York © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Minority-owned and woman-owned businesses in Newport News, Virginia, won only a small fraction of the city’s contracting dollars over a five-year period compared with the number of qualified firms available to perform the work, according to an independent disparity study presented to the Newport News City Council during a June 23 work session.

The study, conducted by BBC Research & Consulting and presented alongside Sheila White, the city’s director of finance, examined more than $814 million in construction, professional services and goods contracts awarded between July 2019 and June 2024. The review measured how much work went to small and diverse businesses, how many qualified firms existed in the marketplace and whether significant gaps suggested barriers to participation.

The findings showed substantial disparities. Researchers used a disparity index that compares the percentage of contract dollars awarded to a business group with that group’s estimated availability in the marketplace. An index below 0.80 is widely recognized as indicating substantial underutilization and may support an inference that barriers to participation exist.

Minority-owned businesses collectively received just 1.8% of the city’s contracting dollars despite representing an estimated 14.9% of available firms, producing a disparity index of 0.12. White woman-owned businesses received 3.4% of contract dollars compared with 10.4% availability, resulting in an index of 0.33. Service-disabled veteran-owned businesses recorded the lowest participation, with a disparity index of just 0.04. Every category examined in the study fell well below the accepted 0.80 benchmark.

Individual business groups experienced similar results. Black-owned businesses received 1.0% of contract dollars despite representing 5.2% of available firms. Hispanic-owned businesses received 0.5% compared with 2.8% availability. Asian-Pacific-owned businesses captured 0.2% of contract spending despite representing 4.6% of the marketplace. Businesses owned by individuals of Middle Eastern and North African descent received virtually no contracting dollars during the study period.

Researchers also found city contracting dollars were concentrated among a relatively small number of vendors. For contracts valued below $1 million, just 12.9% of participating businesses received half of all contract dollars awarded, a pattern researchers said can make it more difficult for newer and smaller businesses to compete for government work.

City officials emphasized that the study measures outcomes rather than making legal findings of discrimination. Under federal law, race- or gender-conscious contracting programs generally require evidence demonstrating identifiable barriers to participation. Disparity studies such as this one are commonly used by state and local governments to determine whether additional contracting programs may be legally justified.

In response to the findings, Newport News is preparing to launch a new initiative known as Bridge Forward Business Access, designed to expand opportunities for small businesses and firms owned by minorities, women, veterans and individuals with disabilities. The City Council reviewed the proposal during its work session and is expected to vote on the program later this month. Officials say increasing participation by qualified businesses will strengthen competition, improve procurement and support broader economic growth throughout the community.

The Newport News study reflects a broader trend seen across the country. Similar disparity studies have been conducted by numerous cities, counties and state governments, including a recent statewide review in Virginia examining contracting practices across state agencies and public universities during the same July 2019 through June 2024 period. Such studies have become the primary analytical tool governments use when evaluating supplier diversity initiatives and defending them against legal challenges.

For minority business owners, the report provides quantitative evidence supporting long-standing concerns that public contracting opportunities remain concentrated among an established group of vendors. Whether the proposed Bridge Forward Business Access program narrows those gaps will depend on the final policies adopted by the City Council, including outreach efforts, procurement practices and ongoing measurement of participation. Supporters say success will ultimately be measured by whether public contracting opportunities more closely reflect the diversity of qualified businesses available to compete.

JBizNews Desk | Newport News, Virginia

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Mexico is pressing the Office of the U.S. Trade Representative (USTR) to exempt more of its exports from a proposed U.S. tariff tied to forced labor, as federal hearings on the measure opened this week in Washington and a separate tariff deadline approaches later this month, according to the Mexican Economy Ministry and USTR filings.

The dispute centers on a proposal announced by the U.S. Trade Representative on June 2 under Section 301 of the Trade Act of 1974. Following an investigation into labor enforcement practices across 60 economies, the agency concluded that many trading partners had failed to adequately prevent imports produced with forced labor. It proposed additional tariffs of 10% on imports from 15 countries, including Mexico, and 12.5% on goods from the remaining countries under review.

U.S. Trade Representative Jamieson Greer said countries that fail to block forced-labor goods create an unfair competitive disadvantage for American workers and manufacturers. Public hearings before the agency’s Section 301 Committee began Tuesday and continue through Thursday following the close of the written comment period.

Mexico quickly sought to minimize the impact. After consultations with USTR officials in early June, the Mexican Economy Ministry said products qualifying under the United States-Mexico-Canada Agreement (USMCA) rules of origin—representing roughly 85% of Mexico’s exports to the United States—would remain exempt from the proposed 10% tariff. Products already covered under separate Section 232 national security tariffs, including automobiles, steel and aluminum, also remain outside the scope of the proposal, although many of those products continue to face tariffs of up to 50% under separate trade actions.

That leaves approximately 15% of Mexico’s exports potentially subject to the new tariff, and it is that remaining share Mexico is attempting to protect. Economy Minister Marcelo Ebrard is leading negotiations with U.S. officials during a 45-day consultation period, arguing that Mexico has strengthened efforts to prevent forced-labor goods from entering its supply chains and deserves broader exemptions.

The legal backdrop adds urgency to the negotiations. The proposed Section 301 tariffs are widely viewed as replacing earlier duties that encountered legal challenges. A 25% tariff imposed on many Mexican imports under the International Emergency Economic Powers Act (IEEPA) was later struck down by the U.S. Supreme Court, while a temporary 10% surcharge imposed under Section 122 of the Trade Act is scheduled to expire around July 24. Many trade analysts believe the administration intends to have the Section 301 framework ready before that deadline to preserve tariff authority under a more durable legal basis.

Unlike traditional labor disputes, the proposal focuses less on Mexico’s domestic labor practices and more on preventing goods produced with forced labor in third countries—particularly China—from entering the United States through Mexican supply chains. Business groups have expressed concern that companies could increasingly bear the burden of proving their supply chains are free of forced labor before products are allowed into the U.S. market.

The administration has also attempted to limit the impact on American consumers. The proposal includes dozens of pages of product exemptions covering numerous food products, agricultural goods and industrial materials. Items including certain coffee, bananas, tomatoes and selected metals would either remain exempt or face lower tariff rates. A special quota system would also allow limited volumes of qualifying textile and apparel imports to enter under reduced duties.

The tariff discussions come as the United States and Mexico continue broader negotiations over the future of the USMCA trade agreement. The two governments completed a second round of consultations in June and are scheduled to meet again on July 20 in Mexico City, where Mexico will also continue pressing Washington to remove the 50% Section 232 tariffs on steel and aluminum exports that have sharply reduced shipments to the United States.

No new forced-labor tariffs will take effect until the Office of the U.S. Trade Representative completes the hearing process and issues a final determination. Until then, manufacturers, importers and cross-border businesses are watching closely as both governments negotiate over one of North America’s most important trading relationships.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

America’s largest airlines are redesigning air travel around their highest-paying passengers, pouring money into first-class cabins, private lounges and luxury perks while the experience for ordinary coach flyers grows tighter and pricier — a divide that industry executives and analysts spelled out this week.

The split is now impossible to miss. At Delta’s newest first-class lounges, open kitchens plate dishes like hamachi crudo, cocktail bars mix drinks to order, and travelers unwind in soundproof pods or on outdoor decks overlooking the tarmac. American Airlines has teamed with the James Beard Foundation to upgrade its lounge menus and redesigned its newest Boeing 787-9 Dreamliners around private business-class suites with sliding doors, lie-flat seats longer than a twin mattress, and amenity kits stocked with premium skincare.

For everyone else, the trip looks different: a line at every step, a café selling $16 sandwiches, a late boarding group, and a cramped middle seat once the overhead bins fill up.

The reason is money. Premium cabins have become the airlines’ most valuable real estate, throwing off outsized revenue from a small share of seats. That has pushed carriers to keep expanding the front of the plane while packing more travelers into the back. The shift didn’t happen overnight. Delta rewrote the industry’s playbook in the early 2010s, using sophisticated pricing tools to sell first-class seats to coach passengers willing to pay a bit more, rather than simply handing them out as free upgrades, said Henry Harteveldt, president of travel advisory firm Atmosphere Research Group.

Not every airline chief accepts the idea that the industry has abandoned regular flyers. United Airlines CEO Scott Kirby pushed back on the notion that carriers chase only big spenders, saying the company is “investing nose to tail for all customers.” He pointed to upgrades such as seatback entertainment and a better mobile app as improvements that reach every traveler, not just those up front.

Still, the direction is clear, and it reshapes what flying costs for families and budget travelers. As airlines devote more space and investment to premium seats, the cheapest fares increasingly arrive stripped of what used to be standard — seat selection, carry-on baggage, the ability to change or refund a ticket — through basic economy fares. The gap between a comfortable trip and a bare-bones one has widened dramatically, and closing it increasingly means paying more.

For the New York region, the trend hits close to home. Newark Liberty International Airport, a major United hub, along with JFK and LaGuardia, funnels millions of travelers into exactly this two-tier system every year. The business traveler who can expense a lounge pass and a lie-flat seat glides through; the family watching every dollar often pays extra just to sit together or bring a roller bag onboard.

The bigger question is where premiumization stops. Airlines have discovered that affluent travelers are willing to pay substantially more for comfort, convenience and exclusivity, and that finding is steadily reshaping aircraft cabins themselves. More premium suites, larger business-class cabins and expanded lounges are becoming the industry’s growth strategy, while economy passengers are asked to pay separately for services that were once included in the ticket price.

For most travelers, the skies remain open. They simply cost more to navigate comfortably than they did just a few years ago.

JBizNews Desk | Chicago

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

AeroVironment Inc. reported record financial results and announced a major new U.S. Army contract in updates released during the first week of July, sending shares sharply higher and reinforcing investor enthusiasm for companies developing next-generation military technologies. The drone manufacturer has emerged as one of Wall Street’s strongest-performing defense stocks as governments worldwide increase spending on unmanned aircraft, counter-drone systems and advanced battlefield technology.

The company’s latest earnings report highlighted one of the strongest years in its history.

For its fiscal fourth quarter, AeroVironment reported revenue of $641.6 million, an increase of more than 130% compared with the same period a year earlier and well above Wall Street expectations. Adjusted earnings also exceeded analyst forecasts, while full-year revenue approached $2 billion, another company record.

Investors were equally encouraged by AeroVironment’s growing backlog of future business.

The company ended the fiscal year with approximately $1.2 billion in funded backlog while booking roughly $2.7 billion in new orders. That strong pipeline reflects increasing demand from governments seeking modern battlefield technologies following years of rising geopolitical tensions and evolving military strategies.

Adding to investor optimism, the U.S. Army awarded AeroVironment a $500 million contract to supply advanced counter-drone systems through 2029. The award further strengthens the company’s position as one of the Pentagon’s leading suppliers of unmanned and autonomous defense technologies.

Chief Executive Officer Wahid Nawabi described the current fiscal year as transformational for the company, pointing to recent acquisitions that significantly expanded AeroVironment’s technology portfolio. Those acquisitions broaden the company’s capabilities beyond its well-known Switchblade loitering munitions into advanced defense electronics, autonomous systems, directed energy and next-generation aerospace technologies.

While AeroVironment initially built its reputation through small tactical drones used by military forces around the world, management believes some of its fastest future growth may come from defending against drones rather than launching them.

Counter-drone technology has become one of the defense industry’s fastest-growing markets as militaries increasingly seek systems capable of detecting, tracking and neutralizing unmanned aircraft. Governments worldwide continue investing billions of dollars in these capabilities following lessons learned from recent conflicts where inexpensive drones have demonstrated outsized battlefield impact.

Wall Street has taken notice.

Shares of AeroVironment have surged following the earnings release, making the company one of the strongest performers in the aerospace and defense sector. Investors increasingly view companies specializing in drones, artificial intelligence, autonomous systems and electronic warfare as beneficiaries of long-term defense modernization programs.

The broader defense industry has experienced similar momentum.

Growing military budgets across the United States, Europe and Asia continue supporting demand for advanced defense technologies. Rather than focusing solely on traditional military equipment such as tanks and fighter aircraft, governments are allocating increasing resources toward software, autonomous systems, surveillance platforms and precision technologies.

For investors, AeroVironment represents a broader shift occurring throughout the defense sector.

Modern warfare increasingly depends on unmanned systems, artificial intelligence, electronic warfare and networked battlefield communications. Companies supplying those technologies are attracting higher valuations as investors anticipate years of sustained government spending.

The implications extend well beyond one company.

Suppliers throughout the defense technology ecosystem—including semiconductor manufacturers, software developers, communications companies and advanced electronics firms—stand to benefit as military modernization accelerates globally. Defense procurement is becoming increasingly technology-driven, creating opportunities for companies operating far beyond traditional aerospace manufacturing.

Despite the company’s strong performance, management cautioned that government contracting remains dependent on budget approvals and procurement timing. Delays in congressional appropriations or shifts in defense priorities could affect the pace of future contract awards.

Still, AeroVironment’s latest results reinforce a larger trend reshaping both the defense industry and financial markets. Investors are increasingly rewarding companies developing the technologies expected to define future conflicts, positioning drone manufacturers and defense technology firms among the sector’s fastest-growing businesses.

JBizNews Desk | Arlington, Va.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The global pharmaceutical industry is experiencing one of its busiest acquisition periods in years, with drug manufacturers announcing roughly $134 billion in mergers and acquisitions during the first half of 2026, according to PitchBook and other industry trackers. The wave of deals has already surpassed the value of all pharmaceutical acquisitions completed during 2025 and reflects an industry racing to replace future revenue before some of its biggest blockbuster medicines lose patent protection.

The acquisition surge has produced more than 30 billion-dollar transactions during the first six months of the year, making 2026 one of the strongest years for pharmaceutical dealmaking in recent memory.

Driving the activity is what industry executives call the “patent cliff.”

Over the next several years, patents protecting many of the world’s highest-selling medicines will expire, allowing lower-cost generic drugs and biosimilars to enter the market. Once exclusivity ends, pharmaceutical companies often see billions of dollars in annual revenue disappear as competition quickly drives prices lower.

Rather than relying solely on internal research, many companies are choosing to purchase promising biotechnology firms already developing the next generation of treatments.

One of the year’s largest transactions involves Sun Pharmaceutical Industries, which agreed to acquire Organon, headquartered in Jersey City, New Jersey, in an approximately $11.75 billion deal. The acquisition strengthens Sun Pharma’s global presence while adding an established portfolio of women’s health and specialty medicines.

The New Jersey connection highlights the state’s continued importance as one of the world’s leading pharmaceutical hubs.

Often called the “Medicine Chest of the World,” New Jersey remains home to numerous major pharmaceutical companies, biotechnology firms and research facilities. Large transactions involving New Jersey-based companies continue reinforcing the state’s central role in global life sciences.

Several other major acquisitions have reshaped the industry this year.

AbbVie announced a multibillion-dollar acquisition of Apogee Therapeutics, expanding its immunology pipeline as it prepares for future competition facing some of its largest products. GSK, Merck and Eli Lilly have also completed or announced significant acquisitions designed to strengthen future drug portfolios across cancer treatments, immunology, obesity therapies and neurological diseases.

The obesity market has become one of the industry’s hottest areas.

Growing demand for GLP-1 weight-loss medications has triggered intense competition among pharmaceutical companies seeking new treatments capable of competing in what analysts expect to become one of healthcare’s largest markets. More than one hundred experimental obesity medicines remain under development worldwide, making biotechnology companies attractive acquisition targets.

Cancer treatments continue attracting significant investment as well.

Many recent acquisitions involve companies developing next-generation oncology drugs, targeted therapies and precision medicine technologies that pharmaceutical giants hope will replace revenue from older medicines approaching patent expiration.

For patients, the acquisition wave carries both opportunities and concerns.

Large pharmaceutical companies often possess the financial resources, manufacturing capacity and global distribution networks necessary to bring promising medicines through final clinical trials and regulatory approval. Acquisitions can therefore accelerate commercialization of new therapies that smaller biotechnology firms might struggle to develop independently.

At the same time, healthcare economists caution that continued industry consolidation could reduce competition in some therapeutic areas and potentially influence long-term drug pricing if fewer companies control larger portions of the market.

The broader business implications are equally significant.

Biotechnology startups continue attracting billions of dollars in venture capital investment because successful innovation increasingly leads to acquisition by larger pharmaceutical manufacturers. That cycle continues fueling research into treatments for cancer, Alzheimer’s disease, autoimmune disorders and other major health conditions.

Industry analysts expect acquisition activity to remain strong throughout the remainder of 2026 as pharmaceutical companies continue preparing for upcoming patent expirations. With substantial cash reserves still available across many major drug manufacturers, observers believe additional multibillion-dollar transactions remain likely before year-end.

For consumers, today’s corporate acquisitions may ultimately determine tomorrow’s medicines. Many of the treatments expected to reach pharmacies later this decade are changing hands today, making this historic buying spree one of the pharmaceutical industry’s most consequential periods in years.

JBizNews Desk | Jersey City, N.J.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

According to a recent announcement from Canada’s Department of Finance, a group of allied governments is moving ahead with plans to establish the Defence, Security and Resilience Bank (DSRB), a multilateral financial institution designed to help member nations finance military modernization and defense projects. The proposed bank, modeled after the World Bank, would provide long-term financing for weapons procurement, military infrastructure and defense manufacturing while helping participating countries borrow at lower costs. Canada has agreed to host the institution’s headquarters.

The proposal comes as defense spending across the Western alliance accelerates at the fastest pace in decades. At its recent summit, NATO members committed to increasing defense expenditures toward 5% of gross domestic product over the coming years, placing significant pressure on government budgets already strained by higher borrowing costs and slowing economic growth.

The International Monetary Fund, in its April World Economic Outlook, warned that the renewed global military buildup could significantly increase public debt while forcing governments to make difficult fiscal choices. The IMF found that major defense expansions historically add roughly 14 percentage points to national debt-to-GDP ratios within three years while placing pressure on spending for healthcare, education and other domestic priorities.

Supporters argue the DSRB offers a practical solution. Like other multilateral development banks, member governments would contribute capital, allowing the institution to secure top-tier credit ratings and raise funds in global debt markets at favorable interest rates. The bank would then lend those proceeds to participating nations over extended periods, making expensive defense investments more affordable while helping smooth annual budget pressures.

Backers also hope the institution will attract significant private-sector investment. By providing guarantees and co-financing arrangements, the DSRB could encourage commercial banks and institutional investors to participate in defense projects that have traditionally relied almost entirely on government funding. Officials have discussed an initial lending capacity approaching $135 billion, with additional private capital expected to expand the bank’s overall financing power.

The proposal reflects a broader shift in how governments view defense spending. Rather than treating military investment solely as a security expense, policymakers increasingly describe it as an industrial policy capable of supporting manufacturing, technology development and skilled employment. Defense companies, aerospace manufacturers, electronics suppliers and advanced materials producers all stand to benefit from a more predictable pipeline of long-term financing.

One proposal under discussion would use frozen Russian central-bank assets held in Europe as part of the bank’s capitalization, though that idea remains politically sensitive and has not been adopted. Supporters argue such an approach would reduce the financial burden on taxpayers while helping fund Ukraine’s long-term security and allied defense capabilities.

For financial markets, the bank could create an entirely new category of government-backed defense financing, opening opportunities for institutional investors while providing manufacturers with greater certainty as they expand production capacity. Large defense contractors, suppliers and commercial lenders could all benefit if governments begin financing procurement through a permanent multilateral institution rather than relying exclusively on annual appropriations.

Questions remain over governance, membership, lending criteria and how much private capital will ultimately participate. Even so, the direction is becoming increasingly clear. As geopolitical tensions reshape national priorities, allied governments are not only increasing military spending — they are building the financial infrastructure needed to sustain it for decades to come.

JBizNews Desk | Ottawa

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

José Batista Sobrinho S.A., the world’s largest meat company, has formally stepped back from its promise to reach net-zero greenhouse gas emissions by 2040, in a filing with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission that drew wide attention this week. The disclosure marks the clearest retreat yet from a climate commitment the Brazilian giant once promoted as a first for the global meat industry.

José Batista Sobrinho S.A. first announced the goal in March 2021, and global chief executive Gilberto Tomazoni reinforced it at a New York Times event in September 2023, saying the company aimed for net zero by 2040 rather than 2050 because it recognized the urgency. In the recent filing, the company frames that ambition far more cautiously, acknowledging that achievement of a goal of this magnitude was never under the control of any one company and noting the legal exposure the pledge has created.

That exposure is real. In February 2024, New York Attorney General Letitia James sued José Batista Sobrinho S.A., alleging it violated state consumer-protection laws with “sweeping representations” about a net-zero goal the state said the company had no actual plan to achieve. The two sides settled in late 2025, with the company agreeing to present “net zero by 2040” as a goal rather than a pledge or commitment, disclose specific actions and conduct annual internal reviews for three years, funded by a $1.1 million settlement supporting climate-smart agriculture in New York.

The company’s claims had already begun to shift. In January 2025, global chief sustainability officer Jason Weller told Reuters the 2040 target was an “aspiration” and “was never a promise that José Batista Sobrinho S.A. was going to make this happen,” citing the company’s limited control over farms and customers. The company later said its climate ambitions had not changed.

The challenge is rooted in the company’s supply chain. By José Batista Sobrinho S.A.’s own reporting, Scope 3 emissions — chiefly from suppliers — account for 97% of its total greenhouse gas footprint, while its estimated methane emissions exceed those of oil giants ExxonMobil and Shell. In March 2024, the Science Based Targets initiative, widely regarded as the leading benchmark for corporate climate goals, removed the company from its register after it failed to submit a validated emissions-reduction plan.

The retreat comes at a sensitive moment for the company’s finances. José Batista Sobrinho S.A. listed on the New York Stock Exchange in 2025, completing a comeback after paying billions of dollars in fines to Brazilian and U.S. authorities to settle bribery and corruption cases. The listing expanded the company’s access to American capital markets as it continued investing in new facilities, including operations in Nigeria and expanded U.S. beef production.

Environmental groups quickly criticized the latest disclosure, arguing they had warned for years that the company was using the net-zero commitment to improve its public image while continuing business largely unchanged. They point to reported links to more than 118,000 hectares of Amazon deforestation between 2022 and 2024. The company says it continues investing in supply-chain initiatives, including cattle-tracking systems in the Brazilian state of Pará and programs worth tens of millions of dollars to help farmers reduce emissions.

For the broader food industry, the retreat reflects a wider reassessment of ambitious climate commitments. José Batista Sobrinho S.A. was the first major global meatpacker to announce a 2040 net-zero target, but a growing number of companies across industries are revising environmental goals that proved more difficult to achieve than initially expected. At the same time, regulators in states including New York and California are increasingly requiring companies to support climate-related marketing claims with measurable plans and documented progress.

For shoppers and suppliers, the takeaway is straightforward. Environmental claims attached to beef, chicken and pork products — including brands such as Swift and Pilgrim’s — face growing scrutiny from regulators and investors alike, making documented progress increasingly important alongside public commitments.

JBizNews Desk | São Paulo

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu told a Sunday cabinet meeting on July 5 that the proposed $4.2 billion sale of Israeli shipping company Zim Integrated Shipping Services to Germany’s Hapag-Lloyd is “not on the agenda at all,” throwing the deal into serious doubt and erasing much of the premium built into Zim’s stock. Defense Minister Israel Katz backed him, telling ministers the government still holds a “golden share” in Zim and will use its legal authority to step in if national security requires it.

The turning point came when Deputy Minister Almog Cohen raised the sale during the meeting and warned that handing control to a buyer with Gulf ownership would be a disaster. He said Israel would be giving away the key to its maritime gateway to a company under Qatari and Saudi influence. Days earlier, the Defense Ministry had formally concluded that the deal, in its current form, does not adequately protect Israel’s security interests — a position Katz adopted and disclosed to the media.

Investors reacted fast. Zim shares fell about 6.8% on Monday on the New York Stock Exchange, closing near $23.70 and pushing the company’s market value below $3 billion — well under the $4.2 billion the buyers agreed to pay. The stock now trades at a steep discount to the $35-per-share cash offer, a sign the market sees a real chance the sale never closes.

The deal was signed in February. Under its structure, Hapag-Lloyd would take over most of Zim’s international routes, including lanes between East Asia and the Americas, while Israeli private equity fund FIMI Opportunity Funds, led by Ishay Davidi, would carve out the Israeli operations into a separate company called New Zim. That smaller carrier — roughly a dozen vessels — was designed to satisfy the state’s golden-share rules, which require Zim to keep a fleet of Israeli-owned ships and maintain freight service to and from Israel.

Officials say that is exactly the problem. With few commercial land crossings and a single major international airport, Israel depends on the sea for about 90% of its imports. Critics argue that a slimmed-down New Zim, with limited reach and capacity, could not carry that load during a war or blockade, especially if foreign shipping lines stay away. A Knesset committee earlier warned that Zim vessels played a direct role during the recent conflict, moving ammunition, food and medicine when it mattered most.

The ownership of Hapag-Lloyd has drawn the sharpest objections. Among its largest shareholders are Qatar Holding, an arm of Qatar’s sovereign wealth fund with a 12.3% stake, and Saudi Arabia’s Public Investment Fund, which holds about 10.2%. The Ministry of the Economy wrote that relying on a shipping company whose major owners include states hostile to Israel during a national emergency is completely detached from strategic reality. The Defense Ministry also flagged Chile’s government, a shareholder that has grown increasingly critical of Israel, as an added concern.

Katz confirmed the government retains a golden share that lets it intervene when national security is at stake. The February agreement itself says the transaction cannot close without sign-off from Israeli regulators and the state under that special share, alongside approvals from the Israel Companies Authority and the Israel Competition Authority. That gives the government a hard stop, not merely a voice.

Opposition has been building for months. Before Netanyahu and Katz weighed in, the Economy, Agriculture and Transportation ministries, together with Israel’s Shipping and Ports Authority, had already moved to block the sale. Zim’s workers’ union and the naval officers’ union oppose it as well. Union chairman Oren Caspi called Zim the world’s ninth-largest shipping line, controlling about 40% of Israel’s import and export market, and said it is not an ordinary commercial company.

Hapag-Lloyd is not backing down. A spokesperson said the company still expects to complete the acquisition and is pursuing approvals from regulators and the government, adding that it believes it will receive them all. The German carrier has hired former IDF Chief of Staff Gabi Ashkenazi to help move the bid forward. For Hapag-Lloyd, losing Zim would be a major setback to its growth strategy.

Some parties close to the deal believe the review is being slowed on purpose to push any final decision past Israel’s November elections, leaving it to a future government. FIMI’s Davidi, who has clashed with Netanyahu politically, argues that New Zim would launch debt-free with $700 million in equity and meet every state requirement. For now, the sale sits stalled at the top of Israel’s government, and the market is pricing in the doubt.

JBizNews Desk| Jerusalem © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Hotter, drier weather could nearly double household water bills in some American cities by midcentury, according to a Stanford-led study published July 8 in Nature Sustainability. The research, led by Jennifer Skerker, a doctoral student in civil and environmental engineering, is the first to model how climate change, the cost of new infrastructure and household demand combine to push an already growing affordability problem toward a breaking point.

The team built its model around Santa Cruz, California, a small coastal city that draws almost entirely on local surface water and a single reservoir with barely a year of storage. That makes it unusually exposed to drought and a useful test case, the authors said, because the city has already used up cheaper conservation options such as restricting irrigation and switching to water-efficient appliances.

The numbers are stark. Under a dry-climate scenario, median monthly water bills for the poorest residents could rise from about $60 to $111 in today’s dollars. Paying for the needed infrastructure could push the share of local households above the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) affordability threshold from 19% to 35%. More than 5% of households could end up spending as much as a third of their income on water, forcing hard trade-offs against food, health care and other basics.

“Climate change stresses water supplies and forces utilities to build expensive new infrastructure to maintain reliability,” Skerker said. That construction — desalination plants, water-reuse systems, new pipelines — is costly, and utilities pass the expense on to ratepayers.

How a city pays for resilience matters as much as the climate itself. The study found that a build-early approach adding large desalination capacity delivered reliable supply but at a steep cost to affordability, while a wait-and-see approach kept bills lower but provided reliable water in only six of ten years on average.

“Under today’s financing and regulatory models, climate adaptation and water affordability are on a collision course,” said senior author Sarah Fletcher, an assistant professor at the Stanford Woods Institute for the Environment.

The warning sits atop a longer trend. The average cost of tap water in the United States has risen three times faster than inflation over the past two decades, driven largely by aging pipes and deferred maintenance. Water has long been one of the cheapest lines on a household budget, in part because most communities draw from nearby sources and are shielded from the global forces that move gas and food prices.

That is changing. When Hurricane Helene tore through western North Carolina in 2024, it caused nearly $3.7 billion in damage to the region’s water systems, and in Asheville it took 53 days to restore drinkable tap water to the whole city. In Corpus Christi, Texas, four years of drought pushed the city to approve nearly half a billion dollars for new water sources, and the city manager has said residents will likely see rates double over the next few years.

The researchers said the framework can be applied to other exposed cities, naming Los Angeles, San Diego, San Francisco, and abroad Cape Town and Melbourne. Even places that look secure could grow vulnerable as utilities raise rates.

The finding fits a wider pattern. A separate analysis from MIT Sloan economists Christopher Knittel and Catherine Wolfram, with UCLA’s Kimberly Clausing, estimated that climate change is already adding hundreds of dollars a year to household budgets — more than $1,000 in some regions — through insurance premiums, utility bills and disaster losses, including an average $360 increase in home insurance premiums between 1990 and 2023.

For families, the throughline is simple. The cost of a warming climate is not only wildfires and floods on the news; it turns up on the monthly water, power and insurance bills households pay whether or not they follow the science.

JBizNews Desk | Stanford, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The first deadlines set by President Donald Trump’s executive order on artificial intelligence have now arrived, putting hard dates on a policy the administration spent months shaping. The order, titled “Promoting Advanced Artificial Intelligence Innovation and Security” and signed at the White House on June 2, gave federal agencies 30 days to begin strengthening government cybersecurity systems, with a broader set of actions due by August 1.

The order was notable because the White House substantially revised an earlier draft before it was signed. Trump had postponed a tougher version, telling reporters he did not want regulations that could slow American leadership in artificial intelligence. “We’re leading China, we’re leading everybody, and I don’t want to do anything that’s going to get in the way of that lead,” he said, adding that he did not want the policy to become a barrier to innovation. The final version shortened a proposed government review period for advanced AI models from 90 days to 30 and relies primarily on voluntary industry cooperation instead of mandatory requirements.

The administration’s concern centers on cybersecurity risks posed by increasingly powerful artificial intelligence systems. Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent and then-Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell met with major Wall Street executives earlier this year to discuss emerging AI-related cyber threats and the potential risks advanced models could pose to financial institutions and critical infrastructure.

The executive order directs the Department of War and the Committee on National Security Systems to prioritize strengthening cybersecurity protections across their networks within roughly 30 days. It also instructs the Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency (CISA) to accelerate protections for civilian federal systems while expanding cybersecurity assistance to state and local governments and operators of critical infrastructure, including community banks, rural hospitals and local utilities.

The next major milestone arrives on August 1. By then, the Treasury Department, the National Security Agency (NSA) and CISA are directed to establish a classified process for determining when an artificial intelligence system qualifies as a “covered frontier model.” The framework also calls for a voluntary process allowing developers to provide the federal government with up to 30 days of early access before releasing certain advanced AI models. The order specifically states that it does not create a mandatory licensing or government pre-approval requirement.

The decision to place the Treasury Department in a leading role reflects the administration’s view that cybersecurity risks now extend well beyond the technology sector into banking, financial markets and the broader economy. The order also instructs the Attorney General to prioritize prosecution of individuals who use artificial intelligence to illegally access, disrupt or damage computer systems under existing federal criminal laws.

The policy marks a significant shift from the administration’s earlier approach. Upon returning to office, Trump rescinded a Biden-era executive order that required leading AI developers to share certain safety testing information with the federal government. The administration also renamed the federal AI Safety Institute, removing the word “Safety” from its title. Some lawmakers have noted that portions of the new executive order revive concepts that had previously been rejected.

Technology industry groups have responded cautiously but positively. Victoria Espinel, president and chief executive officer of the Business Software Alliance, praised the administration for adopting a voluntary, phased approach that encourages collaboration among government agencies, developers and cybersecurity experts. Analysts say that although participation remains voluntary, many companies developing advanced AI systems may feel practical pressure to cooperate because of national security concerns and growing public expectations.

For businesses outside the technology sector, the order carries practical implications. Community banks, hospitals, utilities and other critical infrastructure operators are specifically identified as beneficiaries of expanded federal cybersecurity assistance, while companies developing or deploying advanced AI systems will be watching closely as the August 1 framework begins taking shape.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Costco Wholesale Corporation on Wednesday reported net sales of $29.24 billion for the retail month of June, the five weeks ended July 5, an increase of 10.6 percent from $26.44 billion a year earlier, according to the warehouse retailer’s monthly sales release issued from its Issaquah, Washington headquarters.

The company said comparable sales, a measure that strips out newly opened warehouses, rose 8.8 percent across the business in June. Canada posted growth of 3.7 percent and other international markets rose 4.7 percent. Digitally enabled comparable sales, which cover online orders and delivery, jumped 20.9 percent, extending a long run of double-digit gains in Costco’s e-commerce channel.

A large share of June’s headline growth came from the gas pump rather than the sales floor. Costco said higher fuel prices added roughly 2.5 percentage points to overall comparable sales, with average worldwide selling prices per gallon up about 22 percent from a year earlier. Fuel prices have stayed elevated through the spring and early summer. Stripping out both gasoline and swings in foreign exchange rates, comparable sales still rose, but at a more modest pace, showing that steady member traffic and everyday grocery demand carried the underlying business even without the fuel boost.

For the first 44 weeks of its fiscal year, Costco reported net sales of $250.43 billion, up 10.1 percent from the same stretch last year. Comparable sales for that period rose 8.3 percent, with digitally enabled sales again climbing more than 20 percent. The figures point to a retailer still pulling shoppers through its doors at a time when many chains are fighting to hold traffic against cautious household budgets.

Costco’s model continues to lean on membership fees and repeat visits rather than one-time promotions. The company operates 933 warehouses worldwide as of the June report, including 641 in the United States and Puerto Rico, 115 in Canada and 43 in Mexico, along with locations across Europe, Asia and Oceania. That store base, paired with a renewal-driven membership base, gives the chain a recurring revenue stream that smooths over month-to-month swings in discretionary spending.

Separately, Costco’s board declared a quarterly cash dividend of $1.47 per share on Tuesday. The dividend is payable Aug. 7 to shareholders of record as of the close of business on July 24. The payout signals continued confidence in the company’s cash generation and hands a direct return to shareholders on top of the sales momentum.

Despite the double-digit sales gain, the market reaction was muted, with shares trading in a narrow range after the release rather than rallying on the top-line number. Part of the caution reflects how much of June’s growth was tied to fuel prices, a factor outside the company’s control that can reverse quickly if pump prices fall. Investors tend to focus on the fuel- and currency-adjusted figure as a cleaner read on how the core warehouse business is performing, and that adjusted number, while solid, was less dramatic than the 10.6 percent headline.

For everyday shoppers, the report underscores a pattern that has held for much of the past year. Households have kept filling carts at warehouse clubs, leaning on bulk buying and Costco’s private-label Kirkland Signature brand to stretch grocery budgets as prices for many staples remain higher than they were before the recent stretch of inflation. Fresh foods and core grocery categories have continued to grow, while the company’s ancillary businesses, including gas stations, pharmacies and optical departments, add reasons for members to keep returning.

The June update follows a fiscal second and third quarter in which Costco beat Wall Street expectations on both profit and comparable sales, helped by higher membership fee revenue and steady demand for both essentials and higher-margin discretionary goods. The company has also been pursuing refunds tied to tariffs it paid on imported merchandise, a cost pressure that has weighed on retailers importing goods from abroad.

The next test comes with Costco’s fiscal fourth-quarter and full-year results later this summer, when the company will report full profit figures alongside sales. For now, the June numbers show a retailer holding its ground: growing faster than much of the sector, keeping members loyal and returning cash to shareholders, even as a chunk of the reported growth rests on fuel prices that could ease in the months ahead.

JBizNews Desk | Issaquah, Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

PepsiCo will open the books on its spring quarter Thursday, July 9, and the results could provide one of the clearest signals yet on whether Americans are still willing to pay higher prices for snacks and soft drinks or are finally beginning to push back. The company confirmed it will release second-quarter results before the market opens, with Chief Executive Ramon Laguarta and Chief Financial Officer Steve Schmitt discussing the results with analysts later that morning. The quarter covers the period ending June 13.

Wall Street expects another profitable quarter. Analysts surveyed by Zacks Investment Research forecast earnings of about $2.19 per share on revenue of roughly $23.9 billion, representing approximately 5% sales growth from a year earlier. Other analyst estimates are similar, with consensus earnings near $2.21 per share. PepsiCo earned $2.12 per share during the same quarter last year.

While investors will focus on whether the company meets expectations, the more important question is how PepsiCo achieved those results. Analysts want to know whether sales growth is being driven by customers buying more products or by the company continuing to charge higher prices. That distinction has become increasingly important as consumers face years of elevated grocery costs.

For several quarters, major food and beverage companies have relied heavily on price increases to boost revenue. But there are signs shoppers may finally be reaching their limits. Families are increasingly switching to private-label products, buying fewer discretionary items, or waiting for promotions before making purchases. PepsiCo’s results could help determine whether that trend is accelerating.

Particular attention will be paid to Frito-Lay North America, home to brands including Lay’s, Doritos, and Cheetos. The division has faced growing concerns that demand for snack foods is softening as consumers become more price-conscious. Some analysts have trimmed their price targets for PepsiCo ahead of earnings, and the company’s shares have hovered around $144, a level many technical analysts view as an important support point.

PepsiCo has responded by expanding into faster-growing product categories. The company recently introduced Pepsi Prebiotic, a gut-health soft drink, while also rolling out Gatorade Lower Sugar and additional functional beverage offerings aimed at health-conscious consumers. Investors will be looking for signs these newer products are attracting meaningful customer demand rather than simply adding more options to store shelves.

Costs also remain a key issue. Like much of the food industry, PepsiCo continues to face higher expenses for ingredients, packaging, transportation and tariffs affecting parts of its supply chain. Those higher costs put pressure on profit margins unless the company can successfully pass them on to consumers through additional price increases. Thursday’s report should provide a clearer picture of whether PepsiCo still has that pricing power.

The company enters earnings on relatively solid footing. During the first quarter, PepsiCo reported revenue of $19.4 billion, up 8.5%, while earnings rose to $1.70 per share. Management also reaffirmed its full-year outlook, calling for 2% to 4% organic revenue growth. Investors will be listening closely to see whether executives express greater confidence in reaching the upper end of that range as the second half of the year begins.

PepsiCo also benefits from its broad international operations, where sales have generally outpaced the more mature and highly competitive U.S. market. Continued strength overseas could help offset slower domestic growth if American consumers become more cautious.

For consumers, PepsiCo’s earnings matter far beyond the stock market. The company’s brands—including Pepsi, Mountain Dew, Gatorade, Lay’s, Doritos, Tostitos, and Quaker—are found in millions of American households every day. As one of the world’s largest food and beverage companies, its results often provide an early indication of broader trends across grocery stores nationwide.

If PepsiCo reports that consumers are buying fewer products or increasingly trading down to lower-cost alternatives, it would suggest inflation and higher living costs continue to weigh on household budgets. If shoppers continue purchasing despite higher prices, it could indicate consumers remain more resilient than many economists expected.

Thursday’s earnings also mark the unofficial start of another busy corporate earnings season, with investors looking for clues about the overall health of the American consumer. More than the quarterly numbers themselves, management’s outlook for pricing, demand and the remainder of 2026 will likely determine how investors react.

For shoppers, the message is straightforward: listen closely to what PepsiCo says about consumer behavior. As one of the nation’s largest food companies, its outlook often offers an early glimpse into where grocery prices—and consumer spending—may be headed next.

This article is for informational purposes only and should not be considered investment advice. Analyst estimates are subject to change, and actual results may differ.

JBizNews Desk | Purchase, New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

BOSTON, July 8Vertex Pharmaceuticals announced Wednesday that it has agreed to acquire Crinetics Pharmaceuticals for approximately $10 billion, marking the largest acquisition in Vertex’s history as the biotechnology giant expands beyond its leadership in cystic fibrosis into treatments for rare endocrine diseases. The transaction was announced jointly by both companies and is expected to close during the third quarter of 2026, subject to shareholder and regulatory approvals.

Under the agreement, Vertex will pay $85.00 per share in cash for Crinetics, valuing the San Diego-based biotechnology company at approximately $10 billion, or about $8.8 billion net of Crinetics’ cash on hand. The offer represents a premium of more than 100% over Crinetics’ recent closing price, sending the company’s shares sharply higher as investors welcomed the acquisition.

The purchase significantly broadens Vertex’s pipeline beyond its dominant cystic fibrosis franchise, which has generated billions of dollars in annual revenue but has also increased investor pressure on the company to diversify future growth. The acquisition immediately gives Vertex access to a newly approved commercial product while adding several late-stage drug candidates targeting rare hormonal disorders.

Among the biggest attractions is PALSONIFY, Crinetics’ once-daily oral treatment for adults with acromegaly, a rare disorder caused by excessive growth hormone production. The therapy received approval from the U.S. Food and Drug Administration in 2025 and has also secured regulatory approval in Europe.

Vertex also gains control of atumelnant, an experimental therapy currently in late-stage clinical development for congenital adrenal hyperplasia, with additional potential applications for Cushing’s syndrome. Company executives described the treatment’s clinical results as among the most promising they have seen, believing it could become a major long-term growth driver.

Executives estimate the combined commercial opportunity for the newly acquired portfolio could eventually exceed $5 billion in annual revenue, strengthening Vertex’s position as one of the biotechnology industry’s fastest-growing large-cap companies.

To finance the acquisition, Vertex will use a combination of existing cash and new debt, supported by $4.5 billion in committed bridge financing arranged by Bank of America and Morgan Stanley. Morgan Stanley and Lazard served as financial advisers to Vertex, while Kirkland & Ellis acted as legal counsel.

The acquisition continues an active year for pharmaceutical mergers as large drugmakers seek to replenish future product pipelines ahead of looming patent expirations on blockbuster medicines. Industry leaders have increasingly turned to acquisitions rather than internal development to accelerate growth, particularly in specialty and rare-disease markets where pricing power and long-term demand remain strong.

For patients, the transaction could accelerate global access to innovative therapies as Vertex brings its worldwide commercial infrastructure and financial resources to Crinetics’ growing portfolio. For investors, the deal signals that major biotechnology companies remain willing to pay substantial premiums for high-quality late-stage assets despite broader market volatility and geopolitical uncertainty.

The agreement also reinforces confidence across the biotechnology sector, demonstrating that strategic acquisitions remain a priority even as rising interest rates, inflation concerns and global market turbulence continue to weigh on corporate dealmaking. If approved, the acquisition will become one of the largest healthcare transactions completed this year and a defining milestone in Vertex’s continued evolution into a broader rare-disease powerhouse.

JBizNews Desk | Boston

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Amazon returned to the bond market on Tuesday, filing to raise at least $25 billion to help finance the massive data centers, specialized chips and cloud infrastructure driving its artificial intelligence expansion, marking one of the largest corporate debt offerings of the year.

According to a regulatory filing, the online retail and cloud-computing giant launched an eight-part offering of floating- and fixed-rate notes with maturities ranging from three to 40 years. Amazon said the proceeds will be used for general corporate purposes, including future capital investments and the possible repayment of existing debt.

Investor demand remained strong despite the enormous size of the offering. Orders reportedly peaked at roughly $62 billion before banks tightened pricing and finalized a book of approximately $41 billion, still comfortably exceeding the amount Amazon ultimately sought to raise. Barclays, Goldman Sachs, JPMorgan Chase, and Morgan Stanley led the transaction.

The company also indicated it does not expect to return to the bond market again this year.

Tuesday’s offering is only the latest chapter in Amazon’s unprecedented borrowing campaign. Earlier this year, the company raised approximately $54 billion through bond offerings in the United States and Europe, followed by a $10 billion Canadian debt sale in June. Last November, Amazon also issued $15 billion in U.S. bonds, while its heavily oversubscribed March offering ultimately raised another $37 billion.

The reason for the borrowing spree is equally historic.

Amazon expects capital expenditures to reach approximately $200 billion this year, up dramatically from $131 billion in 2025. Much of that spending is earmarked for expanding data centers, purchasing advanced AI chips, upgrading networking equipment and building the infrastructure required to support growing demand for generative artificial intelligence.

Chief Executive Andy Jassy has repeatedly defended the investment strategy, describing artificial intelligence as a “once-in-a-lifetime opportunity” capable of reshaping nearly every aspect of Amazon’s business.

The spending surge extends well beyond Amazon.

Technology giants including Microsoft, Alphabet, Meta, Oracle, and Nvidia are collectively expected to spend more than $700 billion this year on AI infrastructure, creating one of the largest corporate investment cycles in modern history.

For everyday Americans, those massive debt offerings have a direct connection to retirement savings.

Investment-grade corporate bonds issued by companies like Amazon are widely held by pension funds, insurance companies, mutual funds and many of the bond funds included in 401(k) retirement plans. In effect, millions of retirement savers are helping finance the AI boom while sharing in both its potential rewards and its long-term risks.

Some investors, however, are beginning to question how quickly these enormous investments will generate meaningful returns.

Analysts estimate the largest cloud providers could collectively spend roughly $725 billion on AI-related infrastructure this year alone. While demand for artificial intelligence continues to grow rapidly, Wall Street has increasingly focused on when these investments will begin producing sufficient revenue to justify their extraordinary cost.

The somewhat softer demand for Tuesday’s offering, compared with Amazon’s heavily oversubscribed debt sales earlier this year, suggests some investors may be becoming more selective even as confidence in Amazon’s financial strength remains high.

Fortunately for the company, its balance sheet remains among the strongest in corporate America.

Amazon continues to generate substantial operating cash flow and maintains high investment-grade credit ratings, allowing it to borrow at relatively attractive interest rates even while issuing tens of billions of dollars in new debt.

Still, the sheer pace of fundraising underscores how expensive the AI race has become.

Building hyperscale data centers, purchasing advanced semiconductor processors, expanding cloud capacity and securing enough electricity to power those facilities require capital on a scale rarely seen in the technology industry. Even companies generating tens of billions of dollars in annual profits are increasingly turning to debt markets to help fund the expansion.

Amazon’s second-quarter earnings later this month will provide investors with another opportunity to evaluate whether those investments are beginning to translate into stronger cloud growth and higher AI-related revenue.

For now, Tuesday’s financing sends a clear message: Amazon has no intention of slowing its artificial intelligence ambitions, and Wall Street remains willing to provide tens of billions of dollars to help finance them.

JBizNews Desk | Seattle

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Investors sharply increased their expectations Wednesday that the Federal Reserve could keep interest rates higher for longer—or even raise them again—after a spike in oil prices renewed concerns that inflation may prove more stubborn than previously expected. The shift followed the release of the Federal Reserve’s latest meeting minutes and a sharp rally in crude oil after renewed tensions involving Iran, according to market pricing and CME FedWatch data.

Markets had entered the week expecting the Fed to remain on course toward eventually lowering interest rates as inflation gradually cooled. That outlook changed after crude prices surged following renewed geopolitical tensions in the Middle East, raising fears that higher energy costs could once again spread throughout the U.S. economy.

International Brent crude settled more than 5% higher Wednesday, while West Texas Intermediate also posted strong gains. Rising oil prices typically filter into gasoline, diesel, transportation and manufacturing costs before eventually reaching consumers through higher prices on everyday goods and services.

Those concerns were quickly reflected across financial markets. Treasury yields climbed as investors adjusted expectations for future Federal Reserve policy, while traders increased the probability that policymakers could delay interest-rate cuts if inflation remains elevated. The move also pressured interest-rate-sensitive sectors of the stock market, particularly technology companies whose valuations are more vulnerable when borrowing costs rise.

Federal Reserve officials have repeatedly stressed that inflation must continue moving sustainably toward the central bank’s 2% target before monetary policy can be eased. Although inflation has moderated significantly from its post-pandemic highs, policymakers have remained cautious, warning that unexpected increases in energy prices could slow or even reverse that progress.

For businesses, higher interest rates carry broad implications. Companies face increased borrowing costs for expansion, equipment purchases and commercial real estate, while consumers typically pay more for mortgages, vehicle loans and credit-card balances. Small businesses, which often rely on financing to fund growth, are particularly sensitive to prolonged periods of elevated borrowing costs.

The latest market reaction underscores how quickly geopolitical events can reshape economic expectations. While the Federal Reserve does not directly target oil prices, sustained increases in energy costs often work their way through supply chains, making inflation more difficult to control and complicating policymakers’ decisions.

Investors will now focus on upcoming inflation reports, employment data and comments from Federal Reserve officials for additional clues about the direction of monetary policy. Should energy prices remain elevated, expectations for lower interest rates could continue to fade, increasing volatility across equity and bond markets.

For Wall Street, Wednesday’s trading served as another reminder that global geopolitical developments can rapidly alter the outlook for inflation, interest rates and corporate earnings. Until oil markets stabilize and inflation shows renewed signs of easing, investors are likely to remain highly sensitive to developments both in Washington and overseas.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The strongest U.S. summer movie season in six years is improving the outlook for AMC Entertainment Holdings Inc. and the broader theater industry, according to a new research report from Macquarie, which raised its 2026 domestic box office forecast following stronger-than-expected ticket sales during the second quarter.

Macquarie said U.S. box office revenue reached approximately $2.97 billion during the second quarter, an increase of about 11% from a year earlier and ahead of industry expectations. The improvement was driven by a series of major theatrical releases, including The Super Mario Galaxy Movie, Michael and Toy Story 5, along with several unexpected box office successes. Based on that performance, the firm increased its forecast for the 2026 North American box office to $9.8 billion, about 13% higher than last year.

For AMC Entertainment, the world’s largest movie theater operator, stronger attendance translates directly into higher ticket sales, concession revenue and improved operating performance. As more seats are filled, theaters generate additional revenue while spreading fixed operating costs across more customers, improving profitability.

The improving industry outlook aligns with guidance previously provided by AMC Chairman and Chief Executive Officer Adam Aron. In recent filings with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission, the company highlighted an upcoming release schedule that includes Spider-Man: Brand New Day, Avengers: Doomsday, Moana, Dune: Part Three and The Odyssey. AMC has said it believes the North American box office could exceed 2025 levels by between $500 million and $1 billion, supported by a stronger lineup of major theatrical releases.

Recent attendance trends have reinforced that optimism. AMC reported welcoming more than 5 million moviegoers over the Memorial Day holiday weekend, one of the strongest performances in the company’s recent history. The theater chain also pointed to an extended run of films generating opening weekends exceeding $75 million, providing consistent traffic across its locations.

The stronger business environment has also allowed AMC to improve its financial position. The company raised approximately $350 million through equity offerings this year, increasing liquidity and strengthening its balance sheet as the exhibition industry continues recovering from the disruption caused by the pandemic. While the capital raises diluted existing shareholders, the additional cash provides greater flexibility as AMC continues managing its debt obligations, with no significant maturities scheduled until 2029.

Beyond ticket sales, concession revenue continues to play an increasingly important role in theater profitability. AMC has expanded food offerings at many locations beyond traditional popcorn and soft drinks to include pizza, popcorn chicken, pretzel bites and other premium menu items. Those higher-margin food and beverage sales have become a growing source of revenue as consumers return to theaters.

Despite the improving outlook, challenges remain. The movie theater industry continues to depend on a steady flow of successful film releases, while competition from streaming platforms remains a long-term factor influencing consumer viewing habits. Industry analysts also note that theater operators continue carrying significant debt accumulated during the pandemic years.

Even so, the recent recovery represents the strongest momentum the exhibition business has experienced in several years. A healthy release schedule, stronger attendance and growing concession sales are providing renewed confidence that the theatrical movie business continues to recover as audiences return to cinemas for major blockbuster releases.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

NEW YORK, July 8 — Gold prices extended their decline Wednesday even as renewed tensions between the United States and Iran rattled global markets, signaling that investors are placing greater weight on rising interest-rate expectations than on gold’s traditional role as a safe-haven asset. Trading data from COMEX showed August gold futures settling near $4,157.40 an ounce after another volatile session.

Ordinarily, escalating geopolitical tensions send investors rushing into gold. Instead, the precious metal continued retreating from the record highs reached earlier this year, surprising many market participants. Analysts say the shift reflects changing expectations surrounding monetary policy rather than a reduced appreciation for gold as a defensive investment.

The biggest headwind has been the sharp rise in oil prices. With Brent crude climbing more than 5% Wednesday, investors increasingly believe higher energy costs could reignite inflation, forcing the Federal Reserve to keep interest rates elevated for longer or potentially consider additional tightening if price pressures worsen.

That matters because gold does not generate income. Unlike Treasury bonds or money-market investments, gold pays no interest or dividends. When interest rates rise, income-producing assets become more attractive, reducing demand for precious metals and putting downward pressure on gold prices.

The recent selloff also reflects investor positioning. Earlier this year, concerns surrounding the Middle East, persistent inflation and global economic uncertainty pushed gold to record highs as investors sought protection from market volatility. As those positions become crowded, many institutional investors have begun locking in profits, accelerating the decline.

The stronger U.S. dollar has added another layer of pressure. Since gold is priced globally in dollars, a stronger currency makes bullion more expensive for international buyers, often weighing on global demand and limiting price gains even during periods of geopolitical uncertainty.

For consumers, gold remains an important long-term store of value, but recent trading illustrates that the metal can experience significant short-term swings. Investors who purchased near this year’s highs have already seen notable paper losses, reinforcing that even traditional safe-haven assets carry meaningful market risk.

Jewelry retailers, precious-metal dealers and mining companies also watch gold prices closely. Lower bullion prices can affect retail demand, profit margins and investment activity across the broader precious-metals industry.

Looking ahead, gold’s direction will likely depend on two key factors: whether tensions in the Middle East escalate further and how the Federal Reserve responds to evolving inflation data. A significant deterioration in global security could quickly revive safe-haven buying, while persistently high interest rates may continue to weigh on the metal.

For Wall Street, Wednesday’s trading underscored a changing investment landscape. Rather than reacting solely to geopolitical headlines, investors are increasingly focusing on how those events influence inflation, interest rates and broader monetary policy—factors that now appear to be driving the direction of the gold market more than fear alone.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Midtown Manhattan high-rise where two structural columns buckled on Tuesday was deemed stable on Wednesday, and the New York City Department of Buildings said crews had shored up several floors as some neighboring evacuations were lifted, according to updates from the agency and Mayor Zohran Mamdani’s office.

The building at 235 East 42nd Street, the former global headquarters of pharmaceutical giant Pfizer Inc., is in the middle of one of the largest office-to-apartment conversion projects in New York City’s history, a plan to turn the 37-story tower into roughly 1,600 residential units. The trouble began just before 8 a.m. Tuesday, when the Fire Department of New York (FDNY) received a call about bricks falling from the structure. Construction workers on the 21st floor reported that support columns were beginning to give way, and inspectors later found two bent steel columns, multiple cracks and sagging floors. No injuries were reported, and officials said all workers were accounted for.

The incident triggered a large emergency response, mass evacuations of nearby buildings and street closures on East 42nd and East 43rd Streets between Second and Third Avenues, in a stretch of Midtown near Grand Central Terminal that draws commuters, residents and tourists. The tower sits just blocks from the Chrysler Building and United Nations headquarters.

By Tuesday evening, Department of Buildings Commissioner Ahmed Tigani said temporary shoring had begun, with jacks installed and new steel put in place to stabilize the structure. He said inspectors reached the 21st floor and were confident the emergency work was securing the building, adding that an independent third-party engineer had been brought in to review the situation. Deputy Mayor for Housing and Planning Leila Bozorg said a six-person team inspected the building floor by floor and found no additional movement, calling it an encouraging sign as crews continued working toward the 37th floor.

On Wednesday, Mayor Mamdani said at an unrelated press conference that the building had shown no further movement and that eight floors, from the 18th through the 23rd, had already been shored up by late morning. He said crews would continue working through the day to reach the roof and then reinforce floors down to the ninth. Some evacuation orders affecting neighboring buildings were lifted Wednesday morning, although four nearby buildings remained under vacate orders.

The developer, MetroLoft, said Wednesday that it had identified the problem and was working with the Department of Buildings to complete repairs, maintaining that the building was never at risk of collapse and that no debris fell to the street. Developer Nathan Berman previously described the damage as a routine construction issue and told reporters the buckling was likely caused by additional weight placed on the columns.

City inspection records point to a more serious preliminary assessment. Department of Buildings comments attached to the incident indicate an investigator believed insufficient steel reinforcement, contrary to approved construction plans, may have contributed to the columns buckling. The department ordered all construction work halted except for emergency stabilization performed under full-time supervision by licensed engineers and construction superintendents. Once emergency repairs are completed, officials said a comprehensive structural assessment will be conducted before any additional construction is permitted.

The tower had already attracted regulatory attention before Tuesday’s incident. Public records show the site accumulated roughly two dozen complaints over the past year involving falling material and alleged unsafe working conditions. The developer and property owner are also defendants in an active lawsuit filed by a construction worker who alleges he suffered serious and permanent injuries after a fall at the building in September 2025.

For New York’s commercial real estate market, the incident comes at a pivotal time. Office-to-residential conversions have become a central strategy for addressing the city’s housing shortage while repurposing aging office towers with elevated vacancy rates. The redevelopment of 235 East 42nd Street has been one of the highest-profile examples of that effort. A structural failure during construction is likely to increase scrutiny of engineering oversight, construction practices and regulatory inspections as additional conversion projects move forward.

For now, city officials remain focused on fully stabilizing the building and completing a floor-by-floor structural review. The cause remains under investigation, and the New York City Department of Buildings has indicated a full inquiry will follow once emergency stabilization work is complete. Portions of Midtown surrounding the site are expected to remain partially closed while repairs continue.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

TAMPA, Fla., July 8 — A federal judge dismissed Trump Media & Technology Group’s $3.8 billion defamation lawsuit against The Washington Post on Wednesday, ruling that the company failed to produce sufficient evidence that the newspaper acted with the “actual malice” required under U.S. defamation law. The decision came from U.S. District Judge Thomas Barber of the U.S. District Court for the Middle District of Florida, who granted summary judgment in favor of The Washington Post and said a detailed written opinion will follow.

The lawsuit stemmed from a May 13, 2023, Washington Post article titled “Trust linked to porn-friendly bank could gain a stake in Trump’s Truth Social.” The report examined financing arrangements surrounding Trump Media & Technology Group, the parent company of Truth Social, as it sought funding before completing its merger that took the company public.

The article reported that Trump Media had received an $8 million loan from ES Family Trust and stated that the company had paid a $240,000 referral fee to Entoro Securities, a brokerage associated with the transaction. As the litigation progressed, the dispute narrowed to two statements concerning whether that referral fee had in fact been paid.

Judge Barber ruled that Trump Media failed to meet the demanding legal standard established by the U.S. Supreme Court in New York Times Co. v. Sullivan (1964). Under that precedent, public figures must prove by clear and convincing evidence that allegedly defamatory statements were published with actual malice—meaning the publisher either knew the statements were false or acted with reckless disregard for whether they were true.

According to the court, the evidence presented during discovery did not support such a finding. Judge Barber concluded that The Washington Post had conducted a legitimate reporting process before publication, including interviews conducted by reporter Drew Harwell, review of available documents and information provided by former Trump Media co-founder Will Wilkerson. The court found no evidence that the newspaper knowingly published false information or recklessly ignored the truth.

Trump Media argued that a correction added to the article in May 2026 demonstrated the original reporting was inaccurate. The correction acknowledged that discovery had established Trump Media did not pay the $240,000 referral fee referenced in the article while also stating that the original reporting reflected the information available to the newspaper at the time of publication.

Judge Barber rejected the company’s argument, finding that a correction issued years later does not establish actual malice when the article was originally published. The ruling emphasized that mistakes alone are not enough to satisfy the constitutional standard governing defamation claims brought by public figures.

A spokeswoman for The Washington Post welcomed the decision, saying the newspaper was pleased with the court’s ruling and looked forward to reviewing the judge’s full written opinion once it is released. The court also canceled a pretrial conference that had been scheduled for July 13, effectively bringing the case to a close unless an appeal is filed.

The decision comes as Trump Media continues to navigate financial and operational challenges. The company, which trades on the Nasdaq under the ticker DJT, has experienced significant share-price volatility since completing its merger with Digital World Acquisition Corp. in March 2024. Although the company has reported a substantial cash position, investors have continued to focus on its ability to grow advertising revenue, expand subscriptions and develop sustainable long-term earnings.

The ruling also fits into a broader pattern of litigation involving President Donald Trump and media organizations. In recent years, multiple lawsuits filed against national news outlets have been dismissed after courts concluded the plaintiffs failed to satisfy the constitutional actual-malice standard required for public figures seeking defamation damages.

For investors, the immediate financial impact of Wednesday’s ruling is limited. The lawsuit did not represent a core operating asset, nor was any recovery reflected in analysts’ financial models. However, the dismissal closes another lengthy legal battle as management remains under pressure to demonstrate that Truth Social can translate its sizable user base and capital resources into consistent revenue growth and long-term profitability.

The judge’s forthcoming written opinion may offer additional guidance on the court’s reasoning, but for now the ruling underscores the high legal hurdle public companies and public figures face when pursuing defamation claims against major news organizations. From a business perspective, investors are likely to remain far more focused on Trump Media’s operating performance, user growth and monetization strategy than on litigation against the press.

JBizNews Desk | Tampa

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

WASHINGTON, July 8 — Oil prices surged Wednesday after renewed military action involving Iran and growing concerns over the security of the Strait of Hormuz, sending energy stocks sharply higher and renewing fears that higher fuel costs could reignite inflation. The move followed statements from the U.S. Treasury Department regarding Iranian oil sanctions and comments from President Donald Trump indicating the ceasefire between the United States and Iran had ended.

International Brent crude settled up 5.43% at $78.19 a barrel after briefly trading above $80, while West Texas Intermediate crude climbed 4.37% to $73.52. The gains marked one of the strongest single-day advances in months as traders reacted to the heightened geopolitical risk surrounding one of the world’s most important oil-producing regions.

The rally quickly spread across Wall Street. Energy producers were among the market’s strongest performers, with shares of Chevron, ExxonMobil, Diamondback Energy, Occidental Petroleum and Valero Energy all moving higher as investors anticipated stronger earnings should crude prices remain elevated.

The latest surge reflects growing concerns that disruptions to shipping through the Strait of Hormuz could tighten global supplies. Roughly one-fifth of the world’s seaborne oil moves through the narrow waterway, making any threat to tanker traffic a major concern for energy markets. Additional attacks on commercial vessels this week reinforced those fears and added a geopolitical premium back into crude prices.

For businesses, rising oil prices extend well beyond the energy sector. Higher fuel costs increase transportation expenses, raise manufacturing costs and eventually push up prices for consumer goods ranging from groceries to household products. Airlines, trucking companies, retailers and manufacturers all face additional pressure when oil remains elevated for an extended period.

The spike also complicates the outlook for the Federal Reserve. Energy prices are a key contributor to inflation, and sustained increases can delay or even reverse progress toward the central bank’s 2% inflation target. Following Wednesday’s rally, traders increased expectations that the Fed may keep interest rates higher for longer if energy-driven inflation persists.

Consumers are likely to feel the impact first at the gasoline pump. If crude prices remain near current levels or continue climbing, retail fuel prices could increase in the weeks ahead, reducing disposable income and placing additional strain on household budgets already facing elevated borrowing costs.

Despite the rally, analysts caution that oil markets remain highly sensitive to geopolitical developments. Any signs of de-escalation could quickly remove the risk premium now supporting prices, while further disruptions to Middle East supply routes could send crude even higher.

For Wall Street, the message was clear. While most sectors struggled with renewed inflation concerns, energy companies once again demonstrated their ability to outperform during periods of geopolitical uncertainty and rising commodity prices. Investors will now closely monitor developments in the Middle East, as well as any additional actions affecting Iranian oil exports, for clues on where crude prices head next.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump said Wednesday that Iran had reached out seeking to end the war, telling reporters aboard Air Force One as he returned from a NATO summit in Ankara, Turkey, that Tehran “called a little while ago” and wanted “to make a deal so badly.” He immediately questioned whether the Iranian government was “worthy” of one, leaving the future of the month-old ceasefire in doubt after two days of renewed U.S. military strikes.

The remarks capped a combative day for the president. Earlier at the summit, Trump told reporters, “I’m not sure I want to make a deal,” calling Iran’s leaders “scum” and “liars” and saying U.S. negotiators were “wasting their time.” “We can play games, but I’m not sure I want to make a deal,” he said. “Just finish the job.” Asked why he had shifted so quickly from describing Iran’s leaders as “smart” and “rational” only weeks earlier, Trump replied, “I got to know them.”

The latest escalation began Tuesday when U.S. Central Command (CENTCOM) said Iranian forces attacked three commercial vessels near the Strait of Hormuz, one of the world’s busiest shipping lanes. Shortly afterward, the U.S. Treasury Department revoked the waiver that had allowed Iran to resume oil exports under last month’s truce, cutting off a major source of revenue for Tehran.

CENTCOM said U.S. forces struck more than 80 military targets overnight, including air-defense systems, radar installations, anti-ship missile batteries and more than 60 fast boats operated by Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps. On Wednesday afternoon, the command announced another round of strikes aimed at further degrading Iran’s ability to threaten commercial shipping through the strait.

Trump suggested the campaign could broaden further. He said Washington could restore the naval blockade of Iranian ports that had been lifted under the ceasefire and floated the possibility of seizing Kharg Island, Iran’s principal oil-export terminal. He also raised the prospect of targeting Iran’s electrical grid, saying, “It may be a big attack, and it’ll knock out a lot of stuff. We’ll take them out.”

Despite the tough rhetoric, Trump insisted any renewed military campaign would be brief.

“Anything that happens is going to happen very fast,” he said. “We’re not looking for long-term.”

The president also said he believes he remains a top target of the Iranian government, telling reporters in Ankara, “I’m No. 1 on the kill list for Iran,” before joking that he would rather be “No. 1 on TikTok.” He confirmed he would return to Washington aboard an older presidential aircraft instead of the recently delivered plane donated by Qatar, declining to say whether security concerns influenced the decision. The U.S. Justice Department announced in 2024 that it had disrupted an alleged Iranian plot to assassinate Trump.

Iran forcefully rejected Trump’s characterization of events.

Foreign Ministry spokesman Esmaeil Baqaei accused Washington of violating the June agreement “through its unilateral actions” and said Iran would defend its sovereignty. Deputy Foreign Minister Kazem Gharibabadi called Trump a “criminal,” while another Iranian official described the president’s comments as “disgusting.”

Foreign Minister Seyed Abbas Araghchi wrote that insults directed at the Iranian people “do not diminish” the country, adding that Iran responds to provocation “with action.” Parliament Speaker Mohammad Bagher Ghalibaf, who has played a leading role in negotiations, argued that it was the United States that violated the agreement by restoring oil sanctions, declaring, “The era of bullying and extortion is over. We don’t fold.”

Speaking in Milwaukee, Vice President JD Vance defended the administration’s military response and restated its position.

“The basic deal that we cut was we’ll lift our blockade if you stop shooting at ships — but if you shoot at ships, we are going to punch back, and we’re going to punch back harder than ever before,” Vance said. “If they shoot at ships, we’re going to knock the hell out of them, and it’s that simple.”

At the center of the dispute remains the framework signed on June 17 by Trump and Iranian President Masoud Pezeshkian. The 14-point memorandum halted military operations, reopened the Strait of Hormuz and lifted the U.S. blockade while giving both sides 60 days to negotiate a broader peace agreement. That negotiating window expires in mid-August, with Washington and Tehran now accusing each other of violating its terms.

U.S. envoy Steve Witkoff and presidential adviser Jared Kushner met with mediators in Doha in late June, but no direct talks with senior Iranian officials have been publicly confirmed since then.

For all of the heated rhetoric, Trump stopped short of closing the diplomatic door, saying negotiators “can keep talking if they want.”

Whether Tehran’s reported outreach leads to renewed negotiations or another breakdown may determine whether the ceasefire survives the weeks ahead.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Rivian Automotive and General Motors released their second-quarter vehicle sales during the first week of July, offering two very different snapshots of the U.S. auto market. While Rivian exceeded expectations and raised its full-year delivery forecast, GM remained America’s largest automaker but reported declining sales as demand for electric vehicles slowed following the expiration of federal EV incentives.

Together, the results highlight how the industry is adjusting to changing consumer preferences, new government policies and intensifying competition in both gasoline and electric vehicles.

Rivian delivered 12,194 vehicles during the second quarter, comfortably exceeding both its own guidance and Wall Street expectations. Encouraged by the stronger-than-expected performance, the electric vehicle manufacturer raised its full-year delivery forecast to between 65,000 and 70,000 vehicles, reflecting growing confidence in demand for its expanding lineup.

The company credited continued strength in its R1T pickup, R1S SUV and commercial delivery van business while also pointing to strong early interest in its new R2 sport utility vehicle. Investors welcomed the higher guidance, sending Rivian shares higher following the announcement.

For Rivian, the improved outlook represents another important milestone as the company works toward long-term profitability. Like many newer electric vehicle manufacturers, Rivian continues investing heavily in production capacity while seeking to increase sales volume and lower manufacturing costs.

General Motors painted a different picture.

GM sold 714,896 vehicles in the United States during the second quarter, maintaining its position as the nation’s largest automaker but recording a 4.2% decline from the same quarter a year earlier. It marked the company’s third consecutive quarterly sales decline.

Despite the overall decrease, GM executives emphasized continued strength in traditional trucks and sport utility vehicles. The company reported strong demand for models such as the Chevrolet Silverado, GMC Sierra, Chevrolet Traverse and several other SUV nameplates that continue generating some of its highest profit margins.

Electric vehicles proved more challenging.

GM’s EV sales fell significantly compared with the prior year, reflecting softer consumer demand after the expiration of the federal tax credit previously available on many electric vehicle purchases. Without the incentive, many buyers have delayed purchases or returned to gasoline-powered vehicles, hybrids or plug-in hybrid models.

The contrast between Rivian and GM illustrates how differently manufacturers are experiencing today’s market.

Rivian continues growing from a relatively small production base, allowing new products and increased manufacturing capacity to generate substantial percentage gains. GM, by comparison, manages one of the world’s largest automotive operations, where even modest changes in consumer demand affect hundreds of thousands of vehicle sales.

Another factor is product mix.

While Rivian focuses almost exclusively on premium electric vehicles, GM depends heavily on profitable pickups and SUVs while simultaneously investing billions of dollars to expand its electric vehicle portfolio. That broader strategy provides stability but also exposes the company to changing consumer demand across multiple vehicle categories.

The broader industry continues evolving rapidly.

Automakers worldwide remain committed to electric vehicles, but many are adjusting production schedules, delaying some investments and placing greater emphasis on hybrids as consumers seek lower operating costs without concerns about charging infrastructure.

For consumers, increased competition continues creating more choices than ever before. Buyers shopping for electric vehicles now have access to expanding model lineups across multiple manufacturers, while traditional gasoline and hybrid vehicles remain widely available as companies respond to changing demand.

Investors will now shift their attention to upcoming quarterly earnings reports, where both Rivian and GM are expected to provide additional details about profitability, production plans and expectations for the remainder of the year.

The second-quarter sales reports demonstrate that America’s auto industry remains in the middle of one of its largest transformations in decades. Companies able to balance consumer demand, manufacturing efficiency and evolving technology are likely to be best positioned as the market continues shifting toward its next phase.

JBizNews Desk | Detroit

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Shell told investors on Tuesday that the war in the Middle East sharply reduced its natural gas production during the second quarter, cutting output from its Qatar operations by roughly one-third. Despite the production hit, the energy giant said exceptionally strong trading profits are expected to offset much of the damage when it reports full quarterly earnings later this month.

In a second-quarter trading update released Tuesday, Shell forecast integrated gas production between 610,000 and 650,000 barrels of oil equivalent per day for the April-through-June period. That compares with 909,000 barrels per day produced during the first quarter, representing a decline of roughly 30% that the company directly linked to disruptions affecting its operations in Qatar.

The decline traces back to the Pearl gas-to-liquids facility in Ras Laffan Industrial City, where one of the plant’s two processing trains has remained offline following damage sustained earlier this year. Shell previously indicated repairs could take approximately one year to complete.

Although the production loss is significant, investors focused on another part of Tuesday’s update.

Shell said trading and optimization earnings within its integrated gas division are expected to be significantly higher than in the first quarter, reflecting the extraordinary volatility that has swept through global energy markets.

That helped lift investor sentiment.

Shares of Shell climbed more than 3% in London trading, helping lead the FTSE 100 Index higher as investors concluded that strong trading performance would likely offset much of the production decline.

The pattern has become increasingly common across the global energy industry.

When geopolitical tensions send oil and natural gas prices swinging sharply, the trading desks operated by major energy companies often generate substantial profits by buying, selling and routing energy cargoes around the world. Those gains can offset lower production from disrupted facilities.

Shell, BP, and TotalEnergies all benefited from elevated trading activity during the first quarter, and Tuesday’s guidance suggests that trend continued through the second quarter.

The remainder of Shell’s business also showed signs of improvement.

The company raised its outlook for liquefied natural gas production to between 7.4 million and 7.8 million tonnes, increased its indicative refining margin to approximately $20 per barrel, up from $17 during the previous quarter, and projected chemical margins of roughly $240 per tonne, compared with $139 previously.

Shell also expects a positive working-capital swing of between $1 billion and $6 billion, a significant reversal from the $11.2 billion outflow reported during the first quarter.

The company enters earnings season from a position of considerable financial strength.

Adjusted earnings reached $6.9 billion during the first quarter, the highest level in two years, fueled largely by robust trading activity during periods of heightened market volatility. Shell also increased its dividend by 5%, rewarding shareholders despite ongoing geopolitical uncertainty.

For households and businesses, however, the story looks very different.

The same market volatility boosting profits for major energy companies has contributed to higher fuel prices, increased transportation costs and more expensive utility bills. Price swings in oil and natural gas eventually ripple through the broader economy, affecting everything from airline tickets and freight costs to grocery prices and home heating bills.

The geopolitical backdrop remains highly uncertain.

Energy companies continue monitoring developments across the Middle East as disruptions to shipping routes and production facilities threaten global supply chains. Industry executives have repeatedly emphasized the importance of maintaining reliable export routes, particularly through the Strait of Hormuz, one of the world’s most important energy corridors.

Investors will receive a clearer picture on July 30, when Shell releases full second-quarter earnings and provides updates on its share repurchase program, dividend policy and progress restoring production at its Qatar operations.

For now, Tuesday’s update illustrates one of the defining realities of today’s energy markets: geopolitical instability can simultaneously reduce production, increase volatility and strengthen trading profits, allowing diversified energy companies like Shell to weather disruptions that might otherwise significantly weaken their financial performance.

JBizNews Desk | London

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The artificial intelligence (AI) boom is causing a fierce bidding war for some luxury homes in the San Francisco Bay Area, with dozens of homes selling more than $1 million above asking price last month.

Mike Simonsen, chief economist at Compass International Holdings, noted in a post on X citing the firm’s analysis of MLS data that there were 44 homes sold in San Francisco that closed at a price at least $1 million above the final asking price. It showed the 44 transactions from June totaled over $60 million in total sales.

The June total marked the continuation of a recent trend after April and May each had a little more than 30 sales that closed at least $1 million over the asking price and totaled over $40 million, while March had 20 such sales that totaled about $30 million.

By contrast, from February 2024 through February 2026, some months saw zero home sales that closed $1 million above the asking price and no month saw more than nine such transactions – which illustrates the rapid intensification of bidding wars in the Bay Area luxury market.

CHATGPT BOOM FUELS A LUXURY HOUSING FRENZY IN BAY AREA

Simonsen said in his post that the data was, “Absolutely BANANAS” and added that it “may be the most useful data in understanding the 2026 San Francisco housing market.”

Most of the homes sold at $1 million or more above their final asking price were sold in San Francisco’s 94114 zip code, which includes neighborhoods such as The Castro, Noe Valley and Dolores Heights.

San Francisco has long anchored the Bay Area’s tech economy and Silicon Valley has surged amid the rapid rollout of AI software serving a wide range of consumer and business purposes. That has contributed to the uptick in demand for luxury homes in the city.

HOUSING AFFORDABILITY UNLIKELY TO RETURN TO MORE FAVORABLE LEVELS OF THE PAST, ECONOMIST SAYS

Joel Berner, senior economist at Realtor.com, told FOX Business that the overall housing market in San Francisco is a “seller’s market” with buyers “competing over a smaller pool of listings, and homes are selling 18% faster than they were last year at this time.”

Across the overall market, the median listing price has actually declined 4.9% from a year ago to $1.137 million, though Berner noted that’s likely due to smaller homes coming onto the market and added, “The luxury tiers (95th and 99th price percentile) of the SF market are seeing stronger price growth than the median.”

CALIFORNIA TECH LEADERS CHALLENGE PROGRESSIVE POLICIES AS BILLIONAIRES, BUSINESSES FLEE: REPORT

“This kind of uptick in buyer activity is consistent with a cash infusion on the buyer side, which we know is occurring as part of the AI boom and the IPOs of several of these companies with presences in the Bay Area,” Berner explained. “Buyers have more money in their pockets, but they’re chasing after the same pool of homes as before as supply has not yet had the chance to meet demand.”

He added that because San Francisco is a “notoriously tough place to build new homes, with pricey and scarce land and high regulatory burdens for builders,” it is “unlikely that a new wave of construction comes to balance the market, so expect seller’s market conditions to continue and prices to start rising significantly.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

This post was originally published here

Federal Reserve policymakers are increasingly concerned about inflation and the uncertainty about the direction it may take was reflected in the minutes of the Fed’s latest monetary policy meeting released on Wednesday.

The central bank’s first monetary policy meeting under the leadership of Fed Chair Kevin Warsh occurred against the backdrop of rising inflation, as energy prices surged earlier this year and pushed the pace of price growth up and further away from the Fed’s 2% long-run target.

The minutes of the Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC), which determines the central bank’s monetary policy moves, showed that while policymakers in June didn’t see a need to raise interest rates immediately amid “high assessed uncertainty” regarding future rate cuts or hikes.

Policymakers voted unanimously to leave the benchmark federal funds rate unchanged at a range of 3.5% to 3.75%, but engaged in a discussion about circumstances that could open the door to rate cuts or rate hikes depending on the direction of inflation.

FED’S FAVORED INFLATION GAUGE ACCELERATED IN MAY AMID ENERGY PRICE SHOCK

“Most participants remarked on scenarios in which inflationary pressures would dissipate and inflation would soon begin to return to 2%. In such scenarios, almost all of these participants noted it would likely be appropriate to maintain or eventually lower the target range for the federal funds rate,” the FOMC explained.

“Most participants, however, also point to scenarios in which, in the context of stable labor market conditions, inflation would remain elevated due to strong AI-related demand, the conflict in the Middle East, or the effects of tariffs,” the FOMC wrote. “In such scenarios, almost all of these participants indicated that some policy firming would likely be warranted to return inflation to 2%.”

The June FOMC meeting included the release of the so-called “dot plot” that showed nine of the 18 voting members projected an interest rate hike before the end of 2026, with six projecting two 25-basis-point hikes.

FEDERAL RESERVE LEAVES INTEREST RATES UNCHANGED AS WARSH ERA BEGINS

The summary of economic projections also revised its forecast for PCE inflation at the end of this year up from 2.7% as of the March projection to 3.6%, reflecting recent inflationary trends.

Warsh has said that he wants to end “forward guidance” in how the Fed communicates about future rate moves and declined to submit his own economic projection as part of the FOMC’s forecasts and post-meeting message.

The FOMC’s post-meeting statement was noticeably shorter than the preceding releases when Fed Governor Jerome Powell was still serving as chairman.

AMERICANS GROW MORE PESSIMISTIC ABOUT FINANCES AS RENT AND FOOD COST FEARS SURGE, FED SAYS

The minutes showed that some policymakers viewed Warsh’s first meeting as “an opportune time to consider significant changes to the FOMC’s post-meeting statement.”

“A majority of participants remarked that they saw advantages in shortening the statement. Most participants emphasized that they preferred not to repeat the language in the previous statement that had suggested an easing bias regarding the likely direction of the Committee’s future interest rate decisions,” the FOMC explained.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

This post was originally published here


President Donald Trump said Wednesday that he would fly home from the NATO summit in Ankara, Turkey, aboard the older presidential aircraft rather than the newly delivered Air Force One, announcing in a post on Truth Social that the new plane would instead stop in the United Kingdom so American troops could tour it. The decision came the same day he told reporters he considers himself Iran’s “No. 1 target” for assassination. MEAWW

Speaking at a press conference as he wrapped up the summit, Trump was pressed twice on why he was not taking the new jet on what would have been its first foreign return flight. He first turned to the danger of the job, then said the aircraft was headed to Europe. “It’s flying to Europe, to one of the big bases,” Trump said, adding that he would be “going home by normal methods.” NBC News He said the plane would stop so the soldiers could see it because it was “truly magnificent.”

The new aircraft is a Boeing 747-8 that Qatar’s royal family donated last year after Trump complained about the condition of the two aging jets that have served as the U.S. presidential plane since 1990. Yahoo! He unveiled the retrofitted plane last month at Joint Base Andrews in Maryland. The U.S. Air Force has said it spent under $400 million on security upgrades, The Hill though the president has at times referred to the project in far larger figures.

In a Truth Social post before the press conference, Trump said the plane would fly directly to RAF Mildenhall in England so service members could be the first Americans to walk through it. He said he would fly home in the older plane “for old time’s sake.” PBS

The timing drew immediate scrutiny. The switch landed as fighting between the United States and Iran flared again, only weeks after a June ceasefire and memorandum of understanding were meant to end the war that began with U.S.-led strikes on February 28. Newsweek Earlier Wednesday, Trump threatened fresh strikes on Iranian targets and floated reinstating a naval blockade of the Strait of Hormuz, the waterway that carried roughly a fifth of the world’s hydrocarbons before the conflict. The Hill

Reporters asked directly whether security concerns tied to Iran drove the plane change. Trump did not confirm or deny it. “The life of a president is very dangerous,” he said, Fox News noting he has been the target of multiple assassination attempts. “I’m No. 1 on the kill list for Iran,” he added, before joking that he would rather be “No. 1 on TikTok.” The Hill

The White House has denied that the change in plans is due to any issue with the new plane. NBC News Still, questions about the aircraft have followed it since Qatar offered it. The Associated Press reported last week that the donated jet appears to lack some of the missile-detection and countermeasure systems installed on the older planes, and that one expert saw it as better suited to domestic trips. The Hill There has been no official statement from the White House, the Air Force, or military officials calling the plane unsafe. MEAWW

According to a senior White House official, the plan calls for Trump to fly the former Air Force One from Turkey to Mildenhall, then continue to Joint Base Andrews on the newer jet. NBC News Air base visits are typically known well in advance rather than added at the last minute, which fed the speculation. NBC News

The plane itself remains a stopgap. It is meant to bridge the gap between the aging Boeing 747-200s in service for more than two decades and two new Boeing aircraft that were expected in 2024 but are not due until 2028. The Hill

Around the plane story, the war took center stage. Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth said U.S. forces had struck small craft harassing shipping in the Strait of Hormuz, along with underground sites storing drones and missiles, coastal defenses and radar. NBC News Vice President JD Vance put the rule bluntly: if Iran fires on ships, “we’re going to knock the hell out of them.” NBC News Iran vowed to respond. Ebrahim Rezaei, a spokesman for Iran’s parliamentary security committee, warned that Gulf states aligned with Washington should “watch over their oil and gas wells.” CBS News

For businesses tracking energy prices and shipping lanes, the renewed fighting keeps the Strait of Hormuz at the center of risk. The channel’s status shapes oil costs, insurance rates and freight schedules well beyond the Gulf.

JBizNews Desk © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.


Body runs 748 words. Headline reworked from your pasted version. Want me to sharpen the business angle further or tighten the war material?

Honda is recalling more than 325,000 vehicles over faulty rearview image displays, which could increase the risk of a crash, according to federal regulators.

The recall affects 2018-2020 Odyssey vehicles, the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) announced on Wednesday.

A total of 325,588 vehicles are covered by the recall effort.

HONDA RECALLS MORE THAN 880,000 VEHICLES OVER REAR SUSPENSION FAILURE RISK

The NHTSA said the recall was issued due to rearview cameras that may not display properly.

“Water may enter into the rearview camera, which can cause the rearview camera image to fail to display when the vehicle is in reverse,” the recall notice reads.

A display malfunction could increase the risk of a crash, the NHTSA said.

The announcement expands a previous recall, which affected certain 2019-2020 Honda Odyssey vehicles.

Owners affected by the recall may take their cars to Honda dealers, so the rearview camera can be replaced free of charge, according to the NHTSA.

Owner notification letters are expected to be mailed on Aug. 24.

HONDA RECALLS 99,000 VEHICLES OVER FLAW THAT COULD TRIGGER UNINTENDED AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

This comes after Honda issued two separate recalls in recent months that included other car models.

This included more than 880,000 vehicles being recalled because a key rear suspension part can rust and fail, and nearly 99,000 cars that were recalled over a defect that could cause airbags to deploy unexpectedly during a crash.

This post was originally published here

Delta Air Lines has emerged as the winning bidder for two airport gates left behind by the collapsed Spirit Airlines at the world’s busiest airport, according to filings in Spirit’s bankruptcy case, with a federal judge scheduled to decide Wednesday whether to approve the sale.

Court filings in the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of New York show Delta offered $12 million for gates C4 and C6 at Hartsfield-Jackson Atlanta International Airport, along with Spirit’s former ticketing lobby and related operational space. Spirit told the court Delta submitted the highest and best offer following a competitive bidding process that included another airline.

The transaction does not involve ownership of the gates themselves. Because the City of Atlanta owns the airport, Delta would acquire Spirit’s leasehold interest, giving the carrier control of the facilities through June 30, 2031, when Spirit’s original lease was set to expire. Objections to the sale were due July 1, and the bankruptcy court is scheduled to hold a hearing on July 8.

The proposed sale represents another step in the liquidation of Spirit Airlines, which ceased operations on May 2 after 34 years in business before entering Chapter 11 bankruptcy. Since then, the airline has been selling aircraft, airport facilities, equipment and other assets to generate funds for creditors.

For Delta, however, the value of the transaction extends well beyond the $12 million purchase price.

Hartsfield-Jackson serves as the airline’s largest and most important hub. Delta already controls roughly three-quarters of the airport’s gates and carries approximately 80% of its passengers, making Atlanta the centerpiece of its domestic and international route network. In an airport where available gate space is extremely limited, even two additional gates can create opportunities to add flights, improve scheduling flexibility and strengthen connecting service.

Industry analysts say the strategic value far exceeds the cost.

Gary Leff, author of the aviation website View From the Wing, noted that the acquisition involves only two of the airport’s roughly 188 gates, cautioning against overstating its immediate competitive impact. Even so, he observed that every additional gate under Delta’s control is one less available for another carrier seeking to expand service at the nation’s busiest airport.

That competition issue has attracted attention in Washington.

Bryan Bedford, Administrator of the Federal Aviation Administration, has previously expressed concern about the loss of low-cost airline competition following Spirit’s shutdown. He has suggested that airport gate assignments deserve careful consideration because ultra-low-cost carriers have historically played an important role in keeping airfare prices competitive in many markets.

The Atlanta transaction, however, is not expected to trigger federal antitrust review because the $12 million purchase price falls below the reporting threshold that would require additional regulatory scrutiny. As a result, the bankruptcy court’s primary responsibility is determining whether the sale represents the highest value reasonably available for Spirit’s creditors.

For travelers, the implications could extend beyond one bankruptcy proceeding.

Spirit built its business around deeply discounted fares that frequently forced larger airlines to match or lower prices. With the carrier gone, many industry observers believe consumers could eventually face fewer low-cost options on routes where Spirit once competed. If Delta assumes control of additional airport capacity, those gates become unavailable to another discount airline looking to establish or expand operations in Atlanta.

For business travelers and corporations headquartered throughout the Southeast, additional Delta capacity could improve flight availability, scheduling flexibility and international connections through one of the world’s busiest aviation hubs. Leisure travelers, however, may ultimately care more about whether fewer competitors translate into higher ticket prices over time.

Delta has made clear that Atlanta remains central to its long-term growth strategy. Chief Executive Ed Bastian has repeatedly emphasized expanding the airline’s global network, and every additional gate at its largest hub provides greater flexibility to support that expansion.

The bankruptcy court’s decision on Wednesday will determine whether the lease transfer moves forward. If approved, Delta will further strengthen its position at the airport it already dominates, adding another chapter to the ongoing reshaping of the U.S. airline industry following Spirit’s collapse.

JBizNews Desk | Atlanta

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

NEW YORK — Wall Street finished sharply mixed on Wednesday, July 8, after President Donald Trump, speaking at the NATO Summit in Ankara, Turkey, declared that the ceasefire and memorandum of understanding between the United States and Iran was “over,” reigniting fears of a broader Middle East conflict, sending oil prices sharply higher and knocking the Dow Jones Industrial Average lower.

The market’s message was clear: geopolitics is once again driving Wall Street.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average fell 576.76 points, or 1.09%, to 52,348.39. The S&P 500 slipped 0.28% to 7,482.71, while the technology-heavy Nasdaq Composite managed to rise 0.20% to 25,870.65, supported by strength in several large technology companies. The Russell 2000 lost about 0.9%, while the CBOE Volatility Index (VIX), Wall Street’s closely watched fear gauge, climbed nearly 4% as investors sought protection against further market swings.

The day’s biggest catalyst came from Ankara.

Speaking to reporters on the sidelines of the NATO summit, Trump said he considered the ceasefire with Iran finished, dismissed further negotiations and warned that additional U.S. military action could follow. His comments came after overnight U.S. strikes on Iranian targets and renewed attacks on commercial vessels near the Strait of Hormuz, one of the world’s most strategically important shipping lanes.

Investors immediately focused on oil.

Brent crude, the global benchmark, surged 5.43% to settle at $78.19 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate climbed 4.37% to $73.52 per barrel, marking one of the strongest single-day advances in weeks.

Higher oil prices tend to benefit energy producers, but they also raise transportation costs, pressure manufacturers, squeeze airline profits and eventually work their way into gasoline prices and consumer inflation. That combination weighed heavily on many industrial and consumer-focused companies that make up the Dow.

Technology stocks told a different story.

The Nasdaq managed to finish higher thanks to continued strength in several semiconductor and artificial intelligence-related companies.

Broadcom gained after Apple announced an expanded multiyear partnership expected to exceed $30 billion. The agreement calls for more than 15 billion American-made chips and includes a $1.5 billion expansion of Broadcom’s manufacturing facility in Fort Collins, Colorado, representing Apple’s largest domestic manufacturing commitment to date.

Several other technology companies also attracted buyers. Penguin Solutions rallied following its earnings report, while Alibaba, Akamai Technologies and Arista Networks also posted gains as investors continued rotating toward companies viewed as having strong long-term growth prospects.

Not every traditional safe haven moved as expected.

Gold futures fell approximately 1.6%, extending a pullback from record highs reached earlier this year. Rather than moving aggressively into precious metals, investors largely focused on energy markets and selective opportunities within technology.

The Federal Reserve also remained on investors’ radar.

Market participants continued digesting the latest Fed meeting minutes, which highlighted persistent inflation risks despite easing labor-market concerns.

Adam Phillips, Managing Director of Investments at EP Wealth Advisors, said the minutes reinforced the Federal Reserve’s cautious stance.

“The minutes demonstrated the Fed’s hawkish bias, highlighting that upside inflation risks remain while concerns around the labor market have eased,” Phillips said, adding that renewed tensions in the Middle East only increase uncertainty surrounding inflation and monetary policy.

Those concerns were echoed in the latest outlook from the International Monetary Fund, which projects oil prices to remain significantly higher next year while forecasting global inflation of 4.7% in 2026, underscoring the possibility that inflationary pressures may persist longer than many investors had hoped.

There was also notable activity outside the public markets.

Blue Origin, the aerospace company founded by Jeff Bezos, is reportedly seeking approximately $10 billion in its first outside funding round, a transaction that would value the company at roughly $130 billion. Bezos is expected to contribute about $2 billion, alongside major institutional investors.

Meanwhile, SpaceX, which entered the public markets last month under the ticker SPCX, posted a modest gain after a volatile start to life as a publicly traded company.

For business owners, investors and consumers, Wednesday’s trading served as another reminder that events halfway around the world can quickly affect everyday life at home. Rising crude oil prices often translate into higher gasoline prices, increased shipping costs, more expensive airline travel and additional inflationary pressure throughout the economy.

Wall Street’s split performance reflected exactly that reality. Technology continued attracting investment, but companies tied more closely to energy costs came under pressure. As long as tensions surrounding Iran and the Strait of Hormuz remain unresolved, energy markets are likely to remain one of the biggest forces shaping both Wall Street and Main Street.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump said Wednesday that the ceasefire between the United States and Iran was over and that American forces would likely strike the country again the same night. Speaking on the sidelines of the NATO summit in Ankara, Turkey, Trump told reporters, “For me, I think it’s over,” and said continued negotiations were “a waste of time.” Asked whether the two countries would return to fighting, he said, “We hit them very hard last night,” and added the U.S. would “probably hit them hard again tonight.”

The president laid out a series of new threats. He said the U.S. could reinstate its naval blockade of Iran’s ports, strike the country’s electric and water plants, and “take over” Kharg Island, Iran’s main oil-export terminal. He also renewed his complaint that other NATO members had not supported the U.S. in the conflict. In a later appearance Trump appeared to pull back, saying he did not think a full war would “start again,” even as he called Iran’s leaders “sick people.”

The escalation followed a fresh exchange of fire. After attacks on three commercial ships in the Strait of Hormuz earlier in the week, the U.S. military struck Iranian targets overnight. U.S. Central Command said it hit more than 80 sites, including air-defense systems, coastal radar and over 60 small boats used by Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps to threaten passing tankers. The command said the round of strikes had ended but that it remained ready to act again if Iran did not honor the agreement.

Iran said it answered with drone and missile strikes on the U.S.-allied Gulf states of Bahrain and Kuwait, claiming it had targeted 85 American military sites. Kuwait’s armed forces said they intercepted ballistic missiles and drones and reported no major damage. Iran’s army said eight of its service members were killed in the overnight U.S. strikes on the coastal cities of Bandar Abbas and Bushehr, naming the dead by rank in a rare public announcement.

The threats put an already fragile deal in doubt. The two sides signed a memorandum of understanding on June 17 that set a 60-day ceasefire, lifted the U.S. blockade and reopened the Strait of Hormuz, through which about a fifth of the world’s oil once passed. That window is set to expire in mid-August, with little progress on the harder issues, including Iran’s nuclear program and long-term control of the waterway. On Tuesday, the U.S. Treasury Department revoked a waiver that had allowed Iran to sell crude, a step Tehran cited as its own evidence that Washington had broken the deal.

The market reaction was swift. Brent crude, the international benchmark, settled 5.2 percent higher at $78.02 a barrel, while West Texas Intermediate rose 4.4 percent to close at $73.52, the largest one-day jump since early June. The Dow Jones Industrial Average fell more than 800 points at its low, about 1.5 percent, days after setting a record. Retail gasoline rose less than a penny a gallon overnight, according to AAA, though prices could climb as higher crude costs reach the pump. The CME FedWatch tool showed traders now see better than a one-in-three chance of a Federal Reserve rate increase this month.

Iranian officials rejected Trump’s remarks outright. Deputy Foreign Minister Kazem Gharibabadi said the threats were an admission that years of force and sanctions had failed, while Foreign Minister Abbas Araghchi said insults would not diminish Iran’s standing. Gulf governments, including Kuwait, Qatar and the United Arab Emirates, condemned Iran’s strikes on their soil and pressed both sides to return to talks. The European Union’s foreign policy chief, Kaja Kallas, said the renewed fighting had made an already difficult negotiation harder and called Iran’s attacks on Bahrain and Kuwait unacceptable.

Pakistan, which has helped mediate between Washington and Tehran, urged restraint, saying a renewed conflict served no one’s interest. For now, tanker traffic through Hormuz has nearly stopped, and with both sides still trading threats and the mid-August deadline approaching, the prospect of a lasting agreement looks more distant than it did a month ago.

JBizNews Desk © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.


Kept your headline as written and rebuilt the piece around the ceasefire-and-strikes story, with markets moved to a supporting paragraph. Body runs about 670 words. Say the word if you want it tighter or the strike/threat detail expanded.

Chinese artificial intelligence startup DeepSeek is developing its own AI chip, according to people familiar with the project, a move that could reduce the company’s dependence on Nvidia and Huawei while intensifying the global race to control the technology powering the next generation of artificial intelligence.

The project, first reported by Reuters, centers on a custom chip designed primarily for AI inference — the stage where trained AI models generate answers for users — rather than the far more computationally intensive process of training new models. DeepSeek declined to comment on the report.

According to the sources, development has been underway for roughly a year. The company has quietly expanded its hiring of semiconductor engineers and held discussions with chip-design firms, contract manufacturers and memory suppliers as it works to build its own hardware.

The news immediately rippled through financial markets. Shares of Nvidia, whose graphics processors dominate the AI industry, slipped in early trading as investors weighed the possibility that another major AI developer could eventually reduce its reliance on the company’s products.

The timing is significant. U.S. export restrictions have sharply limited China’s access to Nvidia’s most advanced AI chips, pushing many Chinese technology companies to accelerate development of domestic alternatives.

DeepSeek gained international attention after releasing its R1 reasoning model, which surprised many in the technology industry with its strong performance at significantly lower costs than many competing systems. The company originally trained its models using Nvidia’s H800 processors, chips specifically designed for the Chinese market before Washington tightened export controls. Since then, it has increasingly relied on Huawei’s Ascend processors while pursuing greater technological independence.

The move also reflects a much broader shift across the AI industry.

Rather than relying entirely on off-the-shelf processors, leading AI companies are increasingly investing in custom silicon tailored specifically to their own software. OpenAI recently unveiled its first custom inference chip developed with Broadcom, while reports indicate Anthropic is evaluating similar efforts. Inside China, technology giants including Alibaba and Baidu have also invested heavily in proprietary AI processors.

The reason is simple: cost.

Every prompt submitted to an AI chatbot requires computing power. Purchasing chips from outside suppliers means paying those suppliers’ margins while competing for increasingly scarce hardware. A processor designed specifically for one company’s models can reduce operating costs, improve efficiency and provide greater control over future product development.

For businesses, the financial stakes are enormous.

Artificial intelligence is rapidly becoming one of the largest capital investment cycles in technology history. Companies are spending hundreds of billions of dollars building data centers, purchasing chips and expanding cloud infrastructure. Even modest reductions in computing costs can translate into billions of dollars in long-term savings.

Success, however, is far from guaranteed.

Designing competitive AI processors requires years of engineering, advanced manufacturing capabilities and substantial financial investment. Access to leading-edge semiconductor fabrication remains one of China’s biggest challenges under current U.S. export restrictions.

Some analysts remain skeptical about the project’s global impact.

Richard Windsor, founder of Radio Free Mobile, argued that without access to the world’s most advanced manufacturing technologies, Chinese-designed chips may struggle to compete internationally, even if they prove successful inside China’s domestic market.

DeepSeek’s hardware ambitions come as the company reportedly prepares to raise outside capital for the first time. According to recent reports, the startup is seeking approximately $7 billion in funding at a valuation between $52 billion and $59 billion, marking a significant shift after years of avoiding external investment.

For Nvidia, the development highlights the long-term consequences of export restrictions.

While the controls were designed to limit China’s access to advanced American technology, they have also encouraged Chinese companies to accelerate investment in domestic semiconductor development. Every successful homegrown AI processor reduces reliance on imported hardware and strengthens China’s own semiconductor ecosystem.

Whether DeepSeek ultimately delivers a competitive chip remains uncertain.

What is clear is that the battle for AI leadership is no longer being fought only through software. Increasingly, it is becoming a contest over who controls the chips, factories, supply chains and infrastructure that power artificial intelligence itself—a competition likely to shape the global technology industry for years to come.

JBizNews Desk | Beijing

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

General Mills reported better-than-expected quarterly earnings on July 1, beating Wall Street forecasts while announcing an ambitious plan to cut $3 billion in costs by 2030 as consumers continue pulling back on grocery spending. The maker of Cheerios, Pillsbury, Betty Crocker and dozens of other household brands said the savings initiative is designed to offset inflation, improve efficiency and position the company for long-term growth.

The Minneapolis-based food giant reported adjusted earnings of 95 cents per share, topping analysts’ expectations of about 81 cents per share, while quarterly revenue came in at approximately $4.6 billion. Investors welcomed the stronger-than-expected results, sending the company’s shares sharply higher following the announcement.

“Our fourth-quarter results represented a positive finish to a challenging fiscal year,” Chairman and Chief Executive Officer Jeff Harmening said while outlining the company’s strategy for returning to sustainable growth.

Although quarterly earnings exceeded expectations, the broader picture reflected continued pressure throughout the packaged-food industry.

General Mills reported full-year net sales of $18.4 billion, down roughly 5% from the previous fiscal year, as inflation-weary shoppers continued buying fewer premium grocery products and increasingly switched to lower-priced private-label alternatives.

The company also reported a quarterly net loss driven largely by one-time accounting charges, including goodwill impairments and costs associated with the planned sale of its Brazil business. Excluding those non-cash charges, underlying operating performance remained stronger than headline earnings suggested.

The biggest announcement, however, was management’s new cost-reduction initiative.

General Mills plans to generate $3 billion in cumulative savings by fiscal 2030 through a combination of supply-chain improvements, manufacturing efficiencies, organizational restructuring and expanded use of artificial intelligence throughout its operations.

Approximately $2 billion of those savings will come from existing productivity initiatives, while the remaining savings are expected through a broader transformation program aimed at simplifying business operations worldwide.

Company executives expect approximately $750 million in savings during the coming fiscal year alone.

The aggressive cost-cutting reflects changing consumer behavior.

After several years of raising prices to offset inflation, many food manufacturers are discovering shoppers have become increasingly price-sensitive. Consumers are purchasing fewer discretionary grocery items, comparing prices more closely and choosing store brands more frequently than in previous years.

General Mills believes improving efficiency rather than relying solely on additional price increases will better position the company for future growth.

Management also plans to introduce new products emphasizing convenience, health and higher protein content while refreshing established brands to better compete for consumer spending.

One recent success has been the company’s Cheerios Protein line, which executives said has already generated approximately $100 million in sales.

Inflation continues presenting challenges.

General Mills expects ingredient and operating costs to increase between 4% and 5% during the coming fiscal year, making its cost-saving initiatives increasingly important to protecting profitability while limiting future price increases.

For consumers, the company’s results provide another indication that grocery budgets remain under pressure.

When one of America’s largest packaged-food companies reports customers are purchasing less and seeking greater value, it reinforces broader economic trends affecting households nationwide.

The company’s decision to emphasize efficiency over continued price increases could eventually help moderate grocery inflation for some products, although executives acknowledged consumers are likely to remain cautious throughout the coming year.

For investors, the results suggest General Mills is shifting from defending profitability through higher prices toward improving operations and rebuilding long-term sales growth.

The broader food industry continues undergoing similar adjustments as manufacturers balance rising costs, changing consumer preferences and increased competition from lower-priced alternatives.

Whether General Mills succeeds in achieving its ambitious savings targets while maintaining product quality and brand loyalty will likely determine how well the company performs over the next several years.

JBizNews Desk | Minneapolis

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited

Cognizant announced on Thursday, July 2, that it is deploying OpenAI’s GPT-5.5 across its cybersecurity business to help large organizations identify, verify, and remediate software vulnerabilities before attackers can exploit them. The Teaneck, New Jersey technology company (Nasdaq: CTSH) said the initiative combines GPT-5.5 with OpenAI’s Trusted Access for Cyber framework, which adds security controls, monitoring, and human oversight to enterprise AI deployments.

The work will be delivered through Cognizant’s Frontier AI Cyber Defense services and its participation in the OpenAI Daybreak Cyber Partner Program, a collaboration designed to help trusted cybersecurity firms integrate advanced AI into enterprise security operations while maintaining strict safeguards. Cognizant said every AI-assisted workflow will continue to include human review before any action is taken.

According to the company, the technology will assist security teams with reviewing software code for vulnerabilities, modeling potential attack paths, validating security findings, prioritizing risks, building threat detection systems, conducting threat hunting, and supporting incident response when cyberattacks occur.

Cognizant’s argument is not simply that artificial intelligence can discover vulnerabilities faster. Many existing cybersecurity tools already scan software for potential weaknesses. The greater challenge begins after a vulnerability is identified. Security teams must determine whether the finding is genuine, evaluate its severity, develop and test a software fix, and deploy that fix before attackers have an opportunity to exploit it.

The company believes AI can significantly reduce that timeline.

Frontier AI has changed the equation for cyber defense, but a model’s power only matters in how it is applied inside a real enterprise,” said Sandra Notardonato, Global Head of Partner Development and Influencer Relations at Cognizant. She said Cognizant’s cybersecurity teams integrate the technology directly into clients’ development and security operations to help move organizations from simply identifying risks to resolving them.

Cognizant said it employs more than 5,000 cybersecurity professionals and has spent more than a decade serving highly regulated industries including financial services, healthcare, and government, where software vulnerabilities can carry significant operational and regulatory consequences. The company said combining that human expertise with advanced AI allows it to scale vulnerability remediation while maintaining enterprise-level oversight.

Before offering the technology broadly to customers, Cognizant is deploying it internally in what it describes as a “Client Zero” strategy. Its own security teams are already using GPT-5.5 to review software code, distinguish legitimate threats from false positives, and evaluate software updates before they are deployed across the company’s internal systems and products. Cognizant said those experiences will shape future customer implementations.

OpenAI said partnerships with established cybersecurity firms can help advanced AI capabilities reach more organizations in a controlled manner.

Frontier cyber capability reaches more defenders when partners can operationalize it inside the trusted workflows enterprises already use every day,” said Colleen Kapase, Vice President of Strategic Global Partnerships and Ecosystems at OpenAI.

Both companies emphasized that the deployment includes strict access controls, comprehensive activity logging, and mandatory human oversight. Those safeguards are intended to address concerns that autonomous AI systems could introduce new security risks if allowed to operate without appropriate supervision.

The announcement comes as businesses worldwide increase spending on cybersecurity amid growing ransomware attacks, software supply-chain threats, and AI-enabled cybercrime. Technology companies are racing to integrate generative AI into enterprise security platforms in hopes of reducing the time between discovering a vulnerability and deploying a fix.

For businesses, that window is often the difference between a routine software update and a costly data breach involving customer records, operational disruptions, or ransomware demands.

Cognizant is betting that pairing OpenAI’s GPT-5.5 with thousands of experienced cybersecurity professionals will help customers close that gap more quickly while maintaining the human judgment required for enterprise security. As competition intensifies among major technology and consulting firms to deliver AI-powered cybersecurity solutions, customers are likely to judge success not by the sophistication of the AI itself, but by whether it prevents real-world cyberattacks.

JBizNews Desk | Teaneck, New Jersey
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

TRENTON, N.J. — Governor Mikie Sherrill signed three energy bills into law on Tuesday, July 7, while announcing one-time credits on this summer’s electric bills for every residential customer in the state. Her administration said the package, combined with actions taken over the past six months, is expected to save New Jersey ratepayers more than $1 billion annually, citing an analysis by Synapse Energy Economics.

The centerpiece of the legislative package is a first-of-its-kind policy aimed at the massive data centers powering the artificial intelligence economy.

Under the new Data Center Fair Share law, sponsored by Assemblyman Dave Bailey Jr. and Senator John Burzichelli, New Jersey will create a separate utility rate class for data centers with peak electricity demand of at least 50 megawatts. Instead of spreading the costs of new grid infrastructure across households and small businesses, those large facilities will be responsible for paying for the electric system upgrades needed to support their own operations.

The New Jersey Board of Public Utilities (BPU) has 12 months to establish the new rules.

Speaking during an event in Camden, Sherrill said the law is designed to protect everyday ratepayers.

“We’ve set them aside in a separate class of utility users, so that if we have storms like this, they will be first impacted, not normal ratepayers,” she said.

The legislation also encourages large data centers to bring additional clean energy generation onto the grid and requires them to reduce electricity usage first when demand approaches system capacity.

A second bill eliminates what supporters describe as an outdated financial incentive that allowed utilities to earn an additional return on equity simply because they participated in PJM Interconnection, the regional electric grid operator serving 13 states and the District of Columbia. Those costs were passed on to customers through transmission charges.

Supporters estimate eliminating the incentive will save ratepayers approximately $60 million annually.

The third measure, known as the Advanced Grid Technologies Act, increases state oversight of major transmission investments. Utilities will now be required to obtain a Certificate of Public Convenience and Necessity before undertaking certain supplemental transmission projects.

Under the law, the BPU must act within 180 days under the standard review process or 120 days if utilities use advanced transmission technologies.

According to the governor’s office, supplemental transmission projects accounted for 79% of New Jersey’s transmission costs between 2008 and 2025, totaling approximately $14.7 billion. Citing the Rocky Mountain Institute, the administration noted that while New Jersey represents roughly 12% of PJM’s electricity demand, it accounts for nearly 22% of the regional grid’s supplemental transmission spending—the largest disparity of any state in the PJM system.

Alongside the legislation, Sherrill announced a $25 Residential Universal Bill Credit for all 3.6 million residential electric customers. Lower- and moderate-income households will receive an additional $150 through the Residential Energy Assistance Payment Program.

The Board of Public Utilities also renewed its Summer Termination Program, which prevents utility shutoffs for eligible vulnerable households during periods of extreme heat, and approved 12 new solar projects expected to generate enough electricity to power approximately 45,000 homes.

Assembly Speaker Craig Coughlin said the legislation closes a loophole that had unnecessarily increased costs for ratepayers under previous federal policy. BPU President Ben Hertz-Shargel joined the governor during the bill-signing ceremony.

Republican lawmakers criticized the package, arguing that while it increases oversight and changes cost allocation, it does not address New Jersey’s underlying electricity supply challenges by adding new power generation.

They also pointed to the size of this year’s universal bill credit. The $25 payment is significantly smaller than last year’s $100 credit, coming just days after severe July Fourth weekend storms left roughly 200,000 customers without power at the peak of the outages.

Sherrill acknowledged that the data center legislation alone will not immediately reduce electricity prices because wholesale power costs are set across the broader PJM regional market. New data centers built in neighboring states can still affect electricity prices in New Jersey, just as projects built in New Jersey can influence prices throughout the region.

Still, the governor said other states are already studying New Jersey’s approach to ensuring that the rapidly growing artificial intelligence industry pays a larger share of the infrastructure costs it creates.

For New Jersey families and small business owners facing another summer of high electricity bills, the immediate benefit comes in the form of bill credits. The longer-term impact will depend on how regulators implement the new laws over the next year and whether shifting more infrastructure costs to large energy users ultimately delivers the promised savings for ratepayers.

JBizNews Desk | Trenton

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

According to remarks made Tuesday, July 7, by President Donald Trump during a meeting with Turkish President Recep Tayyip Erdoğan, the United States is prepared to consider selling F-35 fighter jets to Turkey and revisiting sanctions that have blocked such a transaction for years. Trump said the administration would “certainly consider” the sale, describing Turkey as an important NATO ally while indicating the issue is now under active review.

The comments marked a significant shift in Washington’s posture toward Ankara. Rather than treating Turkey’s removal from the F-35 program as a settled matter, Trump suggested the issue could be revisited as part of broader efforts to strengthen U.S.-Turkish relations.

The dispute dates back to 2019, when the United States removed Turkey from the F-35 program after Ankara purchased Russia’s S-400 air-defense system. American officials argued that operating the Russian-made system alongside the fifth-generation stealth fighter could compromise highly sensitive military technology. Congress later reinforced that position through the Countering America’s Adversaries Through Sanctions Act (CAATSA) and subsequent defense legislation, effectively blocking future F-35 transfers while Turkey continues to possess the S-400 system.

Turkey previously invested approximately $1.7 billion in the F-35 program and had expected to receive aircraft before its participation was suspended. Several completed aircraft intended for Turkey have remained in storage in the United States since the program was halted.

Any reversal would face major political hurdles. While the White House can shape foreign policy, Congress continues to play a central role in approving major arms sales. Lawmakers from both parties have repeatedly opposed restoring Turkey’s access to the F-35 program unless Ankara permanently removes or relinquishes the Russian missile system. Several members of Congress have also raised concerns about Turkey’s regional policies, including tensions involving Greece and Cyprus.

One proposal that has circulated among policymakers would involve relocating the S-400 system to a third country, potentially creating a path toward resolving the dispute. No agreement has been reached, however, and significant diplomatic and legal questions remain.

The debate extends beyond the fighter aircraft themselves. The administration recently advanced plans for additional military sales involving F110 jet engines used in Turkey’s domestically developed KAAN fighter program, a move that also drew criticism from several lawmakers who questioned the strategic implications.

The financial stakes are substantial. The F-35 is manufactured by Lockheed Martin, while its engines are produced by Pratt & Whitney, a division of RTX. A Turkish return to the program would represent billions of dollars in potential orders for American aerospace manufacturers and thousands of companies throughout the defense supply chain. Turkey was previously both a customer and a manufacturing partner, supplying components used throughout the global F-35 production program.

For investors, the outcome could influence future revenue expectations across the U.S. defense sector. For NATO, the decision carries broader strategic implications, balancing alliance unity against longstanding security concerns surrounding Russian military technology.

For now, Trump’s remarks have reopened one of the alliance’s most contentious defense questions. Whether the proposal ultimately advances will depend not only on the White House but also on Congress, allied governments and Turkey’s willingness to address the issues that led to its removal from the F-35 program in the first place.

JBizNews Desk | Ankara

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Meta Platforms told a federal court on Monday that four states are seeking $1.4 trillion in penalties over claims the company intentionally designed Facebook and Instagram to addict children and teenagers while misleading the public about the risks—an amount so enormous that it exceeds the company’s entire stock market value and would rank among the largest corporate penalties ever pursued in American history.

Meta disclosed the figure in a July 6 court filing responding to the states’ proposed method for calculating penalties if they prevail at trial. The amount had not previously been made public and exceeds Meta’s market capitalization of roughly $1.3 trillion to $1.4 trillion. The company called the proposed penalty unprecedented, arguing it has “no analog in the history of consumer protection enforcement.”

The states leading the case are California, Colorado, Kentucky, and New Jersey. Their lawsuits accuse Meta of deliberately building features into its social media platforms designed to keep young users engaged for extended periods while publicly minimizing concerns about addiction and mental health. The case is scheduled to go to trial in August before U.S. District Judge Yvonne Gonzalez Rogers in Oakland, California.

The size of the proposed penalty stems from how the states calculate damages.

Although many of the detailed court filings remain under seal, attorneys for the states said during a June hearing that the total is based on multiplying the number of alleged violations by the maximum civil penalties allowed under each state’s consumer protection laws. Because the claims involve millions of young Facebook and Instagram users over multiple years, the potential penalties rapidly compound into the trillions of dollars.

Meta strongly disputes both the legal theory and the calculation.

The company argues that “social media addiction” is not a formally recognized psychiatric diagnosis and therefore contends that its public statements denying its platforms are addictive cannot be considered false or misleading. Meta also maintains that the attorneys general have failed to produce sufficient evidence showing the company intentionally deceived consumers.

Still, the states have already scored important legal victories before trial begins.

Last month, Judge Gonzalez Rogers denied Meta’s request to dismiss the case, ruling that genuine factual disputes remain over whether the company’s platforms were intentionally designed to be addictive, whether Meta knowingly misrepresented those risks, and whether children and teenagers were specifically targeted. The judge also ruled that Meta failed to fully comply with portions of the federal Children’s Online Privacy Protection Act (COPPA), giving the states a significant procedural win heading into trial.

Following that ruling, California Attorney General Rob Bonta accused Meta of placing profits ahead of children’s safety and pledged to hold the company accountable for what he described as violations of consumer protection laws contributing to the nation’s youth mental health crisis.

The Oakland lawsuit is only one piece of a much broader legal battle facing the technology industry.

Meta, along with Snap, Alphabet, and ByteDance, faces thousands of lawsuits filed by states, school districts, families and local governments alleging that social media platforms knowingly incorporated addictive design features that contributed to worsening mental health among young users. Many of those cases also involve allegations surrounding children’s online privacy protections.

The financial exposure extends beyond the California case.

Earlier this year, New Mexico became the first state to take similar claims against Meta to trial, where a jury awarded the state $375 million after finding the company had violated consumer protection laws. A judge is still considering additional financial penalties and potential operational changes resulting from that verdict.

For investors, the proposed $1.4 trillion figure highlights the extraordinary legal risks facing one of the world’s largest technology companies. While a judgment approaching that amount appears highly unlikely, even substantially smaller verdicts—particularly if replicated by additional states—could reshape how major social media companies design products, disclose risks and interact with younger users.

For parents, however, the case centers on a simpler question: whether the social media platforms used daily by millions of teenagers were intentionally engineered to maximize engagement at the expense of children’s well-being.

The August trial will place those allegations before a federal jury, with New Jersey among the lead plaintiffs in what has become one of the largest and most closely watched consumer protection lawsuits ever brought against a technology company.

JBizNews Desk | Oakland, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump on Wednesday ordered an immediate stop to all U.S. trade with Spain, giving the instruction out loud to Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent during a press conference at the NATO summit in Ankara, Turkey. Seated beside NATO Secretary-General Mark Rutte, Trump called Spain a “wasted cause” and said the United States no longer wanted to do business with the country, including official visits.

The order followed the summit’s endorsement of a new alliance benchmark asking members to spend 5% of their gross domestic product on defense and related costs. Spain was the only NATO member to publicly reject the full target, instead negotiating flexibility in how it meets the alliance’s capability goals. Trump has singled out Madrid for months over that stance, arguing the country benefits from NATO protection while spending less than its share.

At the podium, Trump turned to Bessent and told him he did not want any trade with Spain. Bessent answered, “Yes, sir.” Trump then said to take care of it immediately and not to talk to Spanish officials, calling them “hopeless” and predicting they would come back asking to trade again. He also said Spain had treated Rutte poorly and that the secretary-general “shouldn’t carry” the country inside the alliance.

Rutte pushed back gently. He told Trump that Spain had raised its defense spending to 2% of GDP and had made a large step over the past year, though he acknowledged there were still issues to resolve. Figures from the Stockholm International Peace Research Institute show Spain spent 2.1% of GDP on defense in 2025, up from 1.4% in 2021, still trailing many European members.

The office of Spanish Prime Minister Pedro Sánchez played down the remarks, saying it viewed them as business as usual and had no plan to change what it called an excellent relationship with Washington. Sánchez, who leads a minority government, has repeatedly clashed with Trump, including over the U.S. war in Iran. Spain has refused to let the United States use the Rota and Morón military bases in the south for operations tied to that conflict, and Sánchez earlier called the U.S.-Israeli campaign against Iran a serious mistake.

Any actual trade cutoff faces a basic obstacle: Spain does not set its own trade policy. As a member of the European Union, Spain negotiates trade as part of a 27-nation customs union handled by the European Commission in Brussels. Individual member states cannot be singled out without affecting the entire single market, and such a move could trigger a coordinated response from the bloc. European Commission deputy spokesperson Olof Gill said the EU had been clear and consistent on the issue. It was also the second time Trump has instructed Bessent to halt commerce with Spain; after the first order in March, trade continued normally.

The numbers show a modest but real relationship. Trade between the two countries totaled roughly $48 billion in 2025, with the United States exporting about $26.6 billion in goods and importing about $21.3 billion, according to Census Bureau data, leaving Washington with a surplus. Spain is the world’s largest olive oil exporter and also ships auto parts, steel, chemicals, refined petroleum, and packaged pharmaceuticals to American buyers. Only about 4.9% of Spain’s goods exports go to the United States, a smaller share than for Italy or Germany, which analysts say leaves Madrid less exposed than other European economies.

Markets moved on the comments, though a separate Trump remark added pressure. Spain’s benchmark IBEX 35 index fell nearly 3% by midday in Madrid, and the yield on Spain’s 10-year government bond rose about 10 basis points to 3.5682% as prices dropped. The broader pan-European Stoxx 600 slid 1.9%, and oil prices spiked after Trump separately said he now considers the Iran ceasefire over.

Trump used the summit to press other allies as well, repeating his push for U.S. control of Greenland, which drew a firm response from Denmark, and suggesting he could pull American troops out of Europe if members did not spend more. The White House did not provide details on whether the administration is drafting formal trade restrictions against Spain or whether Trump was voicing frustration. For now, it remained unclear how an order to stop trading with a single EU member would be carried out in practice.

JBizNews Desk| Washington D.C © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Federal Trade Commission (FTC) on Monday issued warning letters to seven companies it says falsely marketed products as “Made in the USA,” and to an eighth that labeled goods “Made in Texas,” even though the products were imported in whole or in significant part.

Christopher Mufarrige, Director of the FTC’s Bureau of Consumer Protection, said consumers who pay a premium for products marketed as American-made deserve confidence that those claims are truthful. He said the agency will continue holding companies accountable if they undermine that trust through misleading origin claims.

The warning letters, made public on July 6, were sent to companies selling a wide range of products, including drums, industrial laser machinery, coordinate measuring machines and e-cigarettes. The recipients were A&F Drum Company, Z-Tech Advanced Technologies, Vtron Inc. (doing business as Vtron Lasers), Helmel Engineering Products, NebTech, Lucky Bar Holdings, and My Vape Order.

At the center of the enforcement effort is the FTC’s Made in USA Labeling Rule, which requires that products advertised as American-made be “all or virtually all” manufactured in the United States. Simply assembling imported parts domestically generally does not qualify. The overwhelming majority of a product’s components and manufacturing must originate in the United States before companies can legally make an unqualified “Made in USA” claim.

The latest warnings are part of a broader federal enforcement effort.

In March, President Donald Trump signed an executive order titled “Ensuring Truthful Advertising of Products Claiming to be Made in America,” directing the FTC to prioritize investigations involving deceptive domestic-origin claims. The order elevated enforcement of American-made labeling to one of the agency’s leading consumer-protection priorities.

The Commission has already begun acting on that directive.

Earlier this year, the FTC announced a nationwide enforcement sweep targeting companies marketing American flags, footwear and electronic dartboards using allegedly deceptive origin claims. Those cases resulted in enforcement actions requiring businesses to stop making unlawful claims and provide financial relief to affected consumers. Companies that continue violating the Made in USA Labeling Rule may face significant civil penalties.

For now, Monday’s letters stop short of formal enforcement.

Instead, they serve as official warnings urging the companies to review their marketing practices and bring their advertising into compliance. Historically, warning letters often precede stronger regulatory action if businesses fail to correct the alleged violations.

For manufacturers, retailers and distributors, the stakes are substantial.

Products marketed as American-made often command premium prices because many consumers intentionally choose to support domestic manufacturing and American jobs. If companies falsely claim domestic origin, they can gain an unfair competitive advantage over manufacturers that genuinely absorb the higher costs associated with producing goods in the United States.

The FTC emphasized that point in announcing the letters, arguing that enforcement protects not only consumers but also honest manufacturers that invest in American facilities, workers and supply chains.

The timing also carries symbolic significance.

The enforcement initiative comes as the United States approaches celebrations surrounding the nation’s 250th anniversary, with renewed attention on domestic manufacturing and “Made in America” initiatives. FTC Chairman Andrew Ferguson has repeatedly identified truthful country-of-origin advertising as a key priority for the Commission’s consumer-protection agenda.

For the companies receiving warning letters, the next step will likely involve evaluating whether their sourcing, manufacturing and supply chains fully support the marketing claims appearing on their products and websites. Many businesses manufacture products using a combination of domestic and imported components, making the distinction between “Assembled in the USA” and “Made in USA” increasingly important from both a legal and marketing perspective.

For consumers, the message is straightforward.

When shoppers choose to pay more for products advertised as American-made, regulators want to ensure those claims accurately reflect where the products were manufactured. Monday’s warning letters signal that the FTC intends to closely scrutinize those claims and, when necessary, take action to protect both consumers and businesses that play by the rules.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Elon Musk is making one of his boldest promises yet — and a famous market skeptic has already shot it down.

Musk, the chief executive of Tesla and SpaceX, wrote on X on Thursday, July 2, that machines will soon handle so much of the world’s work that people will no longer need jobs to get by. “AI+Robots will be able to do everything, resulting in universal high income,” he wrote. “Work will be optional.”

The pushback came fast. Michael Burry, the investor made famous by The Big Short for calling the 2008 housing crash, replied with a single word: “False.” Then he added, “There will be revolution first.”

Musk was responding to an essay posted the same day by fellow billionaire Chamath Palihapitiya, a venture capitalist and former Facebook executive. The piece, titled The Great Descent, argued that the cost of expertise is falling toward zero as AI tools let ordinary people tap skills that once required hiring a lawyer, an accountant or a consultant.

Musk has made a version of this pitch for years. His argument is that AI and robots will drive down the cost of nearly everything — food, housing, healthcare, energy — until governments can afford to hand citizens enough money to live well. He calls it “universal high income,” a step beyond the “universal basic income” that former presidential candidate Andrew Yang campaigned on in 2019 with his $1,000-a-month plan. Musk’s version promises not just survival, but comfort.

He has pushed the idea even further. Musk has said saving for retirement could become “irrelevant” within 20 years because there will be so much wealth to go around that no one will need a nest egg.

Burry is not buying the timeline. On Substack last week, he disclosed that he is betting against Tesla stock. Back in late January, he called Musk “an American treasure but also a desperately incentivized futurist” — a jab at the billionaire’s habit of predicting a future that happens to line up with his own companies. Burry knows something about early calls: his bet against the mid-2000s housing bubble proved right, but years too soon.

His warning about revolution points to the gap between Musk’s rosy end state and the difficult transition that could come first. The concern is that if AI displaces large numbers of workers before any broad safety net is in place, the result could be widespread social unrest rather than a smooth transition into leisure.

He is not the only heavyweight worried about the handoff. Ray Dalio, founder of the hedge fund Bridgewater Associates, has warned that AI could widen the gap between rich and poor and raise the risk of internal conflict — even civil war. On The Diary of a CEO podcast last fall, Dalio said governments will need a redistribution plan for the AI era and that it must give people more than money, since idleness itself breeds anger. JPMorgan Chase chief Jamie Dimon has likewise spoken about how sharply AI could reshape the workplace.

For everyday workers, the debate is not academic. Some companies have cited AI as one factor in workforce reductions, and the promise of a comfortable government income remains a long way from any paycheck. The question sitting under the billionaire back-and-forth is simple: who pays, and when.

A “high income” for everyone would mean moving trillions of dollars from the companies and investors who own the AI to the workers it replaces. That is a political fight, not a technical one — and critics doubt the same billionaires cheering the technology would line up to fund the redistribution. As analysts have noted, the whole vision rests on wealthy backers agreeing to a massive transfer of their own money.

Governments have tested small versions of the idea. Cash-transfer pilots and one-time stimulus checks have come and gone. But turning that into a permanent, comfortable income for entire populations would demand a rebuilt tax system and a level of political agreement that does not exist right now.

For now, the two men stand at opposite poles: Musk promising abundance and Burry warning of upheaval before it arrives. The workers caught in between are left watching the machines improve every month — and wondering which billionaire has it right.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

WASHINGTON — The International Monetary Fund (IMF) lowered its outlook for the world economy on Wednesday, July 8, trimming its 2026 global growth forecast to 3.0% and raising its inflation projection, even as it argued that the world had absorbed the shock of the Middle East war better than many had feared. Deniz Igan, who leads the World Economic Studies division of the Fund’s research department, presented the newly released update during a morning briefing in Washington.

The new figure marks a slight downgrade from the 3.1% growth forecast the IMF issued in April. The Fund expects global growth to recover to 3.4% in 2027, though that would still remain below the 3.5% average pace recorded in 2024 and 2025. On prices, it raised its 2026 headline inflation forecast by three-tenths of a percentage point to 4.7%, before projecting inflation to ease to 3.9% in 2027.

The Fund’s cautiously optimistic outlook rests on one critical assumption. Its forecast is built on expectations that the Strait of Hormuz—the narrow Persian Gulf shipping lane through which a significant share of the world’s oil supply travels—will begin reopening in mid-July and gradually return to normal conditions by March 2027. Based on that assumption, the IMF credited releases from strategic petroleum reserves, ample commercial inventories and resilient demand from the technology sector with helping the global economy withstand the conflict better than many economists had expected.

That assumption appeared to come under pressure almost immediately.

The report was released the same morning that President Donald Trump, speaking in Ankara ahead of a NATO summit, declared that the understanding between the United States and Iran was “over.” His remarks followed overnight military action after attacks on commercial vessels near the Strait of Hormuz. Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps said it had targeted U.S. military facilities in Bahrain and Kuwait in response, while the U.S. Treasury Department revoked the license that had allowed Iran to continue selling oil on global markets.

The contrast between the IMF’s assumptions and rapidly changing geopolitical developments was striking.

While the Fund’s baseline forecast assumes the energy shock will gradually ease, renewed tensions threaten to keep oil prices elevated and increase the risk of additional supply disruptions. Brent crude traded above $76 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate (WTI) remained above $72 per barrel, extending gains as traders monitored developments in the Gulf. The IMF noted that energy prices were already running roughly 25% higher than before the conflict began on February 28. Should disruptions in the Strait of Hormuz continue, the Fund’s baseline projections could prove overly optimistic.

The regional outlook reflected those risks.

The IMF left its 2026 U.S. growth forecast unchanged at 2.3% and slightly increased its 2027 estimate to 2.2%. It reduced its outlook for the euro area to 0.9% from 1.1%, lowered Japan to 0.6%, and trimmed India, while still among the world’s fastest-growing major economies, to 6.4%. The largest downgrade came in the Middle East and Central Asia, where projected 2026 growth fell by 1.2 percentage points to just 0.7%, although the IMF expects a stronger rebound in 2027 if regional conditions stabilize.

Global trade is also expected to cool.

The IMF projects world trade growth will slow to 3.5% in 2026, down from 5% in 2025, a year boosted by companies accelerating imports ahead of higher U.S. tariffs. Trade growth is then expected to recover to 4.3% in 2027.

One subtle but significant change also stood out.

In its April forecast, released shortly after the conflict began, the IMF outlined multiple economic scenarios, including a severe case in which prolonged energy disruptions pushed inflation above 6% and significantly weakened global growth. In Wednesday’s report, however, the Fund returned to a single baseline forecast and removed those alternative downside scenarios, even as geopolitical uncertainty appears to be increasing.

For American businesses and consumers, the report offers both reassurance and caution.

The IMF continues to see the U.S. economy expanding at a healthy pace while inflation gradually moderates over the next two years. At the same time, much of that outlook depends on energy markets remaining relatively stable. Higher oil prices eventually ripple through transportation, manufacturing, shipping and retail prices, affecting everything from gasoline to groceries.

The IMF’s message is that the global economy has shown greater resilience than many expected. Whether that optimism proves justified will depend largely on events unfolding in the Middle East. As markets digested the report, investors were already watching developments in the Gulf that could reshape the very assumptions underlying the Fund’s latest forecast.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Intel confirmed Monday, July 6, that it is increasing prices on several of its computer processors, citing rising supply chain costs and continued strong demand as the artificial intelligence boom reshapes the global semiconductor industry. The move marks a significant shift for an industry where chip prices have historically fallen over time as technology improves and manufacturing becomes more efficient.

The price increases affect both consumer processors and high-end server chips used in corporate data centers, underscoring how AI-related demand is now influencing virtually every segment of the semiconductor market.

For consumers, Intel raised suggested prices on several processors in its Core Ultra 200S Plus desktop lineup. Depending on the model, prices increased by roughly $30 to $50, representing increases of approximately 10% to 17% over previous suggested retail prices.

The larger increases came in Intel’s data-center business. Several Xeon server processors now carry price hikes ranging from hundreds of dollars to well over $1,000. Intel’s flagship Xeon 6980P processor, for example, increased from $12,460 to $13,955, reflecting one of the largest price adjustments in the company’s enterprise lineup.

The reason extends far beyond Intel itself.

Artificial intelligence has triggered an unprecedented wave of investment in data centers around the world. Technology companies, cloud providers and governments continue spending billions of dollars expanding AI computing infrastructure, dramatically increasing demand for advanced memory, storage and semiconductor manufacturing capacity.

That surge has tightened supplies throughout the semiconductor industry.

Although many of Intel’s processors are not specifically designed for AI workloads, they compete for manufacturing capacity, advanced packaging and critical components with chips produced for AI applications. As demand continues rising, component costs have increased across much of the electronics supply chain.

Industry analysts say Intel is not alone.

Several semiconductor manufacturers have recently announced or signaled price increases tied to higher production costs and ongoing shortages of advanced memory components. Suppliers throughout the industry continue facing pressure as demand outpaces available manufacturing capacity for many high-performance technologies.

The ripple effects extend well beyond semiconductor companies.

Computer manufacturers, enterprise technology providers and cloud-computing companies all depend on processors whose production costs continue rising. Higher component prices eventually work their way into desktops, laptops, servers and enterprise technology purchases made by businesses around the world.

For consumers, the timing could matter.

Retail prices do not always increase immediately because many stores continue selling inventory purchased before manufacturers raised prices. However, analysts expect higher wholesale costs to gradually reach retailers over the coming weeks and months as existing inventory is replaced.

Businesses planning major technology upgrades may also face higher costs.

Organizations purchasing servers, upgrading office computers or expanding data-center capacity could see larger hardware budgets as semiconductor pricing adjusts to current market conditions.

The broader significance highlights one of the unexpected consequences of the artificial intelligence revolution.

While AI promises enormous productivity gains, it is also increasing demand for the components that power modern computing. That competition is pushing prices higher not only for specialized AI hardware but also for products used every day by businesses, schools and consumers.

Intel’s decision reflects growing confidence that demand remains strong enough to support higher pricing despite continued competition throughout the semiconductor industry. The company left prices unchanged on many products, suggesting it is focusing increases on processors experiencing the strongest demand rather than implementing broad price hikes across its entire portfolio.

As AI investment continues accelerating worldwide, industry observers expect semiconductor pricing to remain one of the most closely watched indicators of supply-chain conditions. Whether additional manufacturers follow Intel with further price increases may help determine how much more consumers and businesses ultimately pay for technology over the coming year.

JBizNews Desk | Santa Clara, Calif.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. housing market continues showing signs of improvement in inventory, but for many Americans, homeownership remains financially out of reach as mortgage rates remain stubbornly high. According to the latest housing data from Freddie Mac, the average 30-year fixed mortgage continues hovering around 6.5%, keeping monthly payments elevated even as more homes become available for sale across much of the country.

Higher borrowing costs have become the single biggest obstacle facing prospective homebuyers.

At today’s mortgage rates, financing a $400,000 home requires monthly principal and interest payments exceeding $2,500, hundreds of dollars more each month than buyers would have paid just a few years ago when mortgage rates were near historic lows.

That difference has dramatically reduced affordability, particularly for first-time buyers struggling to save for down payments while managing higher living costs.

Although housing inventory has gradually increased this year, demand has remained relatively subdued.

More homeowners have begun listing their properties, and builders continue adding new homes to the market. Sellers are also becoming more willing to negotiate prices, offer mortgage-rate buydowns and provide additional incentives to attract buyers.

Even so, elevated financing costs continue limiting affordability.

Mortgage rates closely follow movements in the 10-year U.S. Treasury yield, which remains influenced by inflation expectations. As long as inflation remains above the Federal Reserve’s target, economists expect mortgage rates to remain relatively elevated.

Another challenge continues restricting supply.

Millions of homeowners refinanced during the pandemic when mortgage rates fell below 4%, with many locking in rates closer to 3%. Those homeowners now have little incentive to sell because purchasing another home would require accepting significantly higher financing costs.

Economists refer to this as the “lock-in effect,” and it continues limiting the number of existing homes entering the market.

Despite those challenges, there are encouraging signs.

The National Association of Realtors recently reported existing-home sales improving from earlier this year, while inventory continues expanding in many markets. Slower home-price appreciation is also allowing incomes to gradually catch up after several years of rapid housing inflation.

Builders have responded by offering more incentives, including mortgage-rate assistance, closing-cost credits and upgrades designed to improve affordability without reducing advertised home prices.

Housing analysts believe those concessions could create opportunities for financially prepared buyers willing to enter the market despite higher interest rates.

For many households, however, affordability remains the deciding factor.

Higher mortgage payments affect not only purchasing decisions but also how much home buyers can qualify to finance. Even modest changes in mortgage rates can significantly alter monthly payments and purchasing power.

Financial experts generally caution buyers against waiting indefinitely for mortgage rates to return to pandemic-era lows, noting those historically low borrowing costs were largely the result of extraordinary economic conditions unlikely to return soon.

Instead, many advisers recommend purchasing when personal finances allow rather than attempting to predict future interest-rate movements.

For business leaders, the housing market remains an important economic indicator because residential real estate influences consumer spending, construction activity, banking, home improvement retailers and numerous related industries.

The next housing reports later this month will provide additional insight into whether improving inventory and moderating home-price growth are beginning to stimulate stronger buyer activity.

For now, the housing market remains caught between improving supply and stubborn affordability challenges.

More homes may finally be available, but until mortgage rates move meaningfully lower or household incomes rise further, many Americans will continue finding that owning a home remains one of the biggest financial challenges they face.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

NEW YORK — U.S. stocks closed lower on Tuesday, July 7, after the U.S. Treasury Department revoked the license that had allowed Iran to sell oil on the world market, sending crude prices sharply higher and adding fresh pressure to a market already struggling with a broad selloff in semiconductor stocks.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average fell 130.76 points, or 0.25%, to 52,925.15, surrendering gains after reaching another all-time intraday high earlier in the session. The S&P 500 lost 0.45% to finish at 7,503.85, while the Nasdaq Composite dropped 1.16% to 25,818.69, weighed down by another steep decline in chipmakers.

Technology once again led the market lower.

Micron Technology fell 4.7%, while KLA Corp., Marvell Technology, Broadcom and Advanced Micro Devices also posted notable losses. The VanEck Semiconductor ETF, a closely watched benchmark for the industry, dropped more than 3%, extending a retreat that has accelerated over the past week.

The weakness came despite Samsung Electronics reporting record quarterly operating profit earlier in the day. Under normal circumstances, strong results from one of the world’s largest memory-chip manufacturers would have lifted sentiment across the sector. Instead, investors continued rotating out of the semiconductor companies that have fueled Wall Street’s artificial intelligence rally throughout much of the year.

Mike Bailey, director of research at FBB Capital Partners, said expectations for many AI-related companies have climbed so rapidly that even strong earnings are no longer enough to satisfy investors. As valuations have expanded, markets have become increasingly sensitive to any sign that growth may be slowing.

Energy markets added another layer of pressure.

Oil prices surged after the U.S. Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) revoked the general license that had permitted Iranian oil exports. The move followed a series of attacks on commercial vessels near the Strait of Hormuz, one of the world’s most important energy shipping lanes.

Brent crude rose more than 5% to above $76 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate (WTI) climbed more than 5% to above $72 per barrel. Higher oil prices boosted energy shares but raised fresh concerns that rising fuel costs could eventually reignite inflation and weigh on consumers and businesses.

There were several notable company-specific moves.

Crinetics Pharmaceuticals surged 98.8% after Vertex Pharmaceuticals agreed to acquire the biotechnology company in a deal valued at approximately $10 billion. Vertex shares slipped about 2% following the announcement as investors weighed the cost of the acquisition.

Meanwhile, SpaceX, which made its public market debut on June 12, fell nearly 7% during its first trading session as a member of the Nasdaq-100 Index, a difficult start for one of the market’s newest high-profile technology stocks.

Despite Tuesday’s decline, market strategists noted that the selling remains concentrated in the companies that led the market’s gains for much of the past year. Rather than a broad-based exit from equities, investors have increasingly shifted capital into sectors such as healthcare, financials, insurance and other areas that had previously lagged the technology rally.

That rotation will be closely watched in the weeks ahead. If money continues flowing into other sectors, it could help support the broader market even as technology stocks undergo a correction. If selling spreads beyond semiconductors, however, broader market volatility could increase.

The other major variable remains oil.

As long as tensions involving Iran continue to push crude prices higher, the effects are likely to ripple well beyond Wall Street. Higher energy costs eventually feed into transportation, manufacturing, shipping and consumer prices, creating additional challenges for businesses already navigating an uncertain economic environment.

Tuesday’s trading reflected those competing forces. Investors continued taking profits in high-flying technology names while weighing the economic impact of rising geopolitical tensions and higher oil prices. Whether the current market rotation proves temporary or marks the beginning of a more sustained shift away from technology will likely depend on corporate earnings, inflation trends and developments in the Middle East over the coming weeks.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Nikkei Asia reported Monday, July 6, that Apple is preparing its most ambitious iPhone rollout in years, with plans to introduce at least five new iPhone models between late 2026 and the first half of 2027. The expanded lineup comes as the technology giant works to stay ahead of a global memory chip shortage that is driving up costs across the electronics industry and putting pressure on smartphone manufacturers worldwide.

According to the report, Apple plans to launch the iPhone 18, iPhone 18 Pro, iPhone 18 Pro Max, a lower-priced iPhone 18e, and the company’s long-awaited foldable iPhone, marking Apple’s first entry into the rapidly growing foldable smartphone market.

Unlike previous years, Apple is expected to split the launches into two phases. The premium Pro models and the foldable device are expected to debut during the company’s traditional fall product event, while the standard iPhone 18 and 18e models are reportedly scheduled for release during the spring of 2027.

The strategy reflects more than product planning. It also demonstrates Apple’s ability to navigate one of the semiconductor industry’s biggest challenges: securing enough memory chips during an unprecedented supply crunch fueled by artificial intelligence.

The explosive growth of AI data centers has dramatically increased demand for advanced memory chips used in servers and high-performance computing. As cloud providers and technology companies race to expand AI infrastructure, competition for memory components has intensified, pushing prices higher throughout the global electronics supply chain.

Apple has largely insulated itself from those shortages by leveraging its enormous purchasing power. According to Nikkei Asia, the company has already secured components for approximately 80 million iPhones scheduled for production during the second half of 2026. Total iPhone production this year is expected to exceed 220 million devices, giving Apple one of the strongest supply positions in the smartphone industry.

That scale has become a major competitive advantage.

While Apple continues securing production capacity, several Chinese smartphone manufacturers—including Xiaomi, Oppo and Vivo—have reportedly reduced production targets after struggling to obtain sufficient memory supplies at acceptable prices. Industry executives told Nikkei that Apple’s purchasing leverage gives it priority access to critical components that smaller competitors often cannot match.

Even Apple, however, has begun feeling the effects of rising semiconductor costs.

The company recently increased prices on portions of its MacBook and iPad product lines as memory and storage expenses climbed. Analysts say similar cost pressures could eventually affect future iPhone pricing, particularly if semiconductor shortages continue into next year.

Much of the excitement surrounding Apple’s roadmap centers on its first foldable iPhone.

Industry reports indicate Apple has spent years refining the device, focusing heavily on reducing the visible crease that has affected competing foldable smartphones. The premium model is expected to feature a titanium frame, advanced display technology supplied by Samsung Display, and a book-style folding design with separate inner and outer screens.

Because of its complex manufacturing process, analysts expect initial production volumes to remain relatively limited. Early estimates suggest the foldable iPhone could carry a price exceeding $2,000, making it Apple’s most expensive smartphone ever.

For consumers, the broader story extends beyond new devices.

The AI boom reshaping Silicon Valley is also changing the economics of everyday electronics. As technology companies invest hundreds of billions of dollars into artificial intelligence infrastructure, competition for advanced semiconductors continues pushing manufacturing costs higher across phones, tablets, laptops and personal computers.

Apple’s ability to secure long-term supply agreements gives it advantages many competitors lack, allowing the company to continue launching products even as shortages affect other manufacturers. Whether that advantage ultimately translates into higher market share or higher consumer prices will become clearer as the new iPhone lineup begins reaching customers.

Apple has not officially confirmed the reported product roadmap and traditionally does not comment on unreleased products before its annual launch events.

JBizNews Desk | Cupertino, Calif.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A report released by the National Energy Assistance Directors Association (NEADA) and the Center for Energy Poverty and Climate warns that American households are on track to pay the highest summer electric bills ever recorded, as soaring temperatures combine with rising electricity prices to strain family budgets across the country. The report, released in June and highlighted again as a dangerous heat wave grips much of the United States, projects the average household will spend approximately $792 on electricity for cooling between June and September, up more than 10% from last summer.

The increase comes as millions of Americans battle another stretch of extreme heat. Large portions of the country continue experiencing above-normal temperatures, forcing air conditioners to run longer while utilities struggle to meet growing demand.

According to NOAA, above-average temperatures are expected across much of the United States throughout the summer, increasing electricity consumption at the same time energy prices continue climbing.

“Families are getting hit from both sides,” said Mark Wolfe, Executive Director of NEADA. “Electricity prices continue to rise, and hotter summers mean households need to use more electricity simply to stay safe.”

The report estimates that summer cooling costs have climbed nearly 40% since 2020, reflecting both higher electricity prices and increased demand driven by longer and more intense heat waves.

Several factors are contributing to the rising cost of electricity, but one of the fastest-growing pressures comes from the rapid expansion of artificial intelligence.

Across the country, technology companies are building massive AI data centers that require enormous amounts of electricity to operate. Those facilities consume power around the clock, increasing demand on regional electric grids and requiring utilities to invest billions of dollars in new generation capacity, transmission lines and infrastructure upgrades.

Industry analysts say those investments are increasingly finding their way into customer utility bills.

Additional pressure comes from higher fuel costs, continued infrastructure improvements and growing electricity demand from homes, businesses and electric vehicles.

For many families, the financial strain is becoming difficult to manage.

The report estimates millions of households remain behind on their utility payments, while total consumer utility debt continues climbing nationwide. Lower-income families are particularly vulnerable because cooling is no longer considered simply a comfort but an important public health necessity during prolonged periods of extreme heat.

Health experts warn that reducing air conditioning too aggressively can create dangerous conditions, particularly for seniors, young children and individuals with chronic medical conditions.

Rather than turning cooling systems off completely, energy experts recommend practical steps that can reduce electricity consumption without compromising safety.

Simple measures include raising the thermostat by one degree, replacing dirty HVAC filters, sealing air leaks around windows and doors, closing blinds during the hottest parts of the day and using ceiling fans to improve air circulation. Even modest efficiency improvements can lower monthly electricity costs while maintaining comfortable indoor temperatures.

Federal and state assistance programs may also help qualifying households.

The U.S. Department of Energy continues supporting energy-efficiency upgrades through various grant programs designed to improve insulation, replace older cooling equipment and reduce household energy consumption. Many states also offer utility assistance programs for qualifying low-income families during periods of extreme weather.

NEADA is urging Congress to increase funding for the Low Income Home Energy Assistance Program (LIHEAP), arguing that current funding has not kept pace with rising energy costs and more frequent extreme heat events.

The organization also recommends stronger consumer protections to prevent utility shutoffs during dangerous heat waves, particularly for vulnerable populations.

For businesses, higher electricity costs present another challenge.

Restaurants, retailers, manufacturers and office buildings all face rising operating expenses as cooling costs increase during the busiest months of the year. Many companies are responding by investing in energy-efficient lighting, upgraded HVAC systems and smart-building technology designed to reduce long-term utility expenses.

The report highlights how one of the biggest economic stories of 2026—the rapid expansion of artificial intelligence—is affecting Americans in unexpected ways. While AI promises major productivity gains, the enormous electricity required to power advanced computing facilities is adding new pressure to an already strained electric grid.

For households, the message is straightforward: expect another expensive summer.

With temperatures expected to remain above normal across much of the country and electricity demand continuing to grow, energy experts encourage consumers to prepare for higher monthly utility bills while taking advantage of available conservation measures and assistance programs wherever possible.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

According to comments made Monday, July 6, by Panmure Liberum strategist Joachim Klement during CNBC’s Squawk Box Europe, investors are beginning to view parts of the defense industry less like traditional weapons manufacturers and more like technology companies. The shift reflects the growing importance of electronic warfare, artificial intelligence, advanced software, drones and next-generation battlefield systems in modern military operations.

For decades, defense contractors were valued primarily on their long-term government contracts, predictable cash flow and large backlogs of aircraft, ships, missiles and armored vehicles. Today, analysts say the industry’s fastest-growing opportunities are increasingly centered on technology rather than conventional hardware.

“Electronic warfare is a tech phenomenon,” Klement said during the interview, arguing that companies developing advanced software, electronic surveillance, communications systems and autonomous technologies deserve higher valuations than traditional defense manufacturers.

The comments come as defense spending continues rising around the world. Governments across Europe, North America and Asia are committing billions of dollars to modernize their militaries following growing geopolitical tensions and ongoing conflicts. Those investments are creating new opportunities for companies developing advanced military technology while also supporting established defense contractors with large order backlogs.

Investors have responded by pouring money into the sector. Shares of several major defense companies have climbed sharply over the past several years as governments increased military budgets and accelerated procurement programs. While traditional manufacturers continue benefiting from demand for aircraft, missiles and defense systems, companies with strong exposure to artificial intelligence, drones, cybersecurity and electronic warfare have attracted growing investor interest.

Analysts say the nature of warfare itself is changing. Modern conflicts increasingly rely on real-time intelligence, satellite communications, unmanned aircraft, electronic jamming, cyber capabilities and software-driven command systems. Those technologies often evolve much faster than conventional military platforms and require continuous innovation rather than decades-long production cycles.

Klement also noted that investors are becoming more selective when evaluating defense companies. Rather than treating every contractor as a beneficiary of higher military spending, investors are paying closer attention to where governments are directing new funding. Businesses positioned in rapidly growing technology segments may receive higher valuations than companies focused primarily on legacy defense programs.

He pointed to the cancellation of certain large defense programs in Europe as an example of how changing military priorities can reshape industry expectations. Even with rising defense budgets, governments continue reviewing projects to ensure they align with future operational needs and evolving battlefield requirements.

Another factor influencing recent trading has been the broader technology sector. According to Klement, some recent weakness in defense shares reflected investment flows moving into artificial intelligence-related stocks rather than deteriorating business fundamentals. Portfolio managers continue balancing exposure across sectors while seeking companies positioned to benefit from long-term technology trends.

For investors, the distinction matters. Traditional defense companies often trade based on predictable earnings and government contracts. Technology-focused defense firms may command higher valuations because of faster expected growth, recurring software revenue and continued innovation.

The broader business implications extend beyond defense. Increasing collaboration between aerospace, software developers, semiconductor companies, communications providers and artificial intelligence firms is creating new opportunities across multiple industries. As governments invest in advanced defense technologies, suppliers throughout those ecosystems also stand to benefit.

Industry observers expect defense modernization to remain a major theme over the coming decade. Whether developing autonomous systems, electronic warfare capabilities, advanced sensors or secure communications, companies delivering next-generation technologies are expected to play a growing role in military procurement.

For business leaders and investors, the message is clear: the defense industry is no longer defined solely by tanks, ships and fighter jets. Increasingly, it is being driven by software, data, artificial intelligence and electronic systems, changing how Wall Street values the companies shaping the future of national security.

JBizNews Desk | London

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

According to analyst reports released Tuesday, July 7, following SpaceX’s IPO quiet period, Wall Street is sharply divided over just how valuable the company can become. Brian Gesuale of Raymond James initiated coverage with a “Strong Buy” rating and an $800 price target — the highest on Wall Street and roughly 430% above where the stock traded during Tuesday’s session. If shares ever reached that level, SpaceX would carry a market value of roughly $10.5 trillion, more than double the current value of Nvidia, the world’s largest publicly traded company.

The bullish call came as several investment banks published their first research reports on the newly public company. Morgan Stanley assigned a $300 price target, highlighting SpaceX’s long-term potential in launch services, satellite communications and artificial intelligence infrastructure. Goldman Sachs set a $205 target, while UBS came in at $210. Dan Ives of Wedbush Securities issued a $190 target. The company also joined the Nasdaq-100 Index, prompting billions of dollars in automatic purchases from index funds and exchange-traded funds that track the benchmark.

SpaceX completed its blockbuster initial public offering on June 12 under the ticker SPCX, becoming one of the largest IPOs ever. After an initial rally, the shares settled into a volatile trading range as investors weighed the company’s growth prospects against its lofty valuation.

The investment case extends far beyond rockets. SpaceX now combines its reusable launch business with the rapidly expanding Starlink satellite network and xAI, the artificial intelligence company merged into the business earlier this year. Chief Executive Elon Musk has outlined plans for space-based computing infrastructure capable of supporting next-generation AI workloads, while company filings describe an addressable market measured in the tens of trillions of dollars.

Not everyone believes those projections. Aswath Damodaran, professor of finance at New York University and one of Wall Street’s leading valuation experts, has argued that even a valuation above $1 trillion stretches reasonable assumptions. He has also questioned the company’s addressable market estimates, saying investors should distinguish between long-term vision and measurable financial performance.

The financial metrics illustrate the challenge. SpaceX generated approximately $18.7 billion in revenue last year while posting a net loss of roughly $5 billion. Even after its recent pullback, the shares continue to trade at a valuation far above most established technology companies on a price-to-sales basis. Morningstar analysts have likewise projected a more gradual revenue trajectory than many of the most optimistic forecasts currently circulating on Wall Street.

Investors also face structural risks. Additional insider shares are scheduled to become eligible for sale over the coming quarters, potentially increasing supply in the market. Meanwhile, Musk retains overwhelming voting control through the company’s dual-class share structure, limiting the influence of public shareholders on corporate decisions.

The debate carries consequences well beyond professional investors. With SpaceX now included in the Nasdaq-100, millions of Americans indirectly own shares through retirement accounts, pension funds and index funds. That broad ownership has renewed discussion in Washington over valuations, corporate governance and whether highly valued growth companies should become major components of passive investment portfolios so soon after going public.

For now, the gap between Wall Street’s highest and lowest expectations remains extraordinary. One respected analyst believes SpaceX could become the first company worth more than $10 trillion. Others believe investors have already priced in years of future growth. As the company begins life as a public corporation, the market will ultimately decide which view proves closer to reality.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Tesla and BYD reported strong second-quarter delivery results in figures released during the first week of July, underscoring the continued strength of the global electric vehicle market despite intensifying competition and shifting consumer demand. The latest delivery numbers show the world’s two largest electric vehicle manufacturers continuing to battle for market share as automakers race to expand production, lower prices and introduce new technology.

The quarterly results highlight a dramatic turnaround from the cautious outlook that surrounded the EV industry earlier this year. Concerns over slowing demand, higher borrowing costs and increased competition had weighed on the sector, but second-quarter deliveries indicate consumers continue embracing electric vehicles across many major markets.

BYD once again finished the quarter as the world’s largest seller of battery-electric passenger vehicles, delivering more than 557,000 fully electric vehicles during the April-through-June period. Tesla followed with more than 480,000 vehicle deliveries, marking one of the strongest quarters in the company’s history and reinforcing its position as the world’s leading pure electric vehicle manufacturer outside China.

Although BYD maintained its lead in total battery-electric deliveries, Tesla significantly narrowed the gap compared with previous quarters. Industry analysts said the improvement reflects stronger global demand for Tesla’s Model 3 and Model Y vehicles, continued production efficiency and renewed consumer interest following recent pricing adjustments.

The rivalry between the two automakers continues to reshape the global automotive industry. Tesla remains focused exclusively on battery-electric vehicles, while BYD also sells large numbers of plug-in hybrid models, giving the Chinese automaker an even larger presence across the broader new-energy vehicle market.

Competition is expanding well beyond those two companies. Traditional manufacturers including Volkswagen, Hyundai, General Motors, Ford and several emerging Chinese brands continue investing billions of dollars in new electric models as governments around the world tighten emissions standards and consumers seek alternatives to gasoline-powered vehicles.

Pricing has become one of the industry’s biggest competitive weapons. Tesla has repeatedly adjusted prices across key markets while introducing lower-cost model configurations designed to attract additional buyers. BYD continues leveraging its vertically integrated manufacturing strategy, including in-house battery production, allowing the company to aggressively price many of its vehicles while maintaining healthy production volumes.

Industry experts say battery technology remains one of the biggest competitive advantages. BYD’s proprietary Blade Battery has helped lower manufacturing costs while improving safety and driving range. Tesla continues investing heavily in battery development, manufacturing efficiency and software capabilities, areas many analysts believe remain among its strongest long-term advantages.

The growing competition ultimately benefits consumers. Buyers today have more electric vehicle choices than ever before, with expanding model lineups across nearly every price category. Improved driving range, faster charging technology and declining battery costs continue making electric vehicles increasingly practical for both families and businesses.

Global expansion also remains a major focus. BYD continues increasing exports across Europe, Southeast Asia and Latin America while Tesla maintains manufacturing operations serving North America, Europe and Asia. Both companies are expected to remain aggressive as they compete for market share in regions where EV adoption continues accelerating.

For investors, the second-quarter delivery reports provide another reminder that the electric vehicle market remains one of the fastest-changing sectors of the global economy. Quarterly delivery figures have become one of the industry’s most closely watched performance indicators because they offer an early look at consumer demand before companies release their full financial results.

The broader business impact extends far beyond the automakers themselves. Strong EV sales support manufacturers of batteries, semiconductors, charging equipment, software, mining companies supplying critical minerals and thousands of suppliers throughout the global automotive supply chain.

While challenges remain—including pricing pressure, trade policies and continued competition—the latest delivery results suggest demand for electric vehicles remains resilient. As more manufacturers enter the market and technology continues improving, consumers are expected to benefit from greater innovation, increased affordability and a wider selection of electric vehicles than ever before.

JBizNews Desk | Global Auto Markets

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Toyota Motor North America announced Monday, July 6, that it will invest $3.6 billion to expand its San Antonio, Texas, manufacturing campus, adding a new vehicle assembly line and shifting production of its popular Tacoma pickup truck from Mexico to the United States. The company said the project will create approximately 2,000 new jobs, significantly expand production capacity and further strengthen its long-term commitment to U.S. manufacturing.

The investment represents one of Toyota’s largest manufacturing commitments in recent years and comes as automakers continue adjusting their production strategies amid higher tariffs, evolving trade policies and growing political pressure to manufacture more vehicles in the United States.

The expansion will add a new 2.5-million-square-foot assembly facility to Toyota’s existing San Antonio campus. Once completed, the company expects the site to become one of its largest truck manufacturing operations in North America, producing the Tacoma, Tundra and Sequoia under one roof.

Toyota said the transition from Mexico will occur gradually over the next several years, with Tacoma production moving from its older assembly plant in Baja California to Texas. The company emphasized that it is not abandoning Mexico, noting that Tacoma production will continue at its newer Guanajuato facility while the transition takes place.

The announcement reflects broader changes taking place throughout the global automotive industry. Rising tariffs on imported vehicles, steel, aluminum and automotive parts have encouraged manufacturers to reconsider where they build vehicles destined for American consumers. Producing more vehicles inside the United States reduces exposure to changing trade policies while shortening supply chains and transportation costs.

Toyota’s San Antonio plant already serves as one of the company’s flagship truck facilities. The campus currently assembles the full-size Toyota Tundra, including hybrid models, along with the Toyota Sequoia SUV. Adding Tacoma production transforms the facility into Toyota’s primary North American truck manufacturing hub.

The company also continues investing elsewhere on the campus. A new rear axle manufacturing facility is expected to begin operations later this year, allowing Toyota to produce additional components closer to final vehicle assembly and further localize its supply chain.

With Monday’s announcement, Toyota’s total investment in the San Antonio operation climbs to approximately $8.3 billion since construction first began in 2003. Employment at the facility is expected to grow to roughly 6,000 workers once the expansion is fully completed.

The project also delivers a major economic victory for Texas. State officials, Bexar County and the City of San Antonio assembled an incentive package valued at more than $300 million, including infrastructure improvements, tax incentives and workforce development assistance designed to secure the investment and the thousands of jobs accompanying it.

Construction is expected to begin this year, while hiring will occur in phases through the end of the decade. According to state filings, Toyota plans to add hundreds of workers annually before reaching approximately 2,000 new employees by 2030.

For consumers, the shift is unlikely to produce immediate changes. Tacoma production will continue uninterrupted during the transition, and Toyota has not announced any pricing changes related to the move. Instead, the investment reflects a long-term strategy designed to position the company for future growth while reducing manufacturing risks associated with international trade uncertainty.

Industry analysts say Toyota’s announcement could influence decisions by other global automakers evaluating where to build future vehicles. As manufacturers invest billions of dollars in new factories, electric vehicles and advanced technologies, production location has become an increasingly important competitive and political consideration.

The expansion also reinforces Texas’ growing position as one of America’s leading automotive manufacturing states. Along with Toyota, numerous suppliers and related manufacturers continue expanding throughout the region, creating additional employment opportunities beyond the assembly plant itself.

For business leaders and investors, Toyota’s decision highlights an ongoing trend reshaping American manufacturing. Companies are increasingly prioritizing domestic production, not only because of tariffs but also because of supply chain resilience, workforce availability and proximity to customers.

Whether additional automakers follow Toyota’s lead remains to be seen, but Monday’s announcement represents another significant step toward expanding vehicle manufacturing inside the United States while creating thousands of well-paying manufacturing jobs expected to support the Texas economy for decades.

JBizNews Desk | San Antonio, Texas

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Samsung Electronics reported preliminary second-quarter results on Tuesday that shattered its own profit records, yet the numbers set off a global selloff in chip stocks that pulled U.S. markets down from record highs.

In an earnings guidance filing, Samsung said operating profit for the April-to-June quarter reached roughly 89.4 trillion Korean won, about $58.4 billion — a nearly 19-fold jump from the 4.7 trillion won it earned a year earlier. Revenue came in around 171 trillion won, roughly 130% higher than the same quarter in 2025. The surge was powered by record sales and soaring prices for memory chips — DRAM, high-bandwidth memory and NAND flash — that feed the world’s artificial-intelligence servers.

It was Samsung’s third straight record quarter, and the profit figure cleared Wall Street’s consensus of about 87.3 trillion won. But investors sold anyway.

Samsung shares closed nearly 7% lower in Seoul, and South Korea’s KOSPI index tumbled more than 7%. The reason was simple: the stock had already run up roughly 150% this year, so a blockbuster quarter was baked into the price. “The stock had priced in a historic quarter for months,” said Zavier Wong, a market analyst at eToro, adding that confirmation of good news is often what people sell into.

The selling crossed the Pacific. The Nasdaq Composite fell 1.16% to 25,818.69, while the S&P 500 slid 0.45% to 7,503.85. The Dow Jones Industrial Average lost 130.76 points, or 0.25%, to close at 52,925.15 after earlier touching a new all-time intraday high.

Chipmakers led the retreat. Micron closed down 4.7%, with KLA, Marvell Technology, Broadcom and AMD also falling, and the VanEck Semiconductor ETF dropped more than 3%. Adding to the pressure, Reuters reported that China’s DeepSeek is building its own AI chip, a potential new threat to Nvidia.

Beneath the one-day move sits a bigger worry: whether the AI spending boom that has driven memory prices to extraordinary levels can keep going. Samsung’s results were “dragged down by concerns that AI infrastructure spending can’t keep growing at the pace that has been driving memory prices,” Wong said. The chip rally has been the engine of this year’s stock gains, so any doubt about its staying power hits the broad market, not just tech.

Analysts flagged how high the bar has climbed. Adam Crisafulli of Vital Knowledge noted that second-quarter earnings are likely to be strong in absolute terms, but expectations are now far more bullish than they were heading into the first-quarter season, leaving little room to disappoint. Albert Yong, managing partner at Petra Capital Management, said Samsung’s strong results had largely been priced in after the share rally, and that investors remain worried about the durability of the AI boom.

For everyday Americans, the connection runs through retirement accounts. The biggest 401(k) and index-fund holdings are heavily weighted toward the same handful of chip and technology names that swung Tuesday. When a single earnings report in Seoul can knock a percentage point off the Nasdaq, it shows how concentrated the market has become around the AI trade — and how much ordinary savers are riding on it.

There were pockets of strength. Samsung’s foundry business returned to monthly profitability in June for the first time in three years, and the company has secured a $16.5 billion contract from Tesla to manufacture AI chips. Rival SK Hynix has seen its market value more than double this year on the same memory demand.

Samsung releases full second-quarter results on July 30, when investors will see exactly how much of the record profit came from the memory business and whether the mobile division absorbed higher chip costs. Until then, the market’s message is clear: even a historic earnings report is no guarantee of higher share prices when expectations have already reached extraordinary levels.

JBizNews Desk | Seoul, South Korea

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. men’s national team saw its World Cup run come to an end in front of the largest soccer audience the country has ever produced. Fox Corp. said on Tuesday, July 7, that its coverage of Monday night’s USA-Belgium round-of-16 match in Seattle drew 30 million viewers, the most-watched soccer telecast in U.S. history. Add the 12 million who watched the Spanish-language broadcast on Telemundo and Peacock, and the total American audience reached 42 million, according to preliminary Nielsen figures and Adobe Analytics data released by the networks.

That is a staggering number for a sport that spent decades on the margins of American television. It topped the record set only a week earlier, when the USA-Bosnia and Herzegovina group-stage game pulled in 26.4 million on Fox. The Belgium match peaked at 36.9 million viewers between 9:15 and 9:30 p.m. Eastern, right as Belgium pulled away in a 4-1 win that knocked the U.S. out of the tournament it is co-hosting.

The audience tells one story. The money behind it tells another.

Fox paid a reported $485 million for the English-language U.S. rights to the 2026 World Cup, a price several industry analysts have called two to three times below what those rights would fetch in an open market. The reason Fox got a bargain and is now cashing in comes down to geography. This is the first World Cup in 30 years played in U.S. time zones, which means marquee games land in prime time instead of at breakfast. Team USA’s run gave Fox its most valuable inventory of all.

Advertising rates climbed with each round. During the group stage and early knockout matches, spots ran around $300,000, sources told Front Office Sports. For later rounds, prices reached an estimated $1 million to $2 million. Fox charged close to $1 million for some commercials in Team USA’s opening games and could command more as the tournament advanced.

A new wrinkle added even more. FIFA introduced two three-minute hydration breaks per match this year, officially to protect players from summer heat. For Fox, they became a windfall. The breaks let the network run full-screen commercials inside the match itself, something soccer never allowed before. The Hollywood Reporter estimated those in-game spots sold for $200,000 to $750,000 each, and pegged the total value of the breaks across the tournament at $250 million to $600 million.

Put it all together and the two U.S. rights holders are on track for a combined $850 million in ad sales, according to estimates cited by Sportico. That is more than double the $384.3 million Fox and Telemundo booked during the 2018 tournament in Russia, the last summer World Cup.

For the sport’s American backers, Monday’s number is validation. Telemundo called its 12 million audience the largest for any U.S. men’s national team soccer match in Spanish-language history, with 6.7 million streaming on Peacock and 4.8 million watching the linear broadcast. Streaming, not just traditional TV, is carrying more of the load than in any prior tournament.

Still, it helps to keep the World Cup’s place in the American advertising market in perspective. Luke Stillman, managing director at consultancy Madison & Wall, put it bluntly: in the U.S., the World Cup is a $400 million to $500 million event inside a $60 billion to $70 billion television ecosystem. For comparison, the 2025 Super Bowl averaged 127.7 million viewers, and last month’s NBA Finals between the New York Knicks and San Antonio Spurs averaged 20.6 million on ABC and ESPN. Soccer is growing rapidly in the United States, but it has not yet reached football’s scale.

The brands showed up anyway. Official FIFA partners including Coca-Cola, Visa, Hyundai and, for the first time, Lenovo anchored the sponsor roster, while Bank of America, Verizon and American Airlines signed on as tournament sponsors. On the advertising side, Michelob Ultra, Lay’s, Home Depot, Budweiser and Quaker all ran national campaigns tied to the games.

The commercial question now is what happens without the home team. Team USA’s elimination removes the single biggest draw from Fox’s remaining schedule. The tournament runs through the July 19 final in New York and New Jersey, and later-round matches will still command premium advertising rates. But the network no longer has the one storyline that turned casual American viewers into a record-breaking audience.

For one night in Seattle, though, 42 million people proved the American appetite for soccer is real—and worth a fortune to whoever owns the broadcast.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Asian markets opened sharply lower on Wednesday, hit by a fresh wave of selling in semiconductor stocks and a jump in oil prices after the United States struck Iran overnight. The twin blows landed within hours of each other. Late Tuesday in Washington, the U.S. Treasury Department revoked the license that had allowed Iran to sell its oil on world markets, and U.S. Central Command followed with a new round of military strikes inside Iran. Together they sent crude prices up roughly 6% and rattled a region already nervous about chips.

South Korea took the hardest hit. The Kospi index plunged 3.34% to 7,400.24 shortly after the open, its lowest level since late May. Japan’s Nikkei 225 fell 1.34% to 67,341.86, sliding to a level last seen in mid-June.

The pain was concentrated in the same memory-chip giants that had led the region’s blistering 2026 rally. Samsung Electronics dropped 4.32%, extending a slide that began a day earlier when the company’s record earnings guidance failed to satisfy investors who had bet on even bigger numbers. Rival SK Hynix fell 4.77%, slipping toward the 2 million won mark. In Japan, tech-investment heavyweight SoftBank Group eased 1.18%.

One name bucked the trend. Kioxia, the Japanese memory maker, rose 1.16% at the open, a rare spot of green in an otherwise red screen.

The selloff was a second act. On Tuesday, Samsung’s “sell the news” drop was severe enough to trigger a rare circuit breaker in South Korean trading, a mechanism that briefly pauses activity when moves get too violent. Wednesday’s open picked up where that left off.

What’s driving the chip slide

The immediate trigger came from Wall Street. Overnight, the Philadelphia Semiconductor Index — the main gauge of U.S. chip stocks — fell sharply again, and the Nasdaq Composite dropped 1.16% to close at 25,818.69. The Dow Jones Industrial Average slipped 0.25% to 52,925.15 after touching a record high earlier in the day, while the S&P 500 lost 0.45% to 7,503.85.

Underneath the numbers is a bigger worry. Investors are starting to question whether the enormous sums Big Tech is pouring into artificial intelligence can keep justifying the sky-high prices of the chips that power it. Samsung’s results made the point in miniature: profit soared nearly 19-fold from a year earlier to a company record, yet the stock still fell because expectations had climbed even higher. When a record isn’t good enough, nervous investors sell.

Oil and the Iran shock

The energy story added a second layer of stress. On July 7, the U.S. Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control scrapped a waiver issued only weeks ago that had let Iran sell crude oil internationally, replacing it with a far narrower authorization. The move came after a string of attacks on tankers in the Strait of Hormuz, the narrow waterway through which a large share of the world’s oil passes.

Hours later, U.S. Central Command said it had carried out strikes inside Iran, targeting air-defense systems, command networks, coastal radar and anti-ship missile sites, and destroying several Iranian Revolutionary Guard patrol boats.

Oil markets reacted fast. West Texas Intermediate crude, the U.S. benchmark, climbed about 5.25% to roughly $72.15 a barrel, while international standard Brent crude rose about 5.7% to near $76.14. For a region that imports almost all of its energy, higher oil prices are a direct threat — they raise costs for manufacturers, squeeze household budgets, and feed inflation just as central banks had hoped to ease off.

Why it matters beyond the trading floor

For everyday consumers across Asia, the two stories connect at the wallet. Pricier oil means costlier fuel and shipping, which eventually shows up in the price of goods. And the memory chips made by Samsung, SK Hynix and Kioxia sit inside the phones, laptops, cars and data centers that people and businesses buy every day. When these companies stumble, the effects ripple through supply chains, jobs and investment plans well outside the stock market.

The bigger question now is whether Wednesday’s drop is a healthy pause after a red-hot run or the start of something deeper. South Korea’s Kospi and Japan’s Nikkei are both still up strongly for 2026, powered by the AI-driven chip boom. But with oil climbing and the U.S.-Iran conflict flaring again, the mood has turned cautious. Traders across the region will be watching two things above all in the days ahead: whether chip stocks find their footing, and how far oil runs if the standoff with Iran gets worse.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Mortgage rates edged slightly lower Tuesday, offering a modest break for homebuyers during the busiest stretch of the summer housing season. While the move may save borrowers a little money, economists say the broader outlook suggests mortgage rates are likely to remain elevated well into the future.

According to Zillow, the average interest rate on a 30-year fixed-rate purchase mortgage stood at 6.635% on July 7, down from 6.664% the previous day. The average 30-year refinance rate measured 6.728%, while the 15-year fixed mortgage averaged 5.722%.

Although the decline was small, it follows several weeks of rising borrowing costs that have kept affordability under pressure for prospective buyers.

The recent increase in mortgage rates has been driven less by changes in the Federal Reserve’s benchmark interest rate than by investors’ expectations about where monetary policy is headed.

At its June meeting, the Federal Reserve left its benchmark federal funds rate unchanged at 3.50% to 3.75%, but policymakers adopted a more hawkish tone. Updated economic projections showed the median expectation for the federal funds rate rising to 3.8% by the end of 2026, signaling that at least one additional rate increase remains possible if inflation does not continue to moderate.

That marks a significant shift from much of the past two years, when financial markets were focused almost entirely on the timing of future rate cuts.

Inflation remains the central obstacle.

The latest Consumer Price Index showed consumer prices rising 4.2% over the previous 12 months, reinforcing the Federal Reserve’s concern that inflation has not yet returned to its long-term target.

Helping offset some of that pressure was last week’s softer-than-expected employment report.

The U.S. economy added only 57,000 jobs in June, well below economists’ expectations, while payroll figures for April and May were revised lower. Slower hiring generally pushes Treasury yields lower, and because mortgage rates closely track the yield on the 10-year U.S. Treasury, weaker employment data provided modest downward pressure on borrowing costs.

Housing economists caution that buyers should not expect rates to fall dramatically anytime soon.

Selma Hepp, chief economist at Cotality, said mortgage rates are unlikely to decline meaningfully until inflation slows further and long-term Treasury yields retreat. Likewise, Robert Dietz, chief economist for the National Association of Home Builders, has said mortgage rates below 6% may not become common again until 2027.

For families shopping for a home, even small differences matter.

On a $400,000 mortgage, the difference between borrowing at 6% and 6.6% can increase monthly payments by well over $150, adding tens of thousands of dollars over the life of a 30-year loan. That affordability gap continues to sideline many first-time buyers despite a gradual increase in homes available for sale.

Regional housing markets are also beginning to diverge.

According to the latest S&P CoreLogic Case-Shiller Home Price Index, several markets that experienced rapid pandemic-era appreciation—including Tampa, Phoenix, Dallas, and Miami—have begun recording year-over-year price declines. Meanwhile, more established markets in the Northeast and Midwest, including New York, Chicago, and Boston, continue posting price gains supported by stronger local employment and more limited housing inventory.

Builders say the country’s housing shortage remains the larger structural challenge.

Industry estimates suggest the United States is still short roughly 1.2 million housing units, meaning affordability problems are unlikely to disappear simply because mortgage rates eventually decline.

For now, Tuesday’s move offers only modest relief.

Prospective buyers hoping for a return to the historically low mortgage rates of recent years will likely need to remain patient. Until inflation moves decisively lower and the Federal Reserve becomes more comfortable easing monetary policy, borrowing costs are expected to remain well above the levels that fueled the housing boom earlier this decade.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. Treasury Department revoked the license that had allowed Iran to sell its oil on the world market on Tuesday, July 7, choking off a key source of revenue for Tehran after attacks on commercial ships in the Strait of Hormuz. The department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) said it withdrew the authorization because the understanding reached with Iran last month was contingent on compliance, and U.S. officials said Iran had failed to uphold its commitments.

A senior U.S. official said Iran’s actions in the Strait of Hormuz were unacceptable and warranted consequences while emphasizing that Washington remains committed to pursuing a broader diplomatic agreement if Tehran changes course.

The Treasury action effectively unwinds an arrangement that was only weeks old. Under last month’s interim agreement, Iran had been permitted to continue limited oil exports through August 21 while negotiations continued. Tuesday’s move dramatically shortens that timeline. Existing transactions must now be wound down by July 17, with any payments required to remain in blocked, interest-bearing accounts inside the United States. New oil sales under the license are no longer permitted.

The decision follows a fresh escalation in one of the world’s most important energy corridors.

According to the United Kingdom Maritime Trade Operations (UKMTO), three commercial vessels were attacked in or near the Strait of Hormuz in recent days. The incidents included damage to the Qatari liquefied natural gas carrier Al-Rekayyat, along with attacks involving an oil tanker and another commercial vessel. Dr. Majed Al Ansari, spokesperson for Qatar’s Ministry of Foreign Affairs, confirmed the incident involving the LNG carrier. U.S. military forces later responded with strikes against Iranian targets, according to U.S. Central Command, although the Treasury action stands as a separate economic response.

Energy markets reacted immediately.

Brent crude, the international benchmark, settled approximately 3% higher at $74.16 per barrel, while U.S. West Texas Intermediate (WTI) finished 2.8% higher at $70.44. Following news of the Treasury’s license revocation, prices continued climbing in after-hours trading, with Brent approaching $76 per barrel and WTI rising above $72, representing gains of roughly 5% from the previous trading session.

“Obviously today is the next level of breakaway from the memorandum of understanding,” said Bob Yawger, director of energy futures at Mizuho, describing the market’s reaction to the deteriorating relationship between Washington and Tehran.

For Iran, the financial consequences could be significant.

Oil exports remain one of the country’s primary sources of hard currency, generating billions of dollars annually. China continues to be the largest purchaser of Iranian crude, making restrictions on export sales particularly meaningful for Tehran’s already strained economy.

Maritime analysts believe the attacks may have been intended to increase pressure on Gulf shipping routes rather than simply disrupt individual vessels.

Michelle Wiese Bockmann, senior maritime intelligence analyst at Windward, said the recent incidents appear designed to destabilize shipping along the southern corridor protected by the U.S. Navy while encouraging greater reliance on routes where Iran maintains stronger influence.

For American consumers, however, the immediate concern is fuel prices.

The Strait of Hormuz carries roughly 20% of the world’s seaborne oil, making it one of the most strategically important waterways in global commerce. Any disruption to shipping through the strait can quickly affect crude prices, which eventually filter down to gasoline stations, airlines, trucking companies and businesses dependent on transportation.

Higher diesel prices are especially important because they affect freight transportation across the United States. Increased fuel costs for trucks, railroads and delivery companies often work their way into the prices consumers pay for groceries, household goods and countless everyday products.

There is also a balancing effect.

As one of the world’s largest oil producers and exporters, the United States benefits financially when global energy prices rise. Domestic producers generally earn higher revenues during periods of elevated crude prices. At the same time, households, manufacturers, airlines, shipping companies and small businesses typically face higher operating costs as fuel becomes more expensive.

Investors will now turn their attention to U.S. inventory data.

The American Petroleum Institute estimated that domestic crude stockpiles fell by roughly 399,000 barrels last week, while the Energy Information Administration is scheduled to release its official inventory report on Wednesday. Those figures will help determine whether tightening global supply is also being reflected inside the United States.

For now, the Treasury’s decision marks one of Washington’s strongest economic responses since the latest Hormuz crisis began. While U.S. officials continue to leave the door open for negotiations, the revocation of Iran’s oil-sales license sends a clear message that future sanctions relief will depend on Tehran’s actions, not simply ongoing diplomacy.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Hundreds Evacuated as Buckling Columns Trigger Massive Midtown ‘Frozen Zone’ at Mamdani’s Signature Housing Project

Construction workers converting the former Pfizer headquarters into apartments called 911 at roughly 8 a.m. on Tuesday, July 7, after they watched steel support columns begin to buckle on the 21st floor, the New York Police Department said. The workers evacuated the building on their own. Within hours, the city had emptied the tower and shut down a wide stretch of Midtown East, bringing one of New York City’s most ambitious housing redevelopment projects to a standstill.

The building at 235 East 42nd Street, at the corner of Second Avenue, is a 1960s office tower being transformed into housing as part of one of the city’s largest office-to-residential conversion projects. At a Tuesday afternoon briefing, Mayor Zohran Mamdani said two structural columns had buckled, several upper floors were sagging, and cracks had opened on the 21st floor. He described the situation as extremely serious and said the building continued shifting after city inspectors arrived.

Fire Chief John Esposito said the steel columns had begun to bend and deflect and that the structure was still moving while emergency crews remained on scene. While officials said a full collapse into surrounding streets appeared unlikely, they warned that a localized internal collapse remained possible. Fire Commissioner Lillian Bonsignore said the FDNY deployed approximately 150 firefighters and EMS personnel along with more than 50 emergency units to stabilize the situation.

The NYPD established what officials called a frozen zone, closing streets from 40th through 45th Streets between First and Third Avenues to both pedestrians and vehicles. Seven nearby buildings were evacuated as a precaution, including the Hampton Inn Manhattan Grand Central at 231 East 43rd Street, where hotel guests were removed from their rooms, and the Kennedy International School at 225 East 43rd Street, which was operating a summer camp serving approximately 400 children. The Israeli Consulate at 800 Second Avenue was also evacuated.

Authorities confirmed that no injuries were reported and that every construction worker had safely exited the building.

The implications extend far beyond a single Midtown block.

The former Pfizer headquarters is the centerpiece of 235 GC LLC’s redevelopment plan to create approximately 1,600 apartments, including more than 400 affordable housing units, in what developers and project architect Gensler have described as the largest office-to-residential conversion in New York City history. The development has become a centerpiece of the city’s effort to convert aging office towers into desperately needed housing as remote work reshapes Manhattan’s commercial real estate market.

The project is being developed by Metro Loft, led by veteran conversion developer Nathan Berman, together with David Werner Real Estate Investments. GACE Consulting Engineers serves as the project’s structural engineer. Financing totals hundreds of millions of dollars, including a $720 million construction loan provided by Madison Realty Capital in May 2025, in addition to earlier financing arranged through the Northwind Group. Any prolonged shutdown or major redesign could delay completion beyond the current 2027 target and increase project costs.

In a statement, a Metro Loft spokesperson thanked first responders, emphasized that public safety remains the company’s highest priority, and said the structural issues are confined to a limited section of one of the project’s two buildings. The company also stated that the overall structure is not believed to be at risk of complete collapse, consistent with the assessment provided by FDNY officials.

City officials offered a preliminary explanation for the failure. The building had been expanded to 37 stories, and as additional weight was added above the 21st floor, load-bearing columns experienced increased structural stress. A union tradesman at the scene, Cliff Johnson of Steamfitters Local 638, alleged that foundation work supporting the additional height had not been performed properly, though city officials have not reached any conclusions regarding the cause.

The development also carries an existing regulatory history. According to Department of Buildings records, the construction entity associated with the project received seven safety violations during 2025 totaling more than $32,000 in penalties. One citation issued in December carried a $10,000 fine for allegedly failing to notify the department of an incident involving serious injury or death.

By Tuesday evening, officials reported cautious progress. The Department of Buildings said inspectors had completed an initial assessment of the damaged area and authorized contractors to begin installing temporary shoring to stabilize the affected columns. Officials said the damaged structural members had shown no additional movement since the morning inspection. Deputy Mayor for Housing and Development Leila Bozorg told reporters around 4 p.m. that the building had remained stable for several hours, describing that development as encouraging. Residents of one evacuated building, located at 222 East 44th Street, were later allowed to return home.

Officials cautioned that stabilization work would continue overnight and that there was no timetable for reopening surrounding streets or allowing displaced residents, hotel guests and businesses to return. Governor Kathy Hochul said she remained in contact with city officials and confirmed that state building inspectors had joined the response.

For now, the Midtown project that was expected to showcase New York City’s effort to transform vacant office towers into housing has instead become a costly reminder of the engineering, financial and construction risks that accompany some of the largest redevelopment projects in the country.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Two lots of Pedigree-branded dog food were recalled over the potential presence of metal and plastic.

Mars Petcare US issued the voluntary recall on July 2 for 13.2 oz cans of High Protein Chopped Chicken & Duck Flavor for dogs, according to a company announcement.

The affected products include lot codes 613C3KKCFC and 613C1KKCFC.

SHAMPOO RECALLED OVER POTENTIAL BACTERIA CONTAMINATION, INFECTION RISK

The recalled items did not meet Mars and Pedigree safety and quality standards, the company said. As part of the quality control process all Pedigree products go through, these two lots were sent to a third-party vendor for destruction.

But Mars later discovered that the product had been fraudulently diverted and sold into the U.S. marketplace.

“The potential presence of sharp metal and plastic foreign material in the cans could pose a hazard to your dog,” the company announcement reads.

The company warned that health risks to dogs ingesting sharp foreign objects can include choking and lacerations or blockages in the gastrointestinal tract.

Anyone who purchased the affected dog food is instructed not to feed it to their pet and to contact Pedigree for a replacement.

Consumers who are concerned after feeding the recalled product to their dog are urged to contact their veterinarian.

CHECK YOUR AC: 13,000 UNITS RECALLED OVER FIRE RISK

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

The company said no illnesses or injuries have been reported.

“Mars is working with authorities to determine how these products entered the marketplace. We are committed to protecting pets and helping consumers identify and remove the affected products from use,” the company said.

This post was originally published here

The United Arab Emirates is pressing ahead with a multibillion-dollar plan to route its oil, gas and cargo around the Strait of Hormuz entirely, the country’s foreign trade minister said in an interview laying out the strategy in mid-June. Dr. Thani Al Zeyoudi, the UAE’s Minister of Foreign Trade, said the Gulf state is working toward what he called “zero Hormuz dependency” — and that it will keep building whether or not the waterway stays open. The National

“We’re moving toward having zero Hormuz dependency, and that’s regardless of whether it’s open or not,” Al Zeyoudi said. “It’s going to open and we hope that will happen quickly, but we will not stop the new plan.” Bloomberg

The timing is pointed. The Strait of Hormuz — the narrow channel between Iran and Oman — normally carries about a fifth of the world’s crude oil and liquefied natural gas. Iran has effectively controlled the strait since shortly after the war with the United States began on February 28, virtually shutting the passage for roughly 20% of the world’s oil. NPR That closure drove fuel, food and shipping costs higher around the globe.

A June 15 interim peace deal between Washington and Tehran is meant to reopen the strait and lift the dueling naval blockades NPR, and oil prices fell sharply on the news. But shippers remain cautious, and Iranian officials insist they will impose a transit fee once the deal’s 60-day window expires. Council on Foreign Relations That uncertainty is exactly what the UAE says it wants to design out of its economy.

At the center of the plan is a major expansion of the UAE’s eastern ports — Fujairah, Khor Fakkan and Dibba — all of which sit on the Gulf of Oman, outside the strait. Al Zeyoudi said the country also intends to build at least one new harbor along that coastline. The National

Connecting those ports to the country’s oilfields, gasfields and petroleum facilities will require new pipelines, rail lines and roads linking the eastern coast to inland sites. The National

The energy piece is moving fastest. The UAE is accelerating a second pipeline that would double crude export capacity through Fujairah and is evaluating a third petroleum line on top of that. Outlook Business Today a single 1.5 million barrel-per-day pipeline to Fujairah is the country’s only overland crude lifeline. Pipeline-journal Planned expansion could lift total capacity above 3.5 million barrels a day, according to figures cited by Reuters. Marine Insight Officials are also weighing ways to move petrochemicals, LNG and other products without touching Hormuz.

Al Zeyoudi said the projects remain in the planning stage with no disclosed timeline or price tag, but acknowledged they would require billions of dollars. Outlook Business

He was candid about the limits. Crude oil is the easy part, because it can be pushed through pipelines. Liquefied natural gas, aluminum and container imports are far harder to shift. The Liberty Daily The UAE also leans heavily on Gulf ports such as Jebel Ali for imports and regional trade, so moving more cargo east would raise transport costs Marine Insight — though the minister said expanded rail and road links should hold those costs down while Jebel Ali and Khalifa Port keep serving as hubs.

The recent shutdown was a live stress test. During the conflict the UAE kept some crude moving through its existing Fujairah pipeline and leaned harder on eastern ports israelnationalnews, while redirecting cargo through ports in countries including Egypt and India and turning to air freight to keep supply chains intact. israelnationalnews

The Emirates are not racing alone. Saudi Arabia pushed its Hormuz-bypassing East-West Pipeline to a full 7 million barrels a day during the war, diverting oil to Red Sea terminals at Yanbu. Zero Hedge Iraq is expanding its northern pipeline through Turkey, and Kuwait has held early talks with Saudi Arabia and the UAE about cross-border lines. Zero Hedge The states with the fewest options — Kuwait, Qatar and Bahrain — remain almost entirely dependent on Hormuz Council on Foreign Relations, leaving them exposed if Iran revives its threats.

For businesses and households far from the Gulf, the stakes are simple. Every barrel that can skip the strait is a barrel less vulnerable to the next standoff — and less likely to spike prices at the pump, on store shelves and in shipping contracts. Moody’s Ratings expects crude to average between $90 and $110 this year IndexBox, a reminder of how heavily the closure still weighs on the global economy.

The UAE, for its part, is hedging both ways. Even as it builds to escape the chokepoint, the government said this week that the “uninterrupted flow of traffic through the Strait of Hormuz” israelnationalnews remains essential to regional and global prosperity.

JBizNews Desk © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

According to a securities filing released after the market closed Monday, July 6, Rivian Automotive plans to sell 75 million new shares of Class A common stock, raising approximately $1.5 billion to help fund future growth. The offering, led by Goldman Sachs, sent Rivian shares sharply lower Tuesday as investors reacted to the dilution created by the additional stock.

The decline erased much of a recent rally that had followed stronger-than-expected vehicle delivery results. Rivian said proceeds from the offering will help fund equity contributions required under its financing agreement with the U.S. Department of Energy, which is backing construction of the company’s new manufacturing facility in Georgia. The underwriting group also received a 30-day option to purchase an additional 11.25 million shares, potentially increasing the total proceeds.

While the company’s underlying business has shown signs of improvement, issuing new shares reduces the ownership percentage of existing investors, often pressuring a stock price in the short term. That dynamic played out quickly after the announcement, with Rivian recording one of its steepest single-day declines in months.

The offering came only days after Rivian reported second-quarter deliveries of 12,194 vehicles, exceeding its own guidance of 9,000 to 11,000 units. The company also raised its full-year production outlook to between 65,000 and 70,000 vehicles, reinforcing management’s confidence in demand despite continued challenges across the electric-vehicle industry.

Rivian also provided preliminary financial results that exceeded Wall Street expectations. The company estimated second-quarter revenue between $1.55 billion and $1.65 billion, above analyst forecasts, while cash and short-term investments increased to approximately $5.3 billion at the end of June. Company officials said the recent strength in Rivian’s share price created an attractive opportunity to strengthen the balance sheet.

Much of the capital will support development of the R2, Rivian’s lower-priced sport utility vehicle designed to reach a broader segment of consumers beyond the company’s premium R1T pickup and R1S SUV. The R2 is expected to be produced at the Georgia manufacturing complex, a project supported by billions of dollars in federal financing.

Wall Street remains divided on the company’s outlook. Some analysts argue Rivian’s improving production numbers justify continued investment, while others believe the shares already reflect much of the expected recovery. The company continues to burn significant capital as it expands manufacturing capacity, making periodic equity offerings an expected part of its long-term financing strategy.

For the broader electric-vehicle industry, Rivian’s latest capital raise highlights the enormous cost of scaling production in an increasingly competitive market. Building factories, expanding supply chains and launching new vehicle platforms require billions of dollars long before they generate meaningful profits. Access to capital therefore remains one of the industry’s biggest competitive advantages.

Investors will receive a clearer picture of Rivian’s financial health when the company reports complete second-quarter earnings later this month, including updated cash flow, margins and progress toward launching the R2 platform.

JBizNews Desk | Irvine, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The United States is bombing Iran. On Tuesday, July 7, U.S. Central Command said American forces had begun launching powerful strikes against Iranian targets, and hours later a senior U.S. official said the strikes were still ongoing. Explosions were reported across southern Iran near Bandar Abbas, Qeshm Island and the port of Sirik. The fragile ceasefire that has held since last month is now on the brink of collapse, and oil prices are climbing.

CENTCOM said the strikes answered Iranian attacks on three commercial ships in the Strait of Hormuz, calling Tehran’s actions a clear violation of the ceasefire and vowing to impose heavy costs for hitting vessels crewed by civilians. A senior U.S. official told Fox News the strikes are “significantly larger” than the limited round the U.S. carried out last month. The targets inside Iran include air defense systems, coastal surveillance posts, surface-to-air and anti-ship missile sites, drone launch sites and port facilities.

President Donald Trump, speaking at a NATO summit in Ankara, referred to the broader U.S. campaign, begun February 28, as Operation Epic Fury. The United Kingdom Maritime Trade Operations center raised its threat level for the strait to severe, warning that deliberate hostile action is likely and that mine risk and Iranian naval pressure on vessels persist.

The trigger was the ships. Earlier Tuesday, a tanker was struck by a drone off Oman, a day after the Qatari liquefied natural gas carrier Al Rekayyat took an engine-room fire and a Saudi crude tanker was damaged nearby. Qatar and Saudi Arabia both condemned the attacks as assaults on international shipping and global energy supplies.

This is the gravest test yet of the memorandum of understanding that Trump and Iranian President Masoud Pezeshkian signed June 17. Iran’s deputy foreign minister, in a statement via the FARS news agency, called the strikes a serious breach and said Tehran would take decisive measures. Foreign Minister Seyed Abbas Araghchi said talks on a final deal will not resume until the memorandum’s terms are met, starting with a ceasefire and an Israeli withdrawal from Lebanon. The warning followed Trump’s Monday vow to “make a deal or finish the job.”

Oil markets moved fast. Brent crude, the international benchmark, settled 3% higher at $74.16 a barrel on Tuesday, while U.S. West Texas Intermediate rose 2.8% to $70.44. Both climbed further after hours once Washington opened a second front, with Brent up 5.6% to $76.04 and WTI up 5.4% to $72.25.

That second front was economic. The Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control revoked the license that had let Iran sell oil and petrochemicals. Former U.N. ambassador Nikki Haley, on CNBC, argued Iran had been emboldened by earlier concessions, saying released frozen assets and oil waivers left Tehran collecting billions by the day.

For ordinary Americans, a crisis in a distant waterway lands at the gas pump and in the grocery aisle. The U.S. Energy Information Administration has projected wholesale gasoline running roughly 50% above pre-conflict forecasts this year, with diesel higher still. Diesel is the one to watch, because it moves the trucks and trains carrying food, packages and building supplies, so spikes reach store shelves within weeks.

One thing is keeping prices from spiking harder. OPEC+, led by Saudi Arabia, agreed over the weekend to raise production quotas again, and Saudi Aramco cut its Arab Light crude price for Asian buyers by $11 a barrel. That extra supply is why Brent, even after Tuesday’s jump, sits well below the $105 peaks of earlier in the war.

For businesses that live on fuel costs — airlines, truckers, manufacturers and small operators — the message is that the Hormuz risk never left. With U.S. strikes still underway and Iran vowing to hit back, the next move belongs to Tehran, and markets will be watching the strait for where prices head next.

JBizNews Desk © JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Shares of TeraWulf Inc. soared more than 16% Monday after the company announced a 20-year lease agreement with artificial intelligence company Anthropic to develop one of the nation’s largest AI-focused data center campuses, a deal expected to generate approximately $19 billion in revenue over its initial term.

The agreement, disclosed in a filing with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), marks a major transformation for TeraWulf, which began as a Bitcoin mining company and is rapidly repositioning itself as a provider of AI infrastructure.

The project will be built at Justified Data Center Campus in Hawesville, Kentucky, where Anthropic will lease approximately 401 megawatts of data center capacity—enough electricity to power a mid-sized city. Construction will be completed in phases, with the first facilities expected to begin operating during the second half of 2027 and full buildout targeted for early 2028.

Anthropic also secured two optional five-year lease extensions, potentially extending the partnership for decades.

“This agreement validates our strategy and establishes a long-term revenue stream with one of the world’s leading AI companies,” said Paul Prager, TeraWulf’s Chairman and Chief Executive Officer.

The announcement represents another major milestone in the race to build the computing infrastructure needed to support artificial intelligence.

Companies developing AI models—including Anthropic, OpenAI, Google and others—require enormous amounts of computing power, fueling unprecedented demand for specialized data centers capable of housing thousands of advanced AI processors.

The Kentucky campus highlights another growing trend: repurposing former industrial sites into technology hubs.

The 750-acre property previously housed a Century Aluminum smelter before production ceased several years ago. Instead of manufacturing aluminum, the site will now host one of America’s newest AI computing centers.

Alongside the Anthropic announcement, TeraWulf also revealed plans to sell its majority stake in the Abernathy Joint Venture in Texas to an investor group led by Fluidstack for approximately $530 million. The proceeds will allow the company to concentrate capital on wholly owned AI infrastructure projects.

Investors welcomed both announcements.

The stock has already been one of Wall Street’s strongest performers this year as enthusiasm for artificial intelligence continues driving demand for power generation, data centers and high-performance computing facilities.

The deal also reflects a broader shift taking place across the digital infrastructure industry.

Many companies that once focused on cryptocurrency mining are redirecting their expertise toward AI data centers, where long-term leases with major technology companies provide more predictable revenue than the highly volatile cryptocurrency market.

For businesses, the agreement underscores the enormous investment flowing into AI infrastructure. Billions of dollars are being committed not only to software development but also to the physical facilities, electricity and networking systems required to power next-generation artificial intelligence.

For local communities, projects of this size can create construction jobs, long-term employment and new tax revenue, while transforming former industrial properties into high-value technology assets.

As competition intensifies among the world’s leading AI companies, demand for large-scale data centers is expected to remain one of the fastest-growing segments of the technology industry for years to come.

JBizNews Desk | Hawesville, Kentucky

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

America’s airlines are heading into the busiest travel season of the year with a rare advantage: jet fuel prices have fallen sharply, travel demand remains strong and Wall Street expects profits to improve. But don’t expect those lower fuel costs to translate into cheaper airline tickets anytime soon.

In a July 1 research note, Bank of America raised its price targets across much of the airline industry, saying the combination of lower fuel costs, steady passenger demand and improving ticket prices should boost second-quarter earnings. While investors may benefit, travelers are unlikely to see much relief at the checkout.

The turnaround has been significant. Airline stocks rallied more than 20% in June as oil prices eased following the cease-fire in the Middle East. Jet fuel, one of the industry’s largest operating expenses, has fallen roughly 35% from its spring highs, providing a meaningful lift to airline profit margins.

Fuel is typically the second-largest expense for most airlines after labor. When fuel prices decline, carriers can generate substantially higher profits without selling a single additional ticket.

Reflecting that improved outlook, Bank of America increased its price targets on several major airlines, including Delta Air Lines, United Airlines, American Airlines, Southwest Airlines, Alaska Air Group, JetBlue Airways, Frontier Airlines and Allegiant Air.

The bank believes airlines are benefiting from an unusually favorable combination of lower costs and resilient demand.

Airfares have remained elevated despite the drop in fuel prices. According to the U.S. Travel Association’s Travel Price Index, airline fares increased sharply year over year, demonstrating that travelers continue booking flights even at higher prices.

Not every airline is benefiting equally.

Delta Air Lines and United Airlines continue to outperform many competitors thanks to their growing premium-cabin business, expanding international networks and lucrative loyalty programs. Delta’s long-standing partnership with American Express, for example, generates billions of dollars annually and provides a steady stream of high-margin revenue beyond ticket sales.

By comparison, airlines that rely more heavily on price-sensitive leisure travelers, including American Airlines and JetBlue, remain more vulnerable to shifts in consumer spending and generally carry heavier debt loads.

The industry’s pricing power has also been strengthened by limited competition.

The collapse of Spirit Airlines removed a significant amount of low-cost capacity from the market, reducing downward pressure on fares. At the same time, production delays at Boeing and Airbus continue limiting deliveries of new aircraft, preventing airlines from adding enough seats to fully meet demand.

That imbalance between supply and demand helps explain why travelers shouldn’t expect lower fares despite cheaper fuel.

Most summer tickets were sold months ago, when fuel prices were considerably higher. Airlines generally do not lower prices after seats have already been booked. Instead, the savings flow directly to their bottom line.

Meanwhile, with aircraft deliveries still constrained and demand remaining strong, airlines have little incentive to reduce prices.

Another major catalyst is the 2026 FIFA World Cup, which is driving record passenger traffic and tourism spending across host cities throughout North America. The tournament has helped keep flights full during what was already expected to be one of the busiest travel seasons in years.

Investors will soon learn whether the industry’s optimism is justified.

Delta Air Lines is scheduled to report quarterly earnings on July 10, becoming the first major U.S. airline to release results. Its comments on travel demand, pricing and booking trends will likely shape expectations for the rest of the industry. Delta CEO Ed Bastian and United CEO Scott Kirby have both recently indicated that travel demand strengthened heading into the summer.

One risk remains. If airlines become too aggressive in restoring capacity later this year because of lower fuel prices, an increase in available seats could eventually place downward pressure on fares.

For now, however, the industry continues to enjoy an unusual combination of packed airplanes, lower fuel costs and healthy consumer demand.

For travelers, the message is simple: don’t expect last-minute bargains this summer. With limited seats, strong demand and airlines focused on maximizing revenue, booking early remains the best strategy.

JBizNews Desk | Fort Worth, Texas

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Artificial intelligence is reshaping more than the technology industry—it’s rapidly changing America’s electric grid. The enormous amount of electricity needed to power AI data centers is fueling a wave of consolidation across the utility sector, and the biggest example yet is NextEra Energy’s proposed $67 billion all-stock acquisition of Dominion Energy.

The companies announced the agreement in May, saying the combined business would become the world’s largest regulated electric utility and position itself to meet the exploding demand for electricity created by artificial intelligence.

The deal isn’t simply about becoming bigger. It’s about building enough power to support one of the fastest-growing industries in the world.

AI models require massive data centers packed with thousands of computer chips running around the clock. Those facilities consume enormous amounts of electricity, with some using as much power as an entire small city. Technology companies including Microsoft, Amazon, Google, Meta and others continue investing billions of dollars in new AI infrastructure, creating an unprecedented surge in electricity demand.

That demand is particularly intense in Virginia, home to the world’s largest concentration of data centers. Dominion Energy already supplies much of that region, making it one of the utilities at the center of the AI boom.

NextEra Energy, the parent company of Florida Power & Light, is already North America’s largest electric utility by market value and one of the world’s largest producers of wind and solar energy. By combining with Dominion, the company would dramatically expand its ability to serve the rapidly growing data-center market.

Together, the two companies expect to have a pipeline of roughly 130 gigawatts of large-customer demand, much of it tied to AI projects. For perspective, one gigawatt can supply electricity to hundreds of thousands of homes.

NextEra Chief Executive John Ketchum said the merger is about achieving the scale necessary to build new power plants, transmission lines and other infrastructure faster and more efficiently as electricity demand accelerates.

Building that infrastructure won’t come cheaply. The combined company expects to invest approximately $138 billion to strengthen and expand the electric grid while projecting annual earnings growth of 9% or more through 2032.

Under the terms of the agreement, Dominion shareholders would receive approximately 0.81 shares of NextEra Energy for each Dominion share they own. When completed, existing NextEra shareholders would own roughly 74.5% of the combined company, while Dominion shareholders would own the remaining stake.

The proposed merger is part of a much broader trend sweeping the utility industry.

As electricity demand rises for the first time in decades, power companies are racing to secure the capital needed to build new generation capacity. Several major utility and power-sector acquisitions have already been announced this year as companies position themselves for what many executives believe will be years of AI-driven electricity growth.

For consumers, the merger raises an important question: who ultimately pays for all of this new infrastructure?

Consumer advocates and regulators will closely examine whether the billions of dollars needed to expand the grid could eventually lead to higher electricity rates for households and small businesses. Both companies have emphasized that affordability will remain a priority as they seek regulatory approval.

The transaction still faces review from multiple federal and state regulators, a process expected to take many months. Until approvals are granted, customers should not expect any immediate changes to electric service or utility bills.

The larger story, however, extends well beyond this single merger.

Artificial intelligence is creating demand unlike anything the electric industry has experienced in decades. Utilities that once planned primarily for population growth and economic expansion are now preparing for massive new electricity loads driven almost entirely by AI computing.

For investors, the merger reflects growing confidence that electricity demand will remain strong for years. For businesses, it highlights the enormous infrastructure required to support the AI economy. And for consumers, it serves as another reminder that artificial intelligence is quietly reshaping industries far beyond Silicon Valley—including the companies that keep America’s lights on.

JBizNews Desk | Juno Beach, Florida

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

TD Bank on Monday, July 6, named Jill Gateman as head of its U.S. commercial banking business, consolidating several major lending units under a single leader as the Mount Laurel, New Jersey-based bank sharpens its focus following a costly regulatory overhaul. The bank announced the appointment in a statement, with Leo Salom, president and chief executive of TD Bank U.S., praising Gateman’s track record inside the company.

“Jill is an exceptional leader who has been instrumental in advancing TD’s Commercial Banking business,” Salom said.

Under the new structure, TD is folding its Corporate, Commercial, Small Business and Regional Banking segments together beneath Gateman’s leadership. That gives her oversight of a broad portfolio that includes corporate and regional commercial banking, small business lending, treasury management, government banking, middle-market banking, asset-based lending, franchise finance, commercial real estate, healthcare lending and equipment finance. In practical terms, she now leads the division that finances businesses of nearly every size, from small local companies to large corporations.

Gateman is a familiar leader inside TD. She joined the Canadian-owned bank in 2023 to oversee its middle-market, asset-based and sponsor-backed finance businesses, and in 2024 she was promoted to co-head of U.S. commercial banking. Monday’s announcement places the combined operation under her sole leadership, streamlining what had previously been a shared management structure.

The leadership change comes as TD continues working through one of the most challenging periods in its history. The bank spent the past two years responding to a U.S. money-laundering scandal that resulted in billions of dollars in penalties and federal restrictions on future growth, including a cap on the size of its U.S. assets. The crisis prompted leadership changes across the organization and a renewed focus on strengthening compliance, improving oversight and simplifying operations. Consolidating commercial banking under one executive reflects that strategy.

TD Bank remains one of the country’s largest financial institutions. Known by its slogan “America’s Most Convenient Bank,” it ranks among the 10 largest U.S. banks by assets and serves more than 10 million customers through approximately 1,100 locations across the Northeast, Mid-Atlantic, Washington, D.C., the Carolinas and Florida. Its U.S. headquarters are located in Mount Laurel, New Jersey, making it one of the state’s largest financial employers.

For business owners and communities, the appointment carries significance beyond an executive promotion. Commercial banking provides the financing that helps small businesses expand, manufacturers purchase equipment, healthcare providers invest in new technology and municipalities manage public funds. The executive leading that division plays an important role in determining how efficiently businesses can access capital and financial services.

By bringing those operations under one experienced leader, TD is signaling that it wants a more coordinated approach to serving commercial customers while maintaining the stronger controls regulators now expect.

The appointment also marks another step in TD’s effort to move beyond its regulatory challenges and refocus on long-term growth. Commercial banking remains one of the bank’s core businesses, and leadership believes a streamlined structure will position the company to better serve customers while operating under heightened regulatory oversight.

As TD works to rebuild momentum, Gateman will oversee one of the bank’s most important business lines, balancing growth opportunities with the stronger compliance standards the institution has committed to maintaining.

JBizNews Desk | Mount Laurel, New Jersey

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Emmanuel Macron of France and Syrian President Ahmed al-Sharaa announced a sweeping package of economic and infrastructure agreements on Tuesday, July 7, at a reconstruction forum in Damascus — hours after two bombs tore through a nearby street, wounding at least 18 people and laying bare the security risk hanging over Syria’s push to rebuild. The Élysée Palace said Macron was already at the presidential palace when the explosions hit and was unharmed. The visit went ahead as planned.

The economic message was the whole point of the trip. Macron arrived Monday night with a delegation of French business leaders, the first French president to visit Syria in 18 years and the first Western leader since Bashar al-Assad was ousted in December 2024. He came to sign deals — and to signal that France wants a front-row seat in a rebuild that could run into the hundreds of billions of dollars.

At the center of the package was a framework declaration for comprehensive cooperation and a major maritime, air transport and logistics agreement with French shipping giant CMA CGM, whose chairman and CEO Rodolphe Saadé joined the trip. CMA CGM already holds a 30-year contract to develop the Port of Latakia, signed in 2025 for €230 million, and later committed another €200 million to expand the port’s handling capacity. The new deal pushes the company into air cargo handling at Damascus airport.

Macron also put France’s name on Syria’s financial plumbing. He said France would provide technical assistance directly to the Central Bank of Syria and help restructure a banking sector shattered by 14 years of war. “We want to continue working on the restructuring of the banking sector,” Macron said. Additional protocols covered water treatment and energy projects in Homs province, civil aviation, and a memorandum with the French Development Agency to rebuild state institutions. The two countries also agreed to restore full diplomatic ties and reappoint ambassadors.

For al-Sharaa, the pitch to investors was geography. He framed Syria as a future transit hub linking the Mediterranean, the Gulf and Iraq — and tied it directly to the disruption in global shipping. “Syria has a strategic location linking the Mediterranean with the Gulf and Iraq, and is only a few hours by sea from Marseille,” he said. “After the Strait of Hormuz crisis, the world realized the value of safe and stable corridors here.”

That line matters well beyond Damascus. With traffic through the Strait of Hormuz still choked, companies and governments are hunting for alternative routes to move oil and goods between Europe and the Middle East. Syria is betting its coastline can become one of them.

Al-Sharaa laid out a long shopping list for foreign capital: modernized airports and air-navigation systems, offshore energy exploration, upgraded electricity and water networks, university hospitals, food processing, digital infrastructure and a rebuilt civil registry. “Our industrial cities are ready to become a platform for your investments,” he told the room. “We are building a modern investment environment governed by the rule of law and strong institutions.”

Energy is already drawing interest. Syria has signed a memorandum with TotalEnergies, U.S.-based ConocoPhillips and QatarEnergy to explore for oil and gas in its territorial waters. TotalEnergies chief Patrick Pouyanné was also part of Macron’s delegation.

The groundwork was laid over the past year. Macron pushed Europe and the United States to drop most sanctions on Syria, and the European Union lifted its economic penalties in May 2025. Clearing those barriers is what lets French and other Western firms sign contracts at all.

But Tuesday’s blasts underscored why many companies are still holding back. The two explosions — caused by devices planted in a garbage bin and a parked car, according to Syria’s Interior Ministry — went off near the Four Seasons Hotel, where Macron had spent the night. They came less than a week after a café bombing killed around 10 people in the same city. No group claimed responsibility for either attack.

That is the hard math for investors. Syria needs hundreds of billions of dollars, and it has already signed memorandums with several countries and companies — but many of those pledges have yet to become actual projects. Reconstruction money tends to wait for stability, and stability is exactly what Tuesday’s bombs called into question.

Macron tried to keep the focus on the opportunity. He said France would set up expanded joint economic committees, working alongside Gulf countries, to support the rebuild. “There are also many opportunities for our partnership,” he said. Whether Western capital follows the handshakes will depend less on the deals signed inside the palace than on the streets outside it.

JBizNews Desk | Damascus

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

According to remarks made Tuesday, July 7, by President Donald Trump during a bilateral meeting with Turkish President Recep Tayyip Erdoğan in Ankara, Trump renewed his call for the United States to control Greenland and warned that Washington could reconsider its military presence in Europe if NATO allies continue resisting U.S. priorities. The comments came shortly after Trump arrived in Turkey for the annual NATO summit, immediately raising geopolitical and market concerns across Europe.

Trump argued that Denmark does little for Greenland. “Greenland doesn’t help Denmark. Denmark doesn’t spend money to really help Greenland, but it’s an important part for the United States,” he said. He repeated his claim that the island is “surrounded by China ships and Russian ships,” then added that the United States “could remove all of our soldiers out of Europe.”

Asked whether additional American troops could leave Europe, Trump declined to make a commitment. “Well, we’re going to see,” he told reporters. He linked his frustration to what he described as insufficient NATO support during the recent conflict with Iran and said the Greenland dispute had damaged his relationship with the alliance.

For business, the issue extends well beyond geopolitics. Investors are increasingly focused on who will finance Europe’s expanding defense commitments and which companies stand to benefit from a new era of military spending.

European defense stocks have rallied into the summit as investors anticipate higher defense budgets across the continent. A Goldman Sachs basket of European defense companies recovered roughly 17% from its late-June 2026 low ahead of the gathering. On Monday, Fincantieri surged 12.84% to €12.30, while Leonardo, Saab, Hensoldt, Rheinmetall, Thales, Dassault Aviation and Safran also posted gains.

Germany’s Rheinmetall, Europe’s largest defense contractor, traded near €1,121.80 after climbing more than 15% during the past week, although the shares remain well below earlier highs following Germany’s cancellation of its F126 frigate program. The volatility underscores the risks facing investors as governments rapidly reshape military procurement priorities.

The broader spending trend continues to strengthen. NATO members have committed to increasing defense expenditures toward 5% of GDP over the coming decade. According to figures cited by NATO Secretary-General Mark Rutte, non-U.S. members increased military spending 20% last year to $574 billion, while Germany alone boosted defense expenditures 24% to $114 billion. Rutte has warned that manufacturers are now struggling to keep pace with demand.

The summit is also producing new commercial opportunities. Lockheed Martin and Rheinmetall announced plans to jointly produce ATACMS missiles in Germany, marking the first production of the system outside the United States. NATO leaders also outlined more than $40 billion in planned investments over the next five years to strengthen anti-drone capabilities. Belgium is preparing a €3.1 billion air-defense purchase that includes 20 Skyranger systems produced by Rheinmetall, pending final government approval.

Analysts increasingly believe Europe will rely more heavily on domestic defense manufacturers. Analysts Adrien Rabier and Douglas Harned of Bernstein estimate that while U.S. companies still account for roughly 60% of European defense procurement, that balance is likely to shift toward European suppliers over time. They identify BAE Systems, Dassault Aviation, Rheinmetall and Thales among the companies best positioned to benefit from the trend. Berenberg analyst George McWhirter continues to rate Rheinmetall a Buy with a €2,100 price target.

The economic implications extend beyond defense contractors. If the United States reduces its military commitment to Europe, governments across the continent could face difficult budget decisions as higher defense spending competes with funding for healthcare, education and other public services. Businesses operating across Europe are also watching closely, as greater geopolitical uncertainty could influence investment decisions and cross-border trade.

Turkey also has significant commercial interests tied to the summit. Reports indicate Trump and Erdoğan discussed potential agreements involving F-35 fighter aircraft and related defense equipment, creating possible opportunities for both Turkey’s defense industry and major U.S. aerospace manufacturers.

European leaders sought to lower tensions following Trump’s remarks. Danish Prime Minister Mette Frederiksen reiterated that Greenland is not for sale and called on allies to respect Denmark’s sovereignty. Finnish President Alexander Stubb urged cooperation among Arctic allies, emphasizing the strategic importance of maintaining unity within NATO.

With defense spending accelerating, geopolitical tensions rising and investors closely watching every announcement from Ankara, the outcome of the summit could influence both global security policy and defense-sector markets for years to come.

JBizNews Desk | Ankara

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

According to a July 2026 research note from J.P. Morgan, gold’s historic bull run has stalled, and Wall Street is now arguing over how much further the metal can fall. As of early July, gold traded near $4,100 an ounce — down about 29% from the record of roughly $5,590 it set in late January, its worst stretch in years. Greg Shearer, head of base and precious metals at J.P. Morgan, described the metal as stuck in a “technical no-man’s land,” caught between buyers and sellers with neither side willing to commit.

The reversal has been swift. Gold slipped below the $4,000 mark in late June for the first time since November 2025, capping a four-month pullback. That is a sharp turn for an asset that gained 66% in 2025 and kept climbing into January, powered by geopolitical fear, trade uncertainty and worries about the independence of the Federal Reserve.

What changed is the outlook for interest rates. Under Fed Chair Kevin Warsh, markets have shifted from expecting rate cuts to bracing for possible hikes, driven partly by energy-fueled inflation from the Middle East conflict. Higher rates and a stronger dollar hurt gold, which pays no interest, because investors can earn more holding cash or Treasuries instead. At the same time, an easing of some Middle East tensions and a rush back into technology and AI stocks pulled money out of safe-haven assets.

Central banks, long the backbone of gold’s rise, also stepped back. After buying at a torrid pace for years, official institutions turned into net sellers early in 2026. Türkiye alone sold about 60 tons in March, and net reported purchases slowed sharply in the first quarter, according to World Gold Council data.

The bears now have the momentum. Analysts at OCBC Bank expect prices to keep drifting lower into year-end on rising Treasury yields and a firm dollar. Technical traders point to the break below $4,000 as a warning that the easy money has been made.

But plenty of big names still see the sell-off as a pause, not an ending. J.P. Morgan maintains a year-end target near $6,000 an ounce. UBS told clients gold could recover toward $5,200 over the next year, calling the drop a buying opportunity. Goldman Sachs has kept a target around $5,400. Their case rests on the same long-term forces that drove the rally: heavy government debt, central-bank diversification away from the dollar, and lingering geopolitical risk. Strategists at Barclays argued that even with screens flashing “overvalued,” a durable premium above the metal’s roughly $4,000 fair value suggests this is not a bubble bursting.

For everyday investors, the swing matters more than the Wall Street debate. Gold sits in millions of retirement accounts and exchange-traded funds as portfolio insurance, and the past few months are a reminder that even so-called safe assets can drop hard and fast. For gold-mining companies, stabilizing prices around current levels would still leave healthy margins for low-cost producers, supporting jobs and cash flow, while a deeper slide would squeeze weaker miners and stall new projects.

Notably, even after the correction, gold remains one of the better-performing assets of 2026, still ahead for the year. The next moves will hinge on the Fed’s late-July meeting, fresh inflation data and whether central banks return as buyers. For now, the metal that spent two years defying gravity is finally testing where the floor is.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Twenty-eight New Jersey employers have earned spots on U.S. News & World Report’s 2026–2027 Best Companies to Work For list, highlighting the state’s continued strength in industries ranging from healthcare and pharmaceuticals to finance and manufacturing.

The annual rankings, released by U.S. News & World Report, evaluated approximately 3,900 public and private companies across 14 industries, recognizing only the highest-performing employers based on employee experience and workplace quality.

Among the New Jersey companies recognized is Horizon Blue Cross Blue Shield of New Jersey, reflecting the state’s reputation as a major hub for healthcare, life sciences and insurance.

Unlike many workplace rankings that rely heavily on employer submissions, the U.S. News ratings are based on publicly available employee feedback, independent data and expert analysis. Companies were evaluated on compensation, benefits, work-life balance, career advancement, job stability, workplace culture and overall employee satisfaction.

To qualify, private companies were required to employ at least 1,000 people, generate more than $500 million in annual revenue, and receive a significant number of verified employee reviews. Public companies were selected from the nation’s largest corporations by market value.

This year’s rankings also introduced new categories recognizing employers that support family caregivers and those offering exceptional internship programs, reflecting changing workforce priorities as companies compete for talent.

The recognition comes as employers nationwide continue adapting to a rapidly changing workplace shaped by artificial intelligence, hybrid work models and evolving employee expectations. Companies that provide competitive benefits, flexible work arrangements and opportunities for professional growth are increasingly viewed as having an advantage in attracting and retaining skilled workers.

For New Jersey, the results reinforce the state’s position as one of the country’s leading business centers. Home to many of the world’s largest pharmaceutical, healthcare, financial and logistics companies, the Garden State continues to compete aggressively for top talent with neighboring New York and Pennsylvania.

A strong workplace reputation can also translate into measurable business benefits. Companies recognized as top employers often experience lower employee turnover, stronger recruitment and higher productivity, reducing hiring costs while strengthening long-term performance.

For job seekers, the rankings provide another resource when evaluating potential employers, particularly in a competitive labor market where workplace culture and flexibility have become as important as salary for many professionals.

The complete list of recognized companies is available through the U.S. News & World Report careers rankings.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A 37-story Midtown Manhattan tower under construction began buckling Tuesday morning, forcing the evacuation of at least nine surrounding buildings and shutting down a busy stretch of East 42nd Street a block from Grand Central Terminal. The Fire Department of New York said it received a call at 7:57 a.m. on July 7 reporting bricks falling from the 21st floor of the building at 235 East 42nd Street. When crews arrived, they determined that two structural columns had buckled. No injuries have been reported.

At an afternoon news conference, Mayor Zohran Mamdani said the structure remained unstable, warning that one of the columns had continued to move even after city officials reached the scene. “The building remains unstable,” Mamdani said, adding that engineers were assessing the situation “minute by minute.” The New York Police Department closed East 42nd Street between Second and Third Avenues to all foot and vehicle traffic, snarling one of the city’s busiest corridors near the Chrysler Building and the United Nations.

The high-rise is no ordinary construction site. It is the former global headquarters of Pfizer, which occupied the building for decades before selling it, and it is now the centerpiece of one of the largest office-to-residential conversions in New York City history. Construction workers on the 21st floor spotted the columns beginning to give way around 8 a.m. and were safely evacuated, according to police. City structural engineers from the Department of Buildings are investigating a report that a steel beam was compromised, a complaint the site safety manager filed the same morning.

The developer behind the project, Metro Loft Management, said it was working closely with the Department of Buildings to understand the full scope of the problem. “The safety of our workers and the public has always been, and remains, our top priority,” the firm said in a statement. Metro Loft, owned by real estate investors David Werner and Nathan Berman, is converting the aging tower — along with an adjoining building — into a rental complex of roughly 1,500 to 1,600 apartments. The architecture firm Gensler, which is leading the design, has described the building’s mixed 1960s-era structural systems as a uniquely difficult retrofit, with crews racing to pour a new floor every few days to hit a 2026 opening.

The building carries a history of code problems. City records show it has multiple active violations and tens of thousands of dollars in fines, with some complaints dating back years. What caused Tuesday’s failure will not be known until emergency trusses are installed and inspectors can examine the structure, the buildings commissioner said.

Beyond the immediate danger, the incident lands at a sensitive moment for New York’s real estate market. Office-to-residential conversions have been championed by city and state leaders as a rare fix for two problems at once: a glut of outdated, half-empty office towers and a severe shortage of housing that has pushed rents to punishing levels. The 42nd Street project has been held up as the flagship of that movement — billed as the biggest conversion the city has ever attempted, adding more than a dozen new stories atop the original tower.

Tuesday’s scare is likely to sharpen questions about the risks and costs hidden inside those ambitions. Converting a six-decade-old office building into modern apartments means cutting new window openings, removing interior structure and re-engineering floors that were never designed for residential use — delicate, expensive work on bones that are often unpredictable. When it goes smoothly, it turns dead office space into hundreds of homes and construction jobs. When it does not, as the buckling columns on 42nd Street showed, it can halt a neighborhood and put lives at risk.

The property’s ownership reflects how much institutional money rides on these deals. When the building last traded, in 2018, it was purchased for a reported $363.5 million by a group that included Alexandria Real Estate Equities, Deutsche Bank and the State of Wisconsin Investment Board, alongside Werner. Interior demolition began in 2024, with completion targeted for 2027.

For now, the priority is keeping the structure standing and the surrounding blocks clear. A school and a hotel were among the buildings emptied as a precaution, and commuters were urged to avoid the area. City officials said assessments would continue through the evening as engineers worked to stabilize the tower.

This is a developing story.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Rogers Communications has agreed to acquire the remaining 25% stake in Maple Leaf Sports & Entertainment (MLSE) for approximately C$4.35 billion (US$3.1 billion), giving the Canadian telecommunications giant full ownership of one of the world’s most valuable sports and entertainment companies.

The transaction, announced Monday, values MLSE at approximately C$17.4 billion, making it one of the highest-valued sports organizations globally. The seller is Kilmer Sports, the investment company of longtime MLSE Chairman Larry Tanenbaum.

The acquisition gives Rogers complete ownership of an empire that includes the NHL’s Toronto Maple Leafs, NBA’s Toronto Raptors, MLS’s Toronto FC, the CFL’s Toronto Argonauts, the AHL’s Toronto Marlies, and Scotiabank Arena, one of Canada’s premier entertainment venues.

“This is a defining moment for Rogers,” said Tony Staffieri, President and Chief Executive Officer of Rogers Communications. “Bringing Canada’s leading communications company together with Canada’s premier sports and entertainment organization creates long-term value for our customers, fans and shareholders.”

The deal completes a multi-year strategy.

Rogers first became an MLSE owner in 2012, when it purchased a 37.5% stake alongside BCE Inc. Last year, Rogers acquired BCE’s ownership interest, increasing its position to 75%. The company has now exercised its option to purchase Tanenbaum’s remaining interest and assume full control.

The transaction also strengthens Rogers’ position as Canada’s dominant sports media company.

In addition to owning MLSE, Rogers already controls the Toronto Blue Jays, Rogers Centre, and Sportsnet, the country’s largest sports television network. Full ownership allows the company to further integrate professional sports, broadcasting, advertising and digital media under one corporate umbrella.

Industry analysts say the strategy reflects a growing trend among media companies seeking to control both premium sports content and the platforms used to distribute it.

Professional sports franchises have become some of the world’s fastest-appreciating assets, fueled by escalating media rights agreements, sponsorship revenue and global fan engagement. Recent franchise sales across the NBA, NFL and other leagues have pushed team valuations to record levels.

Rogers said it plans to finance the acquisition using existing liquidity and credit facilities. The company has also indicated it may sell a minority interest in portions of its combined sports and media business over the next year while retaining operational control.

The transaction remains subject to approval by the NHL, NBA, MLS, CFL, and other league authorities before closing later this year.

For fans, little is expected to change immediately. Team operations, schedules and ticket availability will continue as normal. However, the acquisition gives Rogers greater flexibility to expand streaming services, develop new digital experiences and capitalize on growing demand for live sports content.

For investors, the deal reinforces the enduring value of premium sports franchises, which continue attracting billions of dollars despite broader economic uncertainty. As live sports remain one of the few television products that consistently draw massive real-time audiences, ownership of both teams and media rights has become an increasingly valuable long-term business strategy.

JBizNews Desk | Toronto

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

More Americans are choosing road trips, regional getaways and day excursions over expensive long-distance vacations this summer, creating an unexpected boost for local restaurants, retailers, attractions and small businesses. The trend, highlighted in a new Associated Press report published July 3, comes as higher travel costs encourage families to vacation closer to home while still spending on leisure activities.

According to AAA, a record 72.2 million Americans were expected to travel at least 50 miles during the extended Independence Day holiday period, making it one of the busiest summer travel seasons on record. Nearly 85% of those travelers were expected to drive rather than fly, keeping more tourism dollars within local communities.

For many small businesses, that shift is translating into stronger sales.

Tourist towns, regional attractions and locally owned restaurants report that families are replacing overseas vacations and cross-country trips with shorter drives that still allow them to enjoy time away while keeping costs under control.

In Asheville, North Carolina, river tubing operator Zen Tubing expanded seasonal hiring after seeing reservations rebound. Visitors are increasingly arriving from nearby states for day trips, spending money not only on outdoor activities but also at local restaurants, breweries and retail shops before returning home.

The same pattern is emerging in cities hosting the 2026 FIFA World Cup.

In Kansas City, retailers and restaurants have benefited from thousands of soccer fans traveling for matches and fan events. Local business owners say the city’s relatively affordable hotels, dining and entertainment have attracted visitors looking for lower-cost alternatives to larger metropolitan destinations.

Consumers remain cautious, however.

Higher prices for airfare, hotels, food and gasoline continue to influence travel decisions. Rather than eliminating vacations altogether, many households are shortening trips, staying closer to home and focusing spending on experiences that fit tighter budgets.

Economists say that trend may actually benefit many small businesses.

Instead of tourism dollars flowing overseas or to major destination resorts, more spending is staying within regional economies. Restaurants, gift shops, family attractions, hotels, campgrounds, wineries, roadside businesses and entertainment venues are seeing increased traffic from travelers taking shorter trips.

The shift also comes during a busy year for domestic tourism. Along with the FIFA World Cup, communities across the country are preparing events leading up to America’s 250th anniversary, creating additional opportunities for local businesses to capture visitor spending.

For small business owners, the summer could provide an important economic lift following several years of inflation, higher operating costs and cautious consumer spending. Businesses located within a few hours’ drive of major population centers appear especially well positioned to benefit.

For consumers, the trend demonstrates that meaningful vacations do not necessarily require expensive flights or international travel. Many families are discovering that nearby destinations can deliver memorable experiences while helping stretch household budgets.

As Americans continue balancing higher living costs with a desire to travel, one clear winner is emerging: local businesses that depend on regional tourism.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Six Flags Great Adventure has unveiled Shoreline Pier, a new Jersey Shore-inspired section of the park designed to attract more families and encourage visitors to spend more time—and money—at New Jersey’s largest theme park. The new attraction officially opened over the holiday weekend at the Jackson, New Jersey, resort.

The expansion recreates the sights and atmosphere of a classic Jersey Shore boardwalk, complete with family rides, midway games, entertainment, shopping and boardwalk-style food.

The centerpiece is Hypno Twister, a spinning thrill ride that reaches speeds of nearly 35 mph, sending riders forward and backward while simulating the motion of ocean waves. Other new attractions include Barrels O’ Fun, a family spinning coaster, Flying Scooters, Wave Swinger, and Super Roundup, giving visitors five attractions designed for both children and adults.

Unlike major roller coaster additions aimed primarily at thrill seekers, Shoreline Pier focuses on families looking to experience attractions together, a strategy Six Flags believes will increase repeat visits and broaden its customer base.

“We wanted to create an experience where families can enjoy rides together while capturing the nostalgia of the Jersey Shore,” park officials said during the opening.

The investment comes as regional tourism remains strong. With many Americans choosing shorter vacations and road trips this summer, destinations within driving distance are benefiting from increased visitor traffic.

For Six Flags, the timing could not be better.

Higher airline fares and travel costs have encouraged more families to seek affordable entertainment closer to home, making regional theme parks an attractive option. Industry analysts say family-focused attractions generally generate higher spending on food, games, merchandise and repeat visits than standalone thrill rides.

Shoreline Pier also expands the park’s entertainment offerings beyond rides. The area includes nightly live performances, classic boardwalk games, expanded dining options and new retail shops designed to recreate the atmosphere of New Jersey’s famous seaside amusement piers.

The addition is part of Six Flags’ broader strategy to transform Great Adventure into a multi-day destination. Visitors can now combine the theme park with Hurricane Harbor, the Wild Safari, and overnight accommodations at the Savannah Sunset Resort, encouraging guests to extend their stay.

Tourism remains a major economic driver for New Jersey, supporting thousands of jobs across hospitality, retail and entertainment. Investments like Shoreline Pier help strengthen the state’s appeal as a destination for both residents and out-of-state visitors looking for affordable summer experiences.

For families planning a day trip this summer, Shoreline Pier delivers a familiar slice of the Jersey Shore—without the beach traffic.

JBizNews Desk | Jackson, New Jersey
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce Launches Hands-On AI Platforms Certification to Help Students, Employees and Businesses Save Time, Reduce Costs, Increase Productivity and Grow Revenue

EATONTOWN, N.J. — The next essential workplace skill has arrived.

Twenty years ago, knowing how to use Microsoft Word, Excel, Outlook and email separated job candidates from the competition. Today, those programs are standard requirements in nearly every workplace.

Now, the same transformation is happening with today’s leading AI platforms.

Employers increasingly expect workers to know how to use platforms such as ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini, Microsoft Copilot, Grok, Perplexity, Meta AI and Mistral to write documents, analyze spreadsheets, create presentations, automate repetitive tasks, communicate with customers and dramatically improve productivity.

The payoff is significant.

According to PwC’s 2026 Global AI Jobs Barometer, workers skilled in today’s leading AI platforms earn an average of 62% more than comparable workers without those skills. After analyzing more than one billion job postings across six continents, PwC concluded that AI platform skills have become one of the fastest-growing drivers of higher salaries, promotions and career advancement.

To help individuals and businesses prepare for this workplace transformation, the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce, drawing on more than 20 years of workforce development, executive education and employer partnerships, is hosting the JBiz AI Operations Summit on July 13–14, 2026, at the Sheraton Eatontown in New Jersey.

The intensive two-day certification program is designed for everyone.

Whether you’re preparing to enter the workforce, applying for your first office job, working as a secretary or administrative assistant, building your career, changing professions, supervising employees or running your own business, learning today’s leading AI platforms can immediately increase your productivity and long-term earning potential.

Unlike technical courses designed for software developers, the summit focuses entirely on practical workplace applications that participants can begin using the very next day.

Participants will receive hands-on training using today’s leading AI platforms, including ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini, Microsoft Copilot, Grok, Perplexity, Meta AI and Mistral, and learn how to:

Save Time

  • Automate repetitive tasks.
  • Complete reports, emails and presentations in minutes instead of hours.
  • Organize meetings, schedules and daily workflows more efficiently.

Increase Productivity

  • Produce higher-quality work in less time.
  • Analyze spreadsheets and business data faster.
  • Improve communication across every department.

Reduce Costs

  • Streamline administrative work.
  • Eliminate unnecessary manual processes.
  • Improve operational efficiency across the organization.

Increase Revenue

  • Create stronger marketing campaigns.
  • Improve customer service and client communications.
  • Generate better sales materials, proposals and business presentations.
  • Free employees to focus on higher-value work that drives business growth.

Upon successful completion, every participant will receive an AI Platforms Certification from the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce, recognizing practical proficiency in today’s leading workplace AI platforms.

An Investment With Immediate ROI

For employers, this is more than employee training—it’s a business investment.

Equip your workforce with practical AI platform skills that help your company:

  • Save time.
  • Reduce operating costs.
  • Increase employee productivity.
  • Improve customer service.
  • Produce higher-quality work.
  • Strengthen decision-making.
  • Increase sales.
  • Grow revenue.
  • Build a more competitive organization.

The result is a workforce that delivers measurable value every day.

For employees, the benefits are equally compelling.

These practical skills strengthen résumés, improve job performance, increase confidence, position workers for promotions and create opportunities for higher-paying positions throughout their careers.

The Numbers Tell the Story

The demand for AI platform skills continues to accelerate.

  • 62% average salary premium for workers with AI platform skills (PwC).
  • Up to 118% salary premium in customer-facing industries (PwC).
  • 8× faster growth in demand for AI platform skills than the overall job market (PwC).
  • 7.5 hours saved every week by professionals using AI platforms (London School of Economics).
  • 2.3 hours saved every workday through AI-assisted tasks (GoTo Workplace Survey).
  • 8%–15% greater chance of receiving a job interview when AI platform skills appear on a résumé (University of Oxford, shared by the World Economic Forum).

“Every generation has a workplace skill that becomes essential,” said Duvi Honig, Founder and CEO of the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce. “Yesterday it was Word, Excel, Outlook and email. Today it’s learning how to use today’s leading AI platforms. Whether you’re entering the workforce, working as a secretary, advancing your career or growing a business, these are practical skills that help people save time, increase productivity, reduce costs, increase revenue and become more valuable in today’s economy.”

JBiz AI Operations Summit

July 13–14, 2026
Sheraton Eatontown
Eatontown, New Jersey

Every participant who completes the two-day program will earn an AI Platforms Certification from the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce.

For registration and corporate or group discounts:

Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce
212-659-5270 ext. 104
Esther@OJChamber.com
www.OJChamber.com

About the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce

For more than 20 years, the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce has helped businesses and individuals grow through workforce development, executive education, certification programs, government partnerships and business advocacy. Through the JBiz AI Operations Summit, the Chamber continues its mission of equipping today’s workforce with practical, in-demand skills that help businesses save time, reduce costs, increase productivity, grow revenue and compete in the modern economy, while advancing its mission of “Uniting the World Through Commerce.”

Wall Street opened Tuesday, July 7, with a split personality. The Dow Jones Industrial Average pushed to a fresh all-time high, up about 187 points, or 0.3%, shortly after the bell, while the tech-heavy Nasdaq Composite fell around 0.6% and the S&P 500 slipped roughly 0.1%. Driving the caution was a jolt from the Middle East: the British maritime agency UKMTO said Tuesday that an “unknown projectile” struck an oil tanker and started a fire off the coast of Oman, near the Strait of Hormuz, on Monday — reviving fears about the world’s most important oil chokepoint just as tensions there had begun to ease.

The strike pushed crude higher. Brent crude, the global benchmark, rose 0.63% to $72.45 a barrel, while U.S. West Texas Intermediate gained 0.57% to $68.94. The move interrupted a stretch of falling oil prices and reminded traders that the U.S.-Iran conflict, and the shipping lane carrying about a fifth of the world’s oil, remain a live risk.

Beneath the surface, money kept rotating. For a second straight session, investors pulled out of the artificial-intelligence trade that has led the market all year and moved into steadier corners like healthcare, banks and the biggest technology names.

The moves built on a strong start to the week. On Monday, the Dow closed at a record 53,055.91, the S&P 500 finished at 7,537.43 and the Nasdaq ended at 26,121.16. The small-cap Russell 2000 was the early bright spot Tuesday, edging up about 0.4%.

Market movers

The pain was concentrated in chipmakers. Micron Technology dropped about 5%, and KLA, Marvell Technology, Broadcom and AMD all fell, dragging the VanEck Semiconductor ETF down more than 3%. On the other side, Eli Lilly climbed more than 2%, while JPMorgan Chase and Microsoft advanced as buyers favored steady earners.

Walmart rose about 1% after the retailer said it was cutting prices on staples including ground beef and Coca-Cola products — a welcome sign for shoppers watching grocery bills. Rivian Automotive sank more than 10% after announcing plans to sell 75 million new shares, a move that dilutes existing holders. Amazon ticked up after reports it is seeking to raise at least $25 billion through a bond sale. And SpaceX, Elon Musk’s rocket company, officially joined the Nasdaq-100 on Tuesday, less than a month after its record-breaking June debut.

Analysts were busy. Goldman Sachs started coverage of SpaceX with a Buy rating and a $205 price target, while UBS and Stifel also launched with Buy calls at $210 and $190. JPMorgan reiterated its Overweight rating on Apple and lifted its target to $345 from $325. Deutsche Bank upgraded First Solar to Buy with a $272 target, and Scotiabank raised Cloudflare to Outperform, boosting its target to $300 from $225. Not every call was upbeat: Bank of America cut Adobe to Underperform with a $190 target, and Erste Group downgraded Broadcom to Hold.

Commodities and volatility

Oil was the standout, climbing on the Hormuz scare. Otherwise the mood stayed mostly calm. The Cboe Volatility Index, Wall Street’s “fear gauge,” had closed near a low 15.6 on Monday and ticked only modestly higher as stocks opened, suggesting traders saw the tanker strike as a worry to watch rather than a reason to flee.

The day ahead

There is fresh data to digest. The Commerce Department reported Tuesday that the U.S. trade deficit widened sharply in May to $77.6 billion, from a revised $54.6 billion in April, as exports fell 3.2% and imports rose 3.3%. Investors are also looking to Wednesday, when the Federal Reserve releases minutes from its first meeting under new Chair Kevin Warsh — a document that could offer clues on when, or whether, interest rates will fall this year. Overseas, leaders are gathering for a NATO summit in Ankara, Turkey, where President Donald Trump is pressing European allies to spend more on their own defense.

For now, the market’s message is one of rotation rather than retreat: as long as the economy holds up, investors seem willing to keep buying — just not the same stocks that carried them here.

JBiz Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Thousands of Americans on Medicare have lost their prescription drug coverage this year after failing to pay premiums that, in some cases, were as little as $8. A new investigation by KFF Health News, published Monday, found many seniors were unaware they owed anything after plans that previously charged $0 monthly premiums quietly introduced small monthly fees for 2026.

The issue centers on Wellcare’s Value Script plan, the nation’s largest standalone Medicare Part D prescription drug plan with nearly 6 million members. In dozens of states, enrollees who paid no premium in 2025 suddenly owed small monthly payments this year. Many say they never realized the change until their prescription coverage had already been canceled.

Under current Medicare rules, insurers can terminate prescription drug coverage after members miss premium payments during a grace period. Even relatively small unpaid balances can result in cancellation.

One Nevada enrollee reportedly lost coverage after owing just $8.10 over three months. Another beneficiary lost coverage after missing less than $30 in premium payments.

For many seniors, the financial consequences extend far beyond the missed payments. Once coverage is terminated, most beneficiaries cannot enroll in another Medicare drug plan until the annual open enrollment period, with new coverage generally not beginning until January 1 of the following year. Those who go without qualifying prescription coverage for more than 63 days may also face a permanent Medicare late-enrollment penalty, increasing their prescription costs for life.

Many affected seniors believed their premiums were still being deducted automatically from their Social Security checks. However, because their plans charged $0 the previous year, automatic deductions had stopped. When premiums increased for 2026, many members needed to actively restart those deductions but were unaware of the requirement.

Wellcare said it notified affected members through mailed notices, emails, phone calls and text messages regarding the premium changes.

The situation highlights how even minor administrative changes can create significant financial and health risks for older Americans, particularly those living on fixed incomes who depend on uninterrupted access to medications for chronic conditions such as heart disease, diabetes, high blood pressure and respiratory illnesses.

The investigation also underscores the complexity of the Medicare Part D system. Although Medicare provides prescription drug coverage, the plans themselves are administered by private insurance companies that determine premiums, billing procedures and enrollment policies within federal guidelines.

Consumer advocates say beneficiaries should carefully review annual plan notices each fall, even if they expect their coverage to remain unchanged. A plan that carried no monthly premium one year may charge a premium the next, creating payment obligations that many retirees may overlook.

For Medicare beneficiaries, the lesson is simple but important: never assume a plan remains free from year to year. Confirm your monthly premium directly with your insurer, verify how payments are being made, and make sure automatic deductions remain active if applicable. Spending a few minutes reviewing your coverage could prevent the loss of prescription benefits and avoid permanent financial penalties.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

SpaceX officially joins the Nasdaq-100 Index before Tuesday’s opening bell, triggering billions of dollars in automatic stock purchases as index funds and exchange-traded funds (ETFs) rebalance their portfolios to include the aerospace company.

The addition comes less than a month after Elon Musk’s company made its public market debut, making it one of the fastest companies ever added to the Nasdaq-100 following an initial public offering.

Because more than $800 billion is tied to the Nasdaq-100 through mutual funds and ETFs, fund managers tracking the index are required to purchase SpaceX shares regardless of valuation or market conditions.

Analysts estimate the inclusion could generate tens of billions of dollars in buying demand across passive investment funds, with the Invesco QQQ Trust alone expected to purchase billions of dollars’ worth of SpaceX stock.

Unlike active fund managers, index funds simply mirror the benchmark they follow. When a company joins the Nasdaq-100, those funds automatically buy the stock while slightly reducing holdings in every other company already in the index.

The timing makes SpaceX’s inclusion particularly noteworthy.

Only a small percentage of the company’s shares are currently available for public trading, meaning a large wave of mandatory buying is entering a relatively limited supply of stock. That imbalance between demand and available shares could contribute to increased price volatility in the short term.

SpaceX joins an index that already includes many of the world’s largest technology companies, including Apple, Microsoft, Nvidia, Amazon, Alphabet, and Meta Platforms.

The company’s rapid inclusion reflects both its enormous market capitalization and Nasdaq’s accelerated process for adding newly listed companies that quickly rank among the exchange’s largest businesses.

For investors who own Nasdaq-100 index funds through retirement accounts or brokerage portfolios, the change happens automatically. Millions of Americans will become indirect SpaceX shareholders without making any investment decisions themselves.

History, however, suggests that joining a major index does not guarantee future gains.

While some companies continue rising after inclusion, others experience temporary price spikes driven by forced buying before normal trading resumes. Investors will also be watching for insider share lockups to expire in the coming months, potentially increasing the number of shares available for sale.

Longer term, SpaceX’s valuation will depend less on index flows and more on the performance of its underlying businesses, including its launch services, Starlink satellite internet network, and future commercial space initiatives.

For Wall Street, Tuesday’s addition represents one of the largest index rebalancing events of the year and another milestone in the continued expansion of passive investing, where trillions of dollars automatically flow into the market based on index membership rather than individual stock selection.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Two trading teams at Millennium Management, one of the world’s largest hedge funds, generated an estimated $3.7 billion in profits during June, underscoring how a handful of specialized traders can produce enormous returns by capitalizing on stock market index changes.

According to a Bloomberg report published Monday, the teams—led by Glen Scheinberg in New York and Pratik Madhvani in Dubai—accounted for more than half of Millennium’s estimated $6.6 billion in pre-fee profits for the month.

Their success came from a strategy known as index rebalancing, one of Wall Street’s most lucrative but least understood trading opportunities.

Major indexes such as the S&P 500, Nasdaq-100, and Russell indexes periodically add and remove companies. Because trillions of dollars are invested in index funds and exchange-traded funds (ETFs) that track those benchmarks, fund managers must buy newly added stocks and sell companies being removed.

Professional trading firms attempt to anticipate those transactions before they occur, profiting from the predictable buying and selling pressure created when index funds adjust their portfolios.

June proved especially profitable because several major index rebalancing events occurred almost simultaneously, creating unusually large trading volumes across global markets.

Millennium, which manages approximately $89 billion in assets through more than 330 independent trading teams, posted an estimated 4.1% return during June, bringing its gain for the year to roughly 10.5%, according to the Bloomberg report.

The results demonstrate the firm’s unique business model.

Rather than relying on a single investment strategy, Millennium allocates capital across hundreds of specialized portfolio managers who focus on everything from equities and bonds to commodities, currencies and quantitative trading. Strong performers receive additional capital, while underperforming teams often see assets reduced or are replaced.

For investors, the story highlights the growing influence of passive investing.

Today, trillions of dollars flow automatically into index funds through retirement accounts, pension plans and ETFs. While these investments offer low costs and broad diversification for long-term investors, they also create predictable trading patterns that sophisticated hedge funds can exploit.

Some market experts argue that index arbitrage improves market efficiency by providing liquidity during large portfolio adjustments. Others contend it allows sophisticated firms to profit from predictable trades generated by passive investors.

Either way, June’s results demonstrate the enormous sums at stake.

Just two teams inside one hedge fund generated nearly $4 billion in a single month by identifying and trading around scheduled changes in major stock indexes.

For individual investors, the takeaway is not to chase these strategies but to recognize how modern financial markets operate. Behind the scenes, some of Wall Street’s largest firms use sophisticated technology, leverage and quantitative models to capitalize on market events that most investors never notice.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Seven members of the OPEC+ alliance, led by Saudi Arabia and Russia, agreed on Sunday, July 5, to increase oil production by another 188,000 barrels per day beginning in August, according to a statement released by OPEC. On the surface, it was the group’s fifth consecutive monthly production increase. Beneath that decision, however, is a growing battle over the future of the nearly 70-year-old oil cartel—one that could ultimately send crude prices sharply lower and deliver significant savings to consumers.

Only a few months ago, the world faced the opposite problem.

The conflict that erupted in late February involving the United States, Israel and Iran disrupted shipping through the Strait of Hormuz, the narrow waterway that normally carries roughly one-fifth of the world’s oil supply. Energy markets reacted immediately. Brent crude, the international benchmark, surged to $138 per barrel on April 7, its highest level since 2022, while fears of prolonged supply shortages sent fuel prices soaring around the globe.

Today, the picture has changed dramatically.

Commercial traffic has resumed through the Strait of Hormuz, production is returning, and crude prices have largely erased their wartime gains. On Monday, July 6, Brent crude traded near $71.70 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate (WTI) hovered around $68.40, almost exactly where both benchmarks stood before the conflict began.

Several energy analysts now believe prices may have further to fall.

The pressure is coming from inside OPEC itself.

During the conflict, Gulf producers with limited export routes—including Iraq, Kuwait and Iran—were forced to sharply reduce production after shipping through the Persian Gulf became constrained. Saudi Arabia was better positioned because it continued exporting significant volumes through its East-West Pipeline to the Red Sea port of Yanbu, allowing it to maintain a much larger share of production.

Now that exports have resumed, countries that lost months of revenue want to increase production aggressively.

Iraq has publicly indicated it wants authorization to pump as much as 5 million barrels per day, with a longer-term objective of reaching 7 million barrels daily. Iraqi officials have also suggested the country could reconsider its membership in OPEC if larger production quotas are not approved.

That threat highlights the organization’s growing dilemma.

To keep member nations satisfied, OPEC may need to permit significantly higher production, increasing global supply and driving oil prices lower. But limiting production to support higher prices risks encouraging frustrated members to leave the organization altogether, weakening the cartel’s influence over world energy markets.

It is a difficult balancing act.

Saudi Arabia remains OPEC’s dominant producer and effectively controls the group’s direction. Flooding the market too quickly could send prices sharply lower, reducing revenues for every member. Holding production back, however, risks internal divisions that could permanently weaken the alliance.

Signs of that pressure are already emerging.

State-owned Saudi Aramco recently reduced official selling prices for its flagship crude grades destined for Asian buyers, one of its most aggressive pricing moves in years. The reductions reflect increasing competition for market share as additional barrels begin returning to global markets.

Demand trends are adding another layer of uncertainty.

Higher oil prices earlier this year accelerated investment in electric vehicles, renewable energy and energy efficiency across many countries. Some analysts believe a portion of that lost oil demand may never fully return, even as prices moderate.

According to JPMorgan commodities strategist Natasha Kaneva, the market now faces the prospect of previously constrained oil supplies returning just as global consumption growth begins slowing—a combination that could create a significant supply surplus.

Several forecasters believe that scenario could push prices considerably lower over the next several years.

Capital Economics economist Kieran Tompkins has suggested oil could average around $60 per barrel next year, with prices potentially falling toward $50 later in the decade. Some market analysts have argued that if OPEC loses control of production discipline altogether, prices could temporarily decline to $40 per barrel.

For oil-producing nations, that would represent a painful financial blow.

Saudi Arabia is widely estimated to require oil prices near $91 per barrel to balance its national budget, while several other producing countries depend heavily on petroleum revenues to fund government spending and economic development.

For consumers, however, lower oil prices would be welcome news.

Cheaper crude typically leads to lower gasoline and diesel prices, reduced airline fuel costs, lower shipping expenses and slower inflation across much of the economy. Because transportation costs affect nearly every product consumers purchase, sustained declines in oil prices often ripple throughout supply chains and eventually reach household budgets.

The larger story extends beyond this month’s production increase.

For decades, OPEC has exercised enormous influence over global oil markets by carefully managing supply. Today, growing internal disagreements, shifting energy demand and changing geopolitical realities are testing that influence as never before.

Whether the organization preserves its unity or fractures under competing national interests could determine not only the future of global energy markets, but also what consumers pay at the gas pump for years to come.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Starbucks shares fell more than 3% Monday after slipping below a key technical support level closely watched by Wall Street traders, signaling that the coffee giant’s recent rally may be losing momentum despite continued improvements in the company’s business.

The stock dropped below its 50-day moving average, a widely followed market indicator used to measure a stock’s intermediate trend. Technical analysts often view a move below that level as a bearish signal, suggesting sellers are beginning to gain control.

Starbucks traded near $102 after falling from recent highs around $109, although the stock remains well above where it traded late last year.

Despite Monday’s decline, the company’s fundamentals remain considerably stronger than its recent chart performance suggests.

During its latest quarterly earnings report, Starbucks reported $9.53 billion in revenue while adjusted earnings exceeded Wall Street expectations. Global comparable store sales also increased, with North America delivering its strongest customer traffic in several years.

CEO Brian Niccol has continued executing the company’s turnaround strategy, focusing on faster service, improved store operations and rebuilding customer loyalty.

Starbucks also recently addressed one of its biggest long-term uncertainties by restructuring its China business through a multibillion-dollar transaction designed to improve profitability while reducing operational risk.

Wall Street remains largely positive on the company.

Several analysts continue to rate Starbucks a Buy, with price targets above current trading levels, reflecting confidence that improving operations can support future earnings growth.

Still, investors face several challenges.

Coffee prices remain elevated, labor costs continue rising and inflation has pressured restaurant margins throughout the industry. At the same time, Starbucks faces growing competition from rapidly expanding specialty coffee chains and regional drive-thru operators targeting younger consumers.

Monday’s decline appears driven more by market trading patterns than by new company-specific developments.

Technical indicators currently suggest the stock may continue trading within a relatively narrow range until investors receive additional information, likely when Starbucks reports its next quarterly earnings later this month.

For long-term investors, Monday’s pullback serves as a reminder that even companies reporting improving financial results can experience short-term volatility as traders react to technical signals and broader market sentiment.

The next major catalyst for Starbucks shares will likely come when management updates investors on customer traffic, profit margins and the continued progress of its turnaround strategy.

JBizNews Desk | Seattle

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wall Street investors have built a record number of bearish bets against Hertz Global Holdings after the rental car company’s stock lost nearly 60% of its value in just a few weeks, reflecting growing concerns about weakening profits, falling used-car prices and the company’s financial outlook.

New short-interest data released Monday showed bearish positions against Hertz reached an all-time high following the company’s June 24 announcement that sharply lowered its profit expectations and unveiled a new financing plan to strengthen its balance sheet.

Short selling is a strategy in which investors borrow shares and sell them, hoping to buy them back later at a lower price. A record level of short interest typically signals that professional investors expect further declines.

Hertz’s problems began after management warned that falling used-vehicle prices would significantly reduce the value of its rental fleet—a critical source of profits for rental car companies when vehicles are sold after leaving service.

The company also lowered its second-quarter earnings outlook, citing faster-than-expected vehicle depreciation and weaker-than-anticipated resale values across the used-car market.

To raise additional capital, Hertz announced plans to secure approximately $400 million through a combination of new debt and an equity offering.

As part of the financing, the company made millions of shares available for investors participating in the transaction, contributing to the surge in short-selling activity.

The market reacted swiftly.

Shares fell more than 40% immediately following the announcement and have continued sliding, making Hertz one of Wall Street’s worst-performing stocks over the past month.

Several analysts also reduced their price targets after the earnings warning, pointing to continued pressure on vehicle values, higher financing costs and uncertainty surrounding the company’s turnaround strategy.

The latest decline marks another dramatic swing for Hertz shareholders.

Earlier this year, the stock became one of Wall Street’s most volatile “meme” stocks after a short squeeze briefly sent shares sharply higher before the rally quickly reversed.

Despite the stock’s decline, Hertz continues operating normally through its Hertz, Dollar, and Thrifty rental brands, serving millions of travelers worldwide.

For investors, however, the company illustrates the challenges facing the rental car industry.

Unlike most businesses, rental car companies rely heavily on the resale value of their vehicle fleets. When used-car prices fall, profits can deteriorate rapidly, even if rental demand remains relatively stable.

With record levels of investors now betting against Hertz, the company faces increasing pressure to stabilize earnings and restore investor confidence.

Whether management’s turnaround plan succeeds—or bearish investors prove correct—will likely depend on how quickly used-car prices recover and whether Hertz can improve profitability during the second half of the year.

JBizNews Desk | Estero, Florida
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Microsoft announced Monday that it will eliminate approximately 4,800 jobs, or about 2.1% of its global workforce, as the company accelerates its push into artificial intelligence while streamlining operations across several divisions. The deepest reductions will come from its Xbox gaming business, where executives acknowledged the unit has struggled with profitability amid rising hardware costs and slowing console demand.

The layoffs were confirmed in a memo to employees from Amy Coleman, Microsoft’s chief people officer, who said the cuts are part of a broader organizational restructuring rather than a direct replacement of workers with AI.

“The roles eliminated today are not being replaced by AI,” Coleman wrote, adding that employees will need to continue developing new skills as Microsoft’s business evolves.

The biggest impact falls on Xbox. In a separate memo, Xbox CEO Asha Sharma told employees the gaming division is undergoing what she called its most significant restructuring ever. Approximately 1,600 positions are being eliminated immediately, with total reductions expected to reach 3,200 jobs by the end of Microsoft’s 2027 fiscal year—nearly one-fifth of the Xbox workforce.

Sharma said the gaming business has been operating with significantly lower profit margins than competing platforms and faces mounting pressure from sharply higher hardware costs. Memory chips used in gaming consoles have become more expensive as global demand for AI data centers continues to surge, squeezing margins throughout the gaming industry.

As part of the overhaul, Microsoft also plans to spin off four gaming studios into separate ownership while shifting more resources toward higher-growth software and AI businesses.

The reductions extend beyond Xbox. Sales, consulting and corporate operations are also being trimmed, including approximately 600 jobs in Washington state, home to Microsoft’s Redmond headquarters. Before the layoffs, Microsoft employed roughly 220,000 people worldwide.

The restructuring comes as Microsoft prepares one of the largest capital spending programs in corporate history. The company has told investors it expects to invest approximately $190 billion during 2026 to expand AI infrastructure, cloud computing capacity and data centers that power products including Copilot, Azure AI and enterprise AI services.

Microsoft has also launched new initiatives that embed thousands of engineers directly inside customer organizations to accelerate AI deployment, underscoring where future hiring and investment are being directed.

The announcement reflects a broader trend sweeping the technology sector. Rather than replacing workers directly with AI, many companies are shifting budgets away from traditional business units and toward artificial intelligence infrastructure, software development and cloud services.

Industrywide, more than 150,000 technology jobs have reportedly been eliminated during the first half of 2026 as companies including Amazon, Meta, Oracle and others continue restructuring while increasing AI investment.

Wall Street has largely rewarded companies that aggressively invest in AI, even as they reduce headcount elsewhere. Microsoft shares were little changed following the announcement, while investors continue watching whether the company’s enormous AI spending will generate stronger long-term revenue growth.

For businesses, Microsoft’s restructuring reinforces a growing reality across corporate America: companies are increasingly redirecting investment toward AI while demanding greater productivity from existing employees. The result is a workforce that must continually adapt as employers prioritize automation, cloud computing and AI-driven services.

The message extends well beyond Microsoft. Businesses across nearly every industry are evaluating staffing needs, retraining employees and investing heavily in AI tools designed to improve efficiency, reduce costs and remain competitive in an increasingly technology-driven economy.

JBizNews Desk | Redmond, Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Alibaba has ordered employees to stop using Anthropic’s Claude artificial intelligence tools, placing Claude Code on an internal list of restricted software and directing engineers to switch to Alibaba’s own coding assistant, Qoder, beginning July 10. The move, first reported by the South China Morning Post, marks a significant escalation in the growing competition between two of the world’s leading AI developers.

According to people familiar with the directive, Alibaba classified Claude Code as a “high-risk” application because of what it described as potential security and “back-door” concerns. Employees who previously relied on Anthropic’s software for programming assistance have been instructed to transition to Qoder, Alibaba’s internally developed AI coding platform.

The decision follows weeks of rising tensions between the two companies.

In June, Anthropic submitted a letter to the U.S. Senate Committee on Banking, Housing, and Urban Affairs, alleging that operators connected to Alibaba’s Qwen artificial intelligence division carried out what it described as the largest known AI model distillation attack against Claude.

Anthropic claimed approximately 25,000 accounts generated nearly 28.8 million conversations with Claude over several weeks in an effort to reproduce the model’s capabilities. Alibaba has denied the allegations.

At the center of the dispute is a rapidly emerging issue within artificial intelligence known as model distillation.

The technique allows developers to train smaller AI systems by studying responses produced by more advanced models. Supporters argue it can improve efficiency and reduce computing costs, while critics contend unauthorized large-scale use may improperly copy years of expensive research and development.

Anthropic maintains that using Claude in this manner violates its terms of service and infringes on its intellectual property.

The conflict intensified further after users reported discovering code inside Claude Code that appeared designed to identify whether certain users were located in China or connected to Chinese AI laboratories.

The discovery, widely discussed on online developer forums, prompted renewed scrutiny of Anthropic’s software.

Anthropic acknowledged the experimental feature and said it had already decided to remove it in a future software update. Company representatives described the functionality as part of an effort to detect unauthorized account resellers and misuse of the platform rather than to monitor ordinary users.

Neither company has publicly expanded on the dispute beyond previously issued statements.

The internal policy represents a sharp shift for Alibaba.

Earlier this year, the company actively encouraged employees to experiment with leading AI assistants, reimbursing developers for subscriptions to outside platforms including Claude, OpenAI’s ChatGPT and Google Gemini. Many engineers reportedly relied heavily on Claude Code because of its strong reputation for software development and debugging.

Under the new policy, employees are expected to migrate to Alibaba’s own AI ecosystem.

The dispute also reflects a broader geopolitical divide emerging across the artificial intelligence industry.

Anthropic has reportedly briefed U.S. policymakers on concerns involving foreign access to advanced AI systems while tightening access restrictions for users in mainland China and other regions. Those measures include expanded identity verification requirements and additional safeguards designed to prevent unauthorized commercial use of Claude.

For businesses, the implications extend beyond one corporate disagreement.

Artificial intelligence is becoming increasingly intertwined with national security, trade policy and technology competition between the United States and China. Companies operating internationally may soon face growing restrictions over which AI platforms employees are permitted to use, depending on corporate ownership, regulatory requirements and geopolitical considerations.

For software developers, the dispute highlights how quickly the AI landscape is changing. Tools that only months ago were viewed simply as productivity software are increasingly becoming strategic assets at the center of global technology competition.

The battle between Alibaba and Anthropic illustrates a broader shift now unfolding across the AI industry: competition is no longer focused solely on building the most capable models, but also on controlling access to them.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

LG Electronics reported record preliminary second-quarter results on Tuesday, July 7, saying operating profit surged approximately 147% from a year earlier to 1.57 trillion Korean won ($1.02 billion), according to the company’s regulatory filing. Quarterly revenue climbed 14.9% to 23.82 trillion won, also a record for the April-to-June period, highlighting a remarkable turnaround after last year’s tariff-driven slowdown.

The South Korean electronics giant said strong demand for its premium home appliances, televisions and automotive components fueled the record performance.

Sales of high-end refrigerators, washing machines and other household appliances remained strong, while overseas demand for air conditioners increased during the summer cooling season. LG also cited continued growth in its vehicle-components division, which has become an increasingly important contributor to earnings as automakers expand their use of advanced electronics.

The momentum extended well beyond one quarter.

For the first six months of 2026, LG generated a record 47.56 trillion won in revenue and 3.25 trillion won in operating profit, already surpassing the company’s total operating profit for all of 2025.

The dramatic improvement reflects both stronger business conditions and an easier comparison with last year.

During the second quarter of 2025, LG’s operating profit fell sharply to roughly 639 billion won as higher U.S. tariffs, softer consumer demand and rising manufacturing costs squeezed margins across its appliance business.

This year, those pressures have eased considerably.

LG has indicated it is recovering certain U.S. import duties through tariff-refund programs after determining some previously paid tariffs qualified for reimbursement. Those recoveries provided an additional boost to earnings while reversing costs that weighed heavily on last year’s results.

At the same time, the company spent the past year restructuring portions of its global manufacturing network, improving supply-chain efficiency and shifting production to better manage future tariff exposure.

Chief Executive Jae-cheol Ryu has also accelerated LG’s transformation away from relying primarily on highly competitive consumer electronics toward higher-margin businesses capable of generating steadier profits.

Those include subscription services for home appliances, software platforms built into LG televisions, automotive electronics and advanced cooling systems used in artificial intelligence data centers.

That strategy is helping reduce the company’s dependence on traditional television and appliance sales while creating recurring revenue streams that investors generally value more highly.

For consumers, the results carry mixed implications.

Strong sales of premium products suggest buyers continue spending on higher-end appliances despite broader economic uncertainty. Meanwhile, lower tariff-related costs could help reduce some pricing pressure across selected product lines, although manufacturers continue facing higher labor, logistics and component expenses.

The results also demonstrate how significantly U.S. trade policy can influence multinational manufacturers.

Just one year ago, tariffs substantially reduced LG’s profitability. Today, a combination of stronger sales, operational improvements and tariff recoveries has helped produce the strongest quarterly performance in company history.

For investors, the next milestone comes later this month when LG releases its complete earnings report, including business-segment performance and net income. Analysts will closely examine how much of the record profit came from sustainable operating improvements versus one-time tariff recoveries.

The broader takeaway is clear: LG’s strategy of emphasizing premium products, expanding higher-margin businesses and improving operational efficiency is delivering results at a time when global consumer demand remains uneven.

JBizNews Desk | Seoul, South Korea

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Samsung Electronics reported record quarterly earnings on Tuesday, July 7, forecasting operating profit of approximately 89.4 trillion Korean won ($58.4 billion) for the April-to-June quarter, according to the company’s official earnings guidance. The figure represents roughly 19 times the profit reported a year earlier and marks the largest quarterly operating profit in Samsung’s history, underscoring the extraordinary demand for artificial intelligence-related semiconductor chips.

Despite the historic results, investors reacted cautiously.

South Korea’s benchmark Kospi index opened sharply lower, falling about 1.6%, while Samsung shares dropped nearly 5% in early trading. The market’s response reflected growing investor concern that much of the AI-driven optimism has already been priced into technology stocks after an exceptional rally this year.

The company continues benefiting from surging demand for advanced memory chips used in artificial intelligence servers and high-performance computing. Samsung’s high-bandwidth memory business has become one of the biggest beneficiaries of the global AI boom as cloud providers and technology companies continue investing billions of dollars in new data centers.

Samsung’s projected operating profit exceeded analyst expectations of roughly 84 trillion won, while quarterly revenue reached approximately 171 trillion won, representing another significant increase from a year earlier.

The results confirm that demand for AI infrastructure remains exceptionally strong.

Memory chips have become one of the most valuable components inside AI systems, and Samsung remains one of the world’s largest producers alongside fellow South Korean manufacturer SK Hynix. Strong pricing for advanced memory products has helped offset weakness in several of Samsung’s traditional consumer electronics businesses.

Market movers

Analysts say Tuesday’s market reaction was driven less by Samsung’s earnings and more by investor expectations.

After semiconductor stocks posted enormous gains throughout 2026, many investors chose to lock in profits following the earnings announcement. The classic “sell the news” reaction has become increasingly common after major technology companies report results that, while impressive, may not significantly exceed already elevated expectations.

Several market strategists noted that Samsung’s earnings could still provide broader support for South Korea’s technology sector if investors regain confidence that AI-related spending remains sustainable.

Elsewhere in South Korea, shares of Hanwha Ocean fell sharply after Germany’s ThyssenKrupp Marine Systems was selected as the preferred bidder for Canada’s next submarine program, disappointing investors who had anticipated a major contract for the Korean shipbuilder.

Japan’s markets were more resilient.

The Nikkei 225 remained relatively stable while the broader Topix continued trading near record levels, supported by a weaker Japanese yen that continues benefiting the country’s exporters.

Wall Street also provided a positive backdrop.

On Monday, the Dow Jones Industrial Average closed above 53,000 for the first time, while the S&P 500 and Nasdaq Composite also finished higher as semiconductor shares extended recent gains. Strong performances from major U.S. chip companies helped reinforce optimism surrounding continued AI investment.

Commodities and volatility

Energy markets remained relatively calm despite ongoing geopolitical concerns.

Brent crude traded near $71.70 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate (WTI) hovered around $68.40, close to pre-conflict levels. Lower oil prices continue easing inflation concerns for many Asian economies that rely heavily on imported energy.

Meanwhile, the Cboe Volatility Index (VIX) remained subdued, indicating investors continue viewing broader market risks as relatively contained.

What’s next

Investors now turn their attention to several major developments later this week.

SK Hynix is preparing for its planned Nasdaq listing, one of the year’s most closely watched semiconductor offerings, while markets also await the release of minutes from the Federal Reserve’s latest policy meeting under Chair Kevin Warsh.

Those developments could influence global technology stocks, interest-rate expectations and investment flows into Asian markets.

For businesses and investors alike, Samsung’s record profit highlights the enormous economic impact artificial intelligence continues having across the semiconductor industry. At the same time, Tuesday’s market reaction serves as a reminder that extraordinary earnings alone may no longer be enough to sustain the sector’s remarkable rally.

JBizNews Desk | Seoul, South Korea

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump pardoned 11 people on Friday, July 3, 2026, among them a staffing-company executive once tied to the Jack Abramoff lobbying scandal and nine men the White House said were prosecuted for helping drivers strip federal emissions controls off their vehicles, according to a list released Friday evening by a White House official.

The best-known name is Adam Kidan, a former business partner of the disgraced Washington lobbyist Jack Abramoff. Kidan pleaded guilty in 2005 to fraud and conspiracy tied to the purchase of a fleet of SunCruz gambling boats and was sentenced in 2006 to nearly six years in prison. The case grew out of the early-2000s influence scandal that reached Capitol Hill, the Interior Department, and officials in President George W. Bush’s administration.

What the White House chose to emphasize, however, was Kidan’s second act in business. After his 2009 release, he took a job at a staffing agency, founded Chartwell Staffing Solutions, and now serves as president of Empire Workforce Solutions. The White House credited his firms with placing more than 250,000 people in entry-level jobs. Kidan, a Republican donor, was also among the hosts of a March fundraiser at Trump’s Mar-a-Lago resort for a Long Island congressional candidate, according to Newsday. A message left with his business was not returned Friday.

The larger business story sits with the other nine pardons. Each stemmed from Clean Air Act cases involving drivers, mechanics, and sellers convicted of disabling emissions-monitoring systems or selling the “defeat devices” used to bypass them. Trump announced that group first on his Truth Social account, writing that he was honoring people who were, in his view, punished by the prior administration for “fixing their car.” The White House framed the cases as examples of burdensome regulations that hurt small operators, highlighting Army veteran Tim Clancy, whose business it said was effectively destroyed by the enforcement actions.

The clemency comes just days after a policy move with broader implications for the automotive repair industry. Earlier in the week, Trump signed a “Freedom to Fix” memorandum directing the Environmental Protection Agency to expand consumers’ and independent repair shops’ ability to repair and modify their own vehicles. The memorandum calls for independent mechanics to receive the same diagnostic and repair information available to franchised dealerships and seeks to curb the California Air Resources Board’s authority over certain aftermarket emissions-related parts. The EPA said the current system places unnecessary burdens on independent businesses and limits consumer choice.

For the aftermarket parts and independent repair industry, that policy shift may carry greater long-term significance than the individual pardons themselves. Thousands of independent repair shops, diesel mechanics, tuners, and aftermarket parts suppliers have argued for years that aggressive federal and California emissions enforcement exposed small businesses to criminal liability while steering customers toward dealership service departments. A regulatory approach that expands repair rights while pardoning individuals convicted under earlier enforcement policies signals a meaningful shift in federal priorities. It also sets up a potential conflict with California, which has long exercised significant influence over national vehicle emissions standards.

Another recipient was Jack Harvard, a Texas rancher and former mayor of Plano during the 1980s who had been convicted of bank fraud. The White House said the pardon recognized his conduct after serving his sentence, including protecting endangered wildlife on his ranch and allowing U.S. military and NATO forces to train there without charge. Officials did not provide additional details about his case.

The full list released by the White House included Joshua Davis, Matt Geouge, Jonathan Achtemeier, Tim Clancy, Ryan Lalone, Wade Lalone, Barry Pierce, Aaron Rudolf, Adam Kidan, Mackenzie Spurlock, and Jack Harvard.

The pardons continue a broader pattern during Trump’s second term of making frequent use of presidential clemency. Supporters have described the emissions-related pardons as relief for mechanics and small-business owners affected by regulatory enforcement, while critics have pointed to the inclusion of political donors and high-profile business figures. For the staffing industry, independent repair shops, and the automotive aftermarket, the clemency actions underscore an administration signaling a lighter regulatory approach toward business.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) fired missiles at two commercial vessels near the Strait of Hormuz early Tuesday, according to U.S. officials, damaging both ships and marking the latest escalation in one of the world’s most strategically important shipping lanes. The attack comes as commercial traffic had begun returning to normal following weeks of regional tensions and raises fresh concerns about global energy supplies and shipping security.

One of the vessels struck was identified as the Al Rekayyat, a liquefied natural gas tanker owned and managed by Nakilat, Qatar’s state-backed LNG shipping company. According to reports, the tanker was transiting the mouth of the Strait of Hormuz in the Gulf of Oman when it was struck on the port side near the engine room. A fire broke out after the impact, sending smoke through part of the vessel. Crew members reported that everyone aboard was accounted for and no fatalities or injuries were immediately reported.

The United Kingdom Maritime Trade Operations (UKMTO) also received reports of a commercial tanker being struck by an unidentified projectile approximately eight nautical miles east of Limah, Oman. The agency said a fire was reported aboard the vessel, although there were no immediate indications of environmental damage.

The attack represents a significant escalation in a waterway through which roughly one-fifth of the world’s seaborne oil and liquefied natural gas shipments pass each day. The Strait of Hormuz remains the most critical maritime chokepoint for global energy markets, linking oil and natural gas producers in the Persian Gulf with customers across Asia, Europe and North America.

Energy traders had recently become more optimistic as shipping volumes gradually recovered and crude oil prices retreated from earlier highs. Before Tuesday’s attack, Brent crude had been trading near pre-conflict levels while West Texas Intermediate (WTI) also moved lower as concerns about supply disruptions eased and OPEC+ continued increasing production.

That optimism could now be tested.

Any renewed threat to commercial shipping through Hormuz has the potential to increase insurance costs, delay cargo movements and place upward pressure on global oil and natural gas prices. Even short-lived disruptions in the strait can ripple through supply chains, affecting transportation costs, manufacturing expenses and consumer prices around the world.

The incident carries particular significance for Qatar, one of the world’s largest exporters of liquefied natural gas. LNG shipments leaving Qatar’s Ras Laffan export complex depend on safe passage through the Strait of Hormuz before reaching customers in Europe and Asia. Any sustained disruption to that route could have consequences for global energy markets at a time when demand for natural gas remains elevated.

Shipping companies and commercial operators are expected to closely monitor security conditions in the region before determining whether to continue normal transit schedules or adopt additional safety measures. Maritime security organizations have repeatedly warned that commercial vessels operating in the Gulf face elevated risks during periods of heightened regional tension.

Financial markets are also expected to react as investors evaluate the potential impact on oil prices, shipping companies and energy producers. Previous disruptions involving the Strait of Hormuz have often resulted in increased volatility across energy, transportation and insurance sectors.

The latest incident also raises broader geopolitical concerns as governments seek to prevent additional escalation in the region. Diplomatic efforts aimed at reducing tensions now face renewed uncertainty following an attack involving commercial shipping in one of the world’s busiest maritime corridors.

For businesses and consumers, developments in the Strait of Hormuz extend well beyond the Middle East. Energy prices influence everything from gasoline and diesel fuel to airline tickets, shipping costs, manufacturing expenses and household utility bills. Any sustained increase in oil or LNG prices could eventually work its way into the broader economy.

Maritime authorities continue monitoring the situation while shipping companies evaluate operational risks in the region. The coming days will likely determine whether the attack proves to be an isolated incident or the beginning of renewed instability affecting one of the world’s most vital energy corridors.

JBizNews Desk | Strait of Hormuz

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump arrived in Turkey on Monday for this week’s NATO Summit, where he is expected to pressure alliance members to accelerate military spending and follow through on commitments made at last year’s summit.

Ahead of the meetings, U.S. Ambassador to NATO Matt Whitaker said the administration expects allies to move quickly toward the alliance’s new goal of spending 5% of gross domestic product (GDP) on defense and related security programs.

“President Trump fully expects that all allies will step up immediately and get on the path to 5%,” Whitaker told reporters before the summit opened.

The new benchmark, agreed to in principle last year, calls for 3.5% of GDP to be spent on core military capabilities and an additional 1.5% on broader security investments, including cyber defense, military infrastructure and defense-related industries.

For businesses, the summit carries significant economic implications.

Higher defense budgets across Europe are expected to generate billions of dollars in new contracts for aerospace companies, defense manufacturers, cybersecurity firms and suppliers throughout the United States and Europe.

NATO Secretary-General Mark Rutte has identified increased defense production as one of the summit’s top priorities, arguing that allied nations must expand manufacturing capacity to replenish weapons stockpiles while continuing military support for Ukraine.

A draft summit declaration also calls for approximately €70 billion ($80 billion) in military assistance to Ukraine during 2026, with additional funding expected in 2027.

The spending surge is already creating opportunities for U.S. manufacturers. Just days before the summit, the Trump administration approved the sale of more than $700 million worth of GE Aerospace F110 jet engines to Turkey, highlighting how increased defense spending is translating into new export orders.

While countries including Poland, Germany and the Baltic nations have accelerated military investment, U.S. officials say several NATO members continue to lag behind agreed targets.

Trump has repeatedly argued that European allies should assume a greater share of NATO’s financial burden, allowing the United States to focus more resources on emerging global security challenges.

Beyond geopolitics, the outcome of this week’s summit could have lasting effects on the defense industry. Increased military spending typically supports demand for aircraft, missiles, radar systems, cybersecurity services, shipbuilding and advanced manufacturing, benefiting thousands of companies throughout the defense supply chain.

For investors and manufacturers, NATO’s spending commitments represent one of the largest long-term growth opportunities in the global defense sector. Whether member nations convert those commitments into actual contracts will be closely watched by markets in the months ahead.

JBizNews Desk | Ankara, Turkey
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

When leaders of all 32 NATO members meet in Ankara, Turkey, the biggest business story on the table won’t be troops or treaties. It will be money — specifically, the roughly $300 billion in European orders for American-made military equipment that NATO Secretary General Mark Rutte has been highlighting to the White House. Rutte displayed that figure during a June 24 Oval Office meeting with President Donald Trump, pairing it with the claim that the buying wave is creating tens of thousands of U.S. factory jobs. He credited the American president directly for the shift.

That pitch is the commercial engine behind this week’s gathering. In a report prepared for the summit, the Congressional Research Service said allied leaders are expected to announce tens of billions of dollars in new defense contracts in Ankara, while outlining Rutte’s three priorities: raising allied defense spending, expanding transatlantic defense-industrial production, and sustaining support for Ukraine. Rutte has described a “sea change” in how European governments approach military budgets since Trump returned to office.

The spending numbers are substantial. According to NATO‘s own accounting, European allies and Canada increased defense spending by 20% in 2025 and together spent more than $574 billion, adjusted to 2021 prices. Those increases stem from the pledge reached at last year’s summit in The Hague, where every member except Spain committed to spending 5% of GDP on defense by 2035 — 3.5% for core military capabilities and 1.5% for security-related investments such as infrastructure and cybersecurity. The Ankara meeting is where governments are expected to show how those commitments will translate into real procurement.

A significant share of those contracts is expected to benefit American manufacturers. U.S. defense companies dominate many of the categories NATO is urgently seeking to expand, including air and missile defense systems, precision-guided munitions, and combat aircraft, after the war in Ukraine exposed major shortages across Europe. NATO’s new capability targets call for a fivefold increase in air defense, while officials have warned that ammunition stockpiles remain insufficient across much of the alliance. That backlog is the “$300 billion” Rutte continues to reference, pointing directly to U.S. production lines and manufacturing jobs. Germany, now Europe’s largest defense spender at roughly $120 billion in 2025, has more than doubled its military budget since 2022.

For the first time, the defense industry itself takes center stage. The full day of the summit’s opening session is dedicated to the NATO Summit Defence Industry Forum, which organizers say will run longer than the leaders’ own formal meeting. One of the key initiatives under discussion is what NATO describes as a “front door” for industry—an AI-enabled platform designed to help companies navigate the alliance’s procurement process more efficiently. Jason Israel, a senior fellow at the Center for European Policy Analysis and a former National Security Council defense-policy director, has pointed to joint purchasing and interoperability as essential goals while cautioning that NATO’s procurement system was never designed to move at today’s pace.

The political backdrop remains complicated. Trump has pushed for more than increased military spending, repeatedly calling for greater allied “loyalty.” He has threatened to reduce the U.S. military presence in Europe, floated annexing Greenland—a semiautonomous territory of NATO ally Denmark—and questioned whether the United States should defend members he believes are not contributing enough. Former NATO Secretary General Jens Stoltenberg wrote in his memoir that the alliance nearly fractured during the 2018 summit amid disputes with Trump, warning that NATO’s collective-defense guarantee loses credibility if an American president openly questions it. Fresh disagreements following the recent U.S.-Iran conflict, in which several allies declined to participate, have added new strains ahead of the Ankara meeting.

Hosting duties fall to Turkish President Recep Tayyip Erdoğan, whose relationship with Trump could help keep the American president engaged despite broader disagreements within the alliance. Turkey also has its own commercial interests. Its drone manufacturers have become major suppliers across Europe, yet Ankara has been excluded from parts of the European Union’s joint procurement efforts. Rutte has repeatedly argued that limiting Turkish participation raises costs and slows defense production.

Despite the political friction, public support for NATO remains strong in the United States. A Chicago Council on Global Affairs survey conducted June 5–7 found that roughly two-thirds of Americans favor maintaining or increasing the nation’s commitment to the alliance. Whether that support translates into signed contracts—and how many of those contracts go to American manufacturers—will be the key measure of the summit’s success.

JBizNews Desk | Ankara, Turkey

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Bitcoin rebounded Monday after President Donald Trump publicly embraced cryptocurrency during the rollout of the new Trump Accounts savings program, helping reverse an earlier selloff and lifting prices back above $63,000.

Speaking at a White House event, Trump said he has become “a big crypto guy,” arguing that the United States must remain competitive with China in the rapidly growing digital asset industry.

“If we don’t have it, China is going to have it,” Trump said, adding that he believes cryptocurrency “has a lot of life” ahead.

His comments helped improve investor sentiment after Bitcoin had fallen more than 2% earlier in the day.

The cryptocurrency’s recovery came despite fresh selling pressure from Strategy (formerly MicroStrategy), one of the world’s largest corporate holders of Bitcoin.

In a regulatory filing Monday, Strategy disclosed it sold approximately $216 million worth of Bitcoin between June 29 and July 5, marking its second round of Bitcoin sales this year. The company still owns approximately 843,775 Bitcoin, making it by far the largest publicly traded corporate holder of the cryptocurrency.

The sales surprised investors because Strategy and Executive Chairman Michael Saylor had long promoted a strategy of accumulating Bitcoin rather than selling it.

Some Wall Street analysts viewed the move as a negative signal for crypto markets, while others said the sales appear to be part of the company’s broader capital management strategy rather than a loss of confidence in Bitcoin.

Meanwhile, Trump’s crypto-friendly remarks added another layer to an administration that has increasingly embraced digital assets.

The comments came during the launch of Trump Accounts, a new tax-advantaged savings program established under the One Big Beautiful Bill Act. The program provides eligible children born between 2025 and 2028 with a $1,000 federal seed investment, while families can contribute additional money annually.

Although asked whether Bitcoin could eventually become an investment option inside the accounts, Trump stopped short of making any commitment.

Under current law, the accounts invest in a low-cost S&P 500 index fund, and adding cryptocurrency would likely require congressional approval rather than an administrative change.

Trump’s position on digital assets has shifted dramatically over the past several years. In 2019, he criticized cryptocurrencies, saying they were “not money.” Since returning to office, however, he has positioned the United States as a supporter of digital asset innovation and has repeatedly argued that America should lead the industry rather than allow China to dominate it.

Bitcoin remains one of the world’s most volatile financial assets, frequently moving thousands of dollars in a single trading session as investors react to economic data, government policy, institutional buying and selling, and regulatory developments.

For investors, Monday’s trading highlighted how quickly sentiment can change. A corporate Bitcoin sale pushed prices lower early in the session, while a few supportive comments from the president helped reverse much of the decline only hours later.

As cryptocurrencies continue moving further into the financial mainstream, investors can expect government policy, institutional activity and political developments to remain major drivers of Bitcoin prices.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Oil prices have fallen all the way back to where they stood before the United States and Iran went to war, erasing months of wartime gains and weakening one of Tehran’s most powerful sources of economic leverage. The decline accelerated Sunday after the Organization of the Petroleum Exporting Countries and its allies agreed to add another 188,000 barrels a day to their production target beginning in August, marking the fourth straight monthly increase and signaling that the world’s biggest exporters are confident supplies will remain ample.

The seven countries still bound by quotas — Saudi Arabia, Russia, Iraq, Kuwait, Algeria, Kazakhstan and Oman — have now returned about 940,000 barrels a day to the market since the war between the United States and Iran began on February 28. That is close to 1% of all the oil the world burns in a day. The United Arab Emirates walked away from the alliance in the spring so it could pump freely, and its exports have since climbed to a record of roughly 3.7 million barrels a day.

For American families, the timing could hardly be better. Crude has slid all the way back to where it sat before the fighting started. West Texas Intermediate, the U.S. benchmark, traded near $68 a barrel late last week, while Brent, the global standard, hovered around $72. Both sit at their lowest levels since February 27 — the day before the war — and cheaper crude usually reaches the gas pump within a few weeks. That means relief for drivers heading home from the July 4 weekend and lower fuel bills for airlines.

The turnaround is remarkable. When Iran choked off the Strait of Hormuz this winter — the narrow channel that carries about a fifth of the world’s seaborne oil — prices jumped and forecasters warned of a real crisis. OPEC’s own output tumbled to 33.13 million barrels a day in May from 42.77 million in February. But tanker traffic through the strait has been climbing back, Saudi Arabia has restored shipments to about 90% of prewar levels, and a memorandum of understanding between Washington and Tehran aimed at ending the war has calmed nerves.

Now the worry is a glut, not a shortage. Norbert Rücker, head of economics at Swiss bank Julius Baer, said the market is settling into a “new-old normal” of ample supply and fierce competition among producers. Goldman Sachs expects Gulf exports to return to prewar levels by the end of July and sees Brent ending the year near $80.

There is one place the shelves are still bare: the world’s emergency reserves. Crude in the U.S. Strategic Petroleum Reserve fell by 5.5 million barrels in the week ended June 26 to 325.7 million barrels, its lowest level since May 1983, according to the Department of Energy. The reserve has been cut nearly in half since 2021, drained to keep oil flowing during the Hormuz crunch as part of a coordinated release organized by the International Energy Agency.

That gap is exactly why the current glut matters far beyond the gas station. The faster the United States and its partners can buy up cheap crude and refill their tanks, the less power Iran holds the next time it threatens to close the strait. A country with full storage can shrug off a blockade; a country running on fumes cannot. Cheaper oil, in other words, hands Washington leverage at the negotiating table just as talks with Tehran gain steam.

Refilling those reserves will not happen overnight. Patrick De Haan, head of petroleum analysis at GasBuddy, has cautioned that stockpiles remain thin enough that markets could still panic if the peace deal wobbles or the strait shuts again. And with governments focused on keeping prices low, few are in a rush to bid aggressively for barrels to top off their reserves right now.

For now, though, the direction is clear. Ample supply, recovering shipments and a fragile but holding truce have pulled oil off its wartime highs and put money back in the pockets of ordinary consumers. Whether the calm lasts depends on a peace deal that neither side has fully signed — and on a strait that Iran has closed before and could close again.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Two of the largest unions representing federal workers sued the Defense Department on Thursday, July 2, arguing the Pentagon acted illegally when it stripped collective bargaining rights from most of its civilian workforce earlier this year. The lawsuit, brought by the American Federation of Government Employees and the National Federation of Federal Employees, says the department violated the Administrative Procedure Act and asks a federal court to throw out the order that ended the contracts.

At the center of the case is an April 9 memo from Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth, who gave department leaders 24 hours to cancel nearly all collective bargaining agreements covering civilian employees. The unions argue the Pentagon reversed a long-standing policy “without any reasoned explanation” and misread the executive order it used to justify the move. Because the department acted arbitrarily, the complaint says, the memo “must be vacated and set aside.”

The dispute traces back to an order signed last year by President Donald Trump, which let agencies with national security missions suspend collective bargaining. Several agencies moved quickly to cancel union contracts. The Defense Department did not. For roughly a year it kept honoring its agreements, then abruptly changed course in April in what the lawsuit calls an “unexplained U-turn.” The unions note the legality of the underlying order is still being fought in multiple courts and say the Pentagon never explained why it could not simply wait for that litigation to finish.

The complaint describes a rollout that was, in its words, “chaotic.” In many cases there was almost no communication at all. Some union leaders learned by phone that their contracts were gone, others got emails or letters, and some received nothing, describing agency officials who “went radio silent.” The filing says managers at facilities across the country began telling employees the union no longer existed, a message the unions call false and damaging.

The practical fallout is landing on workers. The Defense Department has stopped accepting grievances filed under the canceled agreements, removing one of the main ways civilian employees resolve disputes over pay, discipline, and working conditions. The lawsuit points to one Army facility where an employee was placed on a performance improvement plan the unions describe as a likely prelude to firing. With her contract terminated, the complaint says, she has no way to challenge it.

For the unions, the fight is also about staffing a workforce the military depends on. “The Trump administration unilaterally and illegally stripping collective bargaining rights from DoD workers only serves to weaken morale, harm recruitment and retention,” NFFE National President Randy Erwin said in a statement. He argued that decades of unionized civilian work have never harmed national security and said the locals were proud to join AFGE in the challenge.

Hegseth has made his position plain. Pressed by lawmakers in April about canceling the contracts, he said he “fundamentally believes the ‘Department of War’ should not be subject to collective bargaining. Full stop.” He made the remark during testimony before the House Armed Services Committee on April 29, adding that the department already does a strong job providing competitive pay and benefits across the workforce.

The lawsuit lands as Congress keeps pushing back. The House Armed Services Committee recently adopted an amendment barring the Pentagon from using fiscal 2027 funds to carry out the president’s order. Whether it survives is unclear—a nearly identical provision was stripped from last year’s defense bill after Senate Republicans balked at clashing with the White House. The issue is expected to resurface as House and Senate negotiators hammer out the final 2027 defense authorization.

The stakes are large. Rep. Sarah Elfreth (D-Md.) said the president’s order wiped out bargaining rights for more than 1.5 million federal employees, including a wide swath of Defense Department civilians, calling it the most aggressive anti-union move by any president in U.S. history.

The Defense Department employs hundreds of thousands of civilians who repair aircraft, manage supply chains, run depots, and handle logistics that keep the armed forces running. Those jobs compete with private employers for skilled workers, and the unions argue that gutting workplace protections will make it harder to recruit and retain employees at a time when the department is already struggling to fill technical positions. The case now heads to federal court, where a judge will determine whether the Pentagon acted lawfully—and whether hundreds of thousands of civilian employees will regain their collective bargaining agreements.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

U.S. stocks pushed higher Monday, July 6, with the Dow Jones Industrial Average finishing at an all-time high as a rally in semiconductor shares carried the market into a new trading week. The gains came as President Donald Trump rang the opening bell from the Oval Office and formally launched his new Trump Accounts children’s savings program, using the moment to again point to record stock prices as proof his economic agenda is working. Falling oil prices and a rebound in Bitcoin added to the upbeat tone following the Independence Day weekend.

The Dow climbed 155.84 points, or 0.29%, to close at a record 53,055.91, marking its first close above 53,000 and setting another intraday high. The S&P 500 gained 0.72% to finish at 7,537.43, while the Nasdaq Composite advanced 1.12% to 26,121.16. The gains extended last week’s rally, when all three major indexes posted solid advances.

Market movers

Technology stocks once again led Wall Street higher.

The Technology Select Sector SPDR ETF rose nearly 2%, helped by a 7% jump in Western Digital and a 2.8% gain in Teradyne. AMD surged 6.6%, Broadcom climbed 3.7%, Intel added 1.5%, Apple gained 1.3%, and Micron Technology rose 0.9% as investors continued pouring money into companies tied to artificial intelligence and semiconductor manufacturing.

Nvidia edged higher after manufacturing partner Hon Hai Precision Industry (Foxconn) signaled that AI-related demand remains strong.

Analyst upgrades also fueled buying.

Morgan Stanley raised price targets on Lam Research, Applied Materials, and KLA Corporation, sending each stock higher. Meanwhile, Bank of America increased its price target on IBM to $330, citing stronger revenue expectations. IBM gained 3.4%, making it one of the Dow’s top performers.

Boeing led the Dow with a 3.55% gain, followed by Goldman Sachs, up 3.28%. On the downside, Amgen fell 2.32%, while Disney and Merck each lost about 2%.

One of the session’s biggest winners was TeraWulf, which soared more than 16% after announcing a 20-year agreement with Anthropic to supply data center capacity in Kentucky. The long-term contract is expected to generate more than $19 billion in revenue over its lifetime.

Comcast also finished higher after its Sky division agreed to acquire the television operations of Britain’s ITV.

Commodities and volatility

Oil prices continued moving lower as global supply concerns eased.

Saudi Aramco sharply reduced the official selling price of its flagship Arab Light crude for Asian buyers, marking one of the largest price cuts in years as Gulf producers compete for market share following the reopening of the Strait of Hormuz. Brent crude traded below $72 per barrel, erasing nearly all of the gains recorded during the recent Middle East conflict.

Bitcoin also recovered after an early decline.

The cryptocurrency climbed roughly 1.8% to around $63,850 after Trump described himself as “a big crypto guy” during the Trump Accounts launch. Earlier in the session, Bitcoin had weakened after Strategy disclosed it had sold approximately $216 million worth of the digital asset.

Overall market volatility remained relatively subdued as investors continued rotating into technology shares while monitoring interest rates, oil prices and corporate earnings.

Looking ahead

Investors will now turn their attention to another busy week for technology markets.

SpaceX, which recently completed its public listing under the ticker SPCX, is scheduled to join the Nasdaq-100, prompting index funds to purchase shares as part of the benchmark’s rebalancing.

Investors will also watch earnings and guidance from major semiconductor companies, including Samsung Electronics, for additional clues about global demand for AI chips and technology spending.

John Stoltzfus, chief investment strategist at Oppenheimer Asset Management, said U.S. equities could continue climbing if economic fundamentals remain healthy.

“So long as the stateside fundamentals that benefited investors in the first half remain intact or improve, there’s upside to equities ahead,” Stoltzfus wrote, while cautioning investors to expect periods of market volatility.

For now, Wall Street’s momentum remains firmly intact, with record highs, continued strength in artificial intelligence investments, and easing energy prices helping support investor confidence heading into the heart of earnings season.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

.

Over 700 governmental agency rules will be eliminated under a comprehensive reform program released by the Trump administration on Friday.

The Trump administration’s Office of Information and Regulatory Affairs ( OIRA ) released its 2026 regulatory plan, which included 702 deregulatory actions, an increase from the 482 that the previous administration had listed.

OMB, which is a division of the White House’s Office of Management and Budget ( OMB), made it clear that the agency’s unified regulatory agenda for this year aims to repeal laws that are preventing economic growth.

The main objective of this regulation strategy is to improve American ‘ lives. This report provides the most fundamental information about how the Trump administration promotes economic growth, careers, and affordability, according to Mark Paoletta, general counsel serving as OIRA executive.

SUPERSONIC CIVILIAN FLIGHTS IN US SKIES ATTEND SWIFT RETURN WITH A QUICK STEP.

Paoletta added that according to OIRA, the 2026 regulation plan will result in significantly higher regulation cost savings than the previous record set.

In Governmental Year 2025, the President’s striking deregulatory initiatives saved Americans$ 210.9 billion in costs, according to Paoletta, a level of regulatory savings unmatched in American history. With a projected cost saving of$ 1.5 trillion, the fiscal year 2026 will surpass even that figure.

Definitely DISCLOSED OF US MARKET AS A PERSONAL RESOURCE OF CHINA-LINKED Linked VEHICLES

A wide range of rules are changed throughout the national agencies in the regulation strategy for 2026. For instance, the Environmental Protection Agency ( EPA ) announced that it would revisit emissions standards for light- and medium-duty vehicles from the era of the carbon dioxide and that it would repeal those standards for power plants using fossil fuels.

The USDA announced that it would work with retailers to develop new requirements for the Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program ( SNAP ) to deter fraud and abuse.

Additionally, USDA intends to update the definition of qualified foods within the system to reflect the president’s nutrition goals and update the work requirements for able-bodied adults enrolled in SNAP. A proposed law would eliminate obsolete inspection procedures and modernize food safety inspections.

WHITE HOUSE LAYS OUT FIXES FOR AFFORDABILITY HOUSING PURPOSE

A new framework will be put in place to ensure the safe dissemination of U.S. artificial intelligence ( AI ) technology around the world, according to the Commerce Department’s Bureau of Industry and Security ( BIS), which regulates export controls and looks to support national security and the defense industrial base.

Additionally, BIS intends to reduce the trade restrictions on drones that are put in place for some U.S. allies and partners, and to include metal in the administration’s national security tariffs.

Clicking HERE WILL GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO.

This post was originally published here

The 2026 FIFA World Cup is turning into a spending bonanza for the North American cities hosting it. Card purchases across the tournament’s 16 host cities rose 5.4% from a year earlier during the June 10 to June 28 stretch, with spending by out-of-town visitors jumping 17.4%, according to a report from the Bank of America Institute. Behind those numbers are soccer fans opening their wallets like rarely before—some laying out a few thousand dollars, others spending as much as $150,000 to follow their teams across the United States, Canada and Mexico.

The tickets alone can cost a small fortune. On FIFA’s official sales platform, seats for the 104-match tournament have ranged from about $60 to nearly $11,000, with prices adjusting based on demand. For the July 19 final at MetLife Stadium, top-tier seats that started around $6,700 climbed to $10,990, while the priciest Front Category seats reached roughly $33,000. On the resale market, premium seats for marquee knockout matches were listed for about $20,000 on StubHub as of July 2.

Add flights, hotels, rental cars, meals and merchandise, and the trip quickly balloons. Fans interviewed near matches said their total costs ranged from about $2,500 for a single-city visit to as much as $150,000 for supporters purchasing FIFA hospitality packages and following the tournament from city to city. Many described the experience as a once-in-a-lifetime opportunity worth every dollar.

The biggest financial winner is FIFA itself. In a study prepared with the World Trade Organization, soccer’s governing body projected the tournament would generate $80.1 billion in gross economic activity worldwide, including $30.5 billion in the United States alone. FIFA, which operates as a nonprofit organization, says tournament revenue is reinvested into growing the sport globally and has defended its dynamic ticket pricing by citing extraordinary demand.

For host cities, the payoff has been substantial, though uneven. A report from FCM Consulting found that 13 of the 16 host cities have experienced hotel rate increases of at least 80% compared with a year ago. In Guadalajara, average room rates climbed from about $90 last summer to $511, while Boston led U.S. markets at roughly $611 per night and Houston averaged about $205.

Even with higher room rates, not every hotel has benefited equally. Before kickoff, the American Hotel & Lodging Association reported that roughly 80% of host-city hotels were seeing bookings below expectations, with many operators pointing to visa delays and geopolitical uncertainty for softer-than-expected international travel.

That matters because overseas visitors typically spend significantly more than domestic travelers. The U.S. Travel Association estimates international visitors spend more than $5,000 each during their trips, more than $200 above the average domestic traveler. Domestic fans, however, have accounted for much of the tournament traffic, while short-term rental analytics firm AirDNA reported that a surge of new listings has limited earnings for many property owners despite strong demand.

The soaring prices have also sparked criticism. New York officials partnered with Global Citizen to host a free Central Park watch party for 50,000 fans during the final, while host cities from Atlanta to Los Angeles have organized free fan festivals for supporters unable to afford stadium tickets. Even NJ Transit faced backlash after initially proposing a $150 round-trip fare from Penn Station to MetLife Stadium on game days before reducing the price to $98. Andrew Giuliani, who leads the White House task force overseeing the tournament, has said ticket prices are simply too high.

With the knockout rounds underway and the championship scheduled for July 19, the biggest matches are expected to generate another wave of last-minute travel and consumer spending. Whether host cities ultimately realize the long-term economic gains projected by organizers remains an open question. A study by the University of Toronto found that host cities experienced a net economic loss in 12 of the last 14 World Cups, highlighting the difference between short-term spending booms and lasting financial benefits.

For now, however, the numbers are difficult to ignore. Spending is breaking records, businesses across host cities are benefiting from an influx of visitors, and fans continue paying unprecedented prices for the chance to witness soccer’s biggest tournament in person.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The new head of the Federal Reserve is making clear that one of his signature goals — trimming the central bank’s enormous bond portfolio — will be a slow, careful project rather than a quick fix. Speaking Wednesday at the European Central Bank’s annual central-banking forum in Sintra, Portugal, Fed Chairman Kevin Warsh reiterated his preference to scale back the Fed’s bond holdings while stressing that any move would come only after extensive public preparation.

Warsh summed up the timeline with a characteristic line. “It’ll take us more than 18 weeks to bring it down to size,” he said, noting that it took the central bank roughly 18 years to build a balance sheet he believes has grown so large it “borders on fiscal policy.” The message was clear: no sudden moves, but a deliberate direction of travel.

The balance sheet in question is vast. The Fed’s holdings ballooned from about $800 billion before the 2008 financial crisis to nearly $9 trillion at their 2022 peak, swelling each time the central bank bought bonds to support the economy. Three years of runoff brought it back to roughly $6.7 trillion before the Fed resumed slow growth after stress in funding markets late last year. Warsh has long argued that this bond-buying, known as quantitative easing, distorted markets and disproportionately benefited holders of financial assets.

For ordinary Americans, this arcane-sounding debate has real consequences. The size of the Fed’s balance sheet influences long-term interest rates, which in turn shape mortgage rates, auto loans, business borrowing costs, and even the returns available on savings accounts. Shrinking it too quickly could push borrowing costs higher, making home loans and financing more expensive at a time when affordability is already stretched. That is precisely why Warsh is emphasizing patience.

There are technical dangers as well. Draining money from the banking system without care can destabilize the short-term funding markets that keep the financial system operating smoothly. The Fed learned that lesson in 2019, when an earlier effort to reduce its holdings caused a sudden disruption in money markets and forced policymakers to reverse course. Warsh acknowledged that history directly, saying any future reduction must be gradual and carefully managed.

Not everyone at the Fed agrees with his objective. Governor Michael Barr has argued that aggressively shrinking the balance sheet could weaken bank resilience, interfere with money-market functioning, and increase financial risks. Because major policy changes require broad agreement among Federal Open Market Committee members, Warsh will need to build consensus rather than act alone, another reason the process is expected to unfold over several years.

The balance-sheet strategy is only one part of Warsh’s broader agenda since becoming chairman. He has also signaled support for lighter regulation, less reliance on detailed forward guidance from the Fed, and a fresh look at how the central bank communicates inflation and monetary policy. At the June policy meeting, the Fed left its benchmark interest rate unchanged between 3.5% and 3.75%, and Warsh notably declined to publish his own future rate projections, marking a subtle departure from previous leadership.

The broader economic backdrop may give him flexibility. Economic growth has remained resilient, while easing energy prices following the de-escalation of tensions in the Middle East have helped reduce some inflation pressures. Although the White House has continued pressing for lower interest rates, Warsh has repeatedly emphasized that the Federal Reserve will make its decisions independently and based on economic data rather than political considerations.

For businesses and consumers, the near-term message is one of stability. Warsh has made clear he does not intend to abruptly withdraw liquidity from financial markets. Instead, he wants markets, lenders, and borrowers to have ample warning before any meaningful changes occur. That predictability allows companies planning investments and families considering major purchases to prepare without the shock of sudden policy shifts.

The longer-term picture is a Federal Reserve gradually reducing the extraordinary role it assumed during years of financial crises and pandemic-era intervention. Warsh believes the central bank expanded far beyond its traditional mission and that unwinding that footprint is necessary for healthier financial markets. As he emphasized in Sintra, restoring a smaller balance sheet will be measured in years, not months, with careful communication guiding every step.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

With the last of the federal electric-vehicle subsidies now stripped away, the case for going electric increasingly comes down to plain math — and a growing pile of real-world data is telling buyers the most expensive part of the car lasts far longer than they feared.

The timing matters. On Thursday, July 2, 2026, Tesla reported through its investor-relations release from Austin, Texas that it delivered 480,126 vehicles in the second quarter, its strongest Q2 ever and a 25% jump from a year earlier. But the strength was overseas. In the United States, Cox Automotive estimates Tesla’s sales fell about 20% after the $7,500 federal tax credit for new EVs expired on September 30, 2025 under the One Big Beautiful Bill Act. The companion $4,000 used-EV credit is gone too, and the federal tax break for home chargers lapsed on June 30, 2026 — less than a week ago. For American shoppers, the government’s thumb is off the scale.

That is exactly why battery durability has become the number that counts. For years, buyers treated the battery like a ticking clock, bracing for a $5,000-to-$20,000 replacement before the loan was paid off. New fleet data says that fear was overblown for most drivers.

On April 28, 2026, telematics company Geotab published an analysis of more than 22,700 electric vehicles across 21 makes and models and found batteries lose an average of just 2.3% of capacity a year. At that pace, a typical pack still holds about 80% of its original range after eight years — above the 70% floor most warranties guarantee. Geotab tracks battery health by measuring energy in during charging and out during driving, building a long-term trend rather than leaning on a single lab test.

Recurrent, a research firm pulling data from more than 30,000 EV drivers, reached the same conclusion from another angle. Liz Najman, the firm’s director of market insights, said cars with 150,000 miles or more still carrying their original battery are holding at least 83% of their original range. She describes battery aging as an “S curve” — a quick early dip, a long flat middle, then a steeper drop near the very end. Most of the wear people dread happens in the first few years, then nearly stalls.

Individual high-mileage cars back it up. Davide Giacobbe, co-founder and chief executive of Voltest, which tests used EV batteries for dealerships, said he has checked vehicles with 300,000 miles on the odometer still holding around 75% of capacity. “That is almost 500,000 kilometers,” he said. “I challenge you to do 500,000 kilometers in an internal-combustion car.” He noted that cheaper lithium iron phosphate (LFP) packs, now spreading across mainstream models, are aging even better than the older nickel manganese cobalt (NMC) chemistry.

The research is not all reassuring, and the warnings carry a price tag. Geotab pinpointed the biggest thing that shortens battery life, and it is in the driver’s control: heavy reliance on high-power DC fast charging above 100 kilowatts. Cars leaning on the fastest public chargers were projected to keep about 76% of capacity after eight years, versus 88% for cars charged mostly at lower power. Extreme heat speeds wear too. That gap changes the math for delivery fleets and long-haul commuters who live on fast chargers.

For the businesses built around cars — dealers, lenders and insurers — the durability data reshapes how a used EV should be priced. If the battery routinely outlasts the rest of the vehicle, a used electric car should be valued on mileage, accident history and software support, the same way a gas car is, rather than on a worst-case assumption that the pack is about to die. With no federal credits left to prop up sticker prices, the used market is where affordability now lives — and steadier resale values would firm up lease terms and lower the risk lenders price into EV loans.

Adam George of Cox Automotive said the rare early battery failures that do occur are almost always covered defects, not normal wear. “That’s what warranties are for,” he said, likening it to a blown engine on a gas car. Nearly every EV sold in the U.S. since 2012 carries a battery warranty of at least eight years or 100,000 miles.

The takeaway is not that EV batteries never wear out. It is that they wear out far more slowly than the market assumed — and in a post-subsidy market, that durability may do more to sell electric cars than any tax credit ever did.

JBizNews Desk | Austin, Texas

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Ford Motor Company Chief Executive Jim Farley said Wednesday that the United States is sliding into what he called a “huge crisis” in the skilled trades, arguing in a CNN interview that the country has neglected the mechanics, electricians and factory workers it depends on while pouring its attention into artificial intelligence.

Farley pointed to his own industry to make the case. He said there are roughly 400,000 open jobs for automotive technicians, positions paying from about $50,000 for entry-level workers to as much as $150,000 for experienced professionals. Those jobs remain difficult to fill even as vehicles become increasingly sophisticated and wages continue to rise.

The shortage extends well beyond automobile repair.

Farley said the nation lacks enough plumbers, electricians and skilled manufacturing workers, with few young people entering trades that traditionally passed from one generation to the next. He has spent the past year describing these occupations as the “essential economy”—the workers who build, maintain and repair the infrastructure Americans rely on every day.

Citing the Aspen Institute, Farley said the essential economy contributes roughly $12 trillion to U.S. gross domestic product. He estimates America is currently short approximately 600,000 manufacturing workers, 500,000 construction workers, in addition to the 400,000 automotive technicians already needed.

What makes the warning particularly striking is its timing.

Farley has become one of corporate America’s most outspoken executives warning that artificial intelligence could eliminate large numbers of white-collar office jobs over the coming decade, particularly entry-level administrative and programming positions that many young workers have historically used to launch their careers.

At the same time, however, the AI revolution is creating an enormous demand for the very skilled trades the country is struggling to supply.

According to Goldman Sachs Research analysts Hongcen Wei, Daan Struyven and Samantha Dart, U.S. data-center electricity demand is expected to climb from 31 gigawatts in 2025 to 41 gigawatts in 2026, before reaching 66 gigawatts in 2027—nearly doubling within two years.

Those same analysts warned that labor shortages and supply-chain constraints remain the biggest obstacles preventing projects from staying on schedule.

After accounting for those risks, Goldman estimates only about 60% of planned data-center capacity scheduled for next year will actually become operational on time, falling to roughly 50% over a two-year period.

The shortage has already been documented across the construction industry.

The Information Technology and Innovation Foundation reported in November 2025 that the United States was short approximately 439,000 construction workers, most in highly skilled positions such as electricians and pipefitters, while more than 400 data centers were simultaneously under development nationwide.

The Bureau of Labor Statistics projects approximately 80,000 electrician job openings annually over the next decade, while roughly 20,000 union electricians retire every year, leaving the workforce unable to replenish itself fast enough.

Electricians sit at the center of the challenge.

The International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers (IBEW) estimates electrical systems account for between 45% and 70% of the total cost of constructing a modern data center. That highly specialized work cannot easily be accelerated or handed to inexperienced workers.

The financial stakes continue to grow.

McKinsey & Company estimates cumulative worldwide investment in data centers could reach $6.7 trillion by 2030, while global AI-related capital expenditures are projected to exceed $750 billion during 2026 alone.

The shortage is already delaying projects.

Oracle, which is building data-center capacity for OpenAI, pushed portions of its construction schedule from 2027 into 2028, with labor shortages cited as one contributing factor, according to Bloomberg. Oracle disputes that characterization and says its projects remain on schedule.

Meanwhile, Google committed $15 million to the Electrical Training Alliance to expand the pipeline of qualified electricians, reflecting how seriously major technology companies now view workforce availability.

Farley also challenged decades of conventional career advice.

He argued that American families have convinced their children that a traditional four-year college degree represents the only path to a successful career, dismissing that assumption as “total bologna.”

Many parents, he said, continue steering children toward software engineering positions paying around $170,000 annually while overlooking skilled HVAC technicians earning roughly $97,000 in careers that are significantly more difficult to automate or outsource.

Ford has invested directly in changing that perception.

The company funds technician scholarship programs through its nationwide dealer network and has established training centers designed to prepare future mechanics and skilled workers. Farley has also pointed to his own family, noting his son spent last summer working as a fabricator in North Carolina instead of taking additional college classes.

For households, the consequences are becoming increasingly visible.

When there are too few skilled tradespeople, vehicle repairs take longer, home repairs become more expensive, construction slows, and housing costs remain elevated because projects cannot be completed quickly enough.

Electricity bills may also feel the impact.

As AI data centers consume a growing share of the nation’s power grid, their contribution to peak summer electricity demand is projected to increase from roughly 4.1% in 2025 to approximately 8.5% by 2027, placing additional upward pressure on electricity prices in many regions.

The picture that emerges is one of the central paradoxes of the AI economy.

While technology companies continue investing hundreds of billions of dollars into artificial intelligence, one of the industry’s greatest constraints is neither capital nor computing power—it is a shortage of skilled human workers.

The jobs exist.

The wages are competitive.

And as the chief executive of one of America’s largest manufacturers continues to warn, the country is running short of the people willing—and trained—to do them.

JBizNews Desk | Dearborn, Michigan
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

India has emerged as a shelter for global investors rattled by sharp swings in artificial-intelligence stocks, with the NSE Nifty 50 posting steadier returns than most emerging-market rivals through the first half of 2026 and foreign money beginning to flow back. Through June, the Nifty 50 outpaced the MSCI Emerging Markets Index by its widest margin since November, while foreign investor outflows slowed to their lowest level in four months—a shift that has prompted several strategists to rethink a market they had largely written off earlier in the year.

The irony is that India’s recent strength stems largely from what it lacks. For much of 2026, the country’s limited exposure to major AI companies weighed on investor interest as global capital poured into technology-heavy markets such as South Korea and Taiwan, home to many of the semiconductor manufacturers driving the artificial intelligence boom. Now, with those same AI-related investments swinging sharply on every headline about spending, valuations and earnings, India’s relative lack of exposure has become an advantage rather than a weakness. During the first half of the year, the Nifty 50 experienced daily moves of 1% or more far less frequently than most major emerging-market indexes, offering investors a level of stability that has become increasingly valuable.

The broader economic backdrop has improved as well. A stronger Indian rupee, declining oil prices and lower commodity costs have eased inflation concerns while improving the country’s growth outlook. That combination of more stable prices, resilient economic growth and lower market volatility has strengthened the investment case for India and helped distinguish it from many other emerging markets.

Oil prices remain an important part of the story. India imports most of its crude oil, making the economy particularly sensitive to fluctuations in global energy prices. The recent decline in oil prices following earlier spikes tied to geopolitical tensions in the Middle East has provided meaningful relief by reducing inflationary pressures, improving corporate profit margins and giving policymakers greater flexibility.

Monetary policy remains an important variable. The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) kept its benchmark interest rate unchanged at 5.25% in early June while lowering its growth forecast and modestly raising its inflation outlook. The cautious stance suggests policymakers remain unwilling to declare victory over inflation despite improving economic conditions. Investors positioning India as a relatively safe destination are effectively betting that the RBI can continue controlling inflation without significantly slowing economic growth.

Corporate earnings now become the next major test. Investors are closely watching results from Tata Consultancy Services (TCS), India’s largest information-technology services company, scheduled to report later this week. Analysts will be looking to see whether lower operating costs and steady domestic demand translate into stronger earnings. As one of India’s largest technology companies, TCS could also offer important clues about how artificial intelligence may affect the country’s massive outsourcing industry, where automation presents both opportunities and long-term competitive challenges.

For business leaders and investors, the appeal of India increasingly comes down to diversification. The renewed interest is not based on expectations that India will dominate the artificial intelligence revolution. Instead, investors are seeking exposure to one of the world’s largest equity markets whose performance is less dependent on the handful of mega-cap AI companies that have increasingly driven—and disrupted—global stock markets. At a time when a single earnings report from a technology giant can move markets worldwide, an economy supported more by domestic consumption than by semiconductor manufacturing offers a different risk profile.

That does not make India immune from global uncertainty. The rupee could weaken, oil prices could climb again if geopolitical tensions escalate, and a severe downturn in global technology stocks would almost certainly spill into emerging markets as well. Even so, the investment case has become increasingly clear. In a year dominated by both the excitement and volatility surrounding artificial intelligence, India is offering investors something increasingly difficult to find: stability.

JBizNews Desk | Mumbai
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Chinese Foreign Minister Wang Yi told one of Europe’s most prominent business families that China is open for their investment, using a meeting in Stockholm to pitch deeper economic cooperation at a time when President Donald Trump’s tariff disputes have strained relations with several U.S. allies.

According to a statement from China’s Ministry of Foreign Affairs, Wang met Jacob Wallenberg, chairman of Swedish investment company Investor AB, on Saturday and welcomed Swedish and broader European businesses to expand cooperation with China for what he described as mutual benefit.

“Investing in China means investing in the future,” Wang said, noting that the Wallenberg family was among the first European business groups to invest in China following the country’s economic opening during the 1970s and 1980s.

The timing is significant.

Wang’s visit to Sweden is part of a week-long tour of Denmark, Sweden, Finland, and Norway—countries that were among those targeted earlier this year by the Trump administration’s tariff threats.

In January, President Trump threatened a 10% tariff on imports from Denmark and seven other European nations, including Sweden, Norway, and Finland, as part of his campaign to acquire Greenland, warning the tariffs could rise to 25%.

The eight governments responded with a joint statement saying the threats “undermine transatlantic relations and risk a dangerous downward spiral.”

Into that environment stepped China’s top diplomat, presenting Beijing as a cooperative economic partner rather than a competitor.

The messaging has been consistent.

Earlier in Copenhagen, Wang said China and Europe are “partners, not rivals,” arguing that cooperation—not confrontation—should define the relationship. Chinese state media has increasingly portrayed what it calls “transatlantic turmoil”—including U.S. tariffs and disputes over Greenland—as an opportunity for China to attract greater European investment and business.

The implication for European executives is difficult to miss: while Washington threatens additional trade barriers, Beijing is offering expanded access to one of the world’s largest consumer markets.

Whether U.S. tariff policy ultimately pushes European business toward China remains less clear.

The Trump administration’s tariff program has become one of the broadest in decades. After the U.S. Supreme Court struck down the administration’s emergency-powers tariffs in February—forcing refunds estimated at $166 billion collected from more than 330,000 businesses—the administration replaced them with a universal 10% tariff under different statutory authority through late July, while President Trump has suggested raising that rate to 15%.

Separate tariffs on steel, aluminum, copper, and automobiles remain as high as 50%. The average effective U.S. tariff rate reached approximately 11.8% in April, among the highest levels in more than a century.

Those policies have already reshaped global trade flows.

U.S. imports from China declined sharply during the first half of last year as tariffs took effect. In response, China has accelerated efforts to expand exports into other markets, particularly Europe. For many European companies, the business calculation is evolving: if exporting to the United States becomes more expensive and unpredictable, China’s market and manufacturing ecosystem may appear relatively more attractive.

That is the audience Wang Yi was targeting in Stockholm.

The picture, however, remains more complicated than Beijing suggests.

Europe has spent several years pursuing a strategy of “de-risking” its relationship with China by tightening foreign-investment screening, imposing tariffs on Chinese electric vehicles, and raising concerns about Chinese industrial overcapacity. European governments generally welcome investment while remaining cautious about increasing dependence on China, particularly in strategically sensitive industries.

The European Union and China only recently established a new trade and investment consultation mechanism, reflecting an effort to manage tensions rather than fundamentally realign their relationship.

Despite current tariff disputes, the transatlantic economy remains by far the world’s largest commercial partnership. Trade between the European Union and the United States totaled approximately €1.68 trillion during 2024, a level of economic integration that cannot easily be replaced.

The broader challenge for Washington may therefore be less about companies relocating to China than about geopolitical influence.

A tariff strategy intended in part to counter China’s economic rise also risks creating diplomatic openings that Beijing can exploit. When Wang Yi tells European executives that China offers stability and predictability, he is reinforcing an argument made more persuasive by ongoing trade disputes between the United States and its closest allies.

For businesses, the lesson centers on leverage.

Tariffs can reduce trade deficits and strengthen negotiating positions, but imposing trade barriers on allies also increases their incentive to diversify economic relationships elsewhere. China is betting that if Washington continues treating close partners as trade adversaries, more European investment and commercial activity will gradually shift eastward.

Whether that strategy succeeds will depend less on Beijing’s diplomatic outreach than on how the United States manages its economic relationships with the allies China is now actively courting.

JBizNews Desk | Stockholm
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Governments and organizations under international sanctions moved roughly $104 billion through cryptocurrency in 2025, a nearly sevenfold increase that made sanctions evasion the single largest driver of illicit digital-asset activity, according to the 2026 Crypto Crime Report published by blockchain analytics firm Chainalysis. The firm found that total illicit crypto flows reached approximately $154 billion for the year, up 162% from 2024, with the surge driven overwhelmingly by state and state-linked actors seeking to maintain access to global markets despite Western sanctions.

The report, released earlier this year and reinforced by a parallel study from analytics firm TRM Labs, points to a structural shift rather than a one-time spike. Chainalysis concluded that cryptocurrency is no longer a fringe workaround for sanctioned governments but has become a core component of their financial infrastructure, supporting international trade settlements, weapons procurement and cross-border money transfers. Roughly 84% of illicit transaction volume flowed through stablecoins—digital tokens pegged to traditional currencies and valued for maintaining price stability while funds move across borders.

Russia sits at the center of the findings. Chainalysis identified a ruble-backed stablecoin known as A7A5, which processed approximately $93.3 billion in transactions in less than one year, effectively serving as a settlement network for sanctioned Russian businesses. The activity was linked to the cryptocurrency exchange Garantex and its successor, Grinex—entities that the U.S. Department of the Treasury’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) has sanctioned alongside a Kyrgyz-issued token and a network of associated companies. According to the report, when one exchange is shut down, operators increasingly establish a replacement. Grinex was created by former Garantex personnel after law enforcement action disrupted the original platform.

Iran’s use of cryptocurrency appears more operational. The report found that networks associated with the Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) accounted for more than half the value flowing into Iranian cryptocurrency services during the second half of 2025, with total transfers reaching approximately $3 billion. The funds were used to support regional proxy groups while facilitating arms and oil transactions. North Korea experienced its largest cryptocurrency theft year on record, stealing more than $2 billion, including approximately $1.5 billion during a single cyberattack against the Bybit exchange—the largest crypto theft reported to date. Investigators concluded that the proceeds helped finance the regime’s weapons programs.

For the broader cryptocurrency industry, the findings present two competing narratives. Supporters point out that illicit transactions still represent less than 1% of total cryptocurrency activity and argue that public blockchains are inherently transparent, allowing investigators to trace transactions in ways impossible with cash. That transparency has fueled demand for compliance software from firms such as Chainalysis and TRM Labs, which now sell blockchain monitoring tools to governments, banks and digital-asset exchanges.

The headline figures nevertheless present a significant challenge for an industry still working toward mainstream financial acceptance. A $104 billion sanctions-evasion network is precisely the type of statistic that strengthens the resolve of regulators and makes traditional financial institutions more cautious about working with cryptocurrency firms. It raises compliance expectations—and compliance costs—for legitimate exchanges and stablecoin issuers, which increasingly face pressure to identify sanctioned wallets, monitor transactions and freeze suspicious assets or risk losing access to the traditional banking system. Enforcement has likewise evolved, with OFAC, the European Union, and the United Kingdom’s sanctions authorities increasingly identifying specific cryptocurrency wallet addresses directly in their sanctions lists.

The role of stablecoins deserves particular attention from the business community. As dollar-backed digital tokens move closer to mainstream financial adoption, the report’s conclusion that stablecoins now carry the majority of illicit transaction volume places issuers in a difficult position. Their future growth depends on being viewed as safe, regulated financial products closely connected to the banking system, yet those same characteristics also make them attractive tools for sanctioned governments seeking efficient cross-border payments.

The findings also arrive against an active geopolitical backdrop. With global energy markets already under pressure from conflict involving Iran, the report’s conclusion that Tehran increasingly relies on cryptocurrency to move oil revenue and finance regional proxy groups underscores how digital assets have become an important pressure valve for governments facing international sanctions. For banks, exchanges and payment companies, the message is increasingly clear: the primary illicit-finance risk surrounding cryptocurrency is no longer dominated by scams and ransomware attacks. It is increasingly driven by nation-states—and measured in the tens of billions of dollars.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

New York City has committed more than $1 billion to fully reconstruct the century-old Riegelmann Boardwalk at Coney Island, a project city officials describe as both an economic-development engine and a defense against rising seas—even as fresh questions surface this week about how long residents will have to wait. The commitment was announced by the New York City Economic Development Corporation (NYCEDC) and the New York City Department of Parks and Recreation, with NYCEDC President and CEO Andrew Kimball calling it exactly the kind of investment the neighborhood deserves, and Parks Commissioner Iris Rodriguez-Rosa describing it as preparing the boardwalk to safely welcome visitors for another 100 years.

The scope is comprehensive. The plan calls for rebuilding the entire 2.7-mile boardwalk “from piles to topside,” replacing structural pilings, decking and utilities while elevating sections to improve storm protection. The project also includes renovations to restrooms, lifeguard stations and shade pavilions. The city plans to partner with a design-build team, with funding extending through 2032. A separate $42 million project will renovate the adjacent Abe Stark Sports Center and its ice rink, an investment business leaders hope will attract visitors during the winter months and transform Coney Island into more of a year-round destination.

That year-round strategy is central to the business case. Coney Island remains one of Brooklyn’s busiest public attractions, drawing millions of tourists and local visitors annually while supporting an economy built around amusement parks, restaurants, food vendors and small businesses that depend heavily on seasonal foot traffic. Extending the visitor season could provide a meaningful boost to businesses ranging from the famous hot dog stands to the rides operating inside the historic amusement district.

The boardwalk reconstruction is also part of a much larger redevelopment initiative. Under the Coney Island West plan, New York City intends to add approximately 1,500 new homes, with roughly one-quarter designated as affordable housing, alongside new ground-floor retail space and additional public parking on city-owned property. Officials say the combined investment will create years of construction work, new housing opportunities and permanent jobs. For contractors, engineers, suppliers and firms specializing in resilient coastal infrastructure, the billion-dollar project represents a significant pipeline of future business, particularly for minority- and women-owned businesses that frequently participate in public infrastructure projects.

There is, however, an important catch. The New York City Department of Parks and Recreation told CBS News that its carpentry crews already perform repairs on the landmark boardwalk five days a week between April and November, maintaining a structure made up of more than one million wooden boards that constantly require replacement. Local residents—including one who launched a petition calling for faster repairs—argue that the full reconstruction remains years away. Current estimates place the project in the research and design phase through at least 2027, with construction beginning afterward. For many residents dealing with deteriorating boards, exposed nails and structural wear, funding the project and completing the work remain two very different things.

The financing also carries political significance. The $1 billion commitment was secured during the final capital budget approved under former Mayor Eric Adams, meaning responsibility for executing the project now rests with the current administration. Large public infrastructure projects in New York have historically faced delays between funding announcements and groundbreaking, and with community planning and design work still ongoing, the boardwalk’s timeline leaves considerable room for slippage.

Another issue remains unresolved: what the rebuilt boardwalk should actually look like. Longtime business owners and neighborhood advocates want the historic wooden surface preserved, arguing that its traditional appearance forms part of Coney Island’s identity and visitor appeal. City planners have explored more durable materials and selective elevation to improve storm resilience and reduce future maintenance costs. The final design decision will influence not only the boardwalk’s appearance but also its long-term operating expenses.

For now, the headline remains straightforward: New York has committed more than $1 billion to completely rebuild one of Brooklyn’s best-known landmarks while tying the investment to new housing, infrastructure improvements and economic development. The real test will be whether the city can move from planning documents to active construction before the aging boardwalk deteriorates further under the millions of visitors who continue to use it each year.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Russia is spending enormous sums to build its own version of SpaceX, and the early results have been messy. The effort is led by Dmitry Bakanov, who has run the country’s state space corporation, Roscosmos, since February 2025. His job, in plain terms, is to drag Russia’s once-proud space program back into the top tier. So far the climb has been steep.

The clearest sign of trouble came from Russia’s answer to Starlink, the internet-from-space network owned by Elon Musk. The Russian system is called Rassvet, which means “Dawn.” On March 23, the private aerospace firm Bureau 1440 launched the first 16 operational Rassvet satellites into orbit aboard a Soyuz-2.1b rocket from the Plesetsk Cosmodrome. The company, part of IKS Holding, described the launch as a transition from testing to building a commercial service.

Then one of those satellites failed. One of the spacecraft launched in March suffered an apparent thruster failure and burned up in the atmosphere on June 6. Bureau 1440 confirmed the loss in a report published June 9, saying 15 of the 16 satellites from the March deployment remain in orbit and that the network’s capabilities were not affected. Losing a satellite only months into a flagship program is not the start Moscow wanted.

The gap with SpaceX is difficult to overstate. SpaceX has more than 10,000 Starlink satellites in low-Earth orbit and began launching the network roughly six years ago. Russia placed its first operational group of 16 satellites into orbit only this spring. Analysts say Rassvet will need at least 250 satellites before it can function as a reliable broadband network. Bureau 1440 plans to have 156 satellites in orbit by the end of 2026 and expand the constellation to about 900 satellites by 2035.

Money is not the obstacle. The Russian federal budget has earmarked 102.8 billion rubles, about $1.26 billion, for Rassvet, while Bureau 1440 plans to invest another 329 billion rubles, roughly $4 billion, of its own funds through 2030. President Vladimir Putin has praised the project, saying it can compete with Starlink and eventually surpass it in certain markets.

There is also a military urgency behind the effort. In February 2026, Ukraine said unauthorized Starlink terminals used by Russian forces had been deactivated following coordination with SpaceX, disrupting Russian communications and drone operations. A domestically controlled satellite network would remove that vulnerability. Rassvet satellites are also designed to function as space-based 5G stations and support drone operations that are more difficult to jam.

The satellite network is only half of Bakanov’s challenge. The other is rockets. For decades Russia relied on reliable but expendable Soyuz launch vehicles, discarding used stages after every mission. SpaceX changed the economics of spaceflight by landing and reusing the first stage of its Falcon 9, dramatically lowering launch costs. Roscosmos is now attempting to follow the same model.

Bakanov has openly acknowledged the influence of Musk’s approach. In an interview with business newspaper RBC, he said reusing a rocket’s first stage instead of discarding it delivers significant cost savings. Russia’s answer is the Amur-SPG, a methane-fueled reusable rocket designed to replace the Soyuz-2. Roscosmos hopes each launch will cost about $22 million, well below the roughly $50 million it assigns to a Falcon 9 mission, with a first stage engineered for multiple flights.

The challenge is timing. As of January, Roscosmos expected the Amur-SPG to be completed around 2030—roughly 15 years after Falcon 9 first achieved a successful booster landing. Bakanov has said the immediate priority is proving the first stage can safely return and land. Roscosmos has already completed methane engine fire tests and selected landing sites in Russia’s Sverdlovsk region. Even Elon Musk, years ago, publicly suggested Russia should pursue full rocket reusability or risk developing technology that would already be outdated.

The full picture came into sharper focus this week as fresh reporting on Russia’s roughly $60 billion space revival highlighted how far the country still trails the industry leader. While Moscow counts its first operational satellites and conducts engine tests, SpaceX had completed 671 Falcon 9 and Falcon Heavy launches as of July 2, with 668 full mission successes. The ambition inside Roscosmos is real, and so is the funding. Whether Dmitry Bakanov can close a lead measured in thousands of satellites and hundreds of launches remains the question hanging over every ruble Russia spends.

JBizNews Desk | Moscow
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Tesla Inc. told buyers on Thursday that a bigger, three-row version of its best-selling SUV is finally on sale in the United States. In a post on its own social media channels, Tesla said customers in the U.S. and Puerto Rico can now order the Model Y Long Wheelbase — badged the Model Y L — with first deliveries expected in September.

The stretched SUV is built for families who found the regular Model Y too small in the back. It adds about 7 inches of total length and 6 inches between the front and rear wheels, and it swaps the standard car’s tight middle bench for a roomier two-seat-per-row layout. The result is a six-seat vehicle with captain’s chairs in the second row and a third row that adults can actually use. Tesla rates it at 325 miles of range and a 0-to-60 time of 4.4 seconds.

The price is the headline for most shoppers. The Model Y L arrives first as a fully loaded “Launch Series” that starts at $61,990, or about $63,380 once the mandatory delivery charge is added. That makes it the most expensive Model Y on sale — roughly $4,000 more than the $57,990 Model Y Performance and about $22,000 above the cheapest standard Model Y at $39,990.

That sticker surprised some in the auto business. Watchers had expected a U.S. price near $54,000, based on the roughly $4,000 premium the longer version carries over the standard car in China. Instead, Tesla reached for the top of the range. To soften the cost, the company is throwing in one year of Full Self-Driving (Supervised), one year of free Supercharging, one year of Premium Connectivity, and free choice of paint, interior color, and wheels for Launch Series orders.

Tesla is using a familiar playbook here. It often opens a new model with a loaded, higher-priced version to capture the most eager buyers first, then rolls out cheaper trims later. Whether more affordable Model Y L configurations follow will decide how competitive the vehicle really is against rivals.

And the rivals are real. The three-row electric family SUV, once a thin corner of the market, is now crowded. The Kia EV9 starts at $54,900 with up to 304 miles of range. The Hyundai Ioniq 9 starts at about $58,955 with up to 335 miles. Both undercut the Model Y L on price, which means Tesla is asking families to pay more for its badge and its Supercharger network at the exact moment Korean automakers are proving they don’t have to.

The bigger SUV also fills a hole in Tesla’s own lineup. The company has wound down its larger Model S sedan and Model X SUV in the U.S., leaving no roomy, more-than-five-seat option for shoppers who need one. The Model Y L steps into that gap. Third-row legroom of about 33 inches is now in the same range as gas-powered midsize SUVs like the Ford Explorer and Hyundai Palisade, according to figures Tesla provided.

Production is already running at Giga Texas in Austin, so this is a U.S.-built vehicle rather than an import. The longer Model Y first launched in China last summer, where it quickly became a hit, and later reached Australia, Malaysia, and other Asian markets. Tesla Chief Executive Elon Musk had said in August 2025 that U.S. production wouldn’t begin until roughly the end of 2026 — so the Thursday launch lands ahead of that earlier timeline.

The new model comes as Tesla’s overall numbers are improving. The company also said Thursday it delivered 480,126 vehicles worldwide in the second quarter, up 24.9% from the same period a year earlier. It was the second straight quarter of growth after a 6.3% rise in the first quarter. The Model Y remains the top-selling electric vehicle in the U.S., and research firm Cox Automotive reported that one of every three EVs sold in the country in the first quarter was a Model Y.

For everyday buyers, the takeaway is straightforward. Families who liked the idea of a Tesla but needed a real third row finally have one, with the range and quick acceleration the brand is known for. The catch is the price. At nearly $62,000 before options, the Model Y L is a premium buy in a segment where two well-reviewed competitors now cost thousands less. Tesla is betting there is enough pent-up demand — and enough loyalty to its charging network — to make that premium stick. The order books opened Thursday; the first driveways won’t see the vehicle until fall.

JBizNews Desk | Austin, Texas
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

U.S. stocks opened higher Monday, July 6, in the first session after the July 4 holiday weekend, with the Dow Jones Industrial Average climbing past 53,000 for the first time as semiconductor shares rebounded and oil prices slid. The S&P 500 rose 0.5% shortly after the opening bell, while the Nasdaq Composite added 0.7%, and the Dow gained 105 points, or 0.2%, exceeding 53,000 for the first time. The gains built on a strong prior week and came against a busy backdrop: a soft June jobs report that has traders rethinking the Federal Reserve’s next move, falling crude as Middle East supply recovers, and President Donald Trump ringing the opening bell from the Oval Office to promote his new Trump Accounts program.

The clearest signal for households came from the labor market. The Labor Department reported last week that the U.S. economy added just 57,000 jobs in June, the fewest in four months and well below forecasts of about 110,000, with the unemployment rate at 4.2%. Under Fed Chair Kevin Warsh, the central bank has been weighing whether to raise interest rates again this year to hold down inflation, an unusual stance at a time when much of the world is cutting. The weak hiring number cooled those bets: futures now imply roughly a 50% chance of a September rate hike, down from about 66% before the report.

Politics shared the stage with the numbers. Trump rang the opening bell Monday at both the New York Stock Exchange and the Nasdaq from the Oval Office, using the moment to showcase Trump Accounts, which give children a $1,000 government seed contribution and have drawn more than 6 million family sign-ups. Overseas, Iran held the main procession of Ayatollah Ali Khamenei’s funeral in Tehran, and the Russia-Ukraine war escalated ahead of a NATO summit this week, though neither rattled the early tone.

At the open, the Dow traded just above 53,000 after climbing nearly 2% last week. The S&P 500 sat near 7,520 and the Nasdaq Composite pushed higher on the back of chips. The technology sector led the way, with the Technology Select Sector SPDR ETF up more than 2%.

Market movers

Chip equipment makers led the rally on fresh Wall Street calls. Lam Research sat at the top of the S&P 500, up more than 4%, after Morgan Stanley raised its price target, while Applied Materials and KLA Corporation each rose just under 4% on target hikes from the same firm. ASML Holding, the Dutch chip-gear giant, gained about 4% after Bernstein lifted its price target by more than 30% to $2,300.

Memory and testing names ran with them. Western Digital jumped about 10% and Teradyne climbed 8%, with Marvell Technology and Oracle also higher. In premarket trading, Universal Display gained 8% and Element Solutions rose 6.5%.

The day’s biggest surge came from a power-and-AI deal. TeraWulf jumped more than 16% after Anthropic signed a 20-year agreement to use its Kentucky data center, a roughly 400-megawatt project expected to generate more than $19 billion in revenue over the initial term, with first power slated for the second half of 2027. Comcast rose about 0.5% after its U.K.-based Sky agreed to buy rival ITV’s television business. SpaceX, which went public June 12, gained about 1% to $163.75 ahead of its addition to the Nasdaq-100 before Tuesday’s open.

Not everything rose. Icon PLC fell 6%, Loar Holdings dropped 3.5% and Honeywell declined 2% in premarket trading.

Commodities and volatility

Oil kept sliding, easing pressure at the pump. West Texas Intermediate traded near $68 a barrel, down on the day, while Brent held around $71.50. Prices are falling as commercial shipping recovers through the Strait of Hormuz and the prospect of more OPEC+ supply raises the risk of a glut. Gold stayed firm as a safe harbor, trading above $4,100 an ounce Monday, supported by the weak jobs data and lower oil. Wall Street’s fear gauge, the VIX, hovered near 16, a calm reading that signals little stress in the market.

The day ahead

Trading is light on company news this Monday after the holiday, but the week fills up quickly. SpaceX officially joins the Nasdaq-100 before Tuesday’s open, the same day Samsung Electronics releases preliminary second-quarter earnings. Investors will also track the NATO summit and any signal from Fed officials on whether June’s soft hiring changes the rate debate. For now, the market’s message is steady: record highs on the Dow, a rebound in the chips that have driven this year’s gains, and cheaper oil taking some heat out of inflation worries.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Researchers at Tel Aviv University’s Gray Faculty of Medical and Health Sciences have identified a mechanism by which cancerous tumors can redirect a normal immune system process to support tumor growth, a discovery they say could lead to new treatment strategies that restore the immune system’s ability to fight cancer. 

The study was led by Dr. Merav Cohen and doctoral students Roi Balaban and Ori Moskowitz and was published in the journal Science Immunology

The research focused on macrophages, immune cells responsible for removing damaged and dead cells from the body. While this process normally helps maintain healthy tissue and prevent inflammation, the researchers found that within cancerous tumors it can instead change the behavior of the immune cells in ways that promote tumor development. 

To investigate the process, the team developed a new technology called Effero-seq, which tracks changes in immune cells after they engulf dead cells. Using the method, the researchers found that macrophages that consumed dead cancer cells underwent what they described as “reprogramming,” activating genes associated with tumor growth. 

Study finds how tumors hijack immune defenses

The team used a melanoma model to examine the effects of the altered immune cells. They found that macrophages that had consumed dead cancer cells encouraged the formation of new blood vessels inside tumors. The additional blood vessels supplied tumors with oxygen and nutrients, allowing them to grow more rapidly.

The researchers also found that these macrophages became less responsive to signals that normally trigger anti-cancer immune activity. 

The researchers expanded the study by analyzing data from patients with uveal melanoma, a form of eye cancer. They found that patients whose tumors showed higher expression of immune cells carrying the genetic signature identified in the study generally had lower survival rates. 

According to Dr. Cohen, the findings offer new insight into how tumors influence the immune system to support their own growth. 

“The better we understand these mechanisms, the better equipped we will be to develop treatments that block them and restore the immune system’s ability to fight cancer,” she says.

“This research points to a new and promising therapeutic target, one that focuses not only on the cancer cells themselves, but also on the processes that enable them to thrive.” 

This post was originally published on here

Blackstone Inc.’s data center arm QTS is walking away from what would have been the largest data center campus on earth. In a withdrawal notice filed at the Virginia Supreme Court on Thursday, July 2, lawyers for QTS told the court the company had decided to terminate the Digital Gateway project and pull its associated filings. The move ends a years-long legal fight over a 2,100-acre site in Prince William County and hands a clear defeat to the developer and its parent, private equity giant Blackstone.

The project, known as the Prince William Digital Gateway, was enormous. Plans called for up to 37 data center buildings and more than 22 million square feet of computing space along Pageland Lane, next to Manassas National Battlefield Park about 35 miles west of Washington. At full build-out it would have been the biggest data center complex in the world—a footprint roughly twice the size of New York’s Central Park, with power needs rivaling a small city.

QTS, which was developing the land alongside Compass Datacenters, said the decision came after careful consideration. The company noted the project had cleared years of planning, analysis, and public review, and had been approved by the Prince William Board of County Supervisors. QTS said the campus would have delivered tens of billions of dollars in capital investment, along with local tax revenue and thousands of construction and permanent jobs for the county.

The dispute goes back to December 2023, when the county board—then led by Chair Ann Wheeler, a Democrat who backed data centers—approved the rezoning after a marathon 27-hour public hearing at which more than 400 people spoke. Opponents sued almost immediately, arguing the county broke state and local rules governing public notice requirements and rushed the vote through before a new, more skeptical board took office.

The courts agreed. Last August, Prince William Circuit Court Judge Kimberly Irving ruled the rezonings void because of improper public notice. On March 31, the Virginia Court of Appeals unanimously upheld that decision. Two lawsuits drove the challenge, one led by the Oak Valley Homeowners Association and another by the American Battlefield Trust, a preservation group focused on the nearby Civil War site.

One by one, the project’s backers dropped out. Prince William County withdrew from the appeal in April under Chair Deshundra Jefferson, a Democrat and longtime data center critic, followed by co-developer Compass Datacenters. That left QTS as the last party still fighting. The company had filed its appeal to the Virginia Supreme Court on April 30, just hours before the deadline, but has now abandoned it.

“Truth and accountability prevailed today,” said Chap Petersen, the attorney representing local residents and the American Battlefield Trust. The Coalition to Protect Prince William County, which organized much of the opposition, told supporters that the rule of law and the common man had prevailed. Mac Haddow, president of the Oak Valley Homeowners Association, had earlier called the litigation something that never should have happened.

The fight was costly for taxpayers. Prince William County spent close to $2 million defending the rezoning before its board reversed course—a figure opponents repeatedly cited as public money spent against the county’s own residents.

The collapse is more than a local zoning story. It comes as the data center industry faces growing public resistance across the country. Communities from Virginia to the Midwest have pushed back on the strain these facilities place on power grids, water supplies, and electricity bills. In a June report, the U.S. Energy Department projected total U.S. electricity demand would rise about 2.15% in 2026, driven largely by a roughly 5% increase in commercial demand tied to data center growth.

The timing also fuels a broader debate over whether the AI infrastructure boom has run ahead of real demand. This week, reports that Meta Platforms was exploring ways to market excess computing capacity rattled investors already worried about overbuilding. A retreat of this size by a Blackstone subsidiary—on a flagship project it defended for years—does little to quiet those concerns.

For Blackstone, which manages more than $1.27 trillion in assets and has made data centers a centerpiece of its infrastructure and real estate strategy, the loss is a reminder that community opposition has become a meaningful business risk. Land deals, permits, and court challenges can now derail projects that once appeared certain to move forward. Several landowners who had signed agreements with QTS are already seeking to exit their contracts. The company says it remains committed to the region—but for the Digital Gateway, the project is over.

JBizNews Desk | Prince William County, Virginia
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

On Thursday, July 2, 2026, Blue Owl Capital told shareholders in two investor letters that it would again cap quarterly withdrawals at 5% from its two largest private credit funds, after clients asked to pull far more cash than the funds would release. The letters, signed by Blue Owl co-president Craig Packer and fund president Logan Nicholson, marked the second straight quarter that the firm’s flagship credit funds drew the heaviest exit requests in the industry.

Across the wider market, the numbers are stark. Investors sought to withdraw billions from non-traded private credit funds in the second quarter, and because most vehicles limit redemptions to 5% of net assets each quarter, roughly $14 billion of investor money is now stuck behind those limits, according to data from Robert A. Stanger & Co. The private credit market these funds sit inside is worth about $1.8 trillion.

Here is how the cap works. When a fund lets only 5% of shares out but 17% of investors want to leave, everyone who asked gets paid a slice — roughly 29 cents for every dollar requested — and has to line up again next quarter. There is no guarantee the rest gets paid if the exit requests stay high.

At Blue Owl, investors in the roughly $34 billion Blue Owl Credit Income Corp., one of the largest funds of its kind, asked to pull 18.8% of their shares, or about $3.6 billion, in the second quarter. That was down from $4.2 billion three months earlier. The firm’s smaller Blue Owl Technology Income Corp. saw requests for 38.1% of shares, or about $1.1 billion. Together the two funds faced $4.7 billion in withdrawal requests, below the $5.3 billion they saw in the first quarter.

Packer and Nicholson told investors the flagship fund was in no danger of a forced sale. “OCIC does not need to sell a single private loan to satisfy the tender offer,” they wrote, noting that 90% of the fund’s investors chose to stay and that the fund has taken in $1.2 billion of new money this year.

Blue Owl was not alone. Blackstone capped withdrawals at 5% on its $79 billion Blackstone Private Credit Fund after requests reached 10%. Cliffwater limited its $33 billion Cliffwater Corporate Lending Fund to 5% after investors asked to redeem about 17% of shares, tightening from a 7% cap a quarter earlier. Apollo Global Management capped its $26 billion Apollo Debt Solutions fund at 5% after requests hit nearly 17%, or $2.4 billion. In Europe, Switzerland’s Partners Group restricted its $8.6 billion Global Value fund to 5%, though it said it honored every request in full and still pulled in $275 million of fresh money.

What is driving the exits is fear, not yet losses. Private credit funds are big lenders to software companies, which make up roughly a quarter of these portfolios, and investors worry that artificial intelligence tools that write their own code will eat into those borrowers’ revenue. Fund managers say the loans themselves are still performing. Blue Owl told investors there is a “meaningful disconnect” between the public alarm over private credit and what it sees inside its own book.

The money at stake belongs largely to wealthy individuals who bought into so-called semi-liquid funds over the past few years, drawn by higher yields than they could get in public markets in exchange for giving up easy access to their cash. Many are now learning that the “semi” in semi-liquid does real work. Some of the current wave, managers say, is simply backlogged demand from investors who were blocked by caps in the prior quarter and are trying again.

For the firms that run these funds, the stakes are their share prices and their standing with the wealth-management channel that feeds them new clients. Blue Owl stock has fallen about 56% over the past year, though it rose roughly 6% after Thursday’s letters suggested the redemption wave may be easing — the combined $4.7 billion in requests came in below the prior quarter. Blackstone, Ares Management, KKR and Apollo shares all fell sharply in early June as the caps piled up.

Whether the pressure fades or feeds on itself is the open question. Goldman Sachs has projected that private credit funds could shrink by $45 billion to $70 billion over the next two years if retail investors keep pulling out. For now, the funds are holding the line at 5%, betting that steady loan payments and slowing requests will outlast the storm.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Iran turned the funeral procession of Ayatollah Ali Khamenei through Tehran on Monday, July 6, into a mass call for revenge against the United States and Israel, with the day’s defining image a billboard showing President Donald Trump with a bullet pointed at his head. Mourners pelted it with stones as they passed beneath, and leaders of Hezbollah and other allied militant groups marched among the crowds. As the largest gathering of the week filled the streets, Iran’s military spokesman said on state media that the armed forces were on full alert, had used the ceasefire to sharpen their capabilities and had updated their “target bank,” warning that any new attack would draw a harsher response than before.

The revenge message ran straight from the top of Iran’s military and government. Army commander-in-chief Major Gen. Amir Hatami told broadcaster IRIB that Khamenei’s death had hardened Iran’s resolve to avenge him. The Supreme National Security Council said in a weekend statement that the country’s message was resistance against its enemies and vengeance for its slain leader. Crowds chanted that their one word was revenge.

Delegations from Hezbollah, the Iranian-backed Lebanese group, marched in the procession alongside Hamas, the Houthis and Kataib Hezbollah — the network Tehran calls its “Axis of Resistance.” Mourners waved Hezbollah’s yellow flags and the red flags that signal revenge in Shiite tradition. On Sunday, Iranian Parliament Speaker Mohammad Bagher Ghalibaf met senior Hezbollah officials, including Mohammed Fenish, and called the group’s role in the war a “historic turning point,” according to state news agency IRNA.

Much of the anger was aimed squarely at Washington. Beyond the stoned billboard, women in black chadors held red placards reading “KILL TRUMP” in English, an effigy of Trump was strung up along the route, and a eulogist called for the president’s death from the stage. Placards also targeted Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu, Vice President JD Vance and War Secretary Pete Hegseth. Iran has repeatedly denied plotting to kill Trump. Israeli Defense Minister Israel Katz answered that Khamenei had been killed because he led a plan to destroy Israel, and that any Iranian leader who tried again would meet the same end.

Khamenei, who ruled Iran for nearly 37 years, was killed on February 28 at age 86 in a U.S.-Israeli airstrike at the start of the war. Four members of his family died in the same strike. Their coffins were driven Monday on a truck decorated to resemble the grating around a Shiite shrine, moving toward Azadi Tower as fire hoses misted water over the crowds in the heat.

For business, the story runs through the Strait of Hormuz, the narrow waterway that carries much of the world’s oil. Iran paused its talks with the United States for the funeral week, and Trump said he was giving Tehran time off from the negotiations. That pause matters to energy markets, because the war shut most shipping through the strait earlier this year and drove crude sharply higher before a fragile ceasefire reopened the route.

Prices have since fallen back toward pre-war levels. By the end of last week Brent crude was near $72 a barrel and West Texas Intermediate was around $68, both close to where they traded on February 27, the day before the war began. Oil was heading for a fourth straight weekly loss as tankers returned to the strait and the war premium drained out of prices.

Supply is loosening too. OPEC+ agreed Sunday to raise output by 188,000 barrels a day, its fifth straight increase since the war began. Saudi Arabia and the United Arab Emirates have brought exports back close to pre-war levels, lifting combined flows through the strait above 10 million barrels a day. Citigroup expects Brent to keep sliding toward $60 a barrel by year-end as shipping normalizes and Chinese buying softens.

The calm is easily rattled. Tracking data showed at least eight tankers turning back at the strait on Saturday after trying to slip through by hugging the Omani coast, a sign captains remain wary. Maritime authorities describe traffic as steady but not yet growing, and the strait’s security is expected to come up at this week’s NATO summit.

Iran’s government is using the vast turnout, which officials say could reach 15 to 20 million and would rank as the country’s largest state funeral, to project strength while its new leader stays out of sight. Khamenei’s son and successor, Mojtaba Khamenei, who took over in March and is believed to have been wounded in the strike that killed his father, has not appeared in public. The procession continues this week from Qom into the Iraqi cities of Najaf and Karbala before Khamenei is buried Thursday in Mashhad. Netanyahu is expected in Washington to meet Trump as early as next Monday, a session likely to shape whether the ceasefire — and oil’s calm — holds.

JBizNews Desk| Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

EasyJet said on Sunday it has agreed in principle to a takeover by Castlelake, the U.S. investment firm, capping weeks of resistance with a cash deal that values the British budget airline at £5.23 billion.

The Minneapolis-based private credit firm offered £6.90 per share in cash, giving the airline an equity value of about £5.2 billion, or £5.5 billion on a fully diluted basis. In its statement, EasyJet said its board concluded the fifth proposal had reached a level it “would be minded to recommend” to shareholders after reviewing the offer with its advisers.

The agreement followed weeks of negotiations. Castlelake first approached the airline on May 29 with an offer of 560 pence per share, gradually increasing the bid to 690 pence. EasyJet rejected the earlier proposals, calling them “highly opportunistic” and arguing they undervalued the company. Even after turning down a £4.93 billion offer last month, the airline agreed to provide limited commercial information so discussions could continue.

The timing proved significant. Castlelake launched its bid as EasyJet faced higher jet fuel costs and softer travel demand following the U.S.-Iran war and disruptions to shipping through the Strait of Hormuz. The airline’s shares closed Friday at 558.2 pence, roughly 20% below the takeover price, making the offer increasingly attractive despite the board’s earlier resistance.

Not all investors are convinced. Some shareholders had hoped for at least £7 per share, raising questions about whether the final proposal will receive enough support. The companies have extended the UK’s “put up or shut up” deadline until 5 p.m. London time on August 3, allowing additional time to finalize the transaction.

To satisfy European airline ownership rules limiting non-EU control, Castlelake structured the bid with EU-based partners, including Brookfield, along with aviation executives Mark Breen and Peter Bellew. Bellew, a former EasyJet chief operating officer, left the airline in 2022. Castlelake said it intends to invest in the carrier’s long-term growth and fleet modernization.

For travelers, ownership changes rarely affect flights immediately, but they can reshape an airline over time. Private equity owners often streamline operations, adjust route networks and renegotiate aircraft purchases, decisions that ultimately influence ticket prices, schedules and expansion plans. As one of Europe’s largest low-cost carriers, EasyJet’s future strategy could affect millions of passengers.

The proposed acquisition also adds to concerns over the shrinking number of major companies listed on the London Stock Exchange. If the deal closes, EasyJet would become another well-known British company to leave the public market, continuing a trend that has drawn growing attention from UK policymakers seeking to strengthen London’s position as a global financial center.

JBizNews Desk | London
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump made 327 individual stock purchases on April 8, 2025, worth as much as $12.8 million, one day before he announced a pause on his sweeping tariffs and sent the market into one of its largest single-day rallies on record, according to his annual financial disclosure filed Monday with the U.S. Office of Government Ethics. The purchases, detailed in an analysis published Thursday, centered on the mega-cap technology stocks that had been hit hardest by his trade plan.

The buying spree focused on some of the world’s largest publicly traded companies. Trump purchased between $100,001 and $250,000 worth of shares in Apple, Alphabet, Amazon, Microsoft, and Nvidia on April 8, alongside investments in scores of other companies, according to the disclosure.

The timing has drawn attention. On April 2, Trump unveiled broad new tariffs he called “Liberation Day” tariffs, triggering a sharp four-day market selloff. Then, on the morning of April 9, he posted on social media that it was a “GREAT TIME TO BUY!!!” before announcing a 90-day pause on most of the tariffs later that day. The S&P 500 surged nearly 10%, one of its strongest single-day performances on record, while many of the technology companies Trump had purchased rebounded sharply.

The financial disclosure spans more than 900 pages and covers Trump’s financial activity throughout 2025. According to the analysis, April 8 ranked as his 11th-busiest trading day of the year—more than five times his average daily buying activity of approximately 62 transactions.

Federal ethics laws require executive branch officials, including the president, to disclose securities transactions exceeding $1,000 within 45 days. However, disclosure forms report transactions in broad dollar ranges rather than exact purchase prices and do not indicate whether the trades were executed personally or through professionally managed investment accounts.

The disclosure comes during another week in which Trump’s public statements coincided with market-moving developments. On Thursday, he posted “Thank you Micron!” on Truth Social after Micron Technology announced a $250 million commitment to support Trump Accounts, the new federal savings program for children. Earlier financial disclosures showed Trump already owned shares of Micron, meaning the company’s stock gains increased the value of his personal holdings.

The White House has consistently maintained that Trump’s assets are held in a trust managed by his children and that appropriate safeguards exist to prevent conflicts of interest.

Nevertheless, the disclosures have renewed debate among ethics experts over presidents owning actively traded securities while making policy decisions capable of moving financial markets.

Craig Holman, a government affairs lobbyist with the watchdog organization Public Citizen, said senior government officials possess unique access to economic information while also holding the power to influence financial markets, creating what he described as opportunities for potential self-enrichment.

Earlier ethics disclosures released in May also showed Trump actively buying and selling shares of major technology companies including Nvidia, Microsoft, Amazon, and Meta Platforms during the first quarter of 2026. Some of those transactions occurred near significant government actions affecting the companies, including an Nvidia purchase roughly one week before the U.S. Commerce Department approved certain AI chip exports to China.

Beyond Trump’s personal investments, the disclosures underscore how closely financial markets have tracked policy decisions throughout his second term. Tariff announcements, trade negotiations, export restrictions and regulatory actions have repeatedly triggered large swings across stock, bond and commodity markets, increasing investor attention on both government policy and executive communications.

For the companies involved, presidential attention can create both opportunities and challenges. Public endorsements may boost investor confidence, while tariffs, export controls and other policy decisions can significantly influence corporate earnings, supply chains and stock prices.

For Wall Street, the latest disclosure adds another layer to an ongoing question that has defined much of Trump’s second term: how investors should value companies and manage risk when government policy—and the individual directing much of it—can move markets in a matter of hours.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) is scheduled to release its June Consumer Price Index (CPI) on Tuesday, July 14, at 8:30 a.m. Eastern, giving Americans a fresh look at how quickly the cost of everyday goods and services continues to rise. Economists and investors are watching the report closely because it could influence the Federal Reserve’s next decision on interest rates and provide another snapshot of how inflation is affecting households across the country.

The June report follows a stronger-than-expected reading in May, when consumer prices rose 4.2% from a year earlier and 0.5% from the previous month. Rising costs for energy, shelter and food accounted for much of the increase, reinforcing concerns that inflation remains well above the Federal Reserve’s long-term 2% target.

Early forecasts suggest inflation may ease only slightly.

The Federal Reserve Bank of Cleveland’s Inflation Nowcasting Model estimates June’s annual inflation rate could come in at approximately 3.96%, still close to 4% and well above the level policymakers would like to see before considering significant interest-rate reductions.

Although inflation has moderated from its highest levels several years ago, prices remain elevated across many household essentials.

Consumers continue paying more for groceries, electricity, insurance, housing and many everyday services. While gasoline prices have stabilized in recent weeks, higher energy costs earlier this year continue working their way through the economy, affecting transportation, manufacturing and retail prices.

Tariffs on imported goods have also added pressure in several sectors, contributing to higher prices on selected consumer products, electronics and manufactured goods.

The inflation report carries enormous significance because it directly influences monetary policy.

Federal Reserve officials closely monitor CPI data when deciding whether to raise, lower or maintain interest rates. Higher inflation generally encourages the Fed to keep borrowing costs elevated, while evidence of sustained price stability increases the likelihood of future rate cuts designed to support economic growth.

The timing is especially important.

Recent labor market data suggested hiring has slowed, prompting some investors to anticipate eventual interest-rate reductions later this year. However, another stronger-than-expected inflation report could complicate that outlook by encouraging policymakers to remain cautious until inflation shows clearer signs of returning toward target.

The report also affects millions of Americans beyond financial markets.

Inflation influences wage negotiations, retirement planning, Social Security cost-of-living adjustments and the purchasing power of household incomes. When prices continue rising faster than wages, families experience reduced buying power even if paychecks increase.

Economists will pay particular attention to core inflation, which excludes the more volatile food and energy categories. Core CPI often provides a clearer picture of underlying inflation trends because it removes short-term swings caused by weather, commodity prices and geopolitical events.

Housing costs will also remain under close scrutiny.

Shelter expenses continue representing one of the largest contributors to overall inflation, while insurance premiums, healthcare costs and other service-sector prices have remained stubbornly elevated compared with many goods.

For businesses, Tuesday’s report may help shape planning decisions for the remainder of the year.

Companies continue balancing higher labor costs, elevated borrowing expenses and changing consumer demand as they determine pricing strategies, hiring plans and future investment decisions.

For consumers, the report provides another measure of how quickly everyday living costs continue changing. Although inflation has slowed from its historic highs, prices remain significantly above pre-pandemic levels, leaving many families continuing to adjust household budgets.

Financial markets are expected to react quickly once the report is released Tuesday morning, with investors evaluating whether the new data increases or decreases the likelihood of future Federal Reserve action.

Regardless of the final number, the June CPI report will remain one of the most closely watched economic releases of the month because it offers one of the clearest indicators of the nation’s financial health and the direction of interest rates in the months ahead.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Labor Department reported on Thursday that U.S. employers added just 57,000 jobs in June, well short of the roughly 115,000 economists had expected, while May’s gain was revised down to 129,000 and the unemployment rate slipped to 4.2%. On an ordinary day, a hiring miss that large would knock stocks lower. Instead, the Dow Jones Industrial Average pushed to a fresh record high ahead of the July 4 holiday, and Wall Street barely blinked.

That reaction has become the defining habit of 2026. One shock after another — a soft labor report, a war in the Middle East, a sudden sell-off in chip stocks — keeps landing, and the market keeps shrugging it off and grinding higher. As the second half of the year begins, the biggest banks are now telling clients to expect more of the same.

Goldman Sachs is among the most confident. Strategist Ben Snider raised the firm’s year-end target for the S&P 500 to 8,000 from 7,600, roughly 7% above where the index trades now. His team lifted its earnings forecast to $340 per share for 2026, a 24% jump from last year, and to $385 for 2027. Snider expects companies tied to artificial intelligence spending to account for about half of that profit growth.

Goldman is not alone. Deutsche Bank also carries an 8,000 target for the index, and Morgan Stanley sits in the same camp of firms projecting a 17% full-year gain. The common thread in their notes is that corporate earnings, not cheap money, are powering this rally — a point that matters for anyone whose retirement savings or pension is tied to these benchmarks.

The first-half scorecard explains the confidence. Over the six months through June, the Dow climbed 8.9%, its best start to a year since 2021. The broad S&P 500 rose 9.6%, the tech-heavy Nasdaq Composite gained 12.8%, and the small-cap Russell 2000 surged nearly 22% — its strongest first half since 1991. The S&P 500 also posted its best quarter since 2020.

The engine has been artificial intelligence. Semiconductor stocks jumped more than 80% in the first half, with Micron up more than 260% for the year. But the run has grown wobbly. In late June and early July, investors began cashing out of the highest fliers. Micron and Sandisk each fell more than 10% in a single session, Applied Materials slid sharply, and Caterpillar, an AI-infrastructure winner, pulled back almost 7%.

That rotation is why Thursday’s record on the Dow leaned on steadier names. Apple and Microsoft did much of the lifting, and defensive corners of the market — utilities, health care, and consumer staples — outperformed as money moved out of technology. It is a quieter, more cautious version of the same bull market, but a bull market still.

The Federal Reserve backdrop helps explain why weak jobs numbers no longer scare investors. Federal Reserve Chairman Kevin Warsh, speaking Wednesday at a European Central Bank conference in Portugal, said inflation risks have eased substantially, though he cautioned that “prices are too high.” With hiring cooling, traders are reading the data as a reason for the Fed to hold rates steady or cut them, rather than raise them — an outcome the market prefers.

Not everyone is convinced the good times can last. Stock valuations sit near record highs by some measures, and skeptics warn the AI boom echoes the dot-com bubble of the late 1990s. Christopher Harvey, chief equity strategist at CIBC Capital Markets, sees a more modest gain of about 8.8% this year and points to strains in credit markets and doubts about whether AI spending will ever pay off. Bank of America is more cautious still, with a target closer to 7,100. Their warning is simple: the bet only works if corporate earnings keep beating expectations. If profits disappoint, richly priced stocks have little cushion.

Geopolitics remains the wild card. U.S. and Iranian officials resumed talks in Doha this week, and President Donald Trump told reporters that progress toward Iranian denuclearization was “moving along well.” Oil settled around $69 a barrel for WTI crude, easing back toward pre-war levels — a relief for consumers and for companies that depend on fuel and shipping costs.

U.S. markets were closed Friday, July 3, for Independence Day and reopen Monday. The real test of Wall Street’s conviction arrives with second-quarter earnings season, which kicks off in mid-July. If corporate America delivers the profits the bulls are counting on, the path toward 8,000 stays open. If it stumbles, the market’s long streak of shrugging off bad news may finally be put to the test.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump reported a $10.71 million licensing fee from Amazon’s film studio in a federal financial disclosure released Tuesday, a filing that put a hard dollar figure on one of the most striking business turnarounds of his second term: his shift from sworn enemy of Jeff Bezos into a close commercial partner.

The payment came from Amazon MGM Studios for “Melania,” the documentary about the first lady that the studio licensed in early 2025. Trump’s disclosure, a mandatory annual filing, listed the fee as part of more than $2.2 billion in total 2025 revenue, roughly double what he reported the year before. Most of that income came from the family’s cryptocurrency ventures, but the Amazon line drew attention because of who signs the checks.

Amazon paid about $40 million to acquire “Melania” and spent a reported $35 million marketing it, unusually large sums for a documentary that took in only $16.6 million at the global box office. Senator Elizabeth Warren called the price “bribery in plain sight.” Bezos rejected that, saying customer demand rather than politics drove the purchase and that it looked like a sound business decision.

The numbers land as a new book details how far the two men have traveled. In “Regime Change,” New York Times correspondents Maggie Haberman and Jonathan Swan recount that in July 2017 Trump asked aides whether the government could break up Amazon, cursed Bezos by name, and vented about The Washington Post, which Bezos owns. Former aide Anthony Scaramucci described the scene.

By this year, the hostility was gone. Haberman and Swan write that at a dinner after the 2024 election, Bezos told Trump the Post was his “worst investment” and complained that its business managers would not listen to him. Trump, who had long refused to believe Bezos could not steer the paper’s coverage, said he eventually came around: he doubted the billionaire in his first term, then believed him.

For Bezos, staying close to the White House is not sentiment. It is protection for his most valuable government business. His rocket company, Blue Origin, depends on federal contracts and competes directly with Elon Musk’s SpaceX. The U.S. Space Force awarded Blue Origin roughly $2.3 billion in national security launch work, and the company holds a $3.4 billion NASA contract to help build a lunar lander for the Artemis moon program. Amazon itself paid Blue Origin about $1.8 billion last year to launch satellites for its Project Kuiper broadband network. Blue Origin flew its heavy New Glenn rocket for the first time in January 2025 but still lags SpaceX, which launches far more often — a gap that makes federal goodwill valuable.

That web of contracts helps explain why Bezos has courted a president who once threatened his companies. After Trump’s feud with Musk erupted in 2025, Bezos spoke with the president directly and Blue Origin executives met with White House Chief of Staff Susie Wiles, pressing for more work. Bezos also donated $1 million through Amazon to Trump’s inauguration and sat in the front row as the president was sworn in.

The shift has been costly at The Washington Post. The paper lost more than $100 million in a single year, and in February 2026 it cut about a third of its staff, closing its sports desk, books coverage and several foreign bureaus. Bezos had already redirected the opinion section to focus on personal liberties and free markets, a change that triggered resignations and mass subscriber cancellations. Publisher Will Lewis stepped down after the layoffs, and finance chief Jeff D’Onofrio was named interim publisher and chief executive.

Bezos has defended the moves as business decisions rather than political ones. Critics, including former Post editor Martin Baron, argue the opposite, saying fear of retaliation against Amazon and Blue Origin pushed Bezos to soften the paper.

For companies watching Washington, the arc carries a plain lesson. A president who once floated using antitrust law to break up the country’s largest online retailer now counts its founder as an ally, and that founder’s studio, rocket firm and satellite network all do business shaped in part by federal decisions. The Amazon fee is a small slice of Trump’s income, but it is a visible marker of how commercial and political interests have merged at the top of American business.

Whether the alliance holds is another question. Trump’s relationships with billionaires have proven changeable, as his public rupture with Musk showed. For now, Bezos remains inside the tent, his contracts intact and his newspaper reshaped.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

On Thursday, July 2, 2026, the Government of Canada announced that Prime Minister Mark Carney will refer Alberta’s proposal for a new West Coast oil pipeline to the federal Major Projects Office, formally advancing a line built to carry Canadian crude past the United States to buyers in Asia. Standing beside Alberta Premier Danielle Smith in Calgary, Carney called it an approach that gives businesses the certainty they need to build.

The project, labeled the West Coast oil pipeline, would move more than 1 million barrels of oil a day from Bruderheim, Alberta, northeast of Edmonton, to the Roberts Bank marine terminal in Delta, British Columbia, just south of Vancouver. From there, tankers would ship the crude to Asian markets. The route closely follows the existing Trans Mountain corridor, allowing the partners to avoid opening British Columbia’s northern coast, where an oil tanker ban remains in force.

Alberta’s submission package puts the cost between C$35.2 billion and C$43.7 billion, including contingency. The province says it has already spent C$18.3 million on planning.

Who builds it and who pays. The ownership group brings together the federally owned Trans Mountain Corporation, the Alberta Petroleum Marketing Commission, and Calgary-based Pembina Pipeline Corporation (TSX: PPL). Canada and Alberta would be the majority owners, splitting the bulk of the project between Trans Mountain and the Alberta commission. Pembina would hold a 10% economic interest through construction, with an option to increase its stake by another 10% once the pipeline enters service.

Pembina made clear it is not putting money at risk yet. The company said it will retain full discretion over any final investment decision and will not commit its own capital before that decision is made. Scott Burrows, President and Chief Executive Officer of Pembina, called the project a once-in-a-generation opportunity to build nation-scale energy infrastructure. The company has targeted September to finalize definitive agreements.

Why it matters for the economy. Carney has set a goal of doubling Canada’s non-U.S. exports over the next decade. More than 90% of Canadian energy exports currently go to the United States, forcing Canadian heavy crude to sell at a discount because it has limited access to other markets. A second Pacific export route, in addition to the Trans Mountain Expansion that entered service in 2024, would give producers greater bargaining power and could narrow that price discount, increasing revenue for both energy companies and governments.

The government estimates construction could support approximately 140,000 jobs at peak activity, including about 45,000 in Alberta and 70,000 in British Columbia. Once operational, the project is expected to support roughly 50,000 direct and indirect jobs annually.

Getting British Columbia on board. Earlier Thursday, Carney appeared in Vancouver with British Columbia Premier David Eby to announce a separate agreement the Prime Minister said could unlock more than C$200 billion in new investment, with British Columbia serving as the “linchpin.” Ottawa pledged to maintain the northern oil tanker ban, compensate British Columbia for environmental risks if the project proceeds, and assume financial responsibility for potential spill liabilities. Eby said the agreement does not obligate him to support the pipeline but confirmed the province would not challenge a federally approved project in court.

The pipeline proposal is paired with a second agreement. On the same day, Canada, Alberta, and the Oil Sands AllianceCanadian Natural Resources Limited, Suncor Energy, Cenovus Energy, Imperial Oil, and ConocoPhillips—signed a memorandum of understanding supporting the Pathways carbon capture and storage project, which aims to reduce oil sands emissions by 16 million tonnes annually. Companies meeting those targets would see carbon compliance costs increase more gradually. Final agreements are expected later this fall.

Not everyone is convinced the economics justify the investment. No private company has offered to finance and build the project independently, leaving the federal and Alberta governments responsible for most of the cost. Janetta McKenzie of the Pembina Institute—an environmental policy organization unrelated to Pembina Pipeline—said the lack of private investment raises legitimate questions, arguing that expanding existing infrastructure would likely cost less than building a new line. Federal Conservative Leader Pierre Poilievre criticized Carney for maintaining the northern tanker ban and argued the private sector should build the project without government ownership.

For now, the referral to the Major Projects Office formally starts the federal review process. Ottawa plans to decide by October 1, 2026, whether to designate the pipeline a national-interest project under the Building Canada Act, while Indigenous consultations begin immediately. Smith, who has said Alberta should double oil production to 8 million barrels per day over the next 10 to 15 years, called the proposal transformational infrastructure that would generate lasting wealth for Canada.

JBizNews Desk | Calgary, Alberta
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The race to commercialize quantum computing reached another milestone Thursday as IQM Quantum Computers made its public market debut, but investors gave the Finnish technology company a cautious welcome.

Shares of IQM fell about 3.4% on their first day of trading on the Nasdaq, after the company completed a $1.8 billion merger with a special-purpose acquisition company (SPAC). The company now trades under the ticker IQMX, becoming the first European quantum computing company listed on a major U.S. exchange.

Trading was volatile throughout the session.

The stock dropped as much as 7.5% before recovering some losses to close lower, underscoring the uncertainty surrounding valuations for companies operating in one of the world’s newest and most promising technologies.

IQM reached the public market through a merger with Real Asset Acquisition Corp., a SPAC created to acquire a private business. The transaction valued the Finnish company at approximately $1.8 billion before additional capital was raised.

The deal generated roughly $233 million in new funding through the merger and a related private investment. Following the transaction, IQM expects to hold more than $450 million in cash, giving the company significant resources to continue developing its technology.

Quantum computing is an expensive business.

Building quantum computers requires specialized equipment operating at temperatures close to absolute zero, along with years of intensive research and engineering before commercial returns can be realized.

Unlike many startups, IQM already has paying customers.

The company develops complete quantum computing systems—including hardware, software, and cloud-based access—and serves research institutions and national computing centers such as VTT Technical Research Centre of Finland and Germany’s Leibniz Supercomputing Centre.

According to the company, it has built more than 30 quantum computers, delivered 18 systems to customers, and expanded its customer base from eight paying clients in 2024 to 22 during 2025.

Even so, the business remains in its early stages.

IQM generated approximately $36 million in annual revenue during its latest fiscal year and has yet to report a profit. Chief Executive and co-founder Jan Goetz has argued that IQM stands apart from many competitors because it is already delivering working machines rather than simply pursuing laboratory research.

One disclosure in the company’s prospectus drew particular attention.

IQM warned investors that large-scale commercial adoption of quantum computing may never occur. While similar risk disclosures appear throughout the industry, the unusually direct language highlighted the uncertainty that still surrounds the technology despite growing investor enthusiasm.

The company enters a rapidly expanding market.

Several quantum computing companies have pursued public listings during 2026, many through SPAC mergers. Rival Infleqtion debuted on the New York Stock Exchange earlier this month, while companies including Pasqal of France and Xanadu Quantum Technologies of Canada have also announced plans to access public markets.

Investors remain cautious after the previous SPAC boom in 2021, when many highly valued startups later struggled to meet expectations.

Competition is also intense.

IQM’s superconducting technology competes directly with systems being developed by IBM, Google, and publicly traded Rigetti Computing, while rivals including IonQ, D-Wave, and Quantinuum are pursuing different quantum computing architectures.

Government investment continues to accelerate the sector.

President Donald Trump has signed executive actions intended to strengthen U.S. leadership in quantum technology, while the U.S. Department of Energy has set a goal of deploying a scientifically useful, fully reliable quantum computer by 2028.

IQM has already established a research center in Maryland and installed a quantum computer at Oak Ridge National Laboratory, giving the Finnish company an expanding presence in the American market.

For investors, the opportunity is significant—but so is the risk.

Quantum computing has the potential to transform industries ranging from pharmaceutical research and advanced materials to cybersecurity and artificial intelligence. Yet meaningful commercial adoption could still take years, and companies like IQM continue investing heavily while generating relatively modest revenue.

Thursday’s subdued market debut suggests Wall Street remains optimistic about quantum computing’s long-term promise while remaining cautious about how quickly that promise will translate into profits.

The company also began trading in Helsinki, maintaining a home-market listing alongside its new U.S. shares. For now, IQM has capital, customers, and ambitious growth plans—but investors are still deciding what that future is worth.

JBizNews Desk | Helsinki

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

New York City’s government moved into full emergency footing this week after the National Weather Service (NWS) warned that heavy rain and thunderstorms would sweep the region from Sunday evening through Monday night, raising the risk of flash flooding across the five boroughs. Mayor Zohran Kwame Mamdani activated the city’s Flash Flood Emergency Plan and, together with New York City Emergency Management (NYCEM), urged residents and workers to prepare for a wet, disrupted start to the week, according to a release from the mayor’s office.

The NWS flagged the Monday morning commute — roughly 4 a.m. to 10 a.m. — as the most dangerous stretch, when the heaviest downpours were expected to collide with rush hour. Forecasters said most of the tri-state area could see 2 to 3 inches of rain, with 4 inches or more possible in spots. Fox meteorologist Mike Woods warned that rain could briefly fall at rates near 3 inches an hour, enough to overwhelm storm drains and turn streets into standing water within minutes.

For a city that runs on its morning rush, the timing was costly. Millions of New Yorkers depend on subways, buses and roads to reach work, and flash flooding regularly disrupts all three at once — stranding commuters, delaying deliveries and forcing shops to open late or not at all. City officials advised people to limit travel, build in extra time and stay off flooded roads.

Mamdani said crews had spent the weekend clearing catch basins, inspecting flood-prone neighborhoods and reaching out to residents in basement apartments, and asked New Yorkers to do their part. “Limit travel if you can, plan for delays and take these warnings seriously,” the mayor said, urging people to head inside at the first sign of thunder or rising winds.

The city staged its response across every borough. The New York Police Department (NYPD) Tow Truck Task Force was positioned in all five boroughs to pull stranded vehicles off flooded roads, while a Downed Tree Task Force stood ready to clear debris from high winds. The Department of Environmental Protection (DEP), Department of Sanitation (DSNY) and Department of Transportation (DOT) worked to clear catch basins in neighborhoods that flood easily. Specialized emergency teams were placed on standby for rapid deployment.

Officials singled out basement and ground-floor apartments as the highest-risk spots, echoing hard lessons from past storms when fast-rising water trapped residents below street level. Outreach teams contacted people in those units to make sure they had a plan. NYCEM Commissioner Christina Farrell said flash flooding can develop quickly and turn dangerous with little warning, and asked residents to prepare ahead of the Monday rush.

The economic stakes go beyond a rough commute. New York’s low-lying areas are packed with small businesses — restaurants, delis, salons and street-level retail — that can lose inventory, equipment and a full day of sales when water pours in. Basement-level storage and mechanical rooms are especially vulnerable, and repeated flooding has pushed up insurance costs and repair bills for landlords and shop owners across the outer boroughs.

The storm also lands during a stretch of extreme weather that has strained the city’s aging drainage system, which was built for a gentler rainfall pattern than the intense, fast-moving downpours now hitting more often. Each major storm renews pressure on City Hall to invest in flood barriers, expanded catch basins and better warning systems — costly projects that compete for limited budget dollars.

Relief, of a sort, is on the way, though it brings its own challenge. Forecasters said the rain should clear after Monday, with temperatures climbing back toward 90 degrees by Friday and a heat advisory likely to follow. That swing from flooding to heat is the kind of back-to-back weather stress that raises energy demand, strains the power grid and adds costs for businesses running air conditioning and refrigeration.

City officials urged New Yorkers to sign up for Notify NYC emergency alerts by texting NYC to 692-692 and to check real-time conditions before heading out. For businesses, the advice was simpler: plan for a slow, wet Monday, protect ground-level inventory, and give workers and customers room to arrive late.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Lockheed Martin, the world’s largest defense contractor, has pulled ahead in the race to buy Ultra Maritime, a naval-defense specialist, in a deal worth about $3.5 billion, CNBC reported Monday, citing people familiar with the talks. The discussions were still going on, and an agreement could be announced as soon as this week. None of the companies involved has confirmed the deal publicly.

Ultra Maritime is owned by the private-equity firm Advent International. Investment banks Guggenheim and JPMorgan are advising on the sale. The business builds much of the hardware navies use to hunt submarines: sonar buoys that can spot torpedoes and enemy subs, radar, electronic-warfare gear, and torpedo-defense countermeasures. Its main customers are the U.S. Navy and Britain’s Royal Navy.

For Lockheed, the logic is straightforward. The company already sells sensors, sonar and combat systems to navies through its Rotary and Mission Systems division. Buying Ultra Maritime would bolt a specialized underwater-warfare maker onto a business already pointed at the same customers — at a moment when the Pentagon and its NATO allies are spending heavily to track submarines beneath the world’s oceans.

Money is a big reason this asset is drawing a crowd. Ultra Maritime’s revenue is on track to reach roughly $784 million in 2026, up from about $494 million in 2023, after Advent poured close to $170 million into new products over three years. The unit employs around 2,000 people across the “Five Eyes” nations — the United States, United Kingdom, Canada, Australia and New Zealand — that share military intelligence.

The business also has a foot in the door of newer technology. Last year Ultra Maritime teamed up with Anduril Industries, the fast-growing defense startup, to build next-generation anti-submarine systems that pair self-driving underwater drones with Ultra’s sensors. That kind of work fits the direction the U.S. government has been pushing, as officials lean on big contractors to make more weapons faster.

Advent built the wider Cobham Ultra group through two large British takeovers: the roughly £4 billion purchase of defense group Cobham in 2019, followed by the £2.6 billion buyout of Ultra Electronics two years later. Ultra Maritime is seen as one of the more valuable, harder-to-replace pieces of that collection, which is why it has attracted competing offers. Advent put the unit up for sale earlier this year, at one point seeking more than £3 billion, or about $4 billion.

Lockheed has not locked up the deal. Other bidders in the United States and Europe remain part of a competitive auction, and a rival could still come in with a richer offer. The identities of the other bidders have not been disclosed.

If the deal happens, it would rank among Lockheed‘s bigger recent purchases, and Wall Street will want to know how the company plans to pay for it. Lockheed carries a stock-market value of roughly $110 billion to $125 billion and has generated strong free cash flow, which it has historically used — along with borrowing — to fund smaller “bolt-on” acquisitions. Investors will be watching whether a $3.5 billion check changes the company’s plans for dividends or share buybacks.

A deal this size would also face government review on both sides of the Atlantic. Because Ultra Maritime has British roots and supplies the Royal Navy, any sale would likely be examined under the U.K.’s National Security and Investment Act, which lets British officials review or block foreign takeovers of sensitive defense firms. In the United States, the cross-border nature of the technology and customers could draw scrutiny from the Committee on Foreign Investment in the United States, known as CFIUS. Either review could stretch out the timeline for closing.

The report landed at a busy stretch for Lockheed and its chief executive, James Taiclet, who recently met with President Trump alongside other defense-industry leaders as the administration presses contractors to ramp up production. The company is scheduled to report second-quarter earnings on July 23, an event where management could be pressed on the status of the Ultra Maritime talks.

Investors have already reacted. Lockheed shares jumped about 4.6% last Thursday after the first reports of its lead in the bidding, then slipped in later trading. The stock has climbed roughly 13% so far in 2026, helped by rising defense budgets across NATO members since Russia’s invasion of Ukraine.

For everyday readers, the takeaway is less about submarines than about where defense dollars are flowing. Governments rattled by conflicts in Europe and the Middle East are pouring money into weapons makers, and the biggest contractors are using that cash to swallow smaller, specialized rivals. Deals like this one help decide which companies control the technology militaries will buy for the next decade — and which shareholders, workers and towns benefit from the spending.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A father says his family of five is able to eat at Chick-fil-A for under $45 using a DIY sandwich “hack,” though menu prices vary by location amid concerns across the country about affordability due to rising costs.

Jeff Johnson, a worship pastor at an Atlanta church and a podcast host, told his social media followers that it is cheaper to purchase nuggets and buns than to purchase chicken sandwiches for himself, his wife and his three children.

“I have a hack for every dad who’s always saying, ‘Why are we spending so much money at Chick-fil-A,'” Johnson said in a June 26 Instagram video.

“Instead of everybody ordering their fried chicken sandwich and their meal, here’s what we just did and what we have been doing, and y’all need to know about this.”

CHICK-FIL-A EXPANDS ITS ‘GHOST KITCHEN’ MODEL WITH NEW DELIVERY-ONLY STORE IN FLORIDA

Johnson explained that he ordered 30 nuggets, which were just over $17, and buttered buns for everyone, which were 25 cents each.

The camera then pans over to a family member’s sandwich, which shows a bun with several nuggets inside.

Even with added sides and drinks, Johnson’s hack helps reduce the cost for families attempting to budget their meals.

“Everyone’s happy, dad’s happy. We have saved so much money. I’m just telling you, you can eat for under $45 at Chick-fil-A as a family of five if you do what I’m saying,” Johnson said.

Prices vary by restaurant, but individual Chick-fil-A chicken sandwiches often cost about $5 to $6 before sides, drinks and tax.

The commenters on his video were shocked by his hack and appreciative of the advice.

“Chick-fil-A is expensive. Good advice dude. Appreciate it,” one person wrote.

“Did not need to know about the 30 nuggets for $17 as a single person,” another jokingly added.

CHICK-FIL-A LAUNCHES FIRST EVER NON-CHICKEN KIDS MEAL NATIONWIDE

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“Let me know when you get a cease and desist letter from @chickfila,” a third user joked.

“Get some pickles on the side. Gotta have that pickles,” another user said, referring to the pickles that typically come on a classic chicken sandwich.

This post was originally published here

New Jersey entered one of the busiest days of the July Fourth holiday weekend on Sunday with thousands of homes still without electricity, major commuter rail disruptions and a global FIFA World Cup audience descending on MetLife Stadium, creating a costly test of the state’s infrastructure just as it welcomed visitors from around the world.

State health officials said Sunday that the prolonged heat wave’s suspected death toll had risen to at least 22, up from 19 a day earlier, according to New Jersey Department of Health spokesperson Dalya Ewais. Health Commissioner Dr. Raynard Washington said many victims were found inside homes without air conditioning, highlighting the dangers of extended power outages during extreme temperatures.

The combination of severe weather, record heat and one of the world’s biggest sporting events placed extraordinary pressure on utilities, transportation systems and local businesses, many of which were expecting one of the strongest weekends of the summer tourism season.

The largest share of the outages remained on the system operated by FirstEnergy’s Jersey Central Power & Light (JCP&L). According to New Jersey’s outage tracker, roughly 90,000 JCP&L customers remained without power Sunday, accounting for the majority of approximately 124,000 outages statewide. Morris County was among the hardest-hit areas, with more than 30,000 homes and businesses still in the dark.

JCP&L spokesman Chris Hoenig said crews had restored electricity to more than 230,000 customers by Saturday night but warned that the most heavily damaged areas could remain without service until Thursday, a worst-case estimate. More than 1,000 foresters and utility workers continued clearing fallen trees, replacing damaged utility poles and restringing power lines across the region.

The widespread damage was caused by intense thunderstorms that swept through New Jersey on Friday evening, bringing wind gusts of up to 71 miles per hour. Thousands of trees fell onto roads, homes and utility lines, while debris blocked transportation corridors across northern and central New Jersey.

The storms also crippled NJ Transit, the backbone of commuter and event transportation throughout the region. President and CEO Kris Kolluri said crews lost approximately 60 trees along rail lines while catenary wires and signal systems sustained significant damage in just a 20-to-30-minute period.

Repair crews worked around the clock to restore service before the start of the new workweek. The Montclair-Boonton and North Jersey Coast lines reopened Sunday morning, but service on the Morris & Essex and Gladstone Branch lines remained suspended as emergency repairs continued.

The timing presented an enormous operational challenge because NJ Transit serves as the primary transportation provider for thousands of fans attending the 2026 FIFA World Cup. Sunday’s Round of 16 match between Brazil and Norway at MetLife Stadium, temporarily renamed New York New Jersey Stadium for the tournament, was expected to draw another international crowd after weeks of record tournament attendance.

For transportation officials, restoring reliable rail service was about more than moving commuters. The World Cup represents one of the largest international events ever hosted by the region, and agencies including NJ Transit, Amtrak, the Port Authority of New York and New Jersey, and the Metropolitan Transportation Authority have spent years coordinating operations to showcase the area’s transportation network to millions of visitors.

Businesses also felt the impact of the prolonged disruptions. Restaurants, supermarkets, convenience stores and other retailers faced spoiled refrigerated inventory, reduced customer traffic and canceled holiday plans. Hotels, entertainment venues and tourism operators had to navigate transportation delays while accommodating thousands of visitors arriving for World Cup festivities.

Utility restoration efforts also carry significant financial costs. Emergency crews have been working 16-hour shifts in near-100-degree temperatures, requiring substantial overtime while utilities continue replacing damaged infrastructure. Those storm recovery expenses can ultimately affect future operating costs and infrastructure investment decisions.

Many residents are also reconsidering investments in backup generators and other emergency preparedness equipment, echoing the sharp increase in generator demand that followed Hurricane Sandy in 2012.

Weather forecasts called for cooler temperatures during the coming week, offering some relief to utility crews and residents still waiting for power to be restored. Even so, the holiday weekend exposed the growing challenge of maintaining reliable electric and transportation infrastructure as New Jersey continues hosting the 2026 FIFA World Cup through the July 19 final.

For businesses counting on tourism, hospitality and consumer spending, the lesson was clear: major international events can generate enormous economic opportunities, but only if the infrastructure supporting those visitors can withstand increasingly frequent severe weather and record demand.

JBizNews Desk | New Jersey
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A new peer-reviewed study of 38 college students found that writing with artificial intelligence takes more mental effort than writing without it, not less — a conclusion that challenges a common assumption as businesses invest billions of dollars in AI tools and employee training. The research, led by Abram Anders, associate professor of English and the Jonathan Wickert Professor of Innovation at Iowa State University, was published in the journal Computers and Composition and detailed by Iowa State on Monday, June 15.

Anders and co-author Emily Dux Speltz, an assistant professor in the Department of Humanities and Communication at Embry-Riddle Aeronautical University, tracked 38 undergraduates from 22 different majors across two semesters in an experimental course called “AI and Writing.” Students completed structured assignments, then wrote reflections documenting how their thinking changed while working with tools such as OpenAI’s ChatGPT and Anthropic’s Claude.

Most students entered the course expecting AI to do much of the work for them. Instead, they discovered something different. “Writing with AI doesn’t take the work out of writing,” Anders said. “It changes it.”

That finding carries implications well beyond the classroom. As Microsoft, Google, OpenAI, and Anthropic compete to bring AI writing tools into offices around the world, and employers devote significant resources to training their workforces, the study suggests the technology shifts work rather than eliminating it. AI can generate polished text quickly, but the responsibility for judgment, accuracy, and decision-making remains with the user.

Anders put it directly. “AI only handles the surface-level writing, and the real heavy lifting — idea formation, judgment, revision strategy, and quality control — remains with the student writer,” he said. Replace “student” with “employee,” and the finding applies just as easily to today’s workplace.

The researchers identified three ideas students had to understand before AI became a productivity tool rather than a shortcut. The first is that writing with AI is an experiment, not a vending machine. A single vague prompt rarely produces useful work. The second is that strong results depend on the user’s own expertise. Writers must understand a subject well enough to recognize when AI gets facts wrong or produces weak analysis. The third is that the human writer—not the software—must remain responsible for the meaning, direction, and purpose of the final product.

One of the study’s most striking findings involves what the researchers call the “fluency trap.” AI often produces writing that sounds confident, polished, and authoritative even when it is shallow, misleading, or entirely false. Because the writing appears professional, many users instinctively trust it without carefully verifying the information.

Anders and Dux Speltz found that many students initially approached AI much like a search engine, entering a prompt and accepting whatever answer appeared. To challenge that mindset, the course included an exercise called “Create a Fluent Hallucination,” in which students deliberately generated believable but completely false AI content, including fabricated events and invented sources. The exercise was designed to demonstrate firsthand how convincing incorrect information can appear when produced by generative AI.

The lesson extends well beyond education. Businesses increasingly rely on AI to draft emails, marketing materials, reports, proposals, contracts, customer communications, and internal documents. If employees fail to verify AI-generated information, polished errors can quickly become expensive mistakes.

The workforce implications run even deeper. Rather than eliminating effort, the study concludes that AI shifts effort toward the aspects of work that are most difficult to automate: defining problems, exercising judgment, evaluating evidence, making decisions, and revising toward a clear objective. For employers calculating the return on AI investments, that complicates the simple assumption that AI automatically reduces labor. While software may produce a first draft in seconds, organizations still need skilled employees capable of directing, evaluating, and improving that output.

The research also reshapes how writing ability should be viewed in hiring and workforce development. Anders and Dux Speltz argue that as AI becomes embedded in academic, professional, and everyday communication, success will require more than knowing how to operate the software. Workers will need a stronger understanding of how writing and thinking work together.

“AI changes the workflow, but it doesn’t change the fact that writing is thinking,” Anders said. “Students still have to make decisions, set direction and shape meaning.”

The authors are careful not to overstate their conclusions. The study does not claim AI made participants better writers. Instead, it examined how students described changes in their thinking throughout the course. The researchers acknowledge that additional studies involving larger groups are needed to determine whether those changes produce lasting improvements in writing quality. The findings also reflect the experiences of a relatively small group of 38 students.

Even so, the practical message is difficult for employers to ignore. Students who embraced the three core concepts became more deliberate, more skeptical, and more thoughtful in how they used AI. Those who viewed the technology as a shortcut generally produced shortcut-quality work.

As companies continue investing billions in AI software and employee training, the study suggests the biggest competitive advantage will not come from having access to AI—it will come from having employees who know how to question it, guide it, and improve what it produces. AI may generate the first draft in seconds, but the research indicates that critical thinking, sound judgment, and subject expertise remain the qualities that ultimately determine the quality of the final work.

JBizNews Desk | Ames, Iowa

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Oil and gas tankers resumed sailing through the Strait of Hormuz on Sunday, July 5, after an alarming series of unexplained U-turns raised fresh fears that one of the world’s most important energy chokepoints could be disrupted again. The reversals were not caused by bad weather or mechanical problems. Instead, ship operators are navigating an active military threat, with Iranian forces continuing to harass commercial vessels, warnings that parts of the waterway remain mined, and captains weighing intelligence reports, crew safety and soaring insurance costs before committing to the passage.

Despite those dangers, ship-tracking data from Kpler and updates from the Joint Maritime Information Center showed that at least six oil and gas tankers successfully transited the U.S.-protected shipping lane along Oman’s coast on Sunday. The number is likely higher because many vessels are now sailing with their tracking transponders switched off to reduce the risk of being identified. Two smaller tankers instead chose a route closer to the Iranian shoreline.

The renewed traffic followed a tense weekend during which at least eight ships approaching the Strait of Hormuz abruptly turned back before completing the transit. While no official explanation has been released for those individual reversals, maritime security experts say captains are making real-time decisions based on military threats, intelligence warnings and the risk that a single drone, missile or mine strike could endanger crews and shut down one of the world’s busiest energy corridors.

The improving traffic is already benefiting American drivers. According to AAA, the national average for regular gasoline stood at $3.81 per gallon on Sunday, down nearly 50 cents from a month ago and well below the spring peak of $4.56 reached on May 21. Patrick De Haan, head of petroleum analysis at GasBuddy, said 38 states have now fallen below $4 per gallon, providing welcome relief during the busy Independence Day travel period.

About one-fifth of the world’s oil and liquefied natural gas normally passes through the Strait of Hormuz. The near-shutdown earlier this year pushed Brent crude above $100 per barrel, but prices have since dropped below $72 as exports steadily recover.

Saudi Arabia has restored crude exports to roughly 90% of pre-war levels, while the United Arab Emirates is shipping more than 3.9 million barrels per day, aided by a pipeline that bypasses the strait. Total oil flows through Hormuz have climbed above 10 million barrels per day, although that remains below the roughly 20 million barrels that moved before the conflict.

Analysts at HSBC say markets have shifted from worrying about shortages to concerns over excess supply, particularly as China has reduced imports. The U.S. Energy Information Administration expects global production and trade to take until early 2027 to fully recover because of damage to regional infrastructure.

Despite improving traffic, the danger has not disappeared. Iran’s Persian Gulf Strait Authority continues to insist that vessels use routes it designates, while the Joint Maritime Information Center said Sunday that Iranian forces are still harassing commercial ships and warned that parts of the strait remain mined.

For businesses, the reopening of this vital shipping lane is already lowering transportation and fuel costs. But traders remain focused on every tanker entering and leaving the Gulf, knowing that a single security incident could quickly send oil and gasoline prices sharply higher again.

JBizNews Desk | Oman
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A disappointing June jobs report, fresh insight from the Federal Reserve, a sharp pullback in semiconductor stocks and the unofficial start of earnings season are poised to shape Wall Street this week. Investors will be looking for answers to three critical questions: Is the economy slowing enough to change the Fed’s next move? Can technology stocks regain their momentum? And are American consumers still spending despite growing economic uncertainty?

The Bureau of Labor Statistics reported Thursday, July 2, that American employers added just 57,000 jobs in June — less than half of what economists expected — signaling that hiring has slowed significantly entering the second half of 2026. While Wall Street wrapped up a strong first half of the year, markets turned more volatile after the report, setting the stage for a week that could determine the market’s next move.

A Labor Market Losing Momentum

June’s hiring total came in well below the roughly 115,000 jobs economists had expected, and the agency revised April and May payrolls lower by a combined 74,000 jobs. The unemployment rate edged down to 4.2% from 4.3%, but much of that decline reflected fewer Americans participating in the labor force, with the participation rate falling to 61.5%, its lowest level since March 2021.

The weakness was concentrated in leisure and hospitality, which lost 61,000 jobs after softer-than-normal seasonal hiring. Health care, social assistance and professional services accounted for much of the month’s job growth. Average wages climbed 3.5% over the past year, remaining ahead of inflation but reflecting one of the slowest hiring environments in recent months.

For everyday Americans, the report presents a mixed picture. A softer labor market could reduce pressure on the Federal Reserve to keep borrowing costs elevated, offering potential relief for mortgages, auto loans and credit cards. At the same time, slower hiring means fewer job opportunities and less leverage for workers seeking higher pay.

All Eyes Turn to the Federal Reserve

Investors’ attention now shifts to the Federal Reserve’s June meeting minutes, scheduled for release on Wednesday, July 8, at 2 p.m. Eastern. The minutes are expected to provide additional insight into how Chair Kevin Warsh and fellow policymakers view inflation, economic growth and the path for interest rates after leaving policy unchanged at their last meeting.

Following the weaker-than-expected jobs report, traders sharply lowered expectations for another rate increase, making every word of the Fed’s discussion especially important. Investors will be searching for clues about how concerned officials remain over inflation, which has continued to run above the central bank’s long-term 2% target.

Technology Stocks Face an Important Test

The market’s biggest leadership group also enters the week under pressure.

Semiconductor and artificial intelligence shares suffered one of their toughest stretches of 2026, with the PHLX Semiconductor Index falling more than 12% over two trading sessions. The selloff followed reports that OpenAI was in talks to sell a 5% stake to the U.S. government and comments from Meta indicating it may begin selling excess computing capacity, raising new questions about the pace of AI spending.

Several industry leaders moved sharply lower. Micron fell 7%, Applied Materials dropped roughly 10%, and Tesla declined about 8% despite reporting strong vehicle deliveries.

Not all of the money left the market.

Instead, investors rotated into larger, more defensive companies. The Dow Jones Industrial Average climbed to another record high, helped by a nearly 5% gain in Apple, as investors favored established companies with stable earnings and reliable cash flow.

This week’s key question is whether buyers return to the semiconductor sector that fueled much of this year’s rally or continue shifting toward more traditional, dividend-paying companies.

A Strong First Half Faces Its First Major Test

Despite the recent volatility, U.S. markets remain on solid footing after posting one of their strongest first halves in years.

The Dow gained 8.9%, its best first-half performance since 2021. The S&P 500 advanced 9.6%, the Nasdaq climbed 12.8%, and the Russell 2000 surged nearly 22%, marking its strongest first half since 1991.

Energy prices also provided support. West Texas Intermediate crude slipped back below $70 per barrel as tensions in the Strait of Hormuz eased, helping lower gasoline prices and reducing fuel costs for consumers, airlines and freight companies.

Earnings Season Begins With a Look at the Consumer

Corporate earnings now take center stage.

Delta Air Lines headlines the week’s calendar when it reports results before the opening bell on Friday, July 10. Wall Street expects approximately $1.44 in earnings per share on roughly $17.72 billion in revenue, making the report one of the first major indicators of whether Americans continue to spend aggressively on travel.

Earlier in the week, investors will also hear from PepsiCo, Levi Strauss and WD-40, offering additional insight into consumer demand for everything from food and clothing to everyday household products.

Together, the reports should provide one of the clearest early readings on the health of the American consumer and the broader economy.

The coming week isn’t simply about stock prices. It’s about whether hiring continues to cool, whether the Federal Reserve is preparing to shift course, whether consumers remain willing to spend, and whether technology can reclaim its leadership of the market. The answers could shape not only Wall Street’s next move, but also the economic outlook for businesses and families across the country.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Large employers in New Jersey will soon face a new annual fee if significant numbers of their workers receive health coverage through Medicaid instead of employer-sponsored insurance, creating a new business expense that could cost some companies millions of dollars each year.

Gov. Mikie Sherrill signed the measure Tuesday night as part of the state’s $60.7 billion budget, which took effect Wednesday. State officials estimate the new program will generate approximately $145 million annually.

The law creates what New Jersey calls the Employer Healthcare Assistance Contribution.

Companies with 50 or more employees or dependents enrolled in Medicaid will be required to pay an annual assessment based on how many workers rely on the government-funded health program.

The fee starts at $325 per person for employers with 50 to 249 Medicaid enrollees and rises to $725 per person for companies with 500 or more employees or dependents receiving Medicaid benefits.

State officials have identified large retailers, warehouse operators, and major employers such as Amazon, Walmart, and Target as examples of businesses the law is designed to affect.

During its first year, New Jersey estimates the assessment will apply to roughly 700 to 750 companies.

Sherrill said the policy is intended to ensure that profitable employers contribute more toward healthcare costs when large portions of their workforce rely on taxpayer-funded insurance.

The governor argued that the additional revenue will also help reduce financial pressure on hospitals and emergency rooms, where uncompensated care often creates higher healthcare costs throughout the system.

The new assessment comes as New Jersey prepares for significant changes to Medicaid funding.

State officials project that revisions made under the federal tax-and-policy legislation signed last year by President Donald Trump could eventually remove more than 300,000 New Jersey residents from Medicaid while reducing hospital funding by an estimated $3.3 billion annually.

Assemblyman Avi Schnall, a Democrat representing Ocean County, supported the legislation, noting that New Jersey expects Medicaid spending to total approximately $26 billion during the coming fiscal year.

Business organizations strongly opposed the measure.

The New Jersey Business and Industry Association (NJBIA) called the assessment one of the most concerning provisions included in the new state budget.

Christopher Emigholz, the organization’s Chief Government Affairs Officer, said many employers will be penalized for circumstances they cannot fully control because companies often do not know which employees receive Medicaid benefits.

He also warned the assessment could complicate hiring decisions, particularly for businesses employing seasonal and part-time workers.

Supporters of the legislation included provisions intended to address those concerns.

Temporary, seasonal, and part-time employees are exempt from the assessment, and the law prohibits employers from making hiring or firing decisions based on a worker’s Medicaid status.

Several of the companies expected to be affected also criticized the measure.

A Walmart spokesperson said targeted employer taxes ultimately increase costs throughout the economy, raising prices on groceries and other everyday necessities for consumers.

Amazon responded by highlighting its recent $1 billion investment to increase wages and reduce healthcare costs for warehouse employees and delivery drivers, adding that affordable health coverage is available to entry-level workers.

New Jersey is not the first state to pursue this approach.

Massachusetts briefly imposed a similar employer assessment beginning in 2018, while Maryland’s 2006 law targeting Walmart was later struck down by the courts after conflicting with federal employee benefits law.

New Jersey lawmakers say their version was drafted differently in an effort to avoid the same legal challenges.

Other states are already considering similar policies.

Lawmakers in California have directed state officials to study comparable employer assessments, while policymakers in Connecticut, Colorado, Oregon, and Washington have proposed related legislation.

Much of the renewed interest follows federal Medicaid changes that the nonpartisan Congressional Budget Office estimates could leave more than 10 million Americans without health insurance by 2034.

For employers, the practical impact is immediate.

Beginning with the current fiscal year, qualifying businesses operating in New Jersey will face a new healthcare-related expense tied directly to employee Medicaid enrollment. If additional states adopt similar programs, large national employers could see those costs spread well beyond New Jersey.

JBizNews Desk | Trenton, New Jersey

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Satellite television provider Dish DBS filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy protection on Tuesday, its parent company EchoStar Corporation announced, after a delayed $23 billion sale of wireless airwaves to AT&T left the company unable to pay off bonds that were coming due.

The filing was made in the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of Texas, in Houston. In a statement, EchoStar said the move was a prepackaged restructuring — a bankruptcy planned in advance with creditors — backed by holders of more than 88% of Dish DBS bonds. The company said the goal is to restructure its debt quickly and exit court protection before the end of the third quarter of 2026.

At the center of the trouble is a $2 billion block of 7.75% senior secured notes that matured on July 1. Dish DBS could not repay them because the money it was counting on — proceeds from selling wireless spectrum to AT&T — has not arrived. EchoStar agreed last year to sell nationwide 3.45 GHz and 600 MHz spectrum licenses to AT&T for about $23 billion, but the deal has been held up by what the company called unforeseen delays as it awaits regulatory approval.

Charlie Ergen, the chairman and chief executive who co-founded EchoStar and recently returned to lead it through the crisis, framed the filing as a step forward rather than a collapse. He said the company has been “at the forefront of telecommunications for over 45 years” and that the moves would position the business for a stronger future. He added that EchoStar is operating as usual throughout the process.

Importantly, the bankruptcy is limited to the Dish DBS and Dish Wireless corporate entities. EchoStar said its consumer brands — Dish TV, Sling TV, Boost Mobile, Gen Mobile and Hughes — are not part of the filing and will keep operating normally, with no changes to service, employees or vendor payments. Customers, in other words, should see nothing different.

The company that is filing has been under pressure for years. EchoStar, which merged with Dish in 2024, has been struggling to manage roughly $25 billion in debt. Its pay-TV business is shrinking fast: Dish now has about 5 million satellite subscribers and Sling TV about 2 million, down sharply from its peak. In the first three months of 2026 alone, the company lost roughly 177,000 net subscribers, and pay-TV revenue fell more than $260 million from a year earlier, to $2.26 billion.

The bankruptcy also marks a retreat from Dish’s expensive bet on wireless. The restructuring is expected to help wind down Dish Wireless’s facilities-based 5G network — the network the company built to become a fourth national wireless carrier alongside AT&T, Verizon and T-Mobile. That ambition, once encouraged by federal regulators to boost competition, has now given way to selling the underlying airwaves to a rival.

For AT&T, the stalled deal is a complication but also an opportunity. Acquiring EchoStar’s spectrum would give the carrier a large block of valuable airwaves to expand its network, and the delay appears tied to regulatory review rather than a collapse of the agreement. Once the sale closes, EchoStar says it will use the proceeds to repay most of its debt, which would clear the path out of bankruptcy.

The case is being handled by law firm White & Case, with Houston partner Charles Koster leading, while FTI Consulting serves as financial advisor. EchoStar shares, which trade on the Nasdaq under the ticker ECHO, rose 0.4% in after-hours trading following the news — a sign investors viewed the prepackaged filing as an orderly cleanup rather than a surprise.

The filing closes a difficult chapter for Ergen, who spent years trying to reinvent Dish from a fading satellite-TV operator into a wireless player. An earlier attempt to merge with rival DirecTV fell apart, leaving the spectrum sale to AT&T as the company’s main route to raising cash. With that deal delayed and a major bond payment due, bankruptcy became the tool to buy time. If the AT&T transaction finally closes, EchoStar could emerge in the third quarter with far less debt — and a business built around wireless airwaves and streaming rather than the satellite dishes that made it famous.

JBizNews Desk | Houston
© JBizNews.com. All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Crude oil settled near its lowest level since before the Iran war even as a Washington research group warned that Tehran has quietly continued building an underground complex that could one day house a nuclear enrichment facility.

West Texas Intermediate closed near $69 a barrel Friday while Brent crude hovered around $72, roughly where both benchmarks traded on February 27—the day before Israeli and U.S. strikes on Iran ignited the conflict. The last time WTI futures closed below $70 was on Feb. 27. Prices have steadily retreated as commercial shipping resumed through the Strait of Hormuz and traders increasingly bet the fragile ceasefire will hold.

The warning came from the Institute for Science and International Security, a Washington-based nonprofit that monitors nuclear activity using commercial satellite imagery. The organization said images captured in late June show continued excavation and construction at Pickaxe Mountain, a heavily fortified site in Iran’s Zagros Mountains, located just south of the heavily damaged Natanz uranium enrichment complex.

Spencer Faragasso, a senior fellow at the Institute, wrote on X that excavation at the site has continued since at least 2020 and appears designed to preserve Iran’s nuclear capabilities if negotiations with Washington fail. According to the Institute’s analysis, the underground tunnels appear large enough to house an enrichment facility. Inspectors from the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) have not been granted access to the site.

Faragasso argued that if Iran is negotiating in good faith, halting construction at Pickaxe Mountain would be an obvious confidence-building measure. Continued excavation, he said, raises fresh questions about Tehran’s long-term intentions.

The report carries significant implications for energy markets because the nuclear dispute remains the central issue behind the recent conflict. The Islamabad Memorandum, signed remotely by President Donald Trump and Iran’s president on June 17, calls for preserving the status quo while broader negotiations continue. The Institute argues that continuing construction at a suspected nuclear site would conflict with that objective. If confirmed, the activity could strengthen opposition to the agreement in both Washington and Jerusalem and quickly return geopolitical risk to oil markets.

For now, traders are looking beyond the report.

Commercial shipping through the Strait of Hormuz has climbed back above 10 million barrels per day, while Saudi Arabia has restored crude exports to roughly 90% of pre-war levels. The United Arab Emirates has also returned exports to more than 3.9 million barrels per day, using both the Strait of Hormuz and its bypass pipeline network. Combined with emergency reserve releases, those supply increases have transformed a market that faced severe shortages only months ago into one with considerably more available oil.

The next major test could come within days.

Al Arabiya reported that the next round of U.S.-Iran negotiations is expected to begin in Pakistan on July 11, with discussions expected to focus on Iran’s nuclear program, economic sanctions, and frozen Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) assets. Neither Washington, Tehran, nor Pakistan has formally confirmed the meeting date.

The difference between earlier forecasts and today’s market tells the broader economic story. The U.S. Energy Information Administration (EIA) had projected Brent crude would average approximately $105 per barrel during June and July if disruptions in the Strait of Hormuz continued. Instead, oil prices have remained more than $30 below those projections as shipping resumed much faster than expected. That reversal has prevented the sharp increases in gasoline and diesel prices many economists feared heading into the busy July Fourth travel season.

For businesses that rely heavily on fuel—including trucking companies, airlines, manufacturers, and shipping firms—the decline has provided welcome relief after Brent briefly surged above $118 per barrel during the height of the conflict.

That relief, however, depends almost entirely on the ceasefire holding and negotiations continuing.

If evidence mounts that Iran has continued expanding a secret underground nuclear facility while talks proceed—or if the expected July negotiations break down—the geopolitical risk premium could return to oil markets quickly. Any renewed tensions in the Middle East would likely ripple through fuel prices, transportation costs, global supply chains, and ultimately the prices consumers pay for everyday goods.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

America’s southern border is becoming one of the federal government’s biggest construction and technology projects, creating billions of dollars in new business for defense contractors, surveillance companies, and infrastructure builders.

According to U.S. Customs and Border Protection (CBP), the agency is rapidly expanding what officials describe as a “smart wall” along the U.S.-Mexico border using money from a $46 billion border security fund approved by Congress last year.

The funding, included in the sweeping 2025 tax-and-spending law, has turned border security into one of the fastest-growing areas of federal contracting.

CBP Commissioner Rodney Scott said the agency is currently completing approximately six miles of new border barrier each week, while Homeland Security Secretary Markwayne Mullin said the first major phase of the new system is expected to be completed around this time next year.

Unlike earlier border barriers, the new system combines 30-foot steel fencing with advanced surveillance technology, including artificial intelligence, radar, motion sensors, high-resolution cameras, and autonomous surveillance towers capable of monitoring vast stretches of the border without requiring agents on site.

As of mid-June, CBP reported completing another 74 miles of border barrier since President Donald Trump returned to office. During congressional testimony earlier this year, Commissioner Scott said the agency expects to complete approximately 250 miles of new barriers by the end of September.

For private industry, the project represents a multibillion-dollar opportunity.

Among the biggest beneficiaries is Anduril Industries, the defense technology company founded by Palmer Luckey.

Its AI-powered autonomous surveillance towers have become a centerpiece of the new border strategy. Equipped with cameras, sensors, and artificial intelligence capable of distinguishing between people, animals, and vehicles, the towers operate around the clock using solar power.

The 2025 legislation directs CBP to deploy autonomous surveillance towers throughout the border system, with another 95 towers already scheduled for installation.

Being designated as a formal government “program of record” provides Anduril with a long-term stream of federal business while strengthening its position across the defense industry.

Several other companies are also securing major contracts.

Elbit Systems of America, the U.S. subsidiary of the Israeli defense company, continues supplying surveillance equipment, while technology firm Sintela is installing underground fiber-optic sensing networks capable of detecting movement beneath the surface and feeding real-time information into artificial intelligence systems.

According to Sintela CEO Magnus McEwen-King, the company’s technology can follow terrain across forests, mountains, and riverbanks while providing continuous monitoring over large geographic areas.

The spending extends well beyond technology.

Building roughly six miles of fencing every week creates steady demand for steel, heavy construction equipment, engineering firms, skilled labor, transportation providers, and maintenance contractors. CBP is also expanding hiring efforts to support the growing border infrastructure.

In Texas, contractors are additionally installing large floating barriers in portions of the Rio Grande, creating another market for specialized marine barrier manufacturers.

The construction boom comes as illegal border crossings have fallen to their lowest levels in decades following broader immigration enforcement policies implemented by the Trump administration.

Supporters argue the decline provides an opportunity to permanently strengthen border security infrastructure, while critics question whether taxpayers are receiving sufficient value from such a large investment.

Josh Sewell, Director of Research and Policy at the nonpartisan watchdog Taxpayers for Common Sense, has called for stronger oversight before additional billions are committed, pointing to previous government border technology projects that ran significantly over budget.

Meanwhile, local advocacy groups continue expressing concerns about increased surveillance and environmental impacts in sensitive border regions, including parts of Big Bend National Park.

For businesses, however, the outlook remains clear.

With billions of dollars already appropriated and major contracts continuing to be awarded, the federal government’s smart wall initiative is becoming a long-term source of revenue for defense technology companies, construction firms, engineering contractors, surveillance manufacturers, and suppliers across multiple industries.

As work accelerates, the project is evolving into one of the largest infrastructure and technology investments currently underway anywhere in the United States.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

American families are refusing to abandon their summer vacations, but they are aggressively cutting how much they spend to make the trips happen, according to a survey conducted by YouGov and fielded between June 16 and June 21, 2026. The poll of 783 U.S. parents of children under 18 found that 63% already had a family trip planned for the season, while only 27% said they would not travel at all — even as the cost of a getaway climbed sharply.

The pressure on household budgets is easy to see. Airfare in May ran 27% higher than a year earlier, according to inflation data from the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics. Hotel rates and attraction prices have also risen. Yet rather than cancel, most families are making smaller compromises to protect the trip itself.

The most common money-saving move was choosing a closer or cheaper destination, cited by 25% of parents with summer plans. Only 6% canceled a vacation outright, and another 5% switched to a different spot. More than one in five families — 21% — said they were using airline miles or hotel points to help cover the cost. Nearly two-thirds ranked overall price among their three biggest factors when picking where to go.

Spending levels showed how families are budgeting. About half of those traveling expected to spend between $1,000 and $5,000, while 13% planned to spend $5,000 to $10,000, and just 4% expected to top $10,000. The pattern points to households stretching dollars rather than splurging.

Other recent surveys tell the same story. A poll of 5,000 Americans conducted by Talker Research for the fintech firm Current found that 37% would not travel at all this summer, with most of that group saying they simply could not afford a trip. That survey pointed to the rise of “staycations,” “quietcations” and “micro-breaks” as budget-friendly substitutes. Erin Bruehl, vice president of communications at Current, said the trends reflect how practical Americans have become with their money, adding that instead of giving up on travel, people are being smarter about it.

Consulting firm PwC, in its summer spending poll, found that 71% of U.S. adults planned to spend the same or more on summer travel than last year, suggesting demand remains sturdy at the top of the market even as lower-income families pull back. A separate report from NerdWallet, conducted by The Harris Poll, put average summer travel spending on flights and lodging at $3,940 per traveler and estimated that more than 120 million Americans would spend over $475 billion on those costs.

How families are paying is its own economic signal. The NerdWallet survey found that 84% of summer travelers would use credit cards for at least some costs, and while most planned to pay the balance quickly, nearly a quarter said they would carry it. About 17% said they would lean on buy now, pay later services to fund the trip, a sign that some households are borrowing to preserve a summer tradition.

For the travel industry, the numbers cut two ways. Airlines, hotels and theme-park operators are still filling seats, rooms and gates, but a growing share of their customers are trading down — driving less far, staying fewer nights, and choosing value destinations over marquee ones. That behavior supports revenue while squeezing the premium spending that resorts and airlines count on.

The shift is also reshaping where the money lands. Regional attractions, drive-to beach towns, state parks and mid-priced hotels stand to gain as families skip expensive flights. Gas stations, roadside restaurants and campgrounds benefit from the move toward road trips. Meanwhile, credit card issuers and buy now, pay later lenders are capturing a larger slice of vacation spending as families finance trips they will not postpone.

The broader takeaway for the consumer economy is resilience with a catch. Families are treating summer travel as close to essential, refusing to cancel even when prices bite. But they are funding it through points, debt, shorter trips and cheaper destinations — a pattern that keeps travel demand alive while quietly shifting billions of dollars toward the lower-cost corners of the market.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com. All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

SpaceX is preparing to take on some of the biggest names in American telecommunications, signaling that its Starlink satellite business may soon compete directly with AT&T, Verizon, and T-Mobile in what has become one of the company’s boldest expansion plans to date.

The strategy was outlined by SpaceX President Gwynne Shotwell during the company’s late-June initial public offering roadshow, where she told investors that Starlink intends to move beyond providing satellite internet service and become a direct competitor in the U.S. wireless market. The comments, first reported by the Financial Times, represent the clearest indication yet that SpaceX plans to challenge a communications industry valued at roughly $1.6 trillion.  

The announcement comes only weeks after SpaceX’s blockbuster public debut.

The company began trading on the Nasdaq on June 12 under the ticker SPCX, raising nearly $86 billion and reaching a valuation exceeding $2 trillion, making it one of the largest initial public offerings ever completed. Much of that value is tied to Starlink, which has rapidly evolved into the company’s largest revenue generator.

According to figures presented during the roadshow, Starlink generated approximately $11.4 billion of SpaceX’s $18.7 billion in total 2025 revenue. As of March 31, the satellite internet service counted 10.3 million active subscribers across more than 160 countries, reflecting its rapid global expansion over the past several years.  

Until now, Starlink’s primary business has focused on providing high-speed internet service to homes, businesses and remote locations where traditional broadband is unavailable or unreliable. The company has also worked behind the scenes with established wireless carriers, including supporting T-Mobile’s satellite messaging service designed to provide connectivity in areas without cellular coverage.

That approach could soon change dramatically.

Rather than serving as a technology partner, SpaceX now appears ready to market wireless service directly to consumers, placing it in direct competition with carriers that each serve well over 100 million subscribers nationwide.  

A major piece of that strategy fell into place earlier this year.

In May, the Federal Communications Commission approved SpaceX’s acquisition of approximately 65 megahertz of nationwide mid-band wireless spectrum from EchoStar. Owning licensed spectrum is considered essential for operating an independent mobile network and gives SpaceX a foundation it previously lacked.

Even so, industry analysts caution that the approval is only one step in a much longer process. The licenses are not expected to fully transfer until late 2027, and SpaceX’s spectrum holdings remain significantly smaller than those controlled by the nation’s three largest wireless providers. Analysts also note that competing in densely populated urban markets will still require extensive ground infrastructure that SpaceX has yet to build.  

Wall Street remains divided over how disruptive Starlink could ultimately become.

Some analysts see the company fundamentally reshaping the communications industry.

Oppenheimer analysts have argued that SpaceX has the potential to disrupt the broader $1.6 trillion communications market, projecting Starlink could eventually reach 15 million U.S. subscribers by 2030.

Others remain more cautious.

David Barden of New Street Research said SpaceX currently lacks sufficient spectrum to operate a fully competitive nationwide mobile network on its own. He also pointed to the continuing technical challenges of delivering reliable high-capacity service in major metropolitan areas, where conventional cellular networks still possess significant advantages.

Recent usage data supports some of that skepticism. T-Mobile Chief Executive Srini Gopalan recently said satellite traffic currently represents only an extremely small portion of activity on the company’s network, with usage concentrated primarily in national parks and other remote areas beyond traditional cell coverage.  

The competitive threat has already prompted an unusual response from the wireless industry.

In May, AT&T, Verizon, and T-Mobile reached an agreement in principle to create a joint venture that would combine spectrum resources to expand satellite-to-phone services. Analysts viewed the timing of the announcement—coming just weeks before the SpaceX roadshow—as evidence that the nation’s largest carriers view Starlink as a credible long-term competitor rather than simply a niche provider serving rural customers.

The competition may not stop there.

Amazon is also developing its own direct-to-device satellite communications service through its low-Earth orbit satellite network, creating another potential challenger for traditional wireless companies in the years ahead.  

For consumers, satellite-based mobile technology could eventually expand wireless coverage into rural communities and other underserved areas where building conventional cellular towers has long been expensive or impractical.

Industry experts caution, however, that satellite systems still cannot match the capacity and speed of traditional ground-based cellular networks in densely populated cities. As a result, satellite connectivity is expected to complement existing networks for the foreseeable future rather than replace them entirely.  

What distinguishes SpaceX from many previous telecommunications challengers is the company’s ability to control nearly every part of its operation.

SpaceX designs and builds its own satellites, launches them aboard its own rockets and now possesses licensed wireless spectrum that could support a future nationwide mobile network. That level of vertical integration gives the company advantages that previous competitors lacked and could allow it to expand more rapidly if it decides to pursue consumers directly.  

Whether Starlink ultimately becomes a full-scale wireless carrier remains uncertain, but one message from the company’s leadership is already clear: SpaceX intends to play a much larger role in the future of mobile communications, and the nation’s largest telecom companies are preparing accordingly.

JBizNews Desk | Hawthorne, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved.

Finding an apartment is getting a little more expensive again this summer, but renters are still in a better position than they were a year ago thanks to a record wave of new construction that continues to keep prices in check.

According to Apartment List’s July National Rent Report, released this week, the national median rent rose 0.4% in June to $1,385 per month, marking the fifth consecutive monthly increase. The report says the gain is typical for the busy summer moving season, when demand rises and landlords generally have greater pricing power.

Even so, the broader trend remains favorable for renters.

National median rent is still 1.2% lower than it was in June 2025, a decline of roughly $17 per month, and remains 4% below its mid-2022 peak, or about $57 less. Despite that easing, rents are still approximately 21% higher than they were at the start of 2021, reflecting the lasting impact of the pandemic housing boom.

The biggest reason prices have remained relatively soft is supply.

The apartment construction boom peaked in 2024, when developers delivered more than 600,000 new apartments in large multifamily buildings—the highest annual total since 1986. That unprecedented surge gave renters more choices and forced landlords to compete more aggressively for tenants.

Now the market is beginning to tighten.

Apartment List said the national multifamily vacancy rate stands at 7.2%. Vacancy reached a record high in February but has started to decline for the first time in more than four years, suggesting the large inventory of newly completed apartments is gradually being absorbed.

Apartments are also leasing a bit faster. Properties are now spending about 30 days on the market, one day less than in May.

The report also found that annual rent growth has improved for two straight months after reaching its weakest level on record in April, based on Apartment List’s data dating back to 2017. While rents remain lower than a year ago, those year-over-year declines are becoming smaller.

Housing conditions continue to vary widely across the country.

Among major metropolitan areas, San Antonio now has the softest rental market, with median rents down 5% from a year ago as Texas continues adding new apartment supply. Austin follows closely with rents down 4.3%.

At the opposite end of the spectrum, San Francisco recorded the strongest annual increase, with median rents rising 7.4% over the past year.

The regional differences reflect where builders have been most active.

Most of the annual rent declines are concentrated across the South and Mountain West, while much of the Northeast, Midwest, and parts of the West Coast continue seeing rent increases.

Among the nation’s 56 metropolitan areas with more than one million residents, 30 posted lower rents than a year ago, but 51 experienced month-over-month increases during June, highlighting the normal seasonal strength in the rental market.

The report also carries broader economic implications.

Housing remains one of the largest monthly expenses for American households and is a major component of inflation. Slower rent growth helps reduce pressure on consumers while also easing one of the Federal Reserve’s most closely watched inflation measures as policymakers continue evaluating future interest-rate decisions.

The trend is equally important for apartment owners and developers.

After accelerating construction through 2023 and 2024, many builders have sharply reduced new projects. If that slowdown continues while today’s excess supply is absorbed, landlords could regain greater pricing power beginning in 2027.

For now, however, vacancy rates remain elevated and the record pipeline of recently completed apartments continues to give renters more leverage than they have enjoyed in several years.

The bottom line is that rents are following their normal summer pattern by moving higher, but the largest apartment-building boom in decades has prevented another major surge in housing costs. How long that continues will depend on how quickly today’s supply is absorbed—and how much developers slow future construction.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump said Thursday that he expects Elon Musk to donate shares of SpaceX to a new government-backed savings program for American children known as Trump Accounts, a move that could become one of the program’s highest-profile corporate contributions.

Speaking during an interview with CNBC in the Oval Office, Trump said he believes Musk will join other business leaders who have already pledged support for the initiative.

Asked whether Musk would participate, Trump replied that he thinks he will, pointing to recent commitments from Micron Technology and Dell Technologies founder Michael Dell as examples of corporate backing for the program.

Trump Accounts are a new type of tax-advantaged investment account for Americans under the age of 18. Congress created the program last summer as part of a Republican spending package, and the U.S. Treasury Department is preparing to launch it in the coming days in partnership with Bank of New York Mellon and Robinhood.

The goal is to help children begin building long-term savings, with funding coming from the federal government and, in some cases, voluntary contributions from private companies.

A contribution from SpaceX would immediately become one of the program’s most closely watched investments because the aerospace company is among the world’s most valuable businesses and only recently began trading publicly under the ticker SPCX.

Nothing has been finalized.

According to Semafor, which first reported the discussions, the Trump administration has talked with SpaceX about making a contribution, but it remains unclear whether Musk has agreed or what form any donation would ultimately take. SpaceX shares slipped about 0.3% in overnight trading following that report.

The potential donation also reflects the improving relationship between Trump and Musk.

Musk spent roughly $300 million supporting Trump’s successful 2024 presidential campaign before serving as head of the administration’s cost-cutting Department of Government Efficiency (DOGE) as a temporary government employee.

The relationship later deteriorated after Musk publicly criticized a Trump-backed spending bill, prompting an equally public response from the president.

Since then, however, tensions have eased.

The two were seen together at a memorial service for conservative activist Charlie Kirk last fall, and Musk later accompanied Trump’s delegation during a trip to China in May. A SpaceX stock donation would represent another public sign that the two have rebuilt their political and professional relationship.

The story also carries significant business implications.

SpaceX holds billions of dollars in federal defense and space contracts, while the administration has recently defended Musk’s artificial intelligence company, xAI, in ongoing litigation. That overlap between government policy and Musk’s business interests has fueled renewed scrutiny from both supporters and critics.

For American families, the practical question is what assets Trump Accounts will eventually hold.

If major corporations such as SpaceX, Micron, and others contribute shares, millions of children could begin investing at a young age through ownership in some of the country’s fastest-growing companies. Supporters argue that could encourage long-term wealth creation, while critics contend it blurs the line between public policy and private corporate influence.

For SpaceX, the donation could also make business sense.

Placing shares into millions of long-term investment accounts would broaden ownership while reducing the number of shares actively traded in the market. Some retail investors have already noted that SPCX has experienced notable volatility since its public debut as investors continue debating the company’s valuation.

Musk has consistently rejected claims that government assistance built his businesses.

He recently argued that federal incentives received by SpaceX and Tesla represented less than 2% of the companies’ total value, disputing criticism that government support played a central role in their success.

For now, the proposed donation remains Trump’s expectation rather than a finalized agreement. As the Trump Accounts program launches in the coming days, investors, families, and Washington policymakers will be watching closely to see whether that expectation ultimately becomes a formal transfer of SpaceX shares.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Families planning to celebrate Independence Day this weekend will likely notice a familiar trend at the grocery store: the traditional backyard cookout is more expensive than ever.

According to the American Farm Bureau Federation’s 2026 Summer Cookout Cost Survey, released Thursday, the average cost of a classic Fourth of July meal for 10 people has climbed to a record $73.82, an increase of 4%, or $2.90, compared with last year. The survey, which has tracked holiday food prices since 2016, puts this year’s average meal at about $7.38 per person, making it the highest Fourth of July cookout cost since the organization began conducting the annual survey.  

The biggest reason for the increase is beef.

The survey found that two pounds of ground beef now cost an average of $14.06, up 73 cents, or 5.5%, from a year ago. It is the highest beef price recorded since the Farm Bureau began measuring the annual holiday basket.

Faith Parum, an economist with the American Farm Bureau Federation, said ranchers are still rebuilding the nation’s cattle herd following years of drought and rising production expenses. Smaller cattle supplies have kept beef prices elevated, making hamburgers—one of the centerpieces of many Fourth of July celebrations—the largest contributor to this year’s higher grocery bill.  

Other cookout favorites also became more expensive.

Chicken breasts increased 3.5% to $8.06 for two pounds, while three pounds of pork chops climbed 4.7% to $14.79. Fresh strawberries posted one of the largest jumps, rising 12.4% to $5.27 for two pints. The Farm Bureau attributed that increase in part to frost damage in Florida earlier this year, along with higher labor, fuel and transportation costs.

Pork and beans recorded the largest percentage increase among all items surveyed, rising 13.8% to $3.06. Not every grocery item moved higher, however. Ingredients used to make homemade potato salad fell 17.8% to $2.91, helped largely by lower egg prices after last year’s avian influenza-related spike eased. Potato chips also slipped slightly in price.  

Retailers are already seeing consumers adjust to the higher prices.

Stew Leonard, president and chief executive of the grocery chain Stew Leonard’s, said customers are increasingly choosing less expensive cuts of meat and swapping premium proteins for more affordable options as beef prices continue climbing. Families are also preparing more side dishes from scratch and simplifying beverage purchases to keep overall holiday spending under control.

Those changing shopping habits are also influencing what supermarkets are stocking and promoting heading into one of the busiest grocery weekends of the year.  

While shoppers are paying more at the checkout counter, the Farm Bureau noted that the increase looks somewhat different when adjusted for inflation.

Overall U.S. inflation measured 4.2% during the 12 months ending in May, meaning the 4% increase in the cookout basket generally tracked with broader consumer price increases. When calculated using inflation-adjusted dollars, the Farm Bureau estimated this year’s cookout costs roughly $22.03 in 1982-84 purchasing power—virtually unchanged from $22.06 a year ago and still below the inflation-adjusted peak reached in 2022.

In other words, consumers are spending more actual dollars, but the purchasing power required to buy the traditional meal has changed very little over the past year.  

Location also plays a significant role in what families pay.

The Western United States recorded the highest average cookout cost at approximately $80 for 10 people, more than $6 above the national average. Western shoppers paid the most for several key items, including ground beef, chicken, hamburger buns and cheese.

The Northeast remained the least expensive region, with an average cost of $71.35, followed closely by the Midwest at $71.45 and the South at $72.08.  

Another estimate suggests some families may spend considerably more depending on their menu.

The Wells Fargo Agri-Food Institute, using a broader basket that includes additional foods and beverages, estimated that a more complete backyard barbecue for 10 people could cost approximately $161, or about $16 per guest.  

The survey arrives as Americans continue balancing household budgets amid concerns about the broader economy. Questions surrounding consumer spending have grown following a weaker June jobs report and a shrinking labor force, while grocery inflation continues to remain elevated.

The Farm Bureau also pushed back against the common perception that higher grocery prices automatically translate into larger profits for farmers. According to the organization, after accounting for production expenses, farmers receive less than six cents of every food dollar, with the overwhelming majority covering processing, packaging, transportation and retail costs before food reaches consumers.  

For millions of Americans preparing to gather with family and friends this Fourth of July, the tradition remains unchanged. What has changed is the price of filling the grill, as beef costs continue driving holiday grocery bills to their highest level on record.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved.

The 2026 FIFA World Cup has shattered soccer’s all-time attendance record, with packed stadiums across the United States, Canada and Mexico drawing unprecedented crowds and delivering a major economic boost to host cities. A total of 4,644,549 fans passed through the turnstiles during the group stage that concluded late last month, filling 99.7% of available seats and averaging 64,508 spectators per match, according to FIFA. The total surpassed the previous group-stage attendance record of about 3.6 million, set when the United States hosted the tournament in 1994.

“This is a true reflection of our fans’ love for the beautiful game,” FIFA President Gianni Infantino said as the group stage wrapped. With the knockout rounds now underway and the July 19 final approaching, the crowds continue to grow. The tournament also set a single-day attendance record of 426,834 spectators on June 25, while fans from 210 countries and territories have attended matches so far.

For host cities, those record crowds are translating into significant business activity. Card spending across the tournament’s 16 host cities climbed 5.4% from a year earlier between June 10 and June 28, while spending by out-of-town visitors surged 17.4%, according to the Bank of America Institute. Hotels, restaurants, bars, retailers and rideshare companies have all benefited from the influx of visitors, while FIFA fan festivals in cities from Philadelphia to Los Angeles have attracted millions more who never entered a stadium.

The concession numbers tell their own story. During the group stage alone, fans purchased more than 2.8 million beers, 300,000 hot dogs and nearly one million bottles of water inside stadiums, according to FIFA. More than three million supporters also signed up for digital Fan IDs, giving organizers and sponsors direct access to one of the largest global sports audiences ever assembled.

Attending the tournament has not come cheaply. On FIFA’s official ticketing platform, seats for the 104-match tournament have ranged from about $60 to nearly $11,000, with prices fluctuating based on demand. For the championship match at MetLife Stadium outside New York, premium seats reached roughly $33,000, while resale tickets for marquee knockout matches were listed near $20,000 on StubHub. Fans following their teams from city to city have reported spending anywhere from about $2,500 for a single destination trip to as much as $150,000 for premium hospitality packages covering multiple matches.

The travel boom has been uneven across the hospitality industry. A report from FCM Consulting found hotel rates in 13 of the 16 host cities climbed at least 80% compared with last year. Rooms in Guadalajara that averaged about $90 last summer were going for $511, while Boston averaged roughly $611 a night and Houston about $205. Before kickoff, however, the American Hotel & Lodging Association reported that roughly 80% of host-city hotels were seeing bookings below expectations, with many operators citing visa delays and geopolitical uncertainty that discouraged some international travelers. Domestic visitors have made up much of the attendance.

The excitement on the field continues to keep stadiums full. The U.S. Men’s National Team faces Belgium in the Round of 16 on Monday in Seattle, though it will be without leading scorer Folarin Balogun, who is suspended after receiving a red card in the victory over Bosnia and Herzegovina. Mauricio Pochettino’s squad is seeking its first World Cup quarterfinal appearance since 2002, while defending powers led by stars including Kylian Mbappé remain among the favorites to win the tournament.

For businesses, every sold-out match brings another wave of customers. FIFA, which operates as a nonprofit and reinvests tournament revenue into developing the sport, estimates in a study prepared with the World Trade Organization that the World Cup will generate $80.1 billion in global economic activity, including $30.5 billion in the United States alone. Whether host cities ultimately realize lasting economic gains will be debated long after the final whistle, but for now the numbers are unmistakable: stadiums are packed, businesses are bustling, and the 2026 FIFA World Cup has already made attendance history.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Bitcoin sank below $59,000 this week, its weakest level since September 2024, capping a brutal stretch that has cut the price in half despite a Washington that has never been friendlier to digital assets. On Wednesday, Citigroup slashed its 12-month Bitcoin target to $82,000 from $112,000 and its Ethereum target to $2,240 from $3,175, blaming vanishing demand, a wall of fund outflows and stalled crypto legislation.

The drop is striking because it comes under a president who campaigned as crypto’s champion. President Donald Trump promised to make the United States the crypto capital of the world, installed regulators friendly to the industry, and backed efforts to write digital assets into federal law. Yet Bitcoin has fallen roughly 50% from its record high of about $126,000, reached in October 2025, and the coins that rode Trump’s endorsement into the mainstream are now leading the market lower.

The clearest culprit is money leaving the exchange-traded funds that were supposed to make crypto safer and more mainstream. U.S. spot Bitcoin ETFs lost about $4.5 billion in June, according to industry fund-flow data, marking their worst month since launching in early 2024 and pushing total 2026 flows into negative territory for the first time. Those funds were major buyers on the way up. Now the same mechanism is working in reverse, amplifying each new wave of selling.

Citigroup analysts outlined the shift in their research note. The bank cut its assumption for net ETF inflows over the coming year to zero, down from an earlier forecast of $10 billion, warning that the pipeline of new institutional money has largely dried up. One reason, the bank said, is that the CLARITY Act—legislation designed to provide regulatory certainty for institutional crypto investors—remains stalled in the Senate. In a more pessimistic scenario involving continued fund outflows and a weakening economy, Citi sees Bitcoin falling to approximately $53,000.

Investor confidence also took a hit from an unexpected source.

Strategy, formerly known as MicroStrategy, which built its reputation on continuously accumulating Bitcoin, sold a portion of its holdings for the first time since 2022. Executive Chairman Michael Saylor previously indicated the company might sell assets to cover dividend obligations and demonstrate financial flexibility if necessary. Even so, the move unsettled investors who had viewed Strategy as Bitcoin’s most unwavering corporate supporter. The company remains the world’s largest corporate Bitcoin holder, owning approximately 843,700 coins.

The broader economic backdrop has done little to help.

The Federal Reserve, under Chair Kevin Warsh, has maintained benchmark interest rates in the 3.50% to 3.75% range, keeping financial conditions relatively tight and making speculative assets such as cryptocurrencies less attractive. At the same time, investor enthusiasm has shifted toward artificial intelligence, with much of Wall Street’s risk capital flowing into semiconductor companies, AI infrastructure and data centers instead of digital assets.

The weakness extends beyond Bitcoin.

Ethereum has fallen to around $1,600, its lowest level since April 2025, while many smaller cryptocurrencies have suffered even steeper losses. The Crypto Fear & Greed Index, a closely watched measure of investor sentiment, has dropped to 11, deep inside “extreme fear” territory. Blockchain data also indicates that more than half of all Bitcoin currently in circulation is being held at a loss, a condition that has historically appeared only during periods of severe market stress.

For everyday investors, the lesson remains familiar.

Political support and favorable headlines do not override the basic forces that ultimately drive financial markets: interest rates, investor demand and capital flows. A supportive White House may have provided the cryptocurrency industry with greater legitimacy and regulatory access, but it cannot create buyers or eliminate the effects of higher borrowing costs.

Some analysts believe Bitcoin is approaching a market bottom and argue that much of the recent selling has already been priced in. Others warn that if the $58,000 support level fails, the next leg lower could come quickly.

What appears increasingly clear is that cryptocurrency’s direction over the remainder of 2026 will depend less on politics than on market fundamentals—whether ETF inflows return, whether the Federal Reserve begins easing monetary policy, and whether investors regain confidence in digital assets.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Currys Chief Executive Alex Baldock warned Thursday that supplies of fans and portable air conditioners are becoming “tight” ahead of another forecast heatwave in the United Kingdom, after a surge in demand during recent record temperatures emptied shelves across much of the country.

Speaking alongside the electronics retailer’s annual financial results, Baldock said cooling products had been “flying off the shelves” and that the company was working aggressively to replenish inventory before another period of unusually hot weather expected next week.

The demand surge has been extraordinary.

Currys reported that sales of electric fans increased nearly 3,000% during the most recent heatwave weekend compared with the previous week, while portable air-conditioner sales jumped approximately 330%. The company said its nationwide buying power has allowed it to secure more inventory than many competitors, although supplies remain under pressure as temperatures continue climbing.

Currys operates approximately 691 stores across the United Kingdom and the Nordic region, making it one of Europe’s largest consumer electronics retailers.

The comments came as the company reported stronger financial results for the year ended May 2.

Annual revenue increased 6% to £9.2 billion, while pre-tax profit climbed 23% to £153 million. Comparable sales at established UK stores rose 3%, outperforming many competitors in a retail environment that has remained challenging for discretionary spending.

Company executives credited growth across several categories, including coffee machines, artificial intelligence-enabled laptops, repair services, installation services and business sales.

The annual results also mark Baldock’s final earnings report before leaving Currys later this year to become Chief Executive of Boots, one of Britain’s largest pharmacy and health-and-beauty retailers.

The cooling-equipment shortage reflects a broader shift in consumer behavior across Britain.

For decades, air conditioning remained relatively uncommon in British homes because summers were generally mild. However, repeated periods of record-breaking heat have transformed cooling equipment from an occasional purchase into a mainstream household necessity.

Retailers throughout the UK have reported customers lining up to purchase portable air conditioners and fans whenever temperatures spike, creating supply shortages that manufacturers often struggle to replenish quickly.

Industry analysts say climate change is gradually reshaping seasonal retail demand, turning cooling products into an increasingly important sales category that can produce dramatic revenue swings within days.

Baldock also highlighted broader cost pressures facing retailers.

He warned that inflation remains a concern, pointing to continued global demand for semiconductor chips driven partly by artificial intelligence data-center construction. Although Currys said it has secured supplies of computers and mobile phones through at least September, the company expects supply-chain pressures to remain an ongoing challenge.

The chief executive also renewed calls for government reforms involving business rates and tax treatment for low-value imported goods sold through overseas online marketplaces, arguing that domestic retailers continue facing an uneven competitive environment.

For consumers, Baldock offered simple advice: shoppers needing fans or portable air conditioners should not wait until temperatures peak.

With inventories already tightening before the next forecast heatwave arrives, delaying purchases could leave consumers facing fewer choices—or empty shelves—as demand accelerates once temperatures begin rising again.

JBizNews Desk | London

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Nearly a week after two powerful earthquakes devastated Venezuela’s northern coast, rescue crews are still struggling to reach victims—not because of a lack of equipment, but because many of the cranes, excavators, and heavy machines needed to clear debris have run out of fuel.

According to Venezuela’s National Assembly, the death toll climbed to 3,000, with more than 11,200 people injured and tens of thousands still unaccounted for. Rescue operations remain concentrated in La Guaira, one of the hardest-hit regions.

The fuel shortages have added a painful irony to the disaster.

Despite possessing the world’s largest reported oil reserves, Venezuela has been unable to keep enough gasoline flowing to support emergency recovery efforts. Government machinery has reportedly sat idle while families and volunteers searched collapsed buildings by hand.

The two earthquakes struck within seconds of one another on June 24, measuring 7.2 and 7.5 in magnitude, with epicenters in Yaracuy state west of Caracas. The second and stronger quake released roughly three times the energy of the first, bringing down aging apartment buildings and damaging communities across the northern coast.

Satellite imagery indicates nearly 60,000 buildings were damaged or destroyed.

The United Nations estimates the disaster caused between $4.7 billion and $8.7 billion in physical damage—equal to roughly 4% to 8% of Venezuela’s economy. UN agencies also estimate that as many as 6.8 million people could require shelter, medical care, food, or clean water.

Ironically, the country’s oil infrastructure largely survived.

State-owned energy company PDVSA said major refineries, including El Palito, Amuay, and Cardón, escaped significant earthquake damage, while crude production in the Orinoco Belt continued operating.

Instead, officials say the fuel shortages stem from years of underinvestment that left Venezuela unable to refine enough gasoline for domestic demand, forcing the country to depend on imports and fuel rationing. Once the earthquakes struck, that fragile supply chain quickly broke down.

Public frustration has continued to grow.

Many survivors accused the government of responding too slowly, forcing neighbors to rescue victims before heavy equipment arrived. PDVSA and private distributor Domegas said they are also inspecting natural gas systems serving roughly 600,000 households around Caracas to identify leaks caused by the earthquakes.

The emergency response is unfolding under Venezuela’s new political leadership.

Following the capture of former President Nicolás Maduro in January, the United States has backed the country’s new government while overseeing much of Venezuela’s oil revenue.

About 2,000 U.S. service members are assisting with search-and-rescue operations, according to U.S. Southern Command commander Gen. Francis Donovan. President Donald Trump has also pledged American assistance, describing the earthquakes as catastrophic.

International rescue teams from Ecuador, Spain, the Netherlands, Jordan, and Argentina joined local crews during the early days of the response. While many foreign teams have begun winding down operations, rescuers continue searching for survivors.

A three-year-old boy was pulled alive from the rubble in La Guaira on June 30, while crews continue efforts to rescue a 44-year-old man trapped beneath the parking garage of a shopping mall, supplying him with food, water, and medicine.

For businesses, the disaster strikes at a critical moment.

Since Maduro’s removal, the United States has eased sanctions on PDVSA, Venezuela has adopted a new oil law, and crude production has begun recovering. The country produced approximately 1.16 million barrels of oil per day in May, with PDVSA targeting 1.37 million barrels per day by the end of 2026.

Now, billions of dollars needed to rebuild homes, highways, ports, power systems, and public infrastructure may compete directly with efforts to expand oil production and revive the broader economy.

The World Food Programme has requested $50 million to feed up to 500,000 people during the next three months, while the World Health Organization warns that already strained hospitals face growing risks of disease outbreaks.

For now, one of the world’s largest oil-producing nations continues confronting a basic obstacle to recovery: getting enough fuel to power the machines needed to save lives. Until fuel supplies improve, much of the work in La Guaira will continue one shovel at a time.

JBizNews Desk | Caracas

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Target will replace the Ulta Beauty shops inside more than 600 of its stores with a new in-house concept called Target Beauty Studio, launching this fall, the retailer’s Chief Merchandising Officer Cara Sylvester said this week. The move ends a five-year shop-in-shop partnership that expires in August 2026 and marks one of Target’s biggest beauty strategy changes in years.

The Ulta Beauty at Target partnership launched in 2021, giving shoppers access to a curated selection of prestige beauty brands inside Target stores while allowing Ulta to expand its reach without opening standalone locations. Last August, both companies announced they had mutually agreed not to renew the partnership when it expires this summer.

Customers will still be able to shop Ulta Beauty locations inside Target stores through August. Those who have linked their Ulta Beauty Rewards and Target Circle accounts will continue earning rewards on eligible purchases until the partnership officially ends.

Rather than replacing Ulta with another retailer, Target is investing heavily in its own beauty business.

The new Target Beauty Studio will feature more than 80 prestige, global and emerging beauty brands, including approximately 60 brands that have never before been available at Target. The retailer also plans to introduce exclusive product launches available only through Target while expanding beauty-focused Target Circle offers and testing new staffing models designed to improve customer service.

Executives say the goal is to transform beauty into a destination category inside Target stores, creating a shopping experience that encourages discovery while making prestige beauty products more accessible to mainstream consumers.

The move reflects beauty’s growing importance to Target’s business.

While discretionary spending has slowed across many retail categories, beauty products have remained comparatively resilient, with shoppers continuing to spend on skincare, cosmetics, fragrances and personal care even as they reduce purchases elsewhere. Industry analysts have repeatedly identified beauty as one of retail’s strongest-performing categories over the past several years.

The strategy also changes the competitive landscape.

For Ulta Beauty, the partnership helped expand brand awareness and reach millions of Target shoppers. For Target, ending the agreement means transforming a former partner into a direct competitor.

Ashley Helgans, retail analyst at Jefferies, said the transition increases the likelihood that Target becomes a stronger competitor to Ulta as it expands its own prestige assortment and introduces exclusive products.

The announcement also comes during a period of leadership change at Target.

The company is now led by Chief Executive Officer Michael Fiddelke, making the beauty initiative one of the first highly visible merchandising strategies under the retailer’s new leadership. Analysts have suggested improving the in-store shopping experience will be critical as Target works to reverse softer customer traffic while competing more aggressively with both specialty beauty retailers and online marketplaces.

Retail analyst David Bellinger of Mizuho Securities previously wrote that Target’s execution challenges—including staffing levels and in-store operations—likely contributed to the companies’ decision not to extend the Ulta partnership. The success of Target Beauty Studio will therefore serve as an early test of whether Target can independently deliver a premium beauty experience.

Competition within prestige beauty has become increasingly intense.

Alongside Ulta’s standalone stores, Sephora continues expanding through its partnership with Kohl’s, while department stores, specialty retailers and online beauty companies continue investing heavily in premium cosmetics and skincare. Winning customer loyalty increasingly depends on exclusive products, knowledgeable staff and personalized shopping experiences rather than simply carrying well-known brands.

For shoppers, the transition means one final opportunity to visit the existing Ulta Beauty shops before they disappear in August. Beginning this fall, customers will instead find Target Beauty Studio locations offering a broader selection of brands, dozens of new products and a shopping experience designed entirely by Target.

Whether that strategy keeps existing customers—or persuades new ones to choose Target over Ulta, Sephora and other beauty retailers—will become one of the retail industry’s most closely watched merchandising experiments over the coming year.

JBizNews Desk | Minneapolis, Minnesota

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The 2026 FIFA World Cup, billed as the biggest gambling event in history, has become a record-breaking stretch for the companies that let Americans trade on the outcome. Kalshi cleared more than $31 billion in notional trading volume in June, up more than 70% from $17.9 billion in May, according to user-collected data on Dune Analytics, while rival Polymarket posted a record $10.8 billion on its international platform. The figures, tallied as the tournament reached its knockout rounds over the July 4 weekend, are the clearest sign yet that event-contract exchanges have moved from a crypto curiosity to mainstream finance.

Kalshi has kept daily trading volume above $1 billion nearly every day since the tournament kicked off on June 11, the first World Cup expanded to 48 teams. Polymarket’s international platform handled more than $10.8 billion in June, while its U.S.-regulated platform processed more than $3.5 billion, up from $1.77 billion a month earlier, as traders poured into contracts tied to individual matches, tournament winners and player propositions.

The surge has also produced a new competitor. Rothera, an event-contract exchange formed as a joint venture between trading firm Susquehanna International Group and Robinhood, launched in June and immediately generated more than $2 billion in trading volume after Robinhood began routing certain World Cup contracts through the platform. According to Bank of America, Rothera already accounts for about 7% of the U.S. prediction-market industry.

Retail investors have concentrated heavily on the U.S. national team. Traders have placed more than $64 million on Kalshi and $122 million on Polymarket wagering that the United States will win the tournament, despite both exchanges assigning only low single-digit probabilities—approximately 4.3% on Kalshi and 3% on Polymarket. Team USA faces Belgium in the Round of 16 on Monday night, a match expected to generate another surge in trading activity.

The largest individual market remains the tournament champion. Kalshi’s World Cup Winner contract has attracted more than $832 million in trading volume, with roughly 35% of money backing France, the tournament favorite. Both exchanges have aggressively promoted the event to attract new customers. Polymarket offered a prize worth up to $2 million for anyone submitting a perfect knockout-stage bracket, while Kalshi prominently featured World Cup trading in the title of its mobile application.

Trading data also suggests users are holding positions rather than simply placing short-term wagers. Kalshi’s open interest—the value of active contracts awaiting settlement—has climbed above $1 billion for the first time. Polymarket’s open interest sits just below $400 million, elevated but generally consistent with recent months. Bank of America estimates Kalshi has averaged roughly $125 million in trading volume per World Cup match, with parlays accounting for about one-third of that activity, while controlling nearly 80% of the U.S. sports prediction-market sector.

The industry’s rapid growth is unfolding alongside an important legal battle.

More than a dozen states have challenged Kalshi and Polymarket, arguing the companies are operating unlicensed sports betting businesses. The exchanges, supported by the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC), maintain that event contracts fall under federal commodities law rather than state gaming regulations. CFTC Chairman Michael Selig has criticized state enforcement actions against federally regulated exchanges and warned the agency is prepared to defend its jurisdiction in court. Legal experts believe the dispute could ultimately reach the U.S. Supreme Court.

The industry’s handling of unprecedented sports-related trading volume is also attracting attention beyond regulators.

Asaf Meir, chief executive of market-integrity firm Solidus Labs, which works with Kalshi, described the World Cup as a proving ground at a time when regulators, institutional investors and Wall Street firms are evaluating whether prediction markets can expand well beyond sporting events into elections, economic data and other real-world outcomes.

The tournament concludes on July 19 at MetLife Stadium in New Jersey.

By then, the platforms will not only have crowned a World Cup champion—they will also have established a public track record that could influence how far prediction markets are allowed to expand into mainstream finance.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) has closed its four-year investigation into reports of unexpected braking in Tesla vehicles, concluding there was no demonstrated pattern of crashes or significant safety risk that would justify a recall. The decision ends one of the agency’s longest-running reviews of Tesla’s driver-assistance technology and removes another regulatory overhang for the electric-vehicle maker as it continues expanding its software-driven autonomous driving capabilities.

The investigation, formally known as Preliminary Evaluation PE22002, covered approximately 695,000 Tesla Model 3 and Model Y vehicles from the 2021 and 2022 model years. It was launched in February 2022 after hundreds of owners reported sudden, unexplained braking while using Autopilot, Full Self-Driving, or Traffic-Aware Cruise Control, a phenomenon that became widely known as “phantom braking.”

Drivers reported vehicles unexpectedly slowing by 10 to 20 miles per hour over one to three seconds, often while traveling at highway speeds and with no visible obstacle ahead. Many owners said the sudden deceleration startled surrounding motorists and created the potential for rear-end collisions.

Consumer complaints rose rapidly during the investigation. NHTSA had received 99 reports by the end of 2021, a figure that climbed to 314 complaints by the time regulators formally opened the probe in early 2022.

After reviewing years of field data, software updates and customer reports, NHTSA concluded that the braking events presented only a low demonstrated safety risk. The agency said it found no crashes, injuries or fatalities directly linked to the reported incidents throughout the investigation.

One of the agency’s most significant findings was the dramatic decline in complaints following Tesla’s software updates.

According to NHTSA, reported phantom-braking incidents fell from their 2022 peak to just 45 complaints during 2024, 19 complaints in 2025, and only three reports during the first half of 2026. Regulators said the trend closely followed a series of over-the-air software updates Tesla released beginning in 2022 to improve how its driver-assistance systems interpret surrounding traffic conditions.

Unlike traditional automakers that often require dealership visits for repairs, Tesla routinely distributes software improvements remotely to vehicles already on the road. Regulators noted that approach appeared to significantly reduce the frequency of reported braking events without requiring a physical recall.

NHTSA also examined the technology behind the issue.

Investigators found the complaints coincided with Tesla’s 2021 transition from radar-and-camera sensor fusion to a camera-only “Tesla Vision” system. By eliminating forward radar and relying entirely on cameras and artificial intelligence, Tesla adopted an approach that differs from many competing autonomous-driving developers.

According to the agency, the vision-only system occasionally misinterpreted certain driving situations, resulting in unnecessary braking events. Although NHTSA stopped short of declaring the design defective, its report represents one of the clearest acknowledgments by a federal regulator that Tesla’s transition away from radar played a role in the complaint pattern.

The broader debate over autonomous driving technology continues throughout the automotive industry.

While Tesla argues that cameras combined with advanced artificial intelligence ultimately provide safer and more scalable autonomous driving than radar-based systems, several competitors continue relying on combinations of cameras, radar and lidar sensors to create redundant safety layers.

The closure of the phantom-braking investigation does not end Tesla’s regulatory scrutiny.

NHTSA emphasized that closing a preliminary evaluation does not mean a safety defect never existed and retains the authority to reopen the investigation if future evidence warrants additional action. Tesla also continues facing legal challenges outside the United States, including a 2025 class-action lawsuit in Australia involving similar phantom-braking allegations.

The decision follows several other recent regulatory developments involving Tesla. NHTSA recently closed its investigation into power-steering failures affecting approximately 376,000 Model 3 and Model Y vehicles after Tesla addressed the issue through a software update. Regulators have also concluded a separate review involving roughly 2.5 million vehicles equipped with Tesla’s remote vehicle movement feature.

Other investigations remain ongoing, including NHTSA’s special crash investigation into a Tesla Model 3 that struck a home in Katy, Texas, while operating with advanced driver-assistance technology.

For Tesla, the closure of the phantom-braking investigation removes another potential legal and financial risk as the company continues expanding autonomous driving features across its vehicle lineup. Coming on the same day Tesla reported stronger-than-expected quarterly deliveries, the regulatory decision provides another measure of reassurance for investors as the company pushes further toward a software-centered future.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth built a plan last month to pull more American troops out of Europe, then dropped it before announcing it. The Pentagon’s chief spokesman, Sean Parnell, said Thursday that Hegseth made sure his message lined up with President Donald Trump‘s goals and did not want to crowd the president’s room to decide.

Hegseth had been planning to fly to Brussels in June to tell NATO’s top military chiefs that the United States was readying fresh troop cuts on the continent, according to people familiar with the matter cited by the Wall Street Journal. The cuts would have gone beyond two moves already made this year: the canceled deployment of an armored brigade to Poland and the earlier withdrawal of an infantry brigade from Romania.

That plan was scrapped after Hegseth shared it with Secretary of State Marco Rubio, who also serves as Trump’s national security adviser, and other senior officials. Instead of the bombshell, Hegseth used his June 18 speech in Brussels to announce a review of American forces in Europe that could take up to six months.

The episode shows the Trump administration has not settled on how fast or how deep it wants to cut in Europe. There are roughly 80,000 U.S. troops on the continent now.

The back-and-forth is familiar. In May, the Pentagon said it would withdraw about 5,000 troops from Germany after German Chancellor Friedrich Merz criticized Trump’s handling of the war with Iran. Weeks later, Hegseth canceled an armored brigade’s rotation to Poland — a move that caught even Trump off guard. Trump then reversed it on Truth Social, saying he would send 5,000 troops to Poland instead, citing his ties to Polish President Karol Nawrocki.

Congress has tried to slow the cuts. Under the 2026 defense budget law, the Pentagon cannot keep troop levels in Europe below 76,000 for more than 45 days without first notifying and certifying its plans to lawmakers. Republican and Democratic members of the armed services committees have complained they were not consulted on the earlier moves.

The direction, though, is set. A Pentagon defense strategy issued in January said the United States would trim its presence in Europe to focus more on the western Pacific and the Western Hemisphere, with the goal of handing European nations the main job of defending their own continent. On Thursday, Trump wrote on social media that the U.S. spends more on NATO than any other country and gets no benefit from it.

Troop levels and allied spending will be front and center next week when Trump meets NATO leaders in Ankara, Turkey. Alliance officials are hoping the summit shows unity and support for Ukraine, but they fear friction with Trump will steal the spotlight. Officials are also weighing whether to scrap a planned 2027 summit in Albania, according to Reuters.

For business, the story is about who pays and who builds. NATO members agreed in June 2025 to lift defense spending toward 5% of GDP by 2035, a huge jump from the old 2% target. Consulting firm McKinsey estimates European core defense spending could reach about €800 billion—roughly $912 billion—by 2030.

That money is lifting Europe’s arms makers. Shares of Germany’s Rheinmetall, Britain’s BAE Systems, Italy’s Leonardo, France’s Thales, and Sweden’s Saab have climbed sharply since Russia invaded Ukraine in 2022, driven by growing order books. The Stoxx Europe Aerospace & Defence index cooled somewhat this year as investors questioned whether prices had run too far ahead of actual deliveries.

There is a catch for American firms. Much of Europe’s new spending is being steered toward European factories. Under the European Union’s SAFE loan program, the bloc wants 55% of weapons purchases coming from European or Ukrainian makers by 2030. That threatens to shut out U.S. contractors that have long dominated European sales, even as Washington pushes allies to spend more.

At home, Hegseth has said the United States will invest $1.5 trillion in defense in its 2027 budget. But the uncertainty over troop levels—plans floated, then pulled—has unsettled allies and some leading Republicans, who worry the stop-and-start approach will damage the alliance and encourage Russia.

For now, the pace of any pullback is on hold pending the six-month review. The Ankara summit will offer the next signal of where Trump wants it to go.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) is preparing to require most aircraft flying in U.S. civilian airspace to carry technology that allows pilots to see nearby aircraft in real time, according to reporting this week. The proposed rule follows the January 2025 midair collision near Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport that killed 67 people and is intended to reduce the risk of similar accidents by giving flight crews an additional layer of situational awareness.

FAA Administrator Bryan Bedford has directed agency officials to draft the proposal, according to people familiar with the effort, although the agency emphasized that no final decision has yet been made. If adopted, the mandate would represent one of the most significant cockpit safety upgrades for commercial and general aviation since the FAA required aircraft to broadcast their locations using ADS-B Out technology.

At the center of the proposal is ADS-B In (Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast In), a cockpit system that allows pilots to receive the positions of nearby aircraft on an electronic display while also providing audible traffic alerts. Unlike ADS-B Out, which transmits an aircraft’s location to air traffic controllers and other aircraft, ADS-B In gives pilots a direct view of surrounding traffic, allowing them to identify potential conflicts even before receiving instructions from controllers.

The National Transportation Safety Board (NTSB) has recommended broader adoption of ADS-B In for nearly two decades. Following its investigation into January’s fatal collision over the Potomac River, the board renewed that recommendation, concluding the technology could provide pilots with valuable additional warning during rapidly developing situations.

The January 29 accident involved a regional jet operating as an American Airlines flight and a U.S. Army Black Hawk helicopter. According to the NTSB’s preliminary findings, the helicopter was neither broadcasting its position through ADS-B Out nor equipped with ADS-B In. While the regional jet was transmitting its location, it lacked the ability to receive traffic information from surrounding aircraft. Investigators estimated that if the airliner had been equipped with ADS-B In, its pilots may have had approximately one minute to identify the approaching helicopter rather than only 19 seconds before impact.

Congress has debated legislation addressing the issue since the crash but has yet to produce a unified solution. The House approved the ALERT Act, while the Senate advanced separate legislation known as the ROTOR Act. The two proposals differ on implementation timelines and which aircraft would ultimately be required to install the technology.

Rather than waiting for Congress to reconcile the legislation, the FAA appears prepared to move forward through its own regulatory authority. Officials have reportedly discussed shortening or bypassing portions of the traditional federal rulemaking process because of the safety implications.

The proposal carries significant financial implications for the aviation industry.

For major commercial airlines, upgrading existing avionics to support ADS-B In is expected to be relatively modest because most fleets already carry modern ADS-B Out equipment. The greater challenge falls on the nation’s general aviation community.

Industry estimates suggest retrofitting older privately owned aircraft could cost anywhere from approximately $10,000 to $50,000 per aircraft, depending on the equipment installed. Some aircraft owners may determine those costs exceed the value of older airplanes, potentially leading to early retirements rather than upgrades.

The United States has more than 30,000 aircraft potentially requiring retrofits but only a few hundred certified repair stations capable of performing the installations. Aviation groups have also warned of a shortage of qualified aircraft mechanics, noting the median age of FAA-certified mechanics now stands at approximately 54 years, raising concerns about whether enough skilled technicians will be available if thousands of aircraft require upgrades simultaneously.

While aircraft owners could face higher costs, avionics manufacturers may benefit substantially.

Companies including Garmin and Honeywell are expected to see increased demand for cockpit display systems, surveillance equipment and installation services if the mandate is approved. Airlines may also accelerate fleet modernization plans, while business aircraft operators could increasingly favor newer aircraft already equipped with advanced avionics.

The proposal reflects a broader international trend toward enhanced aircraft surveillance and collision-avoidance technologies. Aviation regulators worldwide continue evaluating additional safety measures as global air traffic returns to record levels following the pandemic.

The effort has also highlighted differences between aviation regulators. Administrator Bedford previously suggested the FAA would avoid imposing a mandate without congressional approval, citing compatibility issues involving hundreds of commercial aircraft and proposing that less expensive tablet-based traffic displays might provide an interim solution. That position drew criticism from NTSB Chair Jennifer Homendy, who has urged the FAA to require permanent cockpit-based traffic awareness systems.

The FAA is expected to publish a formal proposal in the coming months. If finalized, the first compliance deadlines could take effect as early as 2027 for commercial airlines, followed by phased implementation for general aviation.

For airlines, aircraft manufacturers, avionics suppliers and private aircraft owners, the proposal signals that the next major investment in aviation safety may soon become a regulatory requirement rather than an operational choice.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Bureau of Labor Statistics reported Thursday that the U.S. labor force participation rate fell to 61.5% in June, its lowest level since March 2021 and, setting aside the pandemic period, the lowest in 50 years, matching a level last seen in June 1976. The decline helped push the unemployment rate down to 4.2%, but largely because hundreds of thousands of Americans stopped looking for work rather than finding new jobs.

At first glance, the June employment report appeared mixed. Employers added just 57,000 jobs, well below economists’ expectations of 115,000, and down from a downwardly revised 129,000 jobs in May. At the same time, the unemployment rate declined to its lowest level in a year. A closer look at the household survey, however, tells a very different story.

According to the report, the U.S. labor force shrank by approximately 720,000 people during June, while the number of Americans classified as not participating in the labor force increased by more than 830,000. Household employment—a separate measure from the payroll survey—fell by 507,000, while the employment-to-population ratio declined to 59%, its lowest level since October 2021.

Many economists said those numbers provide a more accurate picture of current labor-market conditions than the headline unemployment rate.

Dan North, Senior Economist for North America at Allianz, said the labor force participation rate—not the unemployment rate—is the figure demanding the most attention, describing June’s decline as unusually large both on a monthly and yearly basis.

Mike Reid, Head of U.S. Economics at RBC, characterized the report as a “massive exodus” from the labor force, suggesting the decline reflects a combination of retirements, discouraged workers abandoning their job searches and broader demographic changes.

Heather Long, Chief Economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, noted it was especially striking to see roughly 720,000 Americans stop looking for work during the same month that the leisure and hospitality sector also lost jobs.

What makes June’s report particularly noteworthy is who exited the workforce.

Rather than older Americans nearing retirement, much of the decline occurred among prime-age workers, those between 25 and 54 years old—a demographic that historically maintains the strongest attachment to the labor market. Some economists cautioned that monthly household survey data can be volatile and subject to future revisions. Nevertheless, the latest figures continue a longer-term trend that has seen labor force participation remain well below its peak of more than 67% reached around the year 2000.

For businesses, the implications are significant.

A shrinking labor force reduces the number of available workers, making it more difficult for employers to fill open positions while placing upward pressure on wages and hiring costs. At the same time, fewer people earning paychecks ultimately means less consumer spending—the primary engine of the U.S. economy.

Separate data released by Challenger, Gray & Christmas showed U.S. employers announced the highest number of layoffs for the month of May since 2020, with companies citing artificial intelligence as a contributing factor in roughly 40% of announced job cuts. The figures suggest automation continues reshaping hiring decisions across multiple industries.

For the Federal Reserve, June’s employment report adds another layer of complexity to an already difficult economic outlook.

Slower hiring and declining labor force participation argue against further interest-rate increases, with some economists saying the data strengthens the case for the Fed to hold rates steady. Seema Shah, Chief Global Strategist at Principal Asset Management, said the report challenges recent expectations that the labor market had regained momentum while easing pressure on policymakers to tighten monetary policy further.

At the same time, inflation remains above the Federal Reserve’s long-term 2% target, leaving policymakers balancing signs of a cooling labor market against continued concerns over elevated prices. Federal Reserve Chair Kevin Warsh, who described labor conditions as “steady” earlier this week, now faces another closely watched employment report that complicates the central bank’s policy decisions.

The next monthly employment report is scheduled for August 7, when investors, businesses and policymakers will be watching closely to determine whether June’s sharp decline in labor force participation proves to be a temporary anomaly—or a sign that America’s workforce is entering a more prolonged slowdown.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A violent line of thunderstorms tore across New Jersey Friday evening and left more than 230,000 homes and businesses without electricity, according to restoration updates from Jersey Central Power & Light (JCP&L), the FirstEnergy subsidiary serving much of northern and central New Jersey. By Saturday afternoon, the utility said crews had restored power to nearly 80,000 customers, leaving about 150,000 still without service—roughly 95,000 in northern New Jersey and 55,000 in the central part of the state.

Public Service Electric & Gas (PSE&G), New Jersey’s largest electric utility, also reported widespread storm damage. As of Saturday morning, the company said it had restored power to 138,000 customers since extreme heat began on July 1, with powerful winds toppling trees, power lines, and approximately 165 utility poles throughout its service territory.

“We know being without power is challenging, particularly in hot weather,” said Paul Toscarelli, PSE&G’s Vice President of Electric Operations, adding that additional line crews were working throughout the Independence Day holiday weekend to restore service as quickly as possible.

The storm was driven by intense straight-line winds rather than a tropical system or widespread tornado outbreak. Dan Zarrow, chief meteorologist for New Jersey 101.5, said the combination of extreme heat and humidity fueled wind gusts exceeding 70 miles per hour in some locations.

JCP&L spokesman Chris Hoenig said the storm swept across virtually the utility’s entire service territory from north to south, leaving few communities untouched. Morris County and Monmouth County sustained the greatest damage, accounting for more than 90,000 outages at the height of the storm.

The timing could hardly have been worse. Communities across New Jersey were preparing for one of the busiest holiday weekends of the year when widespread outages forced the cancellation of Independence Day celebrations, including Summit’s fireworks at Soldiers Memorial Field. Restaurants, grocery stores, retailers, and other small businesses lost valuable holiday sales while many also faced spoiled inventory after prolonged power failures. JCP&L established free water and ice distribution sites for customers left without electricity during the dangerous heat.

Behind the storm damage sits a larger business story involving the region’s electrical grid.

PJM Interconnection, which manages the electric grid serving New Jersey and 12 other states along with the District of Columbia, reported electricity demand climbing to roughly 163 gigawatts on Thursday as the Northeast heat wave pushed heat index values above 110 degrees across portions of the Mid-Atlantic. That demand came within striking distance of PJM’s all-time record of 165,563 megawatts, established during the summer of 2006.

To help maintain reliability, the U.S. Department of Energy issued emergency orders under the Federal Power Act. Energy Secretary Chris Wright authorized PJM to temporarily operate certain power plants beyond normal environmental restrictions and, if necessary, require large industrial customers—including major data centers—to switch to backup generators during emergency conditions. Facilities drawing at least 50 megawatts of electricity can be directed to move onto backup generation within 15 minutes if the grid becomes critically stressed.

It marked the third time during 2026 that federal emergency authority has been used to support PJM’s electrical system.

The strain also drove electricity prices sharply higher. Wholesale electricity prices in portions of PJM exceeded $2,000 per megawatt-hour on Thursday, while the region’s Western Hub benchmark settled near $1,223, almost three times the level seen during comparable summer demand periods a year earlier. Businesses on demand-based utility rates and consumers with variable-rate electricity plans face the greatest exposure to those price spikes.

PJM officials say the long-term driver behind rising electricity demand is no longer a mystery.

The grid operator projects that approximately 30 of the next 32 gigawatts of expected electricity demand growth through 2030 will come from expanding data centers, which require enormous amounts of power to support artificial intelligence, cloud computing, and digital infrastructure. PJM’s latest capacity auction produced a record clearing price of $333.44 per megawatt-day, significantly increasing the future cost of guaranteeing sufficient generating capacity across the region.

Those higher costs ultimately flow through to utility customers, helping explain why New Jersey lawmakers recently advanced legislation requiring large data centers to bear a greater share of future electric infrastructure costs.

The immediate concern, however, remains restoration efforts.

PSE&G warned that additional thunderstorms could move through New Jersey on Sunday, creating the possibility of new outages while crews continue repairing damage from Friday night’s storms. By early Sunday, FirstEnergy’s outage maps showed the number of customers without electricity gradually falling toward 90,000, although the company cautioned that complete restoration would require several more days because of the widespread damage.

For New Jersey residents and business owners, utility officials continue urging customers to avoid downed power lines, minimize refrigerator openings to preserve food, monitor official outage maps, and prepare for continued restoration work as crews race to rebuild the electric system during one of the hottest stretches of the summer.

JBizNews Desk | New Jersey

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The biggest fireworks show the country has ever attempted lit up the sky over the National Mall in the early hours of Sunday, July 5, after storms forced organizers to evacuate the crowd and push President Trump’s speech past 11 p.m. Saturday. Freedom 250, the White House-backed group organizing America’s 250th birthday celebrations, said the display featured roughly 850,000 pyrotechnic effects launched from 10 sites across the National Mall and West Potomac Park, along with eight barges on the Potomac River.

The company behind the display was Pyrotecnico, a fifth-generation, family-owned fireworks company based in New Castle, Pennsylvania. Company President Rocco Vitale told CBS News that his 75-person crew spent months planning the event, using GPS-synchronized firing systems to coordinate what he described as the largest production his company has ever attempted.

While organizers promoted the display as the biggest in history, Guinness World Records had not officially verified a new world record as of Sunday. Guinness measures the number of fireworks successfully detonated, while Freedom 250’s announced figure referred to total pyrotechnic effects, making the two measurements different. The current Guinness record remains 810,904 fireworks, set in Bocaue, Philippines, during a 2016 New Year’s celebration.

Severe thunderstorms nearly derailed the celebration. Heavy rain and lightning moved through Washington Saturday evening, prompting the U.S. Secret Service to temporarily evacuate thousands of spectators from the National Mall into nearby museums and federal buildings before allowing them to return later in the evening.

President Donald Trump arrived after the weather delay and delivered his Independence Day remarks shortly after 11 p.m. He thanked members of the U.S. military, celebrated America’s founding ideals, and urged support for his SAVE America Act before the fireworks display began.

Earlier in the day, organizers canceled the scheduled Independence Day parade because of dangerous heat, with temperatures reaching approximately 102 degrees. Federal officials said 86 people received medical treatment during the event, while 34 were transported to local hospitals, including several suffering from heat-related illnesses.

Beyond the spectacle, the event highlighted growing economic pressures facing the fireworks industry. Nearly all consumer fireworks sold in the United States are imported from China, and tariffs have significantly increased costs for distributors and municipalities.

Pyrotecnico and other fireworks companies have acknowledged raising prices to offset higher import costs. Across the country, numerous cities and towns reduced, postponed, or canceled Independence Day fireworks because of rising expenses. Some communities relied on emergency fundraising campaigns to keep long-standing July 4 traditions alive.

The contrast was striking. While Washington staged an unprecedented national celebration, many smaller communities scaled back displays because they could no longer afford them.

Neither Freedom 250, the National Park Service, nor the U.S. Department of the Interior disclosed the total cost of the Washington production.

Industry experts estimate the fireworks alone likely cost between $6 million and $7 million, before labor, transportation, permitting, security, and setup expenses. Public federal records show the Department of the Interior previously obligated approximately $1.5 million for National Mall fireworks planning under an earlier contract, though officials have not released final costs for this year’s expanded celebration.

Vitale said Pyrotecnico anticipated trade disruptions well in advance by building inventory and sourcing fireworks from multiple countries, including the United States, Italy, Spain, and other international suppliers.

Weather also disrupted Independence Day celebrations elsewhere. Severe storms interrupted a July 4 concert in Philadelphia, while New York City’s Macy’s Fourth of July Fireworks proceeded despite several small fires that briefly broke out on the Brooklyn Bridge during the event.

Whether Guinness ultimately certifies a new world record or not, Washington delivered one of the largest and most ambitious fireworks displays ever produced. The celebration showcased both America’s 250th anniversary and the growing financial challenges facing an industry increasingly affected by global supply chains, tariffs, and rising production costs.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump used his Independence Day address on the National Mall on Saturday to declare the United States victorious over Iran, telling a storm-battered crowd that American forces had wiped out Tehran’s entire navy “in a moment.” Speaking at the Salute to America celebration marking the country’s 250th anniversary, Trump said the U.S. had destroyed 159 Iranian ships and declared the nation “stronger, freer, richer, safer, and prouder than ever before.”

The claim is Trump’s, and it goes beyond what his own government has publicly confirmed. The White House said U.S. forces used air and naval superiority to destroy Iran’s naval infrastructure, putting the count at 155 to 159 vessels. The Pentagon, however, has described the military operation as a blockade of Iranian ports combined with a limited number of maritime interceptions rather than the destruction of an entire fleet. Independent reporting has not corroborated the 159-ship figure, with one Pentagon briefing citing 13 vessels that were deterred rather than sunk. Earlier in the conflict, defense officials told Congress that clearing mines from the Strait of Hormuz could take as long as six months—a timeline that contrasts with declarations of a complete military victory.

Trump devoted only a brief portion of his speech to Iran.

“They’re dying to settle. They want to settle so badly,” he said of Iran’s leadership. “We gave him a week off for a funeral because we’re nice.”

The comments referenced the temporary pause the administration placed on U.S.-Iran negotiations, which have continued for weeks through mediators from Qatar and Pakistan. The conflict began on Feb. 28, and has since moved into a fragile ceasefire following a June 17 memorandum of understanding establishing a negotiating window covering Iran’s nuclear program and other unresolved issues.

Much of the address revisited themes Trump introduced a night earlier at Mount Rushmore, where he framed the upcoming midterm elections as a battle against what he called a “resurgence of the communist menace,” describing communism as a direct threat to American liberty while linking the issue to immigration. On the National Mall, he returned to those themes while criticizing Democrats ahead of the 2026 elections.

The evening itself unfolded under difficult conditions.

Washington remained under an extreme heat alert, with the heat index approaching 105 degrees, before severe thunderstorms forced the U.S. Secret Service to evacuate portions of the National Mall shortly before the program. Some attendees left entirely while others later returned and underwent a second round of security screening. The remaining military flyovers scheduled for the evening were canceled because of the weather.

Earlier in the day, however, spectators watched performances by the U.S. Navy Blue Angels and the U.S. Air Force Thunderbirds, while the Qatari-donated Boeing aircraft currently serving as Air Force One conducted a ceremonial flyover before storms moved into the area. Organizers proceeded with what they described as the nation’s largest-ever fireworks celebration.

Elsewhere, a separate incident unfolded in New York City, where a fire broke out on the Brooklyn Bridge during the Macy’s Fourth of July Fireworks display. The FDNY classified the incident as a rubbish fire, reporting no injuries.

Despite the administration’s declaration of victory, the most immediate economic effects of the Iran conflict have become visible not on the battlefield but at gas stations across the country.

Crude oil prices have retreated to roughly the levels seen before the conflict began, with West Texas Intermediate trading near $69 per barrel, while the national average price for gasoline declined to approximately $3.83 per gallon, according to AAA, nearly 50 cents lower than one month earlier as commercial shipping through the Strait of Hormuz continued recovering. U.S. financial markets, closed for the Independence Day holiday, are scheduled to reopen Monday.

Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu also added a diplomatic development to the day, announcing plans to visit the United States in the near future following Trump’s decision to pause negotiations with Iran for one week. Trump has indicated that any final decision formally ending the conflict would be made jointly with Netanyahu.

Attention now shifts from military operations to diplomacy.

The negotiating framework established last month provides both governments with a limited window to resolve the conflict’s most difficult outstanding issues, including Iran’s nuclear program and long-term security arrangements in the Persian Gulf.

Saturday’s Independence Day speech declared the war won.

The negotiations now underway will determine whether that declaration becomes a lasting reality.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. Department of the Treasury began depositing a one-time $1,000 into the investment accounts of eligible American children on Saturday, July 4, as the program branded Trump Accounts officially opened for contributions, according to Treasury’s launch announcement and confirmation from Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent. Starting July 4, 2026, eligible children began receiving the $1,000 pilot program contribution from the Treasury, deposited directly into their Trump Account.

The email landing in parents’ inboxes over the weekend — subject line “Benjamin received $1,000 from the U.S. Department of the Treasury” — signals that the money families were promised is now moving. The Trump administration on Saturday launched the new investment accounts for millions of American children, pairing the one-time federal deposit for eligible babies with the opportunity for families and employers to contribute additional funds over time.

The accounts, created under the One Big Beautiful Bill Act that President Donald Trump signed on July 4, 2025, work like a retirement account for children. All U.S. children under 18 with a valid Social Security Number can have a Trump Account. The federal $1,000 seed contribution, however, is more limited. It is available to children born between Jan. 1, 2025, and Dec. 31, 2028, who are U.S. citizens with a valid Social Security number.

Uptake has been heavy. More than 6 million Trump Accounts have been opened for children under 18, according to the Treasury Department. Of those, about 1.4 million qualify for the $1,000 federal pilot contribution. That leaves tens of millions of eligible children still unenrolled, and parents can still claim the money.

How to Get the $1,000 if You Haven’t Applied Yet

There is no cost to open an account, and families have plenty of time. Parents who have not yet enrolled can submit IRS Form 4547 any time before their child turns 18 to open the account and elect into the $1,000 pilot program.

IRS Chief Executive Officer Frank J. Bisignano said the process was intentionally designed to be simple.

“Families with eligible children born between 2025 and 2028 just need to check the box on a form to stake their claim for the $1,000 contribution. It’s that simple.”

Form 4547 can be filed with a tax return or submitted directly through TrumpAccounts.gov. After enrollment, families should download the Trump Accounts app to activate and manage the account.

For parents who enrolled earlier, the activation email is the final step. Families should look for an email confirming that their election to open a child’s Trump Account has been processed and prompting them to complete activation. Once activation is complete, the $1,000 is invested and appears in the account.

Watch for Scams

The Treasury Department is warning families that scammers are targeting the program’s rollout.

Official activation emails come only from no-reply@TrumpAccounts.Treasury.gov, while legitimate follow-up communications arrive through the official app or from email addresses ending in @trumpaccount.com.

Treasury’s guidance is straightforward:

“If you receive a call or text about a Trump Account, do not respond, it is likely a scam.”

Where the Money Goes

Once deposited, the funds are invested automatically.

Treasury selected the State Street SPDR Portfolio S&P 500 ETF (SPYM) as the default investment for all accounts. The fund tracks the S&P 500 Index and carries an expense ratio of just 0.02%.

The accounts are administered by Bank of New York Mellon and Robinhood, and the money generally remains invested until the child turns 18, when the account converts into a traditional IRA.

Families can contribute substantially more than the government’s initial deposit. Parents may contribute up to $2,500 per year in pretax income, while combined annual contributions from all sources are capped at $5,000, excluding contributions from governments and charitable organizations.

Free Money on Top of the Federal Seed

A growing list of employers has agreed to match the federal contribution for employees’ children.

Companies including Micron, SoFi, Charter Communications, BNY, BlackRock, Robinhood, Charles Schwab, Uber, JPMorgan, and Chipotle have announced plans to match the $1,000 federal deposit for eligible employees’ children. Parents should check with their employer to see whether a matching benefit is available.

Private philanthropy is also helping families whose children fall outside the federal eligibility window. A $6.25 billion pledge from billionaire technology entrepreneur Michael Dell and his wife, Susan Dell, will fund a $250 contribution for children age 10 and younger living in ZIP codes with a median family income of $150,000 or less.

For parents, the practical takeaway is straightforward: if the $1,000 has not yet appeared, file IRS Form 4547 through TrumpAccounts.gov, download the official app, and check whether an employer offers a matching contribution.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Antwerp World Diamond Center, the trade body for one of the world’s oldest diamond hubs, presented an elaborate diamond-encrusted gold ring for President Donald Trump on Sunday, June 28, during an “America 250” celebration in Brussels marking the 250th anniversary of U.S. independence. Isidore Mörsel, the center’s president, handed the ring to Bill White, the U.S. ambassador to Belgium, to pass along to the president. The gift arrived months after the Antwerp diamond trade won relief from U.S. import tariffs.

The ring is not subtle. It carries 321 diamonds, 56 sapphires, 13 emeralds and six rubies set in 18-karat gold, roughly the size of a watch face. Dozens of diamonds spell out two large letter “T”s beside the Stars and Stripes, along with the years 1776 and 2026. More stones form the numbers 45 and 47—marking Trump’s two terms—in the shape of the Superman logo. A diamond-winged eagle grips a ruby shield and an emerald olive branch beneath the phrase “250 YEARS USA.” Inside, the band is engraved, “Crafted in Antwerp for Donald John Trump.”

In a prerecorded video shown at the Brussels event, Trump thanked the designers. “A very special thank you to my friends from Antwerp for the magnificent Freedom 250 ring,” he said.

The center turned to David Gotlib, an Antwerp jeweler whose cufflinks can sell for more than $17,000, to make the piece. Neither Gotlib nor the diamond center would place a value on the ring. Two independent jewelers estimated it at between $25,000 and $35,000. Paris- and London-based consultant Alexander Levinson estimated the cost at $25,928, while David Saad, a third-generation jeweler in Canada, valued it between $33,000 and $35,000. Both said roughly half the cost reflected the gemstones and gold, with the remainder representing craftsmanship.

The timing is what draws attention. Belgium’s diamond sector spent much of last year struggling under Trump’s sweeping tariffs. In September, the Antwerp World Diamond Center announced it had secured a zero percent import tariff on the more than $2 billion in polished diamonds Antwerp exports to the United States each year. A spokesperson for the center later said it had provided input to the European Commission during tariff negotiations with the United States but did not directly lobby the Trump administration.

Mörsel described the ring as a symbol of that relationship.

“May this ring serve as a lasting reminder that true partnerships, like the finest natural diamonds, are formed under pressure, endure the test of time, and shine brightest when built on trust,” he said.

The gift also arrives amid continuing debate over what a sitting president may accept. U.S. presidents have broad discretion to receive gifts from private individuals and organizations, while gifts from foreign governments are restricted under the Constitution’s Emoluments Clause unless approved by Congress. Because the ring came from an industry organization rather than the Belgian government, it falls outside that constitutional prohibition.

Personal gifts are expected to appear on the president’s annual financial disclosure. Trump’s latest filing listed a $250,000 sculpture depicting him after the 2024 assassination attempt in Butler, Pennsylvania, along with 10 tickets to the upcoming FIFA World Cup final in New Jersey from FIFA President Gianni Infantino, valued together at about $15,000. Several ethics experts told the Associated Press that the president has departed from the long-standing White House tradition of declining many personal gifts.

The ring is modest compared with some recent gifts. Its estimated value is only a fraction of the roughly $400 million aircraft Qatar donated, which Trump directed be converted into a future Air Force One.

The Brussels celebration itself drew more than 8,000 attendees. Ambassador Bill White said he raised more than $5.5 million from corporate sponsors, including Lockheed Martin and Northrop Grumman, to help fund the event. Musician Alexis Wilkins performed the U.S. national anthem.

Antwerp’s diamond trade has long been closely associated with the city’s Orthodox Jewish community, which for generations played a central role in diamond cutting and trading. Today, the industry is far more international, with Indian-owned companies accounting for much of the trade, while the Antwerp World Diamond Center represents the broader Belgian diamond industry rather than any single community.

For Antwerp, the message was straightforward. After a difficult year, one of the world’s oldest diamond centers wanted to celebrate restored access to its largest export market—and it did so with a ring made from the product that built its global reputation.

JBizNews Desk | Brussels

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Federal officials ordered thousands of people off the National Mall on Saturday evening, cutting short one of the most heavily promoted tourism events in Washington’s history as severe thunderstorms rolled toward the capital just hours before President Donald Trump was set to speak. The National Park Service issued a weather evacuation alert around 7:15 p.m., asking fireworks visitors to seek shelter and follow directions from park rangers, law enforcement personnel and other event staff.

“The safety of our guests, performers, and staff is our top priority,” Freedom 250 spokesperson Danielle Alvarez said in a statement. “Due to approaching severe storms, Freedom 250, United States Secret Service, United States Park Police, National Park Service, the Federal Emergency Management Agency, and all public safety partners are asking all guests to evacuate event grounds and seek temporary shelter in a nearby building.”

The order landed at the worst possible moment for a city that has spent the better part of a year betting on this weekend. Thousands attending the Great American State Fair and other areas around the National Mall were told to leave, and organizers steered them into federal buildings pressed into service as shelters. Visitors were directed to the Department of Commerce, Department of Education, Department of Agriculture, the Internal Revenue Service building, the Ronald Reagan Building, and several Smithsonian museums. The Internal Revenue Service building at 1111 Constitution Ave. NW reached occupancy capacity.

For Washington’s hospitality industry, the disruption arrived on a day that was supposed to cap a banner run. More than two dozen hotels rolled out DC250 packages this summer hoping to attract overnight guests, with luxury properties reporting record bookings. Visitors to the District pump more than $11.4 billion into the local economy each year and generate $2.3 billion in local tax revenue, while roughly 50 million visitors were expected to spend money in the city around the anniversary celebrations. Elliott Ferguson, who leads the city’s tourism arm, had called the administration’s slate of 250th events a clear positive for the industry.

The storms followed a punishing stretch of heat that had already forced cancellations. Washington’s National Independence Day Parade was called off late Friday night. Todd Marcocci, president of Under The Sun Productions, which oversaw the parade, said the decision came after consultation with the National Park Service, the D.C. government and Freedom 250, the nonprofit organizing the anniversary celebrations. The cancellation followed the hottest July 3 Washington had experienced in decades, as Reagan National Airport reached 102 degrees Friday afternoon, breaking a record for the date that had stood since 1966. Among those affected were 80 students from the Grand Island Senior High marching band in Nebraska, who had traveled specifically to perform.

Organizers moved quickly to salvage the night. Freedom 250 announced around 9:10 p.m. that the gates would reopen at 9:45 p.m., with President Trump scheduled to deliver remarks around 11 p.m. before the fireworks display. “Rain or shine, the American people deserve a celebration worthy of our nation’s historic 250th birthday,” the group said, adding that a little rain would not diminish the celebration. The president struck the same note on social media, saying he would not let rain stop the celebration.

The logistics of restarting a secured event of this scale were significant. The Secret Service said its security screening areas would reopen shortly and that everyone who had evacuated would need to go through screening again. Two law enforcement sources told CBS News the Secret Service had dismantled its magnetometers to protect them from storm damage, meaning tens of thousands of returning guests required new security screening before the program could resume.

The weekend’s disruptions came against a broader tourism picture that was already mixed heading into the nation’s 250th anniversary. U.S. travel spending is forecast to reach a record $1.37 trillion in 2026, driven primarily by domestic travelers. At the same time, international arrivals to the United States fell 5.5% in 2025 from the previous year, and industry groups have promoted America’s 250th, the Route 66 centennial, and the FIFA World Cup as major opportunities to reverse that trend. Booking data showed visitors increasingly making shorter, event-focused trips to Washington rather than week-long vacations, with vacation-rental analysts reporting that the city’s average length of stay has declined as travelers build itineraries around specific anniversary events.

That made a smooth, nationally televised Fourth of July celebration even more valuable for the businesses counting on it, from downtown hotels to vendors operating at the Great American State Fair. A storm-delayed marquee event does not erase a year of reservations, but for an industry leaning heavily on one holiday weekend to showcase America’s 250th birthday, the severe weather served as an unwelcome reminder that even the biggest celebrations remain at the mercy of the forecast.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

This Fourth of July marks the 250th anniversary of the founding of the U.S., and while Americans around the country are celebrating the occasion, it also serves as an opportunity to reflect on what helped make the U.S. the world’s largest economy and the reasons it’s still a great place to invest.

Joseph P. Quinlan, head of CIO market strategy for Merrill and Bank of America Private Bank, authored a piece breaking down the 10 reasons as to why the firm is bullish on the long-term prospects of investing in America.

Here’s a look at Quinlan’s 10 reasons to celebrate America on the nation’s 250th birthday.

“Think of our economy as a hydra-headed superpower, leading the world in such diverse activities as aerospace, agriculture, finance, energy, technology, healthcare, education and numerous other industries,” Quinlan said.

BANK OF AMERICA’S LEGACY OF BUILDING THE AMERICAN DREAM

He noted that while the U.S. has just over 4% of the world’s population, it accounts for about one-quarter of all global gross domestic product (GDP), with measures like economic output and per capita income far surpassing emerging countries like China and India.

“Never have so few people produced so much output, creating so much wealth,” Quinlan added.

The U.S. stands in contrast to many of history’s leading world powers by virtue of having friendly neighbors and vast oceans on its flanks, Quinlan said. He said that the U.S. is in “one of the most favorable geographic positions on Earth” and noted how the Great Plains, Mississippi River system and Great Lakes offer space for farming, waterways for commerce and reserves of freshwater that are unmatched around the world.

“At a time when water scarcity, food security, energy supplies and geopolitical tensions are increasingly important, America’s geographic advantages are becoming more valuable – not less,” he noted.

AMERICA 250: BLACKROCK’S LARRY FINK SAYS LONG-TERM INVESTING CAN PERFORM A KIND OF ‘CIVIC MIRACLE’

“America’s economic metabolism is different from the rest of the world. No country creates and destroys as manically as America,” Quinlan wrote, noting that since 2010, about 40% of the companies in the Fortune 500 list have either gone bankrupt, been acquired or ceased operations.

He cited Census Bureau data showing that nearly 6 million new businesses have been formed in the U.S. over the last 12 months – a record high and well above the average of the last decade – as evidence that the country’s “startup itch has only grown stronger in the past few years.”

Quinlan noted that investors move their capital to where it’s treated the best, which shows that “global investors continue to favor the U.S.”

“At last count, the amount of foreign capital invested in the U.S. was around $50 trillion, according to the U.S. Department of Commerce. Bullish on America, the U.S. investment stakes of foreigners have increased nearly five-fold since the start of the century,” he wrote. “No country in the world has been at the receiving end of so much foreign capital this century.”

BELOVED PIZZA CHAIN TURNS AMERICA’S 250TH BIRTHDAY INTO SUMMER-LONG CELEBRATION

The global economy is spurred by intellectual property and brands, and Quinlan noted the U.S. is home to nine of the world’s top 10 global brands in 2026, according to BrandZ.

“These brands are more than commercial success; they are expressions of American soft power,” he wrote, saying they demonstrate how “American culture, technology and business extends far beyond its borders.”

The U.S. military is the most capable in the world and serves as a critical backstop to America’s economic strength through deterrence and the ability to respond to aggression, while it also brings economic benefits amid the backdrop of geopolitical threats from countries like China and Russia.

“America’s defense leadership is not merely a strategic asset – it is also an important economic advantage, supporting innovation across aerospace, cybersecurity, AI and advanced manufacturing,” Quinlan wrote.

MCDONALD’S BRINGING BACK FRIED APPLE PIE TO CELEBRATE AMERICA’S 250TH BIRTHDAY

The entrepreneurial culture of risk-taking in the U.S. has helped the country maintain its edge in tech innovation despite China’s economic rise, Quinlan said, adding that the market cap of firms like Nvidia, Google-parent Alphabet, and Apple are larger than many countries’ economic output.

“America is the largest market in the world for research and development spending and, in terms of AI, investment in AI in the U.S. is light years ahead of most of Europe and the rest of the world,” he said.

Quinlan wrote that U.S. colleges and universities are among its greatest assets, with the Quacquarelli Symonds World University Rankings’ top 100 placing 26 in the U.S., including four of the top five and eight of the top 20.

“Many of the world’s most innovative companies were founded or co-founded by immigrants who first arrived in America as students. Talent follows opportunity, and opportunity still flows disproportionately toward the U.S.,” he noted.

BANK OF AMERICA CARDHOLDERS CAN VISIT 250 MUSEUMS FREE DURING JULY 4 WEEKEND

“Predictions of the dollar’s demise have become a recurring feature of modern finance. Yet the greenback remains the world’s dominant reserve currency, the primary medium of global trade and finance, and the ultimate safe-haven during periods of crisis,” Quinlan wrote.

He added that the dominance of the dollar has given the U.S. what has historically been known as an “exorbitant privilege” that manifests itself in the ability to borrow, invest and transact that few nations can rival, and that, for the time being, “there remains no credible global substitute to the buck.”

Economic competitiveness allows countries to adapt, innovate, bring in talent and drive growth – all categories that Quinlan said the U.S. is among the world leaders in, adding that the U.S. is “positioned to remain among the world’s most competitive economies.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“Summing it all up: At 250 years old, America remains the world’s leading economic, financial, technological and military power,” Quinlan wrote. “The entrepreneurial DNA of 1776 continues to run strong through our nation – think the willingness to take risks, challenge conventions, attract talent, and reinvest itself. That’s worth celebrating.”

This post was originally published here

A record 72.2 million Americans were expected to travel at least 50 miles from home during the Independence Day holiday period, according to AAA, setting a new record despite gasoline prices remaining well above last year’s levels. The forecast, released by AAA on June 17, projected more travelers than last year’s record 71.8 million, highlighting continued consumer demand for summer vacations even as travel costs increased.

Stacey Barber, Vice President of AAA Travel, said the number surpassed last year’s record even as the pace of growth slowed.

“For many Americans, traveling the week of July 4th is tradition,” Barber said. She added that while travel growth is beginning to level off, Americans are still hitting record numbers on the roads, in the skies, and at sea.

The travel period spans nine days, from Saturday, June 27, through Sunday, July 5. AAA developed the forecast with S&P Global Market Intelligence, using economic data including employment, household wealth, gasoline prices, and airline and hotel bookings.

The overwhelming majority of travelers chose to drive. AAA projected 61.4 million people would travel by car, representing about 85% of all holiday travelers. That is virtually unchanged from last year’s 61.3 million, despite significantly higher gasoline prices.

On Thursday, the national average price for regular gasoline stood at $3.84 per gallon, according to AAA. That was more than 20% higher than the same period last year. Prices, however, have fallen sharply in recent weeks, down from $4.29 a month earlier and well below the May 21 peak of $4.56, when fuel costs surged during the conflict with Iran.

“Overall, gas prices remain the highest they’ve been in four years, but the downward trend since late May is welcome news during the busy summer driving season,” AAA said.

Fuel prices continue to vary widely across the country. Hawaii has the highest statewide average at $5.47 per gallon, followed by California at $5.39 and Washington at $5.07. Among the least expensive states are Indiana at $3.10, Texas at $3.35, and Oklahoma at $3.36.

Even with gasoline costing more than last summer, driving remains the most affordable option for many families, particularly those traveling with children. That has helped keep road-trip numbers steady while other travel expenses have climbed.

Air travel remained relatively flat. AAA expected 5.85 million people to fly during the holiday period, a 0.2% increase from last year and roughly 8% of all travelers. The average domestic round-trip airfare reached about $830, approximately 5% higher than a year earlier, based on booking data. Popular routes to destinations such as Chicago and Denver experienced some of the largest price increases.

The fastest-growing segment of holiday travel is neither automobiles nor airplanes. AAA projected 4.93 million travelers would use buses, trains, or cruise ships, a 5.3% increase from last year. Cruise vacations account for much of that growth, as more families choose trips that bundle transportation, accommodations, and meals into a single price.

Based on booking data, the most popular domestic destinations included Seattle, Orlando, Anchorage, Miami, and New York City. AAA said Seattle ranked as the nation’s most popular destination this Independence Day.

For motorists, timing proved critical. Transportation analytics company INRIX projected the heaviest congestion during the second weekend of the holiday period. On Saturday, June 27, traffic was expected to be worst between noon and 5 p.m. INRIX recommended departing before 10 a.m. whenever possible. Travelers returning home on Sunday, July 5, were advised to leave before 11 a.m., with the most severe congestion expected from noon until 6 p.m.

Rental cars also remained in strong demand. Hertz expected Thursday, July 2, to be its busiest pickup day of the holiday period. According to the company, Orlando, Denver, Boston, Los Angeles, and New York City ranked among the busiest rental markets based on advance reservations. AAA also reported that domestic rental-car prices were running roughly 10% higher than last year.

The broader picture is a travel market that has settled into a more sustainable pattern after several years of rapid post-pandemic growth. The increase from 71.8 million to 72.2 million travelers represents another record, although the gains are more modest than the double-digit increases seen in previous years.

That resilience sends an important signal for businesses that rely on holiday travel, including hotels, restaurants, airlines, cruise operators, and gasoline retailers. Consumers have largely absorbed higher airfares and fuel costs without abandoning vacation plans. For many families, the holiday trip remains a priority, even if they trim spending elsewhere to make it happen.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The world’s largest money manager just committed $100 million to something that has nothing to do with the stock market. On March 11, BlackRock announced Future Builders, a five-year program funded by The BlackRock Foundation to train 50,000 Americans as electricians, plumbers, HVAC technicians and ironworkers. “Throughout our history, tradespeople have built our country,” said BlackRock Chairman and CEO Larry Fink. The surprise is not the size of the check. It is what the check says about how many of America’s biggest companies are now thinking about hiring—and why.

For much of the last five years, the loudest debate in corporate hiring centered on diversity goals. Many companies set targets to increase representation among their workforces. Today, many of those employers are changing course. The new emphasis is simpler: hire the person with the skills to do the job. Many companies have reduced or eliminated hiring targets tied to demographic representation while placing greater weight on skills and qualifications.

The change did not happen on its own. On January 21, 2025, President Donald Trump signed Executive Order 14173, restricting diversity programs within the federal government and warning that employment practices favoring one group over another could face legal scrutiny. A follow-up executive order issued on March 26, 2026, expanded that focus to federal contractors by restricting certain diversity-related activities. Many corporate legal departments responded by reviewing and revising hiring policies.

The shift can be seen across some of America’s largest employers. In January 2025, Meta told employees it was ending several programs designed to increase hiring from underrepresented groups. Janelle Gale, Meta’s vice president of people, said the legal landscape surrounding those programs had changed. Google also dropped aspirational hiring goals for underrepresented groups, reduced parts of its diversity organization, and removed certain diversity commitments from its annual reports.

Replacing many of those hiring targets is an approach known as skills-based hiring. Instead of relying heavily on college degrees or other traditional credentials, employers increasingly evaluate whether applicants possess the specific skills required for the job. More companies are removing four-year degree requirements and emphasizing practical experience and demonstrated ability. Roughly 85% of employers now report using some form of skills-based hiring, up from 81% a year earlier. The goal is to broaden the talent pool while selecting candidates based primarily on their ability to perform the work.

One distinction is important. Expanding the applicant pool is not the same as setting hiring targets. Companies continue to recruit broadly and encourage qualified applicants from many backgrounds to apply. The key difference is that many employers now say the final hiring decision is increasingly based on demonstrated skills and qualifications rather than meeting representation goals.

That brings the story back to BlackRock’s investment in skilled trades. The company is not alone. Lowe’s has committed $250 million to workforce training, while Meta has pledged $115 million toward similar efforts. AT&T says it needs more skilled trades workers as part of its five-year, $38 billion expansion of high-speed fiber infrastructure supporting artificial intelligence. Google has committed $15 million alongside the Electrical Training Alliance to help prepare electricians for growing demand.

The reason is straightforward. Larry Fink has warned that the United States faces a shortage of electricians and other skilled trades as artificial intelligence drives a nationwide construction boom in data centers and energy infrastructure. Licensed electricians, plumbers, HVAC technicians, and ironworkers cannot be produced overnight. Training takes years, and many of these occupations already offer salaries that can reach six figures.

Another important point is often overlooked. These hiring changes are separate from supplier diversity programs. Many major corporations continue spending heavily with minority- and women-owned businesses through supplier initiatives. Google and AT&T, for example, each spend at least $1 billion annually with certified minority- and women-owned suppliers as members of the Billion Dollar Roundtable. While hiring practices have evolved at many companies, supplier diversity programs remain a significant part of corporate procurement strategies.

Viewed together, the trend reflects a broader shift in corporate workforce planning. Legal developments, labor shortages, and the growing demand for specialized skills are leading many employers to place greater emphasis on practical ability while investing billions of dollars to train the workforce they expect to need over the next decade.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

When JPMorgan Chase & Co. told securities regulators on June 25 that Marianne Lake would retire, it closed one of Wall Street’s longest-running guessing games — who would eventually replace Chief Executive Jamie Dimon. What that filing did not spell out in plain dollars is how much Lake carries out the door. Drawn from the stock awards listed in the bank’s own regulatory disclosures and its most recent proxy statement, the figure lands near $50 million in unvested shares that will keep vesting on schedule even after she is gone.

That money is not a parting gift. It is pay Lake already earned in past years, handed to her as restricted stock that had not fully vested when she announced her exit. Big banks structure senior pay this way on purpose. A large slice of each year’s compensation comes as stock that vests slowly, over three to five years, so that leaving early usually means walking away from a pile of unvested shares.

Lake does not lose hers. Companies like JPMorgan build in what is often called a qualifying retirement provision. Employees who hit certain age and length-of-service marks are allowed to keep their unvested awards, which continue vesting on the original timetable rather than being canceled. Lake, who joined the bank in 1999 and spent more than 25 years there, clears those thresholds. So the roughly $50 million stays hers, paid out over the coming years as each grant reaches its vesting date.

Her situation stands apart from the four executives who are staying. In the same June 25 disclosure, JPMorgan handed new one-time retention awards to the leaders it wants to keep in place through any future handoff at the top. Doug Petno and Troy Rohrbaugh, both just named co-presidents, each received awards valued at $30 million. Mary Erdoes, who runs asset and wealth management, and Jennifer Piepszak, the chief operating officer, each received $20 million. Those grants are entirely restricted stock that vests after three years, and only if the bank achieves an average return on tangible common equity of at least 12% between 2026 and 2028. The recipients also must remain employed throughout the period.

Because Lake is the one leaving, she receives none of those new retention awards. Her payout consists of the older stock she had already accumulated, protected by the retirement rules rather than by any fresh deal.

The backdrop is the race to run the largest bank in the United States. Lake served as JPMorgan’s chief financial officer from 2013 to 2019, then led consumer lending, and in 2024 became sole CEO of consumer and community banking, the division that oversees the bank’s branches, credit cards, and home and auto lending. For years she was viewed as one of the leading candidates to succeed Dimon, and had she been selected she would have become the highest-ranking woman in American corporate life, running a bank with nearly $5 trillion in assets.

Her retirement came as Doug Petno and Troy Rohrbaugh emerged as the bank’s leading internal succession candidates. Petno, 61, now serves as sole chief executive of the commercial and investment bank, while Rohrbaugh, 56, takes over Lake’s former consumer and community banking division. Both now occupy the tier immediately below Dimon, 70, who has said he expects to remain chief executive for about three more years before likely staying on as chairman to advise his successor.

The timing surprised parts of Wall Street. Several bank analysts said they had long assumed Lake would ultimately become chief executive, and Bloomberg described her departure as abrupt. People familiar with her plans say she is expected to take a senior position at another company rather than retire from business altogether.

The leadership changes arrived alongside a broader capital plan. A day earlier, following the Federal Reserve’s annual stress test results, JPMorgan’s board authorized a new $50 billion share repurchase program beginning July 1 and increased the quarterly dividend by 10%, to $1.65 a share from $1.50, starting in the third quarter.

For everyday readers, Lake’s payout offers a look at how the top of American banking compensates its executives. The headline figure may sound like a reward for losing the CEO race. In reality, it represents deferred compensation earned over many years and preserved under retirement provisions available to long-serving executives. The bank is using fresh performance-based stock grants to retain the leaders it wants to keep while allowing a departing veteran to collect compensation she had already earned. Lake leaves after more than a quarter-century with the stock she accumulated along the way—and with her name still linked to one of Wall Street’s most closely watched succession stories.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Governor Mikie Sherrill signed New Jersey’s new state budget late Tuesday, putting a record $60.7 billion spending plan into law just before the state’s midnight constitutional deadline, her office said. It is the first budget of her term, and she cast it as a plan built around one idea: making the state more affordable for the people who live there.

The budget totals about $60.743 billion, the largest in New Jersey history, and took effect Wednesday, July 1. Sherrill said the plan holds down costs for families without raising taxes on individual residents, pointing to housing, health care and property taxes as the pressures she wanted to ease.

For most households, the piece that matters most is property tax relief. The budget sets aside more than $4.1 billion for it — the biggest such commitment the state has ever made. That includes roughly $2.19 billion for the ANCHOR rebate program, $345 million for Senior Freeze, and $756 million for Stay NJ, the newer program aimed at helping seniors stay in their homes.

Families with children also get a bump. The budget raises New Jersey’s Child Tax Credit by 25% for three tax years, so a household that received the top credit of $1,000 will now get $1,250. Commuters benefit too: the plan puts nearly $1.1 billion toward NJ Transit operations, an increase of $235 million, or about 28%, and directs $12.4 billion to public schools.

Sherrill also used the budget to show fiscal restraint. It includes a full $7.3 billion pension payment — the sixth year in a row the state has paid its full share, and, her office said, the first time in decades a governor has fully funded the system in a first year. The plan keeps a surplus of just over $6 billion and cuts the state’s structural deficit to about $1.35 billion, down from more than $3 billion when she took office in January.

How to pay for all of it is where the fight is. Much of the new revenue comes from businesses. The budget counts on $4.82 billion from the Business Alternative Income Tax, $4.08 billion from the Corporation Business Tax, and $814 million from the Corporate Transit Fee charged to the state’s largest companies. It also adds a new assessment requiring employers to ask workers whether they or family members are on Medicaid.

Business leaders objected fast. Michele Siekerka, president and CEO of the New Jersey Business & Industry Association, said the state’s employers are “still under attack,” noting that nearly all of the budget’s revenue-raisers land on business in a state that already ranks among the worst in the nation for business taxes. Siekerka did credit the plan for funding the New Jersey Manufacturing Extension Program and for money tied to Sherrill’s push to cut red tape for companies.

Republicans said the budget spends too much and breaks a campaign promise. State Senator Michael Testa said it spends more taxpayer money than ever while asking families to accept the same broken promises. Assemblyman Mike Inganamort said Sherrill vowed as a candidate not to raise taxes, and argued this budget does. The spending bill passed the Assembly 58-20 and the Senate 26-14, with a single Republican crossing over in each chamber.

Some of the sharpest criticism was about process. Alongside the main plan, lawmakers approved a separate $358.8 million supplemental bill in the final hours — its largest single piece a low-interest loan of about $105 million to help Jersey City close a large hole in its own budget. Sherrill had campaigned against exactly these kinds of last-minute add-ons, and good-government groups said the closed-door process fell short of the transparency she promised.

The senior program drew complaints too. To keep Stay NJ affordable, the state lowered income limits and trimmed benefits for higher-earning retirees, dropping the program’s cost from about $1.2 billion to roughly $742 million. Chris Widelo of AARP New Jersey said the final plan fell short of what seniors had been counting on, though earlier pushback is credited with softening deeper cuts Sherrill first proposed.

Now the work shifts to delivery. State Treasurer Aaron Binder said the plan keeps New Jersey on disciplined footing while protecting schools and pensions. Residents will start to feel the effects over the coming months as rebate checks, credits and program changes take hold — and as the state watches Washington, where officials warn that federal funding cuts could force harder choices in next year’s budget.

JBizNews Desk | New Jersey
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.


European stocks closed at a record high on Friday, July 3, extending their rally to a fourth consecutive week after weaker-than-expected U.S. employment data reinforced expectations that the Federal Reserve could begin easing monetary policy sooner than previously expected. The pan-European Stoxx 600 rose 0.69% to a fresh record close, capping its strongest weekly performance in about a month as gains broadened well beyond technology shares.

The move followed Thursday’s U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics report showing the American economy added 57,000 jobs in June, well below the 115,000 economists had expected and down sharply from May’s downwardly revised 129,000. The weaker labor market data eased concerns that the Fed would need to keep interest rates higher for longer, lifting investor sentiment across global markets.

Germany’s DAX led Europe’s major indexes, climbing 0.85% to another record high. Italy’s FTSE MIB gained 0.77%, while France’s CAC 40 added 0.48%. London’s FTSE 100 also ended the session higher as investors rotated into economically sensitive sectors.

The shift marked an important change in market leadership. While technology companies have fueled much of this year’s rally, Friday’s gains spread across industrials, financials, banks, and other cyclical sectors, suggesting investors are becoming more confident that lower borrowing costs could support broader economic growth. Utilities also outperformed, rising 1.78%, reflecting continued demand for defensive investments alongside renewed optimism about the economy.

Several developments added to the positive tone. Investors increasingly believe the European Central Bank may delay additional interest-rate increases as inflation continues to moderate across the eurozone. Germany’s governing coalition reached agreement on a package of tax, labor, and pension reforms, while stronger-than-expected Chinese services sector data improved confidence in global growth before European markets opened.

Among individual stocks, French biotechnology company Abivax led the Stoxx 600, rising as much as 7.7% before closing roughly 6.7% higher after raising €767.1 million ($874.1 million) through an expanded share offering to help fund U.S. development of its inflammatory bowel disease treatment, obefazimod. In Frankfurt, Siemens advanced 1.2% after Kepler Cheuvreux upgraded the stock to “hold” from “reduce.” European defense companies also gained as investors anticipated increased military spending following Russia’s latest large-scale strike on Ukraine. Earlier in the week, banking shares outperformed after UniCredit advanced on developments surrounding its bid for Commerzbank, while Deutsche Bank also posted strong gains.

Commodities and Volatility

Gold rose as investors sought traditional safe-haven assets following the weaker U.S. employment report, while the U.S. dollar headed for its largest weekly decline in nearly three months, making dollar-denominated commodities more attractive for overseas buyers. Oil prices were little changed, with Brent crude trading near $71.76 a barrel and West Texas Intermediate around $68.41, as traders continued monitoring the fragile ceasefire between the United States and Iran. U.S. financial markets remained closed for the Independence Day holiday, reducing trading volumes worldwide.

Investors now turn their attention to upcoming European purchasing managers’ surveys and the next round of U.S. economic data for fresh clues on the outlook for interest rates. For now, Europe’s rally appears to be broadening beyond a handful of technology companies into a wider range of industries—a sign that investor confidence is becoming increasingly widespread rather than concentrated in a few market leaders.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Nearly half of Americans cannot say what the country’s 250th anniversary actually celebrates, according to a national survey the Cato Institute released on Thursday, just two days before the Fourth of July. The poll, written by Cato polling director Emily Ekins, found that 46% of adults did not know the milestone marks the adoption of the Declaration of Independence on July 4, 1776. Just over half, 53%, answered correctly.

The survey was designed by the Cato Institute and conducted by Morning Consult, which interviewed 2,253 American adults online on June 25 and 26. The margin of error is approximately two percentage points.

The incorrect answers varied widely. 8% believed the anniversary marks the ratification of the U.S. Constitution, which came years later. 6% thought it commemorates America’s victory in the Revolutionary War, 5% said the nation’s first presidential election, and 3% believed it marks the Pilgrims’ arrival at Plymouth Rock.

The knowledge gap was greatest among younger Americans. Among Gen Z, roughly ages 18 to 26, 61% could not identify what the 250th anniversary commemorates, while only 39% answered correctly.

Ekins said the findings reveal an interesting contradiction. Americans may know relatively little about the nation’s founding, yet they continue to feel deeply connected to it. The survey found 86% are grateful to be Americans and 79% say they are proud to be American. 76% hold a favorable view of the country’s founding, while 70% believe its founding principles remain important today.

That pride, however, is not always matched by civic knowledge. 58% of respondents did not know the primary purpose of the U.S. Constitution is to establish and limit the powers of the federal government, with only 41% answering correctly. 57% could not identify the principal reason the American colonies sought independence from Britain, while 43% correctly cited taxation without representation and the lack of political representation. One historical fact most Americans did know was that George Washington served as the nation’s first president, correctly identified by 77% of respondents.

For the business community, the survey also highlights changing economic attitudes. Americans continue to view capitalism more favorably than socialism, 52% to 37%. Yet younger generations are moving in a different direction. Among Gen Z, 53% view socialism favorably compared with 45% who view capitalism favorably. Nearly as many young adults also expressed favorable views of communism (38%) as capitalism.

Those attitudes are beginning to influence politics. The survey found that the label “Democratic Socialist” makes 39% of Americans more likely to support a candidate and 40% less likely. Among Democrats (61%) and Gen Z (51%), however, the label provides a clear political advantage.

Americans also continue to connect the nation’s prosperity to its founding institutions. 82% said the Constitution played an important role in making the United States a wealthy country. Respondents most frequently credited America’s success to limited government under the Constitution, free markets and capitalism, and a culture of hard work.

At the same time, many expressed concern about the country’s future. 56% fear the United States could cease to be a free nation within the next fifty years, a concern shared by majorities of both Republicans and Democrats. 57% believe America has already drifted from its founding principles. When asked what poses the greatest threat to the republic, respondents pointed to government corruption, politicians ignoring the Constitution, and excessive concentration of political power.

Despite those concerns, Americans continue to support the nation’s constitutional system. 61% prefer power to remain divided among the branches of government even if it slows decision-making. 72% believe presidents should obey Supreme Court rulings even when they disagree with them, and 58% say no political party should hold too much power.

The findings arrive as communities, businesses, nonprofits, museums, and civic organizations prepare for a year of America 250 celebrations expected to generate significant tourism, sponsorship opportunities, and retail spending through 2026.

The survey also underscores why the Historic Morris Katz President Collection legacy of Holocaust survivor Morris Katz carries renewed significance to help educate the next generation.

Having endured the horrors of Nazi tyranny before finding refuge in the United States, Katz understood the value of freedom in a way few Americans ever could. The assassination of President John F. Kennedy profoundly affected him. He viewed it as a personal attack on the nation that had given him liberty, hope, and a new beginning. Inspired to honor America’s democracy, Katz spent the next six years creating The Presidential Collection, an extraordinary series of paintings depicting every President of the United States as a tribute to the office of the presidency, the Constitution, and the enduring ideals of American freedom.

At a time when nearly half of Americans cannot identify what the nation’s 250th anniversary commemorates, Katz’s work serves as more than an artistic achievement. It is a reminder that freedom is never guaranteed. It must be understood, appreciated, protected, and passed from one generation to the next.

As America celebrates its 250th birthday, The Presidential Collection stands not only as a tribute to the nation’s leaders, but also as a powerful educational legacy—one created by a man who experienced life without freedom and dedicated his talent to honoring the country that restored it.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Kuaishou Technology is seeking to raise approximately $2 billion for its rapidly growing Kling AI business, a move that would value one of China’s fastest-growing artificial intelligence platforms as competition intensifies in the global race to build next-generation AI video tools.

People familiar with the fundraising said the company is in discussions with investors about financing that would support the continued expansion of Kling AI, whose text-to-video technology has quickly gained attention among businesses, content creators, advertisers and filmmakers. The fundraising comes as demand for generative AI continues to surge worldwide, with companies investing billions of dollars in new computing infrastructure and advanced AI models.

Launched in 2024, Kling AI allows users to generate highly realistic videos from written prompts or still images. The platform has rapidly become one of China’s leading competitors to AI video systems developed by OpenAI, Google, Runway, Pika, and other global developers racing to commercialize generative video technology.

The proposed financing reflects growing investor confidence that AI-generated video could become one of the fastest-growing segments of the broader artificial intelligence industry. Businesses are increasingly adopting the technology to create marketing campaigns, training materials, product demonstrations, entertainment content and social media videos while reducing production costs and shortening development time.

Kuaishou, one of China’s largest short-video platforms, is leveraging its existing ecosystem of creators and advertisers to accelerate Kling AI’s adoption. By integrating generative AI tools directly into its platform, the company hopes to provide businesses and creators with faster ways to produce high-quality video content while expanding revenue opportunities beyond traditional advertising.

Industry analysts say AI video has become one of the most competitive areas of artificial intelligence, requiring enormous investments in computing power, specialized chips and data centers. Companies developing advanced video-generation models face significant costs for training increasingly sophisticated systems while competing to improve realism, editing controls and production quality.

The reported $2 billion fundraising would provide Kling AI with additional capital to expand research, acquire computing capacity and scale its commercial operations as demand for AI-generated video continues to rise across Asia and international markets.

The fundraising also highlights China’s determination to remain competitive in artificial intelligence despite export restrictions affecting access to some advanced semiconductor technology. Chinese technology companies have accelerated domestic AI development while investing heavily in homegrown models capable of competing with leading Western platforms.

For investors, the financing underscores how AI companies continue attracting substantial capital despite broader economic uncertainty. Since the emergence of generative AI, global investment has increasingly shifted toward companies building foundation models, AI infrastructure and specialized applications capable of serving enterprise customers.

As businesses around the world adopt artificial intelligence at an accelerating pace, AI-generated video is expected to become an increasingly important tool across marketing, education, entertainment, e-commerce and corporate communications. The competition among developers is likely to intensify as companies race to improve quality, lower costs and expand commercial adoption.

If completed, the financing would rank among the largest recent investments in a standalone AI video platform, further demonstrating that investors continue to view generative artificial intelligence as one of the technology sector’s most significant long-term growth opportunities.

JBizNews Desk | Hong Kong

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Meta Platforms surprised investors on Thursday by announcing plans to begin leasing excess artificial-intelligence computing capacity to outside businesses, a move that immediately rattled semiconductor stocks around the world and raised new questions about the future pace of AI infrastructure spending. The announcement helped trigger a sharp selloff in chipmakers from Wall Street to Asia, as investors reassessed whether the largest technology companies may eventually need to purchase fewer high-end AI processors than previously expected.

The new business would allow Meta to rent unused graphics processing unit (GPU) capacity and other AI infrastructure to outside companies, effectively transforming a portion of the massive computing network it has built for its own artificial-intelligence operations into a commercial cloud service. The strategy would place Meta into more direct competition with established cloud providers, including Amazon Web Services, Microsoft Azure, and Google Cloud, while creating a new revenue stream from billions of dollars in AI infrastructure already deployed.

The market reaction was swift.

Shares of several semiconductor companies fell sharply following the announcement as investors questioned whether demand for AI chips could eventually slow if major technology companies begin sharing excess computing capacity instead of continually purchasing additional hardware. Memory-chip makers Micron Technology and SanDisk each fell roughly 10%, while the selling quickly spread to overseas markets.

The impact was particularly severe in South Korea, where the benchmark Kospi index plunged 7.89%. Semiconductor giants SK Hynix dropped 14.57%, while Samsung Electronics lost 9.06%, helping drive one of the country’s steepest stock market declines in years. Japan also joined the selloff, with technology shares falling sharply as investors reduced exposure to semiconductor companies across the region.

The announcement comes as technology companies continue investing hundreds of billions of dollars to build artificial-intelligence data centers capable of supporting increasingly sophisticated AI models. Since the launch of generative AI, demand for advanced processors—particularly graphics chips used to train and operate large language models—has fueled one of the strongest investment cycles the semiconductor industry has ever experienced.

Meta has been among the largest contributors to that spending boom, investing aggressively in AI servers, networking equipment and next-generation computing infrastructure to support products including Meta AI, recommendation algorithms and future AI-powered services across Facebook, Instagram and WhatsApp.

By commercializing excess capacity, Meta could improve returns on those investments while offering businesses access to advanced AI computing without requiring them to build expensive infrastructure themselves.

Industry analysts said the announcement does not necessarily signal a collapse in demand for AI chips. Instead, it reflects the next stage of the AI economy, where companies seek to generate revenue from the enormous computing resources they have already built. As artificial intelligence adoption expands across corporate America, demand for rented computing power may grow just as rapidly as demand for physical chips.

Even so, investors remain sensitive to any indication that the unprecedented pace of AI infrastructure spending could begin to moderate. Semiconductor manufacturers have enjoyed record profits as cloud providers raced to acquire advanced processors, particularly high-performance chips used for AI model training.

The broader business implications extend beyond the chip industry. If successful, Meta’s cloud-leasing strategy could create a new competitor in enterprise AI infrastructure while giving startups, developers and corporations another option for accessing powerful computing resources. Greater competition could eventually reduce AI computing costs and accelerate adoption across industries ranging from healthcare and finance to manufacturing and education.

For now, however, Thursday’s announcement served as a reminder that even the strongest technology sectors remain vulnerable to shifts in investor expectations. The AI revolution continues to expand rapidly, but Wall Street is increasingly focused not only on how much companies spend, but also on how efficiently they monetize those investments.

Whether Meta’s move becomes a new industry trend or simply another business line for the social media giant remains to be seen. What is already clear is that a single strategic announcement was enough to send shockwaves through global semiconductor markets.

JBizNews Desk | Menlo Park, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

NEW YORK — As Americans gather this Fourth of July to celebrate nearly 250 years of independence, fireworks will illuminate the skies, flags will line neighborhoods, and families will honor the freedoms that define the nation.

For Morris Katz, those freedoms were never simply part of an annual celebration.

They were the reason he had a second chance at life.

A Holocaust survivor who immigrated to the United States in 1949, Katz viewed America as the country that restored everything tyranny had tried to destroy—freedom, opportunity, dignity, and hope. Those ideals became the foundation of an extraordinary career that blended artistic innovation, entrepreneurship, education, and patriotism into a legacy that continues to inspire decades later.

One of his most celebrated works was a portrait of President John F. Kennedy, which was displayed in more than 100 museums across the United States. Katz believed art had the power to unite Americans during moments of triumph and tragedy alike.

Then came November 22, 1963.

As television and radio broadcasts announced that President Kennedy had been assassinated, Katz made a decision that would occupy the next six years of his life.

Having survived the Holocaust and witnessed the devastating consequences of hatred and dictatorship, he saw Kennedy’s assassination as more than the loss of a president. To him, it represented a personal attack on the democratic ideals and freedoms that had given him refuge in America.

Rather than respond with despair, he responded with purpose.

Within minutes of hearing the news, Katz committed himself to creating a lasting tribute to the presidency and to the nation he loved. Over the next six years, he meticulously painted every President of the United States in the traditional Old Master style, devoting approximately 200 hours to each portrait. The result became The Presidential Collection, spanning from George Washington through George H.W. Bush—a tribute not only to America’s presidents, but also to the principles of liberty, democracy, leadership, and public service that define the nation.  

For Katz, the Collection was never intended to be simply an art exhibit.

It was a message.

He believed future generations should understand the blessings of freedom, appreciate the sacrifices made by those who built and defended the nation, and recognize that the presidency represents an institution larger than politics. His hope was that Americans, regardless of party or background, could find common ground through a shared appreciation of the country’s history and democratic ideals.

That vision remains especially relevant as the nation approaches its 250th anniversary.

A stronger closing that ties directly to today’s civic values would be:

Long before creating The Presidential Collection, Morris Katz had already earned international recognition as one of the world’s most sought-after artists. A two-time Guinness World Record holder who surpassed Pablo Picasso as the world’s most prolific artist and was recognized as the world’s quickest painter, Katz was also selected from more than 500 artists to create the official portrait commemorating Pope Paul VI’s historic visit to the United States, with millions of reproductions distributed worldwide. According to a feature in Newsmax Magazine, his privately held Presidential Collection is valued at more than $250 million, yet Katz never offered it for sale. When he was offered $50,000 for his original portrait of President John F. Kennedy shortly after completing it—a remarkable sum at the time—he declined, saying simply, “It represents my freedom.” That conviction inspired the Holocaust survivor to devote the next six years to creating The Presidential Collection as his lasting gift to America. At a time when the values of freedom, patriotism, civic responsibility, and respect for our nation’s history are more important than ever, his message continues to inspire new generations to appreciate the extraordinary blessings of the United States and the leaders who helped shape it.

Recognizing the Collection’s educational value, the New Jersey Commission on Holocaust Education, working with the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce, made The Presidential Collection available as a statewide educational resource, distributing materials to chief school administrators, charter schools, Renaissance School Project leaders, principals, teachers, and guidance counselors to support instruction in American history, patriotism, Holocaust education, leadership, and civic responsibility.   The initiative encourages educators to use the Collection as a gateway for classroom discussions about democracy, national unity, civic responsibility, and the values that continue to shape the United States.  

The Collection’s educational message has since reached thousands of schools, helping students connect the lessons of history with the responsibilities of citizenship.

Its influence also extended far beyond classrooms.

Millions of Presidential Collection postcards featuring Katz’s artwork were distributed throughout the United States and internationally, becoming treasured keepsakes and highly sought-after collectibles. Today, many remain in private collections, preserving a unique artistic record of the American presidency for historians, educators, and collectors alike.

The legacy continues through the Morris Katz Foundation, whose Morris Katz Legacy Award recognizes leaders whose service reflects the principles Katz devoted his life to preserving. Honorees include U.S. Ambassador to Israel Mike Huckabee, Israeli President Isaac Herzog, Congressman Josh Gottheimer for introducing the HEAL Act to strengthen Holocaust education, and Congressman Chris Smith, whose decades of leadership included authoring legislation establishing the U.S. Ambassador-at-Large to Monitor and Combat Anti-Semitism while advancing human rights and religious freedom.

For the business community, Katz’s life also illustrates how enduring enterprises are built.

He transformed personal gratitude into intellectual property, educational programming, collectibles, exhibitions, and a globally recognized brand whose impact continues long after his lifetime. His story demonstrates that the strongest businesses are often driven not only by innovation, but by purpose.

As Americans celebrate another Independence Day, Morris Katz’s greatest masterpiece may not be the paintings themselves.

It may be the timeless message behind them—that freedom is never guaranteed, democracy depends on each generation to protect it, and gratitude for the opportunities America provides can inspire a legacy that endures for generations.

To view The Presidential Collection, visit www.MorrisKatz.org.

For information regarding exhibitions, educational programs, or licensing opportunities, contact Art@MorrisKatz.org.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com | All Rights Reserved

Britain’s competition regulator has opened an initial review of the proposed combination involving Paramount Global and Warner Bros. Discovery, launching another regulatory hurdle for a deal that could reshape the global media and streaming industry.

The U.K. Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) said it is assessing whether the transaction could substantially reduce competition in the United Kingdom across television broadcasting, streaming services, film distribution and advertising markets. The review marks the first phase of Britain’s merger process and will determine whether the proposal requires a more extensive investigation.

The proposed combination would unite some of the world’s best-known entertainment brands under one corporate umbrella. Together, the companies control major television networks, film studios, sports rights and streaming platforms, including CBS, Paramount Pictures, Showtime, HBO, CNN, Warner Bros. Pictures, Discovery, Max, and numerous international television channels.

Regulators are expected to focus on whether the combined company could gain excessive bargaining power when negotiating with cable operators, streaming distributors and advertisers, while also examining how the merger could affect consumers through pricing, programming choices and future competition in streaming.

The review comes as traditional media companies continue searching for greater scale to compete against technology giants including Netflix, Amazon Prime Video, Disney+, Apple TV+, and YouTube, all of which continue investing billions of dollars annually in original programming and global distribution.

Industry analysts say consolidation has become increasingly attractive as media companies struggle with declining cable television subscriptions and rising costs associated with producing premium content. Combining operations could allow companies to reduce expenses, eliminate overlapping businesses and strengthen negotiating leverage with advertisers and distributors.

The CMA said it is inviting comments from interested parties before determining whether the transaction raises sufficient competition concerns to warrant a more detailed Phase 2 investigation. Such reviews can examine market concentration, consumer impact, licensing arrangements and the potential effects on future innovation.

The United Kingdom is not the only jurisdiction reviewing major media consolidation. Large cross-border transactions typically require approval from regulators in multiple countries, including the United States and the European Union, before they can proceed.

Investors are closely watching the regulatory process because approval timelines often influence both financing and integration plans. While some large media mergers have ultimately received approval after agreeing to certain conditions, others have faced lengthy investigations or required companies to divest assets to address competition concerns.

For businesses across the entertainment industry, the outcome could influence future licensing negotiations, advertising markets and streaming competition. Content producers, television distributors and technology companies will also be watching closely, as further consolidation among legacy media companies could reshape the competitive landscape for years to come.

The CMA has not yet indicated when it expects to complete its initial review or whether the proposed transaction will advance to a more comprehensive investigation.

JBizNews Desk | London

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Freddie Mac reported Thursday, July 2, that the average rate on a 30-year fixed mortgage eased to 6.43%, its lowest level in seven weeks, down from 6.49% a week earlier. The dip, published in the company’s weekly Primary Mortgage Market Survey, offers a modest bit of relief to homebuyers heading into the heart of the summer buying season, though it lands against a murky outlook for where rates go next.

Sam Khater, Freddie Mac’s chief economist, said the decline coincides with purchase demand that has continued to edge higher, calling it an encouraging sign as prospective buyers respond to small improvements in affordability. The 15-year fixed mortgage also slipped, averaging 5.79%, down from 5.84% the prior week. A year ago, the 30-year rate averaged 6.67% and the 15-year stood at 5.80%, meaning today’s 30-year loan is cheaper than it was last summer while the 15-year is roughly flat.

It helps to understand what the number is. The Freddie Mac survey is a weekly average, built from thousands of loan applications submitted Monday through Wednesday and released each Thursday. Because it smooths results over several days, it can lag the sharper swings seen in daily rate trackers. On the same day the survey showed a seven-week low, some daily lender data pointed the other way, with Zillow-sourced figures putting the typical 30-year purchase rate closer to 6.66%, up slightly from the day before. The takeaway is that rates have been hovering in a narrow band around the mid-6% range, and the weekly average happened to catch the softer end of it.

The bigger question is direction, and here the signals conflict. The drop follows a weak June jobs report released Thursday by the Bureau of Labor Statistics, which showed the economy added just 57,000 jobs, well below the roughly 113,000 expected, with the unemployment rate easing to 4.2%. Softer hiring can pull bond yields and mortgage rates lower, and it revived some hope that the Federal Reserve might hold steady or eventually cut. But the Fed has been signaling the opposite. At its June meeting, policymakers struck a hawkish tone, with a majority indicating a rate increase may still be needed later this year to fight inflation that remains well above the central bank’s 2% target, running near 4.2% in the most recent reading. Fed Chair Kevin Warsh has urged markets to watch the incoming data rather than lean on the central bank for guidance.

For the housing market, even small moves in rates matter. Every quarter-point shift changes a buyer’s monthly payment and, at the margin, decides whether some households can qualify at all. After a long stretch of thin inventory and stretched affordability, homebuilders and real-estate brokerages have been counting on steadier borrowing costs to bring hesitant buyers off the sidelines. Lower rates also tend to lift refinancing, giving existing homeowners a chance to trim payments, and can free up household cash for spending elsewhere in the economy, from furniture and appliances to home improvement.

The affordability picture remains tight even with the dip. Home prices in much of the country are still near record highs, and a rate in the mid-6% range keeps monthly costs far above where they sat during the ultra-low-rate years earlier this decade. That combination has kept many would-be sellers in place, unwilling to trade a cheap existing mortgage for a costlier new one, which in turn has limited the supply of homes for sale.

For now, buyers get a small opening. Whether it widens depends on the tug-of-war between a cooling labor market, which argues for lower rates, and stubborn inflation and a cautious Fed, which argue for higher ones. With the survey collected before the holiday weekend and the next reading due in a week, borrowers weighing a purchase or refinance face the same advice housing economists have offered all year: shop multiple lenders, since quotes can vary enough to save thousands over the life of a loan.

JBizNews Desk | McLean, Virginia

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Amazon is accelerating the global rollout of its Project Kuiper satellite internet network, expanding its challenge to SpaceX’s Starlink as the battle to provide high-speed broadband from space enters a new phase. The company said it is preparing additional satellite launches and expanding ground infrastructure as it works toward building a constellation capable of serving consumers, businesses and governments worldwide.

Project Kuiper is Amazon’s multibillion-dollar effort to deploy more than 3,200 low-Earth orbit satellites, creating a global broadband network designed to bring high-speed internet to underserved and remote communities. The initiative represents one of Amazon’s largest long-term infrastructure investments outside its core retail and cloud-computing businesses.

The company has already begun launching operational satellites and says customer service will expand as more spacecraft are placed into orbit. Amazon plans to use multiple launch providers—including United Launch Alliance (ULA), Blue Origin, Arianespace, and SpaceX—to rapidly build out the constellation over the coming years.

The race is being driven by surging global demand for reliable broadband connectivity. Low-Earth orbit satellite systems offer significantly lower latency than traditional satellite internet, making them attractive not only for rural households but also for airlines, shipping companies, emergency responders, energy producers and governments seeking resilient communications infrastructure.

Amazon is entering a market currently dominated by SpaceX’s Starlink, which has already deployed thousands of satellites and serves customers across dozens of countries. Starlink has become an increasingly important communications platform for businesses, consumers and government agencies, particularly in areas where traditional fiber or wireless networks remain unavailable.

Amazon believes its extensive cloud infrastructure through Amazon Web Services (AWS) provides a competitive advantage. Company executives have said Kuiper customers will benefit from direct integration with AWS, allowing businesses to combine satellite connectivity with cloud computing, artificial intelligence, data storage and enterprise applications.

Industry analysts estimate the global satellite broadband market could generate tens of billions of dollars annually over the next decade as demand for always-on connectivity continues to grow. Competition is also expected to intensify as governments increasingly view satellite communications as critical infrastructure for economic development and national security.

Building a global satellite network, however, requires enormous capital investment. Beyond manufacturing thousands of satellites, operators must finance repeated rocket launches, construct worldwide ground stations and continually replace satellites as they reach the end of their operational lives.

Amazon has committed billions of dollars to Project Kuiper, viewing the initiative as a long-term growth opportunity that complements its broader technology ecosystem. The company has also introduced customer terminals designed to provide affordable internet access for homes, businesses and public institutions.

For investors, Project Kuiper represents another example of Amazon using its financial scale to enter a market with substantial long-term potential, even if profitability remains years away. While the division is unlikely to materially affect near-term earnings, analysts believe satellite broadband could eventually become another major business alongside Amazon’s retail, logistics, advertising and cloud operations.

As launches continue and customer deployments expand, the competition between Project Kuiper and Starlink is expected to reshape the global broadband market, bringing faster internet access to millions of people while opening new opportunities for enterprise communications around the world.

JBizNews Desk | Seattle

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. Department of Agriculture is launching a major effort to boost domestic fertilizer production, announcing $500 million in new funding to help build and expand fertilizer manufacturing plants across the United States.

Agriculture Secretary Brooke Rollins unveiled the initiative Wednesday, saying the program is designed to strengthen America’s fertilizer supply chain, reduce dependence on foreign suppliers, and help lower one of farmers’ biggest operating expenses.

The new initiative, known as the Fertilizer Investment and Expansion for Long-Term Domestic Supply (FIELDS) program, will provide grants ranging from $15 million to $150 million for projects that expand U.S. fertilizer production capacity. Companies receiving awards must provide matching funds, with financing coming through the Commodity Credit Corporation. Applications will remain open for 45 days.

The announcement comes after years of volatility in fertilizer prices.

Global fertilizer costs surged following Russia’s invasion of Ukraine and climbed again during recent Middle East conflicts that disrupted energy markets and international shipping. Since fertilizer production depends heavily on natural gas and other energy inputs, higher fuel prices quickly translate into higher costs for farmers.

Those higher costs eventually reach consumers.

Fertilizer is one of the largest expenses involved in producing corn, wheat, soybeans, fruits, and vegetables. It also affects livestock producers because grain is a major component of animal feed. When fertilizer becomes more expensive, food production costs rise throughout the agricultural supply chain, ultimately contributing to higher grocery prices.

Rollins said the new program is intended to accelerate construction of facilities that can produce fertilizer domestically rather than relying on imported supplies.

She contrasted the new initiative with a previous USDA fertilizer program, saying earlier efforts funded numerous projects but resulted in relatively few completed facilities. The new program, she said, will place greater emphasis on projects that are financially sound, construction-ready, and capable of bringing additional production online quickly.

Federal officials say applications will be evaluated based on project readiness, financing, market demand, execution capability, and measurable benefits for American agriculture.

The initiative also reflects a broader shift in U.S. industrial policy.

In recent years, Washington has increasingly treated products such as semiconductors, pharmaceuticals, critical minerals, and agricultural inputs as strategic industries that deserve domestic investment. Policymakers argue that relying too heavily on foreign suppliers leaves the country vulnerable during wars, trade disputes, and other global disruptions.

Alongside the fertilizer announcement, the Environmental Protection Agency introduced a separate challenge program offering up to $30 million in prize funding to encourage development of alternatives to traditional chemical crop desiccation methods used before harvest.

For farmers, however, the immediate focus remains fertilizer affordability.

Building new production facilities will take time, and the matching-fund requirement means private companies must commit substantial capital alongside the federal investment. Even under an accelerated timetable, new plants are unlikely to begin producing fertilizer overnight.

Still, agricultural organizations welcomed the announcement as a step toward improving long-term supply security and increasing competition within the domestic fertilizer market.

For consumers, the program represents an investment aimed at stabilizing food production costs over the coming years. While it will not immediately lower grocery prices, increasing domestic fertilizer production could reduce future price spikes caused by overseas conflicts or supply disruptions.

The success of the initiative will ultimately depend on how quickly projects move from applications to construction and eventually into commercial production. If successful, the program could help strengthen one of the most important links in America’s food supply chain while reducing dependence on imported fertilizer for years to come.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The body of Iran’s slain Supreme Leader Ayatollah Ali Khamenei was laid in state at Tehran’s Grand Mosalla Mosque on Friday, July 3, opening six days of ceremonies that Iranian officials are portraying as a demonstration of national resolve following the recent war with the United States and Israel. Parliament Speaker Mohammad Bagher Ghalibaf described the funeral as a renewal of the nation’s commitment to the ideals of the 1979 Islamic Revolution, calling on supporters to continue what he described as Iran’s path of resistance.

Iranian authorities said Khamenei, 86, was killed alongside several members of his family during a joint U.S.-Israeli strike on his compound on February 28, the opening day of the conflict.

State television broadcast images from inside the mosque showing five flag-draped caskets arranged before mourners. Iranian officials said one of the smaller coffins held Khamenei’s one-year-old granddaughter, who they say also died in the strike. Authorities estimate that as many as 20 million people could attend the funeral processions beginning Saturday, potentially exceeding the estimated 10 million who gathered for the 1989 funeral of Ayatollah Ruhollah Khomeini, the founder of the Islamic Republic.

Several foreign delegations arrived in Tehran to pay their respects, including Dmitry Medvedev, deputy chairman of Russia’s Security Council, and He Wei, vice chairman of China’s National People’s Congress. Officials from Pakistan, Iraq, India, Turkey and several other countries also attended, underscoring Iran’s continued diplomatic relationships despite months of conflict and international pressure.

Questions remain over the public role of Mojtaba Khamenei, the late supreme leader’s son and designated successor. Iranian officials have said he was injured in the February strike and has not appeared publicly since, communicating only through occasional written statements. His absence has fueled speculation among diplomats and investors over how Iran’s next leadership chapter will unfold.

The funeral comes as Washington has begun easing some economic restrictions on Iran following a diplomatic framework reached last month. Under the Islamabad Memorandum of Understanding, signed June 17 by President Donald Trump and Iranian President Masoud Pezeshkian, the United States agreed to temporarily ease sanctions on Iranian oil exports, release certain frozen Iranian assets as negotiations continue, support reconstruction planning, and reopen commercial navigation through the Strait of Hormuz.

On June 22, the U.S. Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) issued a temporary license allowing Iranian crude exports through August 21, 2026, while negotiations continue.

The agreement leaves several of the most contentious issues unresolved, including Iran’s stockpile of enriched uranium, its ballistic missile program, and support for regional proxy groups. On July 1, Ghalibaf reiterated that international inspectors would not be permitted to enter bomb-damaged nuclear facilities.

Some analysts believe the conflict has reinforced the Iranian leadership’s belief that its confrontational strategy succeeded. Narges Bajoghli, an associate professor at the Johns Hopkins School of Advanced International Studies, said the government’s survival following months of military confrontation has strengthened support among some Iranians for its long-standing policy of resistance.

For global markets, the greatest concern remains the Strait of Hormuz, through which roughly 20% of the world’s oil supply passes.

Iranian officials have indicated they are considering imposing transit fees on commercial shipping beginning in mid-August. U.S. Middle East envoy Steve Witkoff has urged Tehran to abandon the proposal during indirect negotiations mediated by Qatar and Pakistan. Meanwhile, Iran’s Khatam al-Anbiya military command warned this week that vessels failing to follow approved transit routes could face military action.

Oil markets have remained relatively calm despite the uncertainty. On Friday, Brent crude traded near $71.76 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate hovered around $68.41, reflecting investor expectations that the ceasefire will continue to hold.

Even so, higher energy costs continue to affect consumers, with U.S. gasoline prices remaining significantly above year-ago levels following months of disruption across Middle Eastern shipping routes.

Speaking Thursday, U.S. Ambassador to the United Nations Michael Waltz warned that President Trump’s patience “is not unlimited,” accusing Tehran of threatening global commerce through repeated disruptions in the Strait of Hormuz.

Formal negotiations are expected to pause during the funeral period before resuming later this month. Iran has announced that Khamenei’s body will travel to Qom, followed by Najaf and Karbala in Iraq, before his burial in Mashhad on July 9.

As diplomatic talks resume and the deadline for Iran’s proposed Hormuz transit policy approaches, governments and financial markets alike will be watching whether the ceasefire evolves into a lasting agreement—or another period of renewed confrontation.

JBizNews Desk | Tehran

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The body of Iran’s slain Supreme Leader Ayatollah Ali Khamenei was laid in state at Tehran’s Grand Mosalla Mosque on Friday, July 3, opening six days of ceremonies that Iranian officials are portraying as a demonstration of national resolve following the recent war with the United States and Israel. Parliament Speaker Mohammad Bagher Ghalibaf described the funeral as a renewal of the nation’s commitment to the ideals of the 1979 Islamic Revolution, calling on supporters to continue what he described as Iran’s path of resistance.

Iranian authorities said Khamenei, 86, was killed alongside several members of his family during a joint U.S.-Israeli strike on his compound on February 28, the opening day of the conflict.

State television broadcast images from inside the mosque showing five flag-draped caskets arranged before mourners. Iranian officials said one of the smaller coffins held Khamenei’s one-year-old granddaughter, who they say also died in the strike. Authorities estimate that as many as 20 million people could attend the funeral processions beginning Saturday, potentially exceeding the estimated 10 million who gathered for the 1989 funeral of Ayatollah Ruhollah Khomeini, the founder of the Islamic Republic.

Several foreign delegations arrived in Tehran to pay their respects, including Dmitry Medvedev, deputy chairman of Russia’s Security Council, and He Wei, vice chairman of China’s National People’s Congress. Officials from Pakistan, Iraq, India, Turkey and several other countries also attended, underscoring Iran’s continued diplomatic relationships despite months of conflict and international pressure.

Questions remain over the public role of Mojtaba Khamenei, the late supreme leader’s son and designated successor. Iranian officials have said he was injured in the February strike and has not appeared publicly since, communicating only through occasional written statements. His absence has fueled speculation among diplomats and investors over how Iran’s next leadership chapter will unfold.

The funeral comes as Washington has begun easing some economic restrictions on Iran following a diplomatic framework reached last month. Under the Islamabad Memorandum of Understanding, signed June 17 by President Donald Trump and Iranian President Masoud Pezeshkian, the United States agreed to temporarily ease sanctions on Iranian oil exports, release certain frozen Iranian assets as negotiations continue, support reconstruction planning, and reopen commercial navigation through the Strait of Hormuz.

On June 22, the U.S. Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) issued a temporary license allowing Iranian crude exports through August 21, 2026, while negotiations continue.

The agreement leaves several of the most contentious issues unresolved, including Iran’s stockpile of enriched uranium, its ballistic missile program, and support for regional proxy groups. On July 1, Ghalibaf reiterated that international inspectors would not be permitted to enter bomb-damaged nuclear facilities.

Some analysts believe the conflict has reinforced the Iranian leadership’s belief that its confrontational strategy succeeded. Narges Bajoghli, an associate professor at the Johns Hopkins School of Advanced International Studies, said the government’s survival following months of military confrontation has strengthened support among some Iranians for its long-standing policy of resistance.

For global markets, the greatest concern remains the Strait of Hormuz, through which roughly 20% of the world’s oil supply passes.

Iranian officials have indicated they are considering imposing transit fees on commercial shipping beginning in mid-August. U.S. Middle East envoy Steve Witkoff has urged Tehran to abandon the proposal during indirect negotiations mediated by Qatar and Pakistan. Meanwhile, Iran’s Khatam al-Anbiya military command warned this week that vessels failing to follow approved transit routes could face military action.

Oil markets have remained relatively calm despite the uncertainty. On Friday, Brent crude traded near $71.76 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate hovered around $68.41, reflecting investor expectations that the ceasefire will continue to hold.

Even so, higher energy costs continue to affect consumers, with U.S. gasoline prices remaining significantly above year-ago levels following months of disruption across Middle Eastern shipping routes.

Speaking Thursday, U.S. Ambassador to the United Nations Michael Waltz warned that President Trump’s patience “is not unlimited,” accusing Tehran of threatening global commerce through repeated disruptions in the Strait of Hormuz.

Formal negotiations are expected to pause during the funeral period before resuming later this month. Iran has announced that Khamenei’s body will travel to Qom, followed by Najaf and Karbala in Iraq, before his burial in Mashhad on July 9.

As diplomatic talks resume and the deadline for Iran’s proposed Hormuz transit policy approaches, governments and financial markets alike will be watching whether the ceasefire evolves into a lasting agreement—or another period of renewed confrontation.

JBizNews Desk | Tehran

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.


Rivian Automotive reported Thursday from its headquarters in Irvine, California, that it delivered 12,194 electric vehicles during the second quarter while producing 12,613 vehicles at its manufacturing plant in Normal, Illinois, outperforming both its own guidance and Wall Street expectations. The stronger-than-expected performance prompted the company to raise its full-year 2026 delivery outlook, sending Rivian shares up as much as 13% in Thursday trading and giving investors fresh optimism that the electric vehicle maker may finally be gaining momentum after a prolonged period of slowing demand and heavy losses.

The company said second-quarter deliveries exceeded its previously issued guidance of 9,000 to 11,000 vehicles, while also surpassing analyst estimates that generally ranged between 10,500 and 11,000 vehicles. Encouraged by the stronger quarter and its production schedule for the remainder of the year, Rivian increased its expected 2026 deliveries to between 65,000 and 70,000 vehicles, compared with its earlier forecast of 62,000 to 67,000. The revised guidance raises the midpoint of Rivian’s annual outlook by roughly 3,500 vehicles, representing an increase of approximately 5.5%.

The results mark an important milestone for Rivian, whose stock has struggled over the past year as investors questioned whether demand for premium-priced electric vehicles could remain strong in an environment of higher interest rates, increased competition and slowing consumer spending. Prior to Thursday’s rally, Rivian shares had fallen nearly 13% over recent months as concerns mounted over the pace of EV adoption across the broader industry.

Company executives attributed the improved performance to steady demand across several product lines, including Rivian’s R1T electric pickup, R1S sport utility vehicle, and its Electric Delivery Van, originally developed for Amazon, one of Rivian’s largest investors and commercial customers. The company also began customer deliveries of its long-awaited R2 SUV during June, a launch viewed by analysts as one of the most important milestones in Rivian’s history.

The R2 is expected to play a central role in Rivian’s long-term growth strategy. With an introductory starting price of $57,990, the new model is designed to appeal to a broader range of consumers than the company’s larger and more expensive R1 lineup. Lower-priced versions are expected to follow in the coming years, potentially allowing Rivian to compete more directly with mass-market electric vehicles while expanding its customer base beyond early adopters and luxury buyers.

Chief Financial Officer Claire McDonough has previously indicated the company expects to deliver between 20,000 and 25,000 R2 vehicles during the year. Production began at Rivian’s Illinois manufacturing facility in April, with customer deliveries commencing in June. To reach the midpoint of its newly increased annual guidance, Rivian would need to deliver roughly 45,000 additional vehicles during the second half of the year.

Beyond vehicle sales, Rivian is also positioning itself for future growth through autonomous driving technology. The company recently announced that Uber plans to invest up to $1.25 billion as part of a partnership to deploy robotaxis based on Rivian’s R2 platform. Initial deployment is expected to begin in 2028, with plans eventually calling for between 10,000 and 50,000 autonomous vehicles over the following years. The agreement gives Rivian another potential revenue stream beyond traditional vehicle manufacturing as the race to commercialize autonomous transportation accelerates.

The announcement came during a busy day for the electric vehicle industry. Tesla reported quarterly deliveries of 480,126 vehicles, beating expectations even as investors sent its shares lower on concerns over profitability. At the same time, Lucid Group reported weaker-than-expected results and announced a leadership restructuring under new Chief Executive Officer Silvio Napoli, underscoring the widening gap between companies gaining momentum and those still struggling to establish sustainable growth.

For Rivian, Thursday’s report represents one of its strongest operational updates in recent quarters and suggests management’s production plans are beginning to translate into improved sales performance. Still, investors remain focused on whether the company can narrow losses, improve margins and generate positive cash flow as it scales production.

Those questions may begin to receive answers when Rivian reports its full second-quarter financial results on July 30, when investors will receive updated information on profitability, operating expenses, cash reserves and the company’s progress toward becoming a financially sustainable automaker.

While challenges remain across the electric vehicle industry, Rivian’s stronger deliveries, higher guidance and successful launch of the R2 provide the clearest indication yet that the company may be entering a more stable phase of growth.

JBizNews Desk | Irvine, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. Treasury Department and Goldman Sachs Asset Management announced Thursday that Goldman will become one of the first major financial firms to participate in the new Trump Accounts savings program, offering professionally managed investment portfolios designed for children. The partnership expands a centerpiece of the Administration’s effort to encourage long-term investing by giving young Americans an opportunity to begin building wealth early in life.

The Trump Accounts program was created under recently enacted federal legislation and provides eligible newborns with a government-funded investment account intended to grow over decades through the financial markets. Families can make additional voluntary contributions, while participating financial institutions manage the investments under federal guidelines.

Goldman Sachs Asset Management said it will offer several low-cost diversified investment options through the program, allowing parents to select portfolios designed to match different levels of investment risk and long-term growth objectives. Company officials said the funds will emphasize broad market diversification and long-term investing rather than short-term trading.

Treasury officials said expanding participation by major investment firms is critical to giving families access to a competitive range of investment products while keeping management fees low. Goldman joins a growing list of financial institutions expected to participate as the program rolls out nationally.

Supporters say the initiative could significantly improve long-term financial security by allowing investment returns to compound over nearly two decades before beneficiaries reach adulthood. Financial planners have long argued that beginning to invest early—even with relatively modest amounts—can dramatically increase lifetime savings because of compound growth.

Under the program, accounts remain in the child’s name and are professionally managed until the beneficiary reaches the age specified under federal law. Withdrawals are generally restricted to approved purposes, including higher education, purchasing a first home, starting a business, or other qualifying long-term financial goals.

Administration officials have described the program as an effort to encourage broader participation in capital markets while helping families build assets across generations. Treasury officials said they expect additional banks and investment companies to announce participation in the coming months.

For Goldman Sachs, the partnership represents another expansion of its wealth management and consumer investment business. While the firm has traditionally focused on institutional investors and high-net-worth clients, recent years have seen Goldman broaden its offerings to reach a wider range of individual investors through digital investment platforms and retirement products.

Business groups welcomed the announcement, saying greater access to professionally managed investment accounts may improve financial literacy while encouraging long-term saving habits among younger generations.

The program’s success will ultimately depend on participation by families, market performance over time, and the number of financial institutions offering competitive investment options. If widely adopted, the accounts could channel billions of dollars into long-term investments while giving millions of children an early start toward building financial assets.

As implementation continues, investors and financial institutions alike will be watching how quickly families enroll and whether additional asset managers join what could become one of the country’s largest long-term savings initiatives.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The United States will not renew the United States-Mexico-Canada Agreement (USMCA) in its current form, setting in motion a series of annual reviews that could reshape North America’s trading relationship over the next decade. The announcement, made Wednesday by U.S. Trade Representative Jamieson Greer, follows the treaty’s first mandatory joint review by the three member nations and opens the door to renegotiating key provisions of one of the world’s largest free trade agreements.

Although the decision does not terminate the agreement, it begins a process under the treaty’s sunset clause that requires the United States, Canada and Mexico to meet every year to determine whether the pact should continue unchanged. Unless all three countries eventually agree to renew it, the agreement would expire in 2036.

The USMCA, which replaced the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) in 2020, governs approximately $2 trillion in annual trade and serves as the foundation for deeply integrated supply chains spanning the three countries. The agreement covers everything from automobiles and agriculture to manufacturing, energy, digital trade and intellectual property.

In a statement issued following Wednesday’s virtual review, Ambassador Jamieson Greer said the United States would continue working with both Mexico and Canada to address what Washington considers shortcomings in the agreement, particularly persistent U.S. trade deficits with its two largest trading partners. Greer emphasized that while the agreement remains fully in force, the Administration believes significant improvements are needed before committing to another sixteen-year extension.

A senior administration official said President Donald Trump chose not to grant an automatic renewal, arguing that existing trade imbalances and unresolved market-access issues should first be addressed through additional negotiations.

The review process was built directly into the USMCA during negotiations in 2019. Under the agreement’s sunset clause, the three governments were required to conduct their first formal review after six years. If all parties agreed, the treaty could have been extended another sixteen years, through 2042. Instead, the United States chose to move into the annual-review process.

Importantly for businesses, there are no immediate changes to tariffs, customs procedures or existing trade rules. Goods qualifying under USMCA continue moving across North American borders under the same provisions that existed before Wednesday’s announcement.

Officials in both neighboring countries sought to reassure businesses that cross-border commerce would continue uninterrupted.

Mexican Economy Minister Marcelo Ebrard said Ambassador Greer informed both Mexico and Canada that Washington was not prepared to grant the automatic extension. Instead, the three governments will continue meeting annually while pursuing additional negotiations. Ebrard stressed that companies should expect no immediate operational changes and said the vast majority of trade between Mexico and the United States would continue under existing USMCA rules.

Canadian Trade Minister Dominic LeBlanc likewise said Canada remains committed to strengthening the agreement while urging Washington to address U.S. tariffs affecting Canadian steel, aluminum, automobiles and lumber, issues that continue to generate friction between the longtime trading partners.

The industries with the most at stake are automotive manufacturing and industrial production.

For decades, automakers have built highly integrated North American supply chains that allow engines, transmissions, electronics and thousands of other components to cross U.S., Canadian and Mexican borders multiple times before a finished vehicle reaches consumers. Those investment decisions were made with the expectation of long-term trade certainty.

Business groups warn that shifting to annual reviews could make companies more cautious when deciding where to build factories, expand production, hire workers or invest billions of dollars in future manufacturing projects. While the agreement remains in place today, yearly uncertainty surrounding its future could influence corporate planning throughout the region.

Industry organizations urged all three governments to reach a long-term resolution as quickly as possible.

Matt Blunt, President of the American Automotive Policy Council, said U.S. automakers are encouraged that negotiations will continue and expressed hope for a durable agreement that preserves North America’s manufacturing competitiveness.

Business Roundtable President Joshua Bolten also called on the three governments to work expeditiously toward extending and strengthening the agreement, arguing that long-term certainty benefits businesses, workers and consumers across the continent.

Trade data illustrates why the Administration is seeking changes. According to the U.S. Bureau of Economic Analysis, the United States recorded a goods trade deficit of approximately $46 billion with Canada and about $197 billion with Mexico last year.

Greer has indicated the Administration wants to negotiate additional bilateral protocols addressing automotive rules of origin, manufacturing content requirements and measures designed to prevent goods produced outside North America from benefiting indirectly from USMCA preferences.

For now, businesses across the continent can continue operating under existing rules. However, the agreement governing one of the world’s largest trading relationships is once again open for negotiation, ensuring that trade policy will remain a major issue for manufacturers, exporters, investors and supply-chain managers for years to come.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Tesla reported from its Austin, Texas headquarters on Thursday that it delivered 480,126 vehicles worldwide during the second quarter while producing 451,758 vehicles, comfortably beating Wall Street expectations. Despite the stronger-than-expected delivery numbers, shares of Elon Musk’s electric-vehicle maker fell about 7% as investors shifted their attention to profitability and margins ahead of the company’s earnings report later this month.

Tesla’s deliveries easily surpassed both the company’s internal consensus estimate of 406,024 vehicles and the 406,600 average forecast compiled by StreetAccount. Deliveries also increased 34% from the first quarter, when Tesla delivered 358,023 vehicles, bringing the company close to its all-time quarterly record.

The company’s core lineup continued to dominate sales. The Model 3 sedan and Model Y SUV accounted for 467,762 deliveries, representing roughly 97% of all vehicles sold during the quarter. The remaining 12,364 vehicles, including the Cybertruck and other premium models, made up the balance.

Tesla’s fast-growing energy storage business also remained a bright spot. The company deployed 13.5 gigawatt-hours of battery storage during the quarter, up sharply from 9.6 gigawatt-hours a year earlier. Although the figure came in slightly below analysts’ expectations of approximately 13.8 gigawatt-hours, the energy division continues to generate significantly higher margins than Tesla’s automotive business and has become an increasingly important contributor to overall earnings.

So why did the stock fall despite the strong delivery numbers?

Analysts pointed to the gap between production and deliveries. Tesla delivered approximately 28,000 more vehicles than it produced, indicating the company reduced existing inventory rather than meeting demand solely through new production. While lowering inventory is generally viewed positively, investors typically place greater value on sustained demand supported by ongoing factory output.

The shares had also rallied ahead of the report, leaving little room for additional upside after the delivery announcement.

Attention now turns to July 22, when Tesla will release its full second-quarter financial results after markets close. Investors will be watching closely for average selling prices, operating margins, and profitability—figures that will determine whether the rebound in deliveries translated into stronger earnings.

Tesla cautioned that quarterly deliveries and energy deployments should not be viewed as indicators of financial performance, noting that earnings depend on multiple additional factors.

Regionally, Europe showed signs of recovery following a difficult start to the year, when consumer backlash tied to Musk’s political activity contributed to weaker registrations across Germany, France, and Scandinavia. China also improved following the launch of the refreshed Model Y, although intense competition from BYD and other domestic manufacturers continues to pressure pricing.

North America remained more challenging as buyers increasingly shifted toward hybrid vehicles while the expiration of the federal electric vehicle tax credit weighed on fully electric vehicle demand.

For Tesla, the second quarter suggests its core automotive business may be stabilizing after two consecutive years of declining annual sales. Whether that recovery proves sustainable—and whether it can occur without sacrificing the industry-leading margins that once defined the company—will become much clearer when Tesla reports earnings later this month.

JBizNews Desk | Austin, Texas

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.


The European Court of Justice, the European Union’s highest court, ruled Thursday that Alphabet and its Google unit must pay a €4.1 billion ($4.67 billion) antitrust penalty, dismissing the company’s final appeal and confirming that Google illegally used its Android mobile operating system to block competition. The ruling, in case C-738/22 P, is final, leaving Google with no further avenue to challenge the fine.

The case began in 2018, when the European Commission imposed what was then a record €4.34 billion antitrust penalty against Google. In 2022, the EU’s General Court reduced the fine to €4.1 billion, and Google appealed. On Thursday, judges in Luxembourg upheld the lower court’s decision, confirming that Google abused its dominant market position through Android.

According to the Commission, Google required smartphone manufacturers using Android to pre-install Google Search, the Chrome browser, and the Google Play Store as a condition for licensing key Google services. Regulators also found the company discouraged manufacturers from using alternative versions of Android, limiting competition and reducing consumer choice across the smartphone market.

Android powers the overwhelming majority of smartphones worldwide outside Apple’s ecosystem, making the Commission’s findings especially significant for app developers, device manufacturers, and competing search providers.

Google defended its business practices following the ruling. A company spokesperson said the decision overlooks Google’s investments in keeping Android open, interoperable, and free for manufacturers while arguing that the operating system has expanded—not limited—consumer choice and helped thousands of developers and businesses across Europe.

Consumer advocates welcomed the decision. Agustín Reyna, Director General of the European Consumer Organization, said dominant technology companies cannot use their market power to prevent competition or restrict consumer choice. The case was one of the defining enforcement actions led by former EU Competition Commissioner Margrethe Vestager, whose portfolio is now held by Teresa Ribera.

Beyond the financial penalty, legal experts say the decision further strengthens Europe’s aggressive approach toward regulating Big Tech. The ruling complements the European Union’s Digital Markets Act, legislation designed to prevent dominant digital platforms from using their market position to disadvantage competitors before lengthy antitrust cases become necessary.

Google also faces mounting legal pressure elsewhere. Earlier this week, a Swedish court ordered the company to pay approximately $1.5 billion in damages to price-comparison service PriceRunner, now owned by Klarna, over anti-competitive practices.

Despite the regulatory setbacks, Alphabet continues investing heavily in artificial intelligence infrastructure. The company recently announced plans to spend $40 billion constructing three major data centers in Texas as it competes with rivals including OpenAI and Anthropic in the race to expand AI computing capacity.

Alphabet shares traded about 1% lower following Thursday’s ruling, suggesting investors had largely anticipated the outcome. While the financial impact on Alphabet is manageable given its size, the decision sends another clear message that European regulators intend to maintain strict oversight of the world’s largest technology companies.

JBizNews Desk | Luxembourg

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump on Thursday defended his family’s sprawling business interests and his children’s commercial activity, waving off conflict-of-interest concerns days after a federal ethics filing showed he earned more than $1.4 billion from cryptocurrency ventures last year. Speaking from the Oval Office, Trump said the presidency reaches so deeply into the economy that almost anything his children do could be cast as a conflict. “If they buy an energy efficient truck, they have inside information,” he said. Trump added that he tells his children to “stay away” from anything that could look improper, but said they were running businesses long before he entered politics.

The remarks followed the release Tuesday of Trump’s annual financial disclosure by the U.S. Office of Government Ethics. The 927-page report — nearly 700 pages longer than his prior filing — showed the president collected more than $1.4 billion connected to digital assets in 2025, his first year back in the White House. That figure made crypto, not real estate, his single largest source of income. The interview aired on CNBC and was conducted by anchor Joe Kernen.

The disclosure listed roughly $635 million in royalties from a licensing deal tied to his $TRUMP meme coin, launched days before his second inauguration. It also showed more than $500 million from World Liberty Financial, the crypto venture Trump co-founded in 2024 with his sons Eric Trump and Donald Trump Jr. His youngest son, Barron Trump, is listed with the firm as well.

Trump’s older, traditional businesses still produced heavy income. The filing reported about $122 million from Trump Doral, $77.5 million from Mar-a-Lago, and $39 million from another property. The president also disclosed more than $80 million in income from legal settlements with media companies including ABC, CBS, Meta, YouTube and X, plus millions in book and merchandise royalties.

For companies watching Washington, the more consequential thread was Trump’s growing willingness to take direct government stakes in private firms. Pressed on a report that the government could take a 5% stake in OpenAI, Trump sidestepped the question and instead pointed to Intel, the struggling chipmaker. The administration announced an $8.9 billion investment in Intel common stock last August, handing the government a 10% stake. Trump said he told the company he could solve its problems but wanted “10% of the company.”

That approach — an administration trading help for equity — is reshaping how executives think about federal involvement in their industries. It arrives alongside a heavy trade agenda. The administration said Wednesday it would not renew the United States-Mexico-Canada Agreement for another 16 years, a move that keeps the pact alive for a decade but triggers annual reviews that could reopen major terms. A senior official said Trump’s main concern is the trade deficits the United States runs with Canada and Mexico.

Trump also used the interview to stress that he does not want an economic downturn on his record. He invoked former president Herbert Hoover, who led the country into the Great Depression, and blamed him for raising interest rates and taxes. “I don’t want to be Herbert Hoover,” Trump said, casting himself as focused on growth and low borrowing costs.

The president returned repeatedly to the economy’s political stakes. His war with Iran, which began in February, remains in a fragile ceasefire, and Trump has argued that instability in the Middle East is itself a market risk. He repeated a claim that Iran will buy American farm goods as part of a potential peace deal, an assertion Tehran has denied.

Critics say the disclosure underscores how tightly the president’s personal wealth is now tied to industries his administration regulates, particularly crypto, where the White House is pushing Congress to pass new market rules. A representative for the Trump Organization said the filing showed a company with valuable assets, substantial liquidity and a conservative balance sheet, and called the nearly 1,000-page report a sign of transparency.

For businesses, investors and lobbyists, the combined message from the disclosure and the interview is that the lines between Trump’s policy agenda and his family’s commercial interests remain blurred — and that the administration is comfortable operating in that gray zone as it takes equity in companies, rewrites trade deals and leans on the Federal Reserve to keep rates in check.

JBizNews Desk | Washington
© JBizNews.com. All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A global shortage of memory chips has grown severe enough that Apple is pursuing suppliers it would normally avoid. According to reporting published Wednesday, July 1, by Bloomberg, the iPhone maker is seeking approval to purchase memory chips from two Chinese semiconductor companies that appear on a U.S. Pentagon blacklist, as the artificial intelligence boom continues to tighten global supplies and drive up costs.

The companies are ChangXin Memory Technologies (CXMT) and Yangtze Memory Technologies (YMTC), two of China’s largest memory-chip manufacturers. Apple is reportedly exploring the use of their memory products in devices sold within China while lobbying the Trump administration, including the Commerce Department and the White House, for permission to move forward.

The effort reflects just how strained the global memory market has become.

Demand for advanced memory chips has exploded as technology companies race to build artificial intelligence data centers. Massive orders from AI developers have absorbed much of the world’s available supply, leaving fewer chips for smartphones, tablets, laptops, and other consumer electronics.

Industry analysts estimate DRAM memory prices climbed roughly 60% during 2025 and could rise another 30% to 40% during 2026, with shortages expected to continue well into 2027.

Apple has already begun passing some of those higher costs to consumers.

Earlier this year, the company increased prices on several MacBook models by between $100 and $300 while raising prices on selected iPads, HomePods, and Apple TV products. Although iPhone prices have remained unchanged, analysts say the continuing memory shortage could place additional pricing pressure on future devices if supply conditions fail to improve.

For consumers, the story extends well beyond Apple.

Memory chips are essential components inside virtually every modern electronic device. When prices rise, manufacturers throughout the technology industry face higher production costs, increasing the likelihood of more expensive laptops, smartphones, gaming systems, servers, and other connected products.

The shortage also highlights the growing impact of artificial intelligence on everyday consumers.

While AI investment has fueled record profits for many technology companies, it has also redirected enormous quantities of advanced semiconductors away from traditional consumer products. The same chips powering AI servers are competing with manufacturers building devices used by millions of households every day.

Apple’s negotiations also underscore the increasingly complex relationship between business and geopolitics.

Both CXMT and YMTC have been identified by the Pentagon as companies with alleged ties to China’s military. Although purchasing products from those companies is not automatically prohibited under every circumstance, Apple is seeking clear guidance from U.S. officials before moving ahead, hoping to avoid future regulatory complications or political backlash.

Some industry analysts believe Apple’s objective is not necessarily to lower costs but simply to secure an additional source of supply.

Supply-chain analyst Ming-Chi Kuo has noted that China’s own demand for memory chips already exceeds domestic production, suggesting Apple may gain only limited cost savings even if approval is granted. Instead, adding another supplier could reduce the risk of production delays as the global shortage continues.

For investors, the situation demonstrates how artificial intelligence is reshaping the technology supply chain in unexpected ways. Companies that manufacture memory chips have become some of the biggest beneficiaries of the AI boom, while device makers face mounting pressure from rising component costs.

For consumers, the takeaway is straightforward. As long as demand for AI infrastructure continues to outpace memory production, the cost of many electronic devices is likely to remain under upward pressure. Apple’s willingness to seek approval to purchase chips from previously avoided suppliers illustrates just how tight the global market has become.

The AI revolution may be transforming business, but it is also making the everyday technology Americans rely on more expensive—and even the world’s most valuable company is searching for new ways to secure the components it needs.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

South Korea’s benchmark Kospi index suffered one of its sharpest declines in years on Thursday, closing down 655.32 points, or 7.89%, at 7,648.09, after a broad selloff in global semiconductor stocks triggered panic selling across Asia. The steep decline pushed the index back below the 8,000 level and briefly activated an automatic trading halt on the Korea Exchange, underscoring how heavily the country’s stock market has become tied to the fortunes of its semiconductor industry.

Leading the losses were South Korea’s two largest chipmakers. SK Hynix plunged 14.57%, while Samsung Electronics fell 9.06%, wiping billions of dollars off their combined market value in a single trading session. Together, the two companies now account for roughly half of the Kospi’s total weighting, meaning sharp swings in either stock can significantly move the entire market.

The selling began overnight in the United States after another wave of weakness swept through technology and semiconductor shares on Wall Street. Investors were particularly unsettled after Meta Platforms announced plans to enter the cloud-computing leasing business by renting excess artificial-intelligence computing capacity to outside customers. The move raised fresh questions about whether the largest technology companies may begin slowing or reshaping the massive spending that has fueled the AI infrastructure boom.

The concerns quickly spread throughout the semiconductor sector. In U.S. trading, memory-chip makers including Micron Technology and SanDisk each lost about 10%, setting the tone for heavy selling when Asian markets opened Thursday.

South Korea felt the impact more than most markets because of the extraordinary concentration of its benchmark index. According to Zavier Wong, a market analyst at eToro, Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix together now represent approximately 50% of the Kospi’s total market capitalization, nearly double their combined weighting from the end of last year. That concentration has made South Korea’s stock market increasingly dependent on the performance of the global semiconductor industry and, more recently, on investor sentiment surrounding artificial intelligence.

Foreign investors led Thursday’s selling, unloading more than 5 trillion won—approximately $3.7 billion—worth of South Korean equities. Domestic retail investors stepped in aggressively to purchase shares, helping absorb some of the selling pressure, but were unable to prevent the broader market from posting one of its worst declines in recent memory. During the afternoon session, exchange officials activated a sidecar, an automatic mechanism that temporarily pauses certain program trades during periods of extreme volatility.

The losses spread quickly throughout Asia. In Japan, memory-chip producer Kioxia, now one of the country’s largest technology companies, fell more than 13%, helping drag the Nikkei 225 down 2.47%. South Korea’s technology-heavy Kosdaq index also suffered heavy losses, falling 6.74%.

Despite the sharp decline, several market analysts argued that Thursday’s rout appeared driven more by profit-taking after months of extraordinary gains than by any deterioration in the industry’s long-term fundamentals.

Fabien Yip, market analyst at IG, said many investors chose to lock in profits following the remarkable rally semiconductor shares have enjoyed during the global AI boom. While valuations have risen dramatically, demand for advanced memory chips used in artificial-intelligence servers continues to remain strong.

In fact, South Korea’s semiconductor industry continues to invest aggressively in future production. Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix together are planning to invest an estimated $520 billion in four new semiconductor manufacturing complexes across South Korea over the coming years. On Thursday, SK Hynix Chief Executive Kwak Noh-jung reaffirmed the company’s plans to invest approximately 100 trillion won, or about $64 billion, in domestic facilities, including construction of a major new fabrication plant expected to begin next year.

Research firms also remain optimistic about the industry’s longer-term outlook. Just one day before the selloff, Morningstar raised its fair-value estimates for both Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix. Analyst Jing Jie Yu said the current memory-chip cycle continues to outperform earlier expectations, citing tight supply conditions, resilient demand for AI hardware, and growing numbers of long-term supply agreements between chip manufacturers and major technology companies.

For South Korea, where semiconductors remain the country’s largest export industry, Thursday’s market decline served as another reminder of how closely the nation’s economy has become linked to the global race to build artificial intelligence infrastructure. While investor sentiment can change quickly, the country’s largest technology companies remain central players in one of the world’s fastest-growing industries.

JBizNews Desk | Seoul

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The world’s biggest sporting event may also give America’s job market an unexpected boost.

According to a new forecast from Goldman Sachs, the FIFA World Cup could add approximately 40,000 jobs to the June U.S. employment report as millions of visitors travel across the country for matches, increasing demand for hotels, restaurants, transportation, entertainment, and retail workers.

The estimate comes just ahead of Thursday’s closely watched June employment report, one of the most important economic releases of the month and a key indicator for the Federal Reserve as it evaluates the strength of the U.S. economy.

Economists surveyed by Dow Jones expect employers to have added roughly 115,000 jobs during June, down from 172,000 in May. Goldman Sachs, however, believes the World Cup could temporarily lift payroll growth closer to 140,000, with roughly 40,000 of those jobs directly tied to tournament-related hiring.

The investment bank based its analysis on payroll information from Homebase, a workforce management platform serving thousands of small businesses nationwide.

The hiring surge has been concentrated in the tournament’s host cities, where restaurants, hotels, stadiums, retailers, and transportation companies have expanded staffing to accommodate millions of domestic and international visitors.

According to Goldman, hiring in the 11 U.S. World Cup host cities declined only 1.2% from a year earlier, compared with a 3.5% decline across non-host markets. Hospitality employment increased nearly 9.5% in those cities as businesses added workers to meet the surge in customer demand.

For local businesses, the tournament represents one of the largest short-term economic opportunities in years.

Hotels require additional housekeeping and front desk employees. Restaurants need more servers, cooks, bartenders, and managers. Airports, transit systems, rideshare companies, retailers, security firms, and entertainment venues have all expanded staffing as visitors continue arriving from around the world.

While the hiring boost is meaningful, economists caution that much of it will likely prove temporary.

Goldman expects the World Cup’s impact to diminish significantly in July before turning slightly negative in August as many seasonal positions disappear after the tournament concludes. That means some of June’s hiring strength may simply reflect jobs being pulled forward rather than long-term employment growth.

For Federal Reserve policymakers, that distinction matters.

A stronger-than-expected payroll report driven by temporary sporting-event hiring does not necessarily indicate a stronger underlying economy. Economists will closely examine wage growth, labor-force participation, and private-sector hiring to determine whether job creation remains healthy after removing the World Cup effect.

The tournament is also expected to generate billions of dollars in additional economic activity through tourism, hotel stays, restaurant spending, transportation, shopping, and entertainment. Those benefits extend well beyond employers, supporting thousands of small businesses across host cities while generating higher tax revenues for local governments.

The final match will be played in the New York–New Jersey region later this month, placing one of the nation’s largest economic markets at the center of the global event.

For businesses, the World Cup provides a welcome burst of consumer spending during the summer travel season. For economists, however, it also creates a temporary distortion that must be separated from broader labor-market trends.

When Thursday’s employment report is released, investors will be looking beyond the headline number to determine whether hiring remains fundamentally strong—or whether part of the gain simply reflects the economic impact of the world’s biggest soccer tournament.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

David Troostwyk, Vice President of the London Diamond Bourse, this week called on the presidents of the world’s diamond bourses to elect Ahmed Bin Sulayem as the next President of the World Federation of Diamond Bourses (WFDB) when the trade gathers for the 41st World Diamond Congress in Singapore from July 12–15. Troostwyk, who is standing for Vice President on the same slate, said the decisions made at this Congress will shape the direction of the nearly 80-year-old organization for years to come.

Held once every three years, the Congress brings together the federation’s 24 member bourses, and this year’s gathering includes the election of a new leadership team. Current President Yoram Dvash and the Executive Council are stepping down after completing two terms spanning six years—a period marked by the COVID-19 pandemic, the rapid rise of lab-grown diamonds, conflict in the Middle East, new U.S. tariffs, and the sale of De Beers. Troostwyk credited the outgoing leadership with helping stabilize the industry, strengthening support for the Natural Diamond Council, and welcoming Botswana and Angola as affiliate members.

Troostwyk said the federation was originally established after the Second World War to create a trusted international framework for the diamond trade. Its mission was to establish common trading standards for rough and polished diamonds, promote ethical business practices, resolve disputes, and represent the industry with one unified voice.

The foundation of that system, he noted, has always been trust. Members of affiliated bourses could confidently trade with one another knowing they all operated under the same code of conduct. Violations carried significant consequences, including expulsion from a local bourse and exclusion from the federation’s worldwide trading network.

That framework also helped create the World Diamond Council in 2000, which played a leading role in developing the Kimberley Process to combat conflict diamonds. Working alongside the International Diamond Manufacturers Association, the federation also helped establish internationally recognized grading terminology while enforcing ethical standards and disclosure rules for synthetic diamonds.

Although manufacturing has shifted toward Asia and digital trading has reduced reliance on traditional trading floors, Troostwyk argued that the need for a trusted international network has only grown stronger as governments increase compliance, sanctions, sourcing, and traceability requirements.

His preferred candidate is Ahmed Bin Sulayem, Executive Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of the Dubai Multi Commodities Centre (DMCC) and Chairman of the Dubai Diamond Exchange.

Over the past two decades, Bin Sulayem has transformed Dubai into one of the world’s leading diamond trading hubs. According to the campaign statement, DMCC has expanded from just 28 member companies in 2003 to more than 26,000 businesses representing 180 countries, employing over 90,000 people, including approximately 1,400 companies involved in precious stones. Today, the Dubai Diamond Exchange ranks among the largest diamond exchanges globally.

Bin Sulayem is also widely recognized for his leadership in global diamond governance. He has chaired the Kimberley Process three times, most recently serving as its Custodian Chair in 2025, where he championed blockchain-based digital certification and supported the establishment of a permanent Kimberley Process Secretariat in Botswana.

Troostwyk said Bin Sulayem’s relationships with African producer nations, Indian manufacturing centers, retailers across Asia, the Gulf, Europe, and North America, together with his experience working alongside governments and civil society, uniquely position him to lead the federation through an increasingly complex regulatory environment.

The proposed leadership slate includes Bin Sulayem as President, Troostwyk as Vice President, and Molefi Letsiki as Treasurer.

Troostwyk built his career without a family diamond business, founding the advisory firm Salotro and digital trading platform CiviGem while helping modernize the London Diamond Bourse during his presidency through expanded education programs and diversified revenue initiatives.

Letsiki, the son of a diamond polisher, is Founder and Director of Molefi Letsiki Diamonds, described in the campaign statement as the world’s first majority Black-owned De Beers Sightholder. He also serves as President of the Diamond, Gem and Jewellery Association of Southern Africa, is a member of the WFDB Executive Council, and serves as a World Diamond Council Ambassador. His election would further strengthen representation for African producing nations following the federation’s expanded relationship with Botswana and Angola.

All three candidates have also been involved with the Young Diamantaires, a next-generation industry organization originally launched as a WFDB initiative by Executive Council member Rami Baron before becoming an independent non-profit. The organization has organized educational visits to diamond mines, industry tours in Surat, and helped build a science laboratory for a school in an African mining community. Troostwyk described the group’s development as an example of the federation investing in the industry’s future leadership.

The business challenges facing the industry remain significant. Growing competition from lab-grown diamonds, softer global demand, and increasingly strict regulations governing Russian-origin goods continue to pressure prices, margins, and employment throughout the mining, manufacturing, and retail sectors.

Troostwyk argued that a modernized federation committed to promoting the value of natural diamonds will be essential to protecting the industry and the businesses that depend on it. The final decision now rests with the presidents of each member bourse gathering in Singapore.

The 41st World Diamond Congress will be held alongside the Singapore International Jewelry Expo, featuring discussions on African supply, Asian demand, geopolitics, and the next generation of industry leadership.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A major change in health coverage took effect Wednesday, July 1, and two of the country’s largest retailers are stepping in to help seniors make sense of it. For the first time, Medicare has begun covering obesity drugs through a temporary government program, and Walmart and CVS Health are rolling out new services to help older Americans understand, access, and manage the benefit.

The coverage comes through a demonstration program known as Bridge, which allows eligible Medicare beneficiaries to receive GLP-1 obesity medications for a copay of about $50 per month. That represents a dramatic shift for millions of seniors. Popular weight-loss medications made by Novo Nordisk and Eli Lilly have largely been out of reach for older Americans living on fixed incomes, and the new program significantly expands access. The initiative, administered by the Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services (CMS), is scheduled to run through the end of 2027.

The challenge is that many seniors do not yet know the benefit exists. A survey released by the Obesity Care Advocacy Network found that 82% of older Americans were unaware Medicare was beginning to cover obesity medications. Even among those who have heard about the program, determining eligibility and understanding the enrollment process can be confusing.

That is creating an opportunity for retailers with thousands of neighborhood pharmacies.

CVS Health is expanding support through its pharmacy network and MinuteClinic locations by helping patients understand coverage, navigate insurance requirements, and manage medication side effects. The company is also introducing a $49 MinuteClinic virtual visit, allowing eligible patients to speak with a licensed clinician who can evaluate them and prescribe a GLP-1 medication when appropriate.

Walmart and Sam’s Club are taking a similar approach, offering pharmacist consultations, educational materials, and assistance understanding the new Medicare benefit in stores across the country, including many rural communities where access to specialists is often limited.

For consumers, the strategy makes sense. Pharmacies are often the easiest point of entry into the healthcare system. While physician appointments may take weeks, pharmacists are available in neighborhoods every day. By helping seniors navigate a complicated new federal benefit, Walmart and CVS strengthen customer relationships while positioning themselves at the center of what could become one of the fastest-growing prescription categories in America.

The opportunity for drug manufacturers is equally significant. GLP-1 medications produced by Novo Nordisk and Eli Lilly have already transformed the pharmaceutical industry. Opening Medicare coverage to millions of beneficiaries could dramatically expand demand, especially as obesity affects more than 40% of American adults.

The program also highlights the growing debate over healthcare costs. These medications can cost hundreds of dollars each month without insurance, making widespread Medicare coverage an expensive commitment for taxpayers. Researchers also continue studying long-term outcomes, including evidence that some patients regain weight after stopping treatment, raising questions about how long coverage should continue and who should ultimately pay for it.

Another uncertainty is what happens after 2027. The Bridge demonstration was originally intended as a temporary transition before private Medicare Part D insurers assumed responsibility for broader coverage. However, several insurers declined to participate voluntarily, citing concerns about costs and program design, prompting federal officials to extend the demonstration instead.

For seniors, however, the immediate impact is straightforward. A medication that was financially out of reach for many older Americans is now available for about $50 per month for eligible beneficiaries. That could improve access to treatment for millions of people while reducing long-term health complications associated with obesity.

For Walmart and CVS, the program represents more than another prescription to fill. It is an opportunity to become trusted healthcare advisers for millions of Medicare beneficiaries at a time when pharmacies are increasingly expanding beyond dispensing medications into providing broader healthcare services.

Whether the program ultimately becomes permanent remains uncertain. Its future will depend on costs, patient outcomes, and future policy decisions. But for now, seniors have a new benefit available, and two of America’s largest pharmacy operators are racing to help them use it.

JBizNews Desk | New York
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Lines are stretching for hours at gas stations across Russia, and frustration is mounting as months of Ukrainian drone attacks on oil refineries have disrupted fuel supplies across the country. Fuel rationing has now spread to multiple regions, while videos circulating on social media show motorists waiting at empty pumps and paying higher prices. President Vladimir Putin, in a rare public acknowledgment, admitted that “problems persist for both motorists and businesses,” while insisting the shortages are temporary and manageable.

The disruption is striking for one of the world’s largest oil producers.

According to multiple reports, Ukrainian forces have carried out dozens of drone attacks against Russian refineries, fuel depots, storage terminals, and other oil infrastructure since the spring. Energy analysts estimate that more than 20% of Russia’s refining capacity has been temporarily taken offline, sharply reducing domestic gasoline and diesel production.

Some of Russia’s largest refineries have suffered repeated attacks. Facilities serving the Moscow region were among those damaged, forcing repairs expected to take months. As refinery output declined, authorities introduced fuel-purchase limits in numerous regions to prevent panic buying and preserve supplies for essential industries.

Major fuel retailers have capped gasoline purchases per customer, while some local governments have implemented additional restrictions as long lines formed at filling stations. The shortages have become particularly challenging during the busy summer travel and agricultural season, when fuel demand typically reaches its highest levels.

The economic impact extends well beyond motorists.

Russia remains one of the world’s largest exporters of crude oil and petroleum products. Damage to refining infrastructure has reduced the country’s ability to process crude domestically while also complicating fuel exports, placing additional pressure on government revenues that help finance military operations.

Industry analysts say Russia may need to import certain refined fuels to stabilize domestic supplies—an unusual development for a country long considered an energy superpower. Officials are also reportedly evaluating additional restrictions on diesel exports to ensure enough fuel remains available for domestic consumers and businesses.

The disruptions have begun affecting Russia’s broader economy.

Higher wholesale fuel prices increase transportation costs for manufacturers, farmers, retailers, and freight companies, eventually filtering through to consumer prices. Economists also warn that continued fuel shortages could slow economic growth while complicating efforts by Russia’s central bank to reduce interest rates.

Agriculture faces particular challenges as harvest season accelerates. Farmers depend heavily on diesel fuel for planting, harvesting, and transporting crops, making reliable fuel supplies essential for food production.

For global energy markets, the situation remains significant.

Although Russia continues exporting large volumes of crude oil, prolonged refinery disruptions reduce flexibility within global fuel markets and increase uncertainty for buyers. Energy traders continue monitoring both refinery repairs and the possibility of additional Ukrainian strikes that could further limit production.

Ukraine has indicated it intends to continue targeting Russian energy infrastructure as part of its broader military strategy, arguing that refinery attacks reduce Russia’s ability to finance the war while disrupting military logistics.

As long as the attacks continue and damaged facilities remain under repair, analysts expect fuel shortages to persist through much of the summer.

For businesses worldwide, the developments serve as another reminder that geopolitical conflicts can quickly disrupt global energy markets and supply chains. Even one of the world’s largest oil-producing nations is discovering that damaged refining infrastructure can create shortages, higher prices, and economic uncertainty far beyond the battlefield.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

For months, rising prices have squeezed American households, driven largely by an energy shock tied to the war with Iran. Now, with oil and gas costs falling in the wake of a U.S.-Iran détente, traders on the prediction-market platform Kalshi are betting the worst is over. As reported Wednesday by CNBC, traders now see only about a 28% chance that headline inflation climbs above 4.2% this year—the annual rate recorded in May.

That 4.2% figure is increasingly viewed as the likely peak. On Kalshi, participants buy and sell contracts tied to real economic outcomes, effectively putting money behind their forecasts. These contracts settle based on the monthly Consumer Price Index released by the Bureau of Labor Statistics. The next CPI report, covering June, is scheduled for July 14.

The shift in sentiment is closely tied to energy prices. Gasoline, diesel, and shipping costs surged after the conflict with Iran disrupted traffic through the Strait of Hormuz, through which roughly one-fifth of the world’s oil normally passes. As shipping has resumed and crude oil prices have retreated from their wartime highs, inflation pressures have begun easing across the broader economy.

For American families, lower energy prices can quickly translate into lower transportation costs, reduced shipping expenses, and eventually slower price increases for groceries, consumer goods, and travel. If inflation has indeed peaked, households could begin seeing meaningful relief after months of elevated living costs.

Prediction markets are not guarantees, however. They reflect the collective expectations of traders and adjust rapidly as new information becomes available. While Kalshi has become an increasingly watched indicator of market sentiment, the official inflation data released by the government will ultimately determine whether those expectations prove accurate.

The recent inflation surge has been driven largely by what economists describe as a supply shock rather than broad-based consumer demand. Energy prices affected nearly every sector of the economy, from manufacturing to transportation. As that supply disruption fades, inflationary pressure should ease naturally—provided oil markets remain stable.

The outlook also carries implications for interest rates. Federal Reserve Chairman Kevin Warsh has indicated the central bank remains focused on returning inflation to its 2% target before considering lower interest rates. If inflation continues to cool, it could eventually give the Fed greater flexibility to reduce borrowing costs for mortgages, auto loans, and credit cards, though officials have emphasized they are not rushing to make that decision.

There are still significant risks. The ceasefire involving Iran remains fragile, and any renewed disruption in the Strait of Hormuz could quickly send energy prices—and inflation—higher again. Markets are currently betting that stability will continue, but geopolitical developments remain an important wildcard.

For consumers, the takeaway is one of cautious optimism. Markets increasingly believe the inflation spike that defined much of the spring has passed, with falling energy prices leading the improvement. The upcoming inflation reports will determine whether that optimism is justified. If current trends continue, American households may finally begin to experience sustained relief from the price pressures that have weighed on budgets throughout the year.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.